1MRK505384-UEN C en Technical Manual Breaker Protection REQ650 Version 2.2

Relion® 650 SERIES
Breaker protection REQ650

Version 2.2 IEC
Technical manual
Document ID: 1MRK 505 384-UEN
Issued: May 2019
Revision: C
Product version: 2.2
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor
used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may
be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL
Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) This product includes cryptographic software written/
developed by: Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) and Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product names
mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
holders.
Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or product
description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All persons
responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy themselves that
each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including that any applicable safety or
other operational requirements are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where
a system failure and/or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons
(including but not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the
person or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to
ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.
This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be completely ruled
out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the manufacturer.
Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB be responsible or
liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the application of the
equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified
voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests
conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive,
and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The
product is designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series.
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction.................................................................................................. 25
1.1 This manual..................................................................................................................................25
1.1.1 Presumptions for Technical Data..........................................................................................25
1.2 Intended audience......................................................................................................................25
1.3 Product documentation............................................................................................................26
1.3.1 Product documentation set................................................................................................... 26
1.3.2 Document revision history..................................................................................................... 27
1.3.3 Related documents.................................................................................................................. 27
1.4 Document symbols and conventions..................................................................................... 28
1.4.1 Symbols......................................................................................................................................28
1.4.2 Document conventions........................................................................................................... 29
1.5 IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping................................................................................31
Section 2 Available functions.......................................................................................35

2.1 Back-up protection functions.................................................................................................. 35
2.2 Control and monitoring functions.......................................................................................... 36
2.3 Communication.......................................................................................................................... 39
2.4 Basic IED functions.................................................................................................................... 40
Section 3 Analog inputs................................................................................................43

3.1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................43
3.2 Function block.............................................................................................................................43
3.3 Signals.......................................................................................................................................... 43
3.4 Settings........................................................................................................................................ 45
3.5 Monitored data...........................................................................................................................48
3.6 Operation principle....................................................................................................................49
3.7 Technical data.............................................................................................................................50
Section 4 Binary input and output modules...............................................................51

4.1 Binary input.................................................................................................................................. 51
4.1.1 Binary input debounce filter...................................................................................................51
4.1.2 Oscillation filter.........................................................................................................................51
4.1.3 Settings...................................................................................................................................... 51
4.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary input modules.............................................................. 51
4.1.3.2 Setting parameters for binary input/output module................................................. 52
Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI ......................................................53

5.1 Local HMI screen behaviour......................................................................................................53
5.1.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................53
5.1.2 Settings...................................................................................................................................... 53
5.2 Local HMI signals........................................................................................................................ 53
5.2.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................53
Breaker protection REQ650 1

Technical manual
Table of contents
5.2.2 Function block...........................................................................................................................53

5.2.3 Signals........................................................................................................................................ 53
5.3 Basic part for LED indication module.................................................................................... 54
5.3.1 Identification............................................................................................................................ 54
5.3.2 Function block.......................................................................................................................... 54
5.3.3 Signals........................................................................................................................................ 55
5.3.4 Settings...................................................................................................................................... 55
5.4 LCD part for HMI function keys control module.................................................................. 56
5.4.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................56
5.4.2 Function block.......................................................................................................................... 56
5.4.3 Signals........................................................................................................................................ 56
5.4.4 Settings...................................................................................................................................... 57
5.5 Operation principle.................................................................................................................... 58
5.5.1 Local HMI................................................................................................................................... 58
5.5.1.1 Keypad.................................................................................................................................. 59
5.5.1.2 Display...................................................................................................................................61
5.5.1.3 LEDs.......................................................................................................................................63
5.5.2 LED configuration alternatives............................................................................................. 64
5.5.2.1 Functionality .......................................................................................................................64
5.5.2.2 Status LEDs......................................................................................................................... 64
5.5.2.3 Indication LEDs................................................................................................................... 65
5.5.3 Function keys............................................................................................................................ 72
5.5.3.1 Functionality ....................................................................................................................... 72
5.5.3.2 Operation principle.............................................................................................................72
5.5.3.3 Enabling and Disabling Authority on Function keys....................................................74
Section 6 Current protection....................................................................................... 75

6.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC ...................................................... 75
6.1.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................75
6.1.2 Functionality..............................................................................................................................75
6.1.3 Function block...........................................................................................................................75
6.1.4 Signals........................................................................................................................................ 75
6.1.5 Settings...................................................................................................................................... 76
6.1.6 Monitored data......................................................................................................................... 76
6.1.7 Operation principle.................................................................................................................. 76
6.1.8 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 77
6.2 Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC..................................... 77
6.2.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................78
6.2.2 Functionality..............................................................................................................................78
6.2.3 Function block...........................................................................................................................79
6.2.4 Signals........................................................................................................................................ 79
6.2.5 Settings...................................................................................................................................... 81
6.2.6 Monitored data.........................................................................................................................86
6.2.7 Operation principle..................................................................................................................86
6.2.8 Technical data...........................................................................................................................92
6.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC ................................................... 93
2 Breaker protection REQ650

Technical manual
Table of contents
6.3.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................93
6.3.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................. 93
6.3.3 Function block.......................................................................................................................... 93
6.3.4 Signals........................................................................................................................................ 93
6.3.5 Settings......................................................................................................................................94
6.3.6 Monitored data.........................................................................................................................94
6.3.7 Operation principle..................................................................................................................95
6.3.8 Technical data...........................................................................................................................95
6.4 Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps EF4PTOC ................................. 96
6.4.1 Identification............................................................................................................................ 96
6.4.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................. 96
6.4.3 Function block...........................................................................................................................97
6.4.4 Signals........................................................................................................................................ 97
6.4.5 Settings......................................................................................................................................98
6.4.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................104
6.4.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................104
6.4.7.1 Operating quantity within the function.......................................................................104
6.4.7.2 Internal polarizing.............................................................................................................105
6.4.7.3 External polarizing for earth-fault function................................................................ 107
6.4.7.4 Directional detection for earth fault function............................................................ 107
6.4.7.5 Base quantities within the protection..........................................................................107
6.4.7.6 Internal earth-fault protection structure..................................................................... 107
6.4.7.7 Four residual overcurrent steps.................................................................................... 108
6.4.7.8 Directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison function........................................................................................................109
6.4.7.9 Second harmonic blocking element...............................................................................111
6.4.7.10 Switch on to fault feature................................................................................................113
6.4.8 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 115
6.5 Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC .. 116
6.5.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 116
6.5.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................ 116
6.5.3 Function block......................................................................................................................... 117
6.5.4 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 117
6.5.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 118
6.5.6 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 122
6.5.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................ 122
6.5.7.1 Operating quantity within the function....................................................................... 122
6.5.7.2 Internal polarizing facility of the function................................................................... 123
6.5.7.3 External polarizing for negative sequence function.................................................. 123
6.5.7.4 Internal negative sequence protection structure...................................................... 124
6.5.7.5 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages...............................................................124
6.5.7.6 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison
function...............................................................................................................................125
6.5.8 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 127
6.6 Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Celsius/Fahrenheit
LCPTTR/LFPTTR........................................................................................................................128
6.6.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................128

Technical manual
Table of contents
6.6.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................128
6.6.3 Function block.........................................................................................................................129
6.6.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 129
6.6.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 130
6.6.6 Monitored data........................................................................................................................131
6.6.8 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 135
6.7 Breaker failure protection CCRBRF....................................................................................... 135
6.7.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 135
6.7.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................135
6.7.3 Function block.........................................................................................................................136
6.7.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 136
6.7.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 137
6.7.6 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 138
6.7.8 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 141
6.8 Stub protection STBPTOC ..................................................................................................... 142
6.8.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................142
6.8.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................142
6.8.3 Function block.........................................................................................................................142
6.8.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 142
6.8.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 143
6.8.6 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 143
6.8.8 Technical data.........................................................................................................................144
6.9 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC ......................................................................................144
6.9.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................144
6.9.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................145
6.9.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 145
6.9.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 145
6.9.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 145
6.9.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................146
6.9.8 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 147
Section 7 Voltage protection.....................................................................................149

7.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV ....................................................................149
7.1.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................149
7.1.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 149
7.1.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 149
7.1.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 150
7.1.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................................151
7.1.6 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 153
7.1.7.1 Measurement principle.................................................................................................... 153
7.1.7.2 Time delay.......................................................................................................................... 154

Technical manual
Table of contents
7.1.7.3 Blocking.............................................................................................................................. 159

7.1.7.4 Design................................................................................................................................. 160
7.1.8 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 161
7.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV .......................................................................161
7.2.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 161
7.2.2 Functionality OV2PTOV......................................................................................................... 161
7.2.3 Function block.........................................................................................................................162
7.2.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 162
7.2.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 163
7.2.6 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 165
7.2.7.1 Measurement principle....................................................................................................165
7.2.7.2 Time delay.......................................................................................................................... 166
7.2.7.3 Blocking............................................................................................................................... 171
7.2.7.4 Design.................................................................................................................................. 171
7.2.8 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 172
7.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV .................................................... 173
7.3.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 173
7.3.2 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 173
7.3.3.1 Measurement principle.................................................................................................... 174
7.3.3.2 Time delay.......................................................................................................................... 174
7.3.3.3 Blocking...............................................................................................................................179
7.3.3.4 Design..................................................................................................................................179
7.3.4 Technical data.........................................................................................................................180
7.4 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV ...........................................................................................180
7.4.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................180
7.4.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 180
7.4.3 Function block......................................................................................................................... 181
7.4.4 Signals.......................................................................................................................................181
7.4.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 181
7.4.7 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 183
Section 8 Secondary system supervision.................................................................185

8.1 Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC...................................................................................185
8.1.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................185
8.1.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................185
8.1.3 Function block.........................................................................................................................185
8.1.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 185
8.1.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 186
8.1.7 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 187
8.2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC........................................................................................ 188
8.2.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................188
8.2.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 188

Technical manual
Table of contents
8.2.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 188

8.2.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 189
8.2.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................190
8.2.6 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 191
8.2.7.1 Zero and negative sequence detection........................................................................ 191
8.2.7.2 Delta current and delta voltage detection...................................................................193
8.2.7.3 Dead line detection.......................................................................................................... 195
8.2.7.4 Main logic........................................................................................................................... 196
8.2.8 Technical data.........................................................................................................................199
Section 9 Control......................................................................................................... 201

9.1 Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN...................................... 201
9.1.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................201
9.1.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................201
9.1.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 202
9.1.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 202
9.1.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................204
9.1.6 Monitored data...................................................................................................................... 206
9.1.7.1 Basic functionality............................................................................................................ 207
9.1.7.2 Logic diagrams................................................................................................................. 207
9.1.8 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 216
9.2 Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 phase operation SMBRREC ......................217
9.2.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................218
9.2.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................218
9.2.3 Function block.........................................................................................................................218
9.2.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 219
9.2.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................220
9.2.6.1 Terminology explanation................................................................................................ 222
9.2.6.2 Status descriptions.......................................................................................................... 222
9.2.6.3 Description of the status transition............................................................................. 223
9.2.6.4 Functional sequence description.................................................................................. 224
9.2.6.5 Time sequence diagrams................................................................................................ 235
9.2.7 Technical data.........................................................................................................................238
9.3 Interlocking ...............................................................................................................................238
9.3.1 Logical node for interlocking SCILO ..................................................................................238
9.3.1.1 Identification..................................................................................................................... 238
9.3.1.2 Functionality......................................................................................................................239
9.3.1.3 Function block...................................................................................................................239
9.3.1.4 Signals.................................................................................................................................239
9.3.1.5 Logic diagram................................................................................................................... 239
9.4 Apparatus control.................................................................................................................... 240
9.4.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 240

Technical manual
Table of contents
9.4.3 Error handling......................................................................................................................... 242

9.4.4 Bay control QCBAY.................................................................................................................245
9.4.4.1 Functionality......................................................................................................................245
9.4.4.2 Function block...................................................................................................................245
9.4.4.3 Signals................................................................................................................................ 245
9.4.4.4 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 246
9.4.4.5 Operation principle.......................................................................................................... 246
9.4.5 Local/Remote switch LOCREM........................................................................................... 248
9.4.5.1 Function block...................................................................................................................248
9.4.5.2 Signals................................................................................................................................ 248
9.4.5.3 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 249
9.4.6 Switch controller SCSWI....................................................................................................... 250
9.4.6.1 Functionality ..................................................................................................................... 251
9.4.6.2 Function block................................................................................................................... 251
9.4.6.3 Signals................................................................................................................................. 251
9.4.6.4 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 253
9.4.7 Circuit breaker SXCBR...........................................................................................................258
9.4.7.1 Functionality .....................................................................................................................259
9.4.7.2 Function block...................................................................................................................259
9.4.7.3 Signals.................................................................................................................................259
9.4.7.4 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 260
9.4.8 Circuit switch SXSWI..............................................................................................................263
9.4.8.1 Functionality .....................................................................................................................264
9.4.8.2 Function block...................................................................................................................264
9.4.8.3 Signals................................................................................................................................ 264
9.4.8.4 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 265
9.4.9 Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY .................................269
9.4.9.1 Functionality......................................................................................................................269
9.4.9.2 Function block...................................................................................................................269
9.4.9.3 Signals.................................................................................................................................270
9.4.9.4 Settings............................................................................................................................... 271
9.4.9.5 Operation principle...........................................................................................................271
9.4.9.6 Position supervision......................................................................................................... 271
9.4.9.7 Command response evaluation..................................................................................... 271
9.5 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGAPC............273
9.5.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................273
9.5.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................273
9.5.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 274
9.5.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 274
9.5.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 275
9.5.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................276

Technical manual
Table of contents
9.5.7.1 Graphical display...............................................................................................................276

9.6 Selector mini switch VSGAPC................................................................................................. 277
9.6.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 277
9.6.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................277
9.6.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 278
9.6.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 278
9.6.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 278
9.7 Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC.......................279
9.7.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................279
9.7.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 280
9.7.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 280
9.7.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................280
9.7.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................280
9.7.6 Operation principle............................................................................................................... 280
9.8 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC............................................................. 281
9.8.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................281
9.8.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................281
9.8.3 Function block.........................................................................................................................281
9.8.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 282
9.8.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 282
9.9 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS........................................... 283
9.9.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................283
9.9.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 283
9.9.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 284
9.9.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 284
9.9.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................285
9.10 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD............................................................................286
9.10.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 286
9.10.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 286
9.10.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 286
9.10.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 286
9.10.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 287
Section 10 Logic............................................................................................................ 289

10.1 Tripping logic SMPPTRC ........................................................................................................ 289
10.1.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 289
10.1.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 289
10.1.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 289
10.1.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................290
10.1.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 291
10.1.6.1 Logic diagram................................................................................................................... 294

Technical manual
Table of contents
10.1.7 Technical data.........................................................................................................................297

10.2 General start matrix block SMAGAPC...................................................................................297
10.2.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................297
10.2.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 297
10.2.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 297
10.2.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 298
10.2.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................298
10.3 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC.................................................................................................... 303
10.3.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 303
10.3.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 303
10.3.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 303
10.3.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................304
10.3.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................305
10.3.7 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 306
10.4 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH.......................................................................................... 306
10.4.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 306
10.4.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 306
10.4.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 307
10.4.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 307
10.4.5 Settings................................................................................................................................... 308
10.4.7 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 308
10.5 Logic for group warning WRNCALH..................................................................................... 308
10.5.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 308
10.5.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 308
10.5.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 309
10.5.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................309
10.5.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 310
10.5.7 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 310
10.6 Logic for group indication INDCALH.................................................................................... 310
10.6.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................310
10.6.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................310
10.6.3 Function block......................................................................................................................... 311
10.6.4 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 311
10.6.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 312
10.6.7 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 312
10.7 Basic configurable logic blocks..............................................................................................312
10.7.1 AND function block AND....................................................................................................... 313
10.7.1.1 Function block................................................................................................................... 313
10.7.1.2 Signals................................................................................................................................. 313
10.7.1.3 Technical data................................................................................................................... 314
10.7.2 Controllable gate function block GATE..............................................................................314

Technical manual
Table of contents
10.7.2.1 Function block................................................................................................................... 314

10.7.2.2 Signals.................................................................................................................................314
10.7.2.3 Settings...............................................................................................................................314
10.7.2.4 Technical data....................................................................................................................315
10.7.3 Inverter function block INV................................................................................................... 315
10.7.3.1 Function block................................................................................................................... 315
10.7.3.2 Signals................................................................................................................................. 315
10.7.3.3 Technical data....................................................................................................................315
10.7.4 Loop delay function block LLD............................................................................................ 315
10.7.4.1 Function block................................................................................................................... 316
10.7.4.2 Signals................................................................................................................................. 316
10.7.4.3 Technical data....................................................................................................................316
10.7.5 OR function block................................................................................................................... 316
10.7.5.1 Function block................................................................................................................... 316
10.7.5.2 Signals................................................................................................................................. 317
10.7.5.3 Technical data....................................................................................................................317
10.7.6 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER............................................................................317
10.7.6.1 Function block................................................................................................................... 317
10.7.6.2 Signals................................................................................................................................. 317
10.7.6.3 Settings...............................................................................................................................318
10.7.6.4 Technical data....................................................................................................................318
10.7.7 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY....................................................... 318
10.7.7.1 Function block................................................................................................................... 318
10.7.7.2 Signals................................................................................................................................. 319
10.7.7.3 Settings...............................................................................................................................319
10.7.7.4 Technical data....................................................................................................................319
10.7.8 Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY........................................................319
10.7.8.1 Function block...................................................................................................................320
10.7.8.2 Signals................................................................................................................................ 320
10.7.8.3 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 320
10.7.8.4 Technical data................................................................................................................... 320
10.7.9 Settable timer function block TIMERSET.......................................................................... 320
10.7.9.1 Function block................................................................................................................... 321
10.7.9.2 Signals................................................................................................................................. 321
10.7.9.3 Settings...............................................................................................................................321
10.7.9.4 Technical data................................................................................................................... 322
10.7.10 Exclusive OR function block XOR........................................................................................ 322
10.7.10.1 Function block................................................................................................................... 322
10.7.10.2 Signals.................................................................................................................................322
10.7.10.3 Technical data................................................................................................................... 323
10.8 Fixed signals FXDSIGN............................................................................................................ 323
10.8.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................323
10.8.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................323
10.8.3 Function block.........................................................................................................................323
10.8.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 323
10.8.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................324

Technical manual
Table of contents

10.9 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I.................................................................................324
10.9.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................324
10.9.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 324
10.9.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 325
10.9.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 325
10.9.5 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................326
10.9.6 Settings....................................................................................................................................326
10.9.8 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 327
10.10 Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation, 16 bit BTIGAPC..... 327
10.10.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................327
10.10.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................327
10.10.3 Function block.........................................................................................................................327
10.10.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 328
10.10.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................328
10.10.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................328
10.10.8 Technical data.........................................................................................................................329
10.11 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16................................................................................. 329
10.11.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................329
10.11.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 330
10.11.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 330
10.11.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 330
10.11.5 Setting parameters................................................................................................................ 331
10.11.7 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 332
10.12 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation ITBGAPC............... 332
10.12.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................332
10.12.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................332
10.12.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 333
10.12.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 333
10.12.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................334
10.12.7 Technical data.........................................................................................................................335
10.13 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow supervision
TEIGAPC......................................................................................................................................335
10.13.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................335
10.13.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 335
10.13.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 336
10.13.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 336
10.13.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................336
10.13.6.1 Operation accuracy.......................................................................................................... 338
10.13.6.2 Memory storage................................................................................................................338
10.13.7 Technical data.........................................................................................................................338

Technical manual
Table of contents
10.14 Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMP........................................................................... 338

10.14.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................338
10.14.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 339
10.14.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 339
10.14.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 339
10.14.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................339
10.14.6 Monitored data...................................................................................................................... 340
10.14.8 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 341
10.15 Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP...............................................................................341
10.15.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................341
10.15.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................341
10.15.3 Function block.........................................................................................................................341
10.15.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 341
10.15.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................342
10.15.7 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 344
Section 11 Monitoring.................................................................................................. 345

11.1 Measurements.......................................................................................................................... 345
11.1.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 345
11.1.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 345
11.1.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 346
11.1.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................348
11.1.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 351
11.1.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................362
11.1.7.1 Measurement supervision.............................................................................................. 364
11.1.7.2 Measurements CVMMXN................................................................................................ 369
11.1.7.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU...........................................................................374
11.1.7.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU, VNMMXU.......374
11.1.7.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI............................... 374
11.1.8 Technical data.........................................................................................................................374
11.2 Gas medium supervision SSIMG............................................................................................376
11.2.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................376
11.2.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 376
11.2.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 376
11.2.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 377
11.2.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 377
11.2.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................378
11.2.8 Technical data.........................................................................................................................379
11.3 Liquid medium supervision SSIML........................................................................................379
11.3.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................379
11.3.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 379
11.3.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 380

Technical manual
Table of contents
11.3.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................380
11.3.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 381
11.3.6 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 381
11.3.8 Technical data.........................................................................................................................382
11.4 Breaker monitoring SSCBR.....................................................................................................382
11.4.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................382
11.4.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 383
11.4.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 383
11.4.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 383
11.4.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................384
11.4.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................385
11.4.7.1 Circuit breaker contact travel time...............................................................................388
11.4.7.2 Circuit breaker status......................................................................................................389
11.4.7.3 Remaining life of circuit breaker................................................................................... 389
11.4.7.4 Accumulated energy........................................................................................................ 390
11.4.7.5 Circuit breaker operation cycles.................................................................................... 391
11.4.7.6 Circuit breaker operation monitoring.......................................................................... 392
11.4.7.7 Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring...................................................................393
11.4.7.8 Circuit breaker gas pressure indication.......................................................................393
11.4.8 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 394
11.5 Event function EVENT............................................................................................................. 394
11.5.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 394
11.5.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 395
11.5.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 395
11.5.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 395
11.5.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................396
11.6 Disturbance report DRPRDRE................................................................................................ 399
11.6.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 399
11.6.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 399
11.6.3 Function block........................................................................................................................400
11.6.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 401
11.6.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................402
11.6.6 Monitored data...................................................................................................................... 408
11.6.8 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 417
11.7 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP............................................................................417
11.7.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 417
11.7.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................417
11.7.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 418
11.7.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 418
11.7.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 419
11.8 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP....................................................................... 420

Technical manual
Table of contents
11.8.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 420

11.8.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 420
11.8.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 420
11.8.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................420
11.9 Limit counter L4UFCNT...........................................................................................................421
11.9.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................421
11.9.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................421
11.9.3.1 Design................................................................................................................................. 421
11.9.3.2 Reporting........................................................................................................................... 423
11.9.4 Function block........................................................................................................................ 423
11.9.5 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 423
11.9.6 Settings....................................................................................................................................424
11.9.7 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................424
11.9.8 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 424
11.10 Running hour-meter TEILGAPC ............................................................................................ 424
11.10.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 424
11.10.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 425
11.10.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 425
11.10.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 426
11.10.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................426
11.10.6.1 Operation accuracy.......................................................................................................... 428
11.10.6.2 Memory storage............................................................................................................... 428
11.10.7 Technical data.........................................................................................................................428
Section 12 Metering...................................................................................................... 429

12.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT.................................................................................................. 429
12.1.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 429
12.1.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 429
12.1.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 429
12.1.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 429
12.1.5 Settings................................................................................................................................... 430
12.1.6 Monitored data...................................................................................................................... 430
12.1.8 Technical data.........................................................................................................................432
12.2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR................................ 432
12.2.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................432
12.2.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 433
12.2.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 433
12.2.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 433
12.2.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................434
12.2.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................435
12.2.8 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 438

Technical manual
Table of contents
Section 13 Ethernet.......................................................................................................439
13.1 Access point.............................................................................................................................. 439
13.1.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 439
13.1.2 Settings....................................................................................................................................439
13.2 Access point diagnostics....................................................................................................... 440
13.2.1 Functionality...........................................................................................................................440
13.2.2 Function block........................................................................................................................440
13.2.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 441
13.2.4 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................441
13.3 Redundant communication....................................................................................................441
13.3.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................441
13.3.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 442
13.4 Merging unit..............................................................................................................................443
13.4.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 443
13.4.2 Settings................................................................................................................................... 444
13.4.3 Monitored data...................................................................................................................... 444
13.5 Routes........................................................................................................................................ 449
13.5.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................449
13.5.2 Settings................................................................................................................................... 450
13.5.3 Monitored data...................................................................................................................... 450
Section 14 Station communication............................................................................. 451

14.1 Communication protocols......................................................................................................451
14.2 Communication protocol diagnostics................................................................................. 451
14.3 DNP3 protocol...........................................................................................................................452
14.4 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol.............................................................................. 452
14.4.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 452
14.4.2 Communication interfaces and protocols........................................................................453
14.4.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................453
14.4.4 Technical data.........................................................................................................................453
14.4.5 Generic communication function for Single Point indication SPGAPC, SP16GAPC. 454
14.4.5.1 Functionality..................................................................................................................... 454
14.4.5.2 Function block.................................................................................................................. 454
14.4.5.3 Signals................................................................................................................................ 454
14.4.5.4 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 455
14.4.5.5 Monitored data................................................................................................................. 455
14.4.6 Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC..................................456
14.4.6.1 Functionality..................................................................................................................... 456
14.4.6.2 Function block.................................................................................................................. 456
14.4.6.3 Signals.................................................................................................................................457
14.4.6.4 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 457
14.4.6.5 Monitored data................................................................................................................. 458
14.4.7 GOOSE function block to receive a double point value GOOSEDPRCV...................... 458

Technical manual
Table of contents
14.4.7.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................458
14.4.7.2 Functionality..................................................................................................................... 458
14.4.7.3 Function block.................................................................................................................. 458
14.4.7.4 Signals................................................................................................................................ 459
14.4.7.5 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 459
14.4.7.6 Operation principle ......................................................................................................... 459
14.4.8 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value GOOSEINTRCV............................. 460
14.4.8.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 460
14.4.8.2 Functionality..................................................................................................................... 460
14.4.8.3 Function block.................................................................................................................. 460
14.4.8.4 Signals.................................................................................................................................461
14.4.8.5 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 461
14.4.9 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value GOOSEMVRCV.........................462
14.4.9.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................462
14.4.9.2 Functionality......................................................................................................................462
14.4.9.3 Function block...................................................................................................................462
14.4.9.4 Signals................................................................................................................................ 463
14.4.9.5 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 463
14.4.10 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value GOOSESPRCV.........................464
14.4.10.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................464
14.4.10.2 Functionality..................................................................................................................... 464
14.4.10.3 Function block.................................................................................................................. 464
14.4.10.4 Signals................................................................................................................................ 465
14.4.10.5 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 465
14.4.11 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking GOOSEINTLKRCV............... 466
14.4.11.1 Functionality..................................................................................................................... 466
14.4.11.2 Function block...................................................................................................................467
14.4.11.3 Signals................................................................................................................................ 467
14.4.11.4 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 469
14.4.11.5 Operation principle..........................................................................................................469
14.4.12 GOOSE binary receive GOOSEBINRCV................................................................................471
14.4.12.1 Function block................................................................................................................... 471
14.4.12.2 Signals................................................................................................................................. 471
14.4.12.3 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 473
14.4.13 GOOSE function block to receive a switching device GOOSEXLNRCV .......................474
14.4.13.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................474
14.4.13.2 Functionality......................................................................................................................474
14.4.13.3 Function block...................................................................................................................474
14.4.13.4 Signals.................................................................................................................................475
14.4.13.5 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 476
14.5 IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol................................................................477

Technical manual
Table of contents
14.5.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 477

14.5.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 477
14.5.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 477
14.5.3.1 Output signals...................................................................................................................477
14.5.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................478
14.5.5 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................478
14.5.6.1 Conditional blocking....................................................................................................... 486
14.5.6.2 IEC 61850 quality expander QUALEXP......................................................................... 490
14.5.7 Technical data.........................................................................................................................491
14.6 LON communication protocol............................................................................................... 491
14.6.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 491
14.6.2 Settings....................................................................................................................................492
14.6.4 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 508
14.7 SPA communication protocol................................................................................................509
14.7.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 509
14.7.2 Design...................................................................................................................................... 509
14.7.3 Settings................................................................................................................................... 509
14.7.4.1 Communication ports......................................................................................................514
14.7.5 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 515
14.8 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol..........................................................................515
14.8.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................515
14.8.2 Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS..................................................................... 516
14.8.2.1 Functionality...................................................................................................................... 516
14.8.2.2 Identification..................................................................................................................... 516
14.8.2.3 Function block................................................................................................................... 516
14.8.2.4 Signals................................................................................................................................. 517
14.8.2.5 Settings...............................................................................................................................517
14.8.3 Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEASUSR........................518
14.8.3.1 Functionality...................................................................................................................... 518
14.8.3.2 Identification..................................................................................................................... 518
14.8.3.3 Function block................................................................................................................... 518
14.8.3.4 Signals.................................................................................................................................518
14.8.3.5 Settings...............................................................................................................................519
14.8.4 Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR...........................................519
14.8.4.1 Functionality...................................................................................................................... 519
14.8.4.2 Identification..................................................................................................................... 519
14.8.4.3 Function block................................................................................................................... 519
14.8.4.4 Signals................................................................................................................................ 520
14.8.4.5 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 520
14.8.5 Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF................................................520
14.8.5.1 Functionality......................................................................................................................520
14.8.5.2 Identification.....................................................................................................................520
14.8.5.3 Function block...................................................................................................................520

Technical manual
Table of contents
14.8.5.4 Signals................................................................................................................................. 521

14.8.5.5 Settings...............................................................................................................................521
14.8.6 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT...........................521
14.8.6.1 Functionality...................................................................................................................... 521
14.8.6.2 Identification..................................................................................................................... 521
14.8.6.3 Function block................................................................................................................... 522
14.8.6.4 Signals.................................................................................................................................522
14.8.6.5 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 523
14.8.7 IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED.............................................................................523
14.8.7.1 Functionality...................................................................................................................... 523
14.8.7.2 Identification..................................................................................................................... 523
14.8.7.3 Function block...................................................................................................................524
14.8.7.4 Signals................................................................................................................................ 524
14.8.7.5 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 524
14.8.8 Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV...................................................... 524
14.8.8.1 Functionality......................................................................................................................524
14.8.8.2 Identification..................................................................................................................... 524
14.8.8.3 Function block...................................................................................................................525
14.8.8.4 Signals.................................................................................................................................525
14.8.8.5 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 525
14.8.9 Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 I103USRDEF...............................525
14.8.9.1 Functionality......................................................................................................................525
14.8.9.2 Identification..................................................................................................................... 526
14.8.9.3 Function block...................................................................................................................526
14.8.9.4 Signals.................................................................................................................................526
14.8.9.5 Settings...............................................................................................................................527
14.8.10 Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD....................................................... 528
14.8.10.1 Functionality......................................................................................................................528
14.8.10.2 Identification..................................................................................................................... 528
14.8.10.3 Function block...................................................................................................................528
14.8.10.4 Signals.................................................................................................................................528
14.8.10.5 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 529
14.8.11 IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD........................................................... 529
14.8.11.1 Functionality......................................................................................................................529
14.8.11.2 Identification..................................................................................................................... 529
14.8.11.3 Function block...................................................................................................................529
14.8.11.4 Signals.................................................................................................................................529
14.8.11.5 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 530
14.8.12 Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103 I103USRCMD........................530
14.8.12.1 Functionality......................................................................................................................530
14.8.12.2 Identification.....................................................................................................................530
14.8.12.3 Function block...................................................................................................................530
14.8.12.4 Signals................................................................................................................................. 531
14.8.12.5 Settings...............................................................................................................................531
14.8.13 Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 I103GENCMD................................. 532
14.8.13.1 Functionality...................................................................................................................... 532

Technical manual
Table of contents
14.8.13.2 Identification..................................................................................................................... 532

14.8.13.3 Function block................................................................................................................... 532
14.8.13.4 Signals.................................................................................................................................532
14.8.13.5 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 533
14.8.14 IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103 I103POSCMD.............533
14.8.14.1 Functionality...................................................................................................................... 533
14.8.14.2 Identification..................................................................................................................... 533
14.8.14.3 Function block...................................................................................................................533
14.8.14.4 Signals................................................................................................................................ 534
14.8.14.5 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 534
14.8.15 IED commands with position for IEC 60870-5-103 I103POSCMDV..............................534
14.8.15.1 Functionality......................................................................................................................534
14.8.15.2 Identification.....................................................................................................................534
14.8.15.3 Function block...................................................................................................................535
14.8.15.4 Signals.................................................................................................................................535
14.8.15.5 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 535
14.8.16 Operation principle ...............................................................................................................535
14.8.16.1 General................................................................................................................................535
14.8.16.2 Communication ports..................................................................................................... 544
14.8.17 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 544
14.9 MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND....................................................................................544
14.9.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 545
14.9.2 Design...................................................................................................................................... 545
14.9.2.1 General................................................................................................................................545
14.9.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 545
14.9.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................546
14.9.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................547
14.10 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG.............................................................................. 548
14.10.1 Activity logging ACTIVLOG.................................................................................................. 548
14.10.2 Settings................................................................................................................................... 548
Section 15 Security........................................................................................................ 551

15.1 Authority check ATHCHCK......................................................................................................551
15.1.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................551
15.1.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................551
15.1.3.1 Authorization with Central Account Management enabled IED............................. 554
15.2 Authority management AUTHMAN.......................................................................................556
15.2.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 556
15.2.2 AUTHMAN................................................................................................................................ 556
15.2.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................556
15.3 FTP access with password FTPACCS................................................................................... 556
15.3.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 556
15.3.2 FTP access with TLS, FTPACCS........................................................................................... 556
15.3.3 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 557

Technical manual
Table of contents
15.4 Authority status ATHSTAT......................................................................................................557

15.4.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................557
15.4.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 557
15.4.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 557
15.4.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 558
15.4.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................558
15.5 Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG..........................................................558
15.5.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 558
15.5.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 558
15.5.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 559
15.5.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................559
15.5.5.1 Internal signals................................................................................................................. 560
15.5.5.2 Supervision of analog inputs......................................................................................... 562
15.5.6 Technical data.........................................................................................................................562
15.6 ChangeLock function CHNGLCK........................................................................................... 562
15.6.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 563
15.6.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 563
15.6.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 563
15.7 Denial of service DOS.............................................................................................................. 564
15.7.1 Functionality .......................................................................................................................... 564
Section 16 Basic IED functions.................................................................................... 565

16.1 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN...............................................................................565
16.1.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 565
16.1.2 Settings....................................................................................................................................565
16.1.3 Description of SyncLostMode..............................................................................................571
16.1.4 Operation principle ............................................................................................................... 572
16.1.4.1 General concepts.............................................................................................................. 572
16.1.4.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operation.................................................................................... 573
16.1.4.3 Synchronization alternatives..........................................................................................574
16.1.4.4 Process bus IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE synchronization.................................................574
16.1.4.5 Precision Time Protocol (PTP) .......................................................................................575
16.1.5 Technical data.........................................................................................................................576
16.2 Parameter setting groups...................................................................................................... 576
16.2.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 576
16.2.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 576
16.2.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 577
16.2.4 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 577
16.3 Test mode functionality TESTMODE....................................................................................579
16.3.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 579
16.3.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 579

Technical manual
Table of contents
16.3.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 579

16.3.4 Settings................................................................................................................................... 580
16.3.5 Operation principle .............................................................................................................. 580
16.4 IED identifiers TERMINALID....................................................................................................581
16.4.1 Functionality............................................................................................................................581
16.4.2 Settings ................................................................................................................................... 581
16.5 Product information PRODINF.............................................................................................. 581
16.5.1 Functionality............................................................................................................................581
16.5.2 Settings ...................................................................................................................................582
16.5.3 Factory defined settings...................................................................................................... 582
16.6 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI....................................................................................582
16.6.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 583
16.6.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 583
16.6.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 583
16.7 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO ..............................................................................584
16.7.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 584
16.7.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 584
16.7.3 Signals......................................................................................................................................584
16.8 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI...................................................................................585
16.8.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 585
16.8.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 585
16.8.3 Signals......................................................................................................................................586
16.8.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................587
16.8.5.1 Frequency values.............................................................................................................. 590
16.9 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM..................................................................................... 590
16.9.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 590
16.9.2 Function block.........................................................................................................................591
16.9.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 591
16.9.4 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 591
Section 17 IED hardware...............................................................................................593

17.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................593
17.1.1 Variants of case size with local HMI display..................................................................... 593
17.1.2 Case from the front and rear sides.................................................................................... 594
17.2 Hardware modules.................................................................................................................. 594
17.2.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................. 594
17.2.2 Numeric module (NUM)........................................................................................................ 595
17.2.2.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................595
17.2.2.2 Functionality......................................................................................................................595
17.2.2.3 Technical data................................................................................................................... 596
17.2.3 Power supply module (PSM)................................................................................................ 597
17.2.3.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................597

Technical manual
Table of contents
17.2.3.2 Design................................................................................................................................. 597

17.2.3.3 Technical data................................................................................................................... 597
17.2.4 Local human-machine interface (Local HMI).................................................................... 597
17.2.5 Transformer input module (TRM)....................................................................................... 597
17.2.5.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................598
17.2.5.2 Design.................................................................................................................................598
17.2.5.3 Technical data................................................................................................................... 599
17.2.6 Binary input module (BIM)................................................................................................... 599
17.2.6.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................599
17.2.6.2 Design.................................................................................................................................599
17.2.6.3 Signals................................................................................................................................ 602
17.2.6.4 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 602
17.2.6.5 Monitored data................................................................................................................. 602
17.2.6.6 Technical data...................................................................................................................603
17.2.7 Binary output modules (BOM).............................................................................................603
17.2.7.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................... 603
17.2.7.2 Design.................................................................................................................................603
17.2.7.3 Signals................................................................................................................................ 605
17.2.7.4 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 605
17.2.7.5 Monitored data.................................................................................................................606
17.2.7.6 Technical data...................................................................................................................609
17.2.8 Binary input/output module (IOM).................................................................................... 610
17.2.8.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................610
17.2.8.2 Design................................................................................................................................. 610
17.2.8.3 Signals................................................................................................................................. 611
17.2.8.4 Settings............................................................................................................................... 611
17.2.8.5 Monitored data..................................................................................................................612
17.2.8.6 Technical data................................................................................................................... 614
17.2.9 Serial and LON communication module (SLM) ............................................................... 616
17.2.9.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 616
17.2.9.2 Design................................................................................................................................. 616
17.2.9.3 Technical data....................................................................................................................617
17.2.10 Galvanic RS485 communication module........................................................................... 617
17.2.10.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 617
17.2.10.2 Design..................................................................................................................................617
17.2.10.3 Technical data................................................................................................................... 618
17.2.11 IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B......................................................................619
17.2.11.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 619
17.2.11.2 Design................................................................................................................................. 619
17.2.11.3 Encoding.............................................................................................................................619
17.2.11.4 TimeZoneAs1344.............................................................................................................. 620
17.2.11.5 Settings.............................................................................................................................. 620
17.2.11.6 Technical data................................................................................................................... 620
17.3 Dimensions................................................................................................................................ 621
17.3.1 Case with protective cover...................................................................................................621
17.3.2 Case without protective cover............................................................................................ 624

Technical manual
Table of contents
17.3.3 Flush mounting dimensions................................................................................................ 626

17.3.4 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions......................................................................... 626
17.3.5 Wall mounting dimensions...................................................................................................627
17.4 Mounting alternatives............................................................................................................. 628
17.4.1 Flush mounting...................................................................................................................... 628
17.4.1.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................628
17.4.1.2 Mounting procedure for flush mounting.....................................................................628
17.4.2 Wall mounting.........................................................................................................................629
17.4.2.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................629
17.4.2.2 Mounting procedure for wall mounting.......................................................................629
17.4.2.3 How to reach the rear side of the IED.......................................................................... 629
17.4.3 19” panel rack mounting.......................................................................................................630
17.4.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................630
17.4.3.2 Mounting procedure for 19” panel rack mounting.....................................................631
17.4.4 Side-by-side 19” rack mounting...........................................................................................631
17.4.4.1 Overview............................................................................................................................. 631
17.4.4.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting...............................................632
17.4.4.3 IED mounted with a RHGS6 case...................................................................................632
17.4.5 Side-by-side flush mounting................................................................................................633
17.4.5.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................633
17.4.5.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting............................................. 634
17.5 Technical data...........................................................................................................................634
17.5.1 Enclosure................................................................................................................................. 634
17.5.2 Electrical safety...................................................................................................................... 635
17.5.3 Connection system................................................................................................................635
17.5.4 Influencing factors.................................................................................................................636
17.5.5 Type tests according to standard...................................................................................... 637
Section 18 Labels...........................................................................................................639
18.1 Labels on IED.............................................................................................................................639
Section 19 Connection diagrams................................................................................ 641
Section 20 Inverse time characteristics..................................................................... 643

20.1 Application................................................................................................................................ 643
20.2 Principle of operation............................................................................................................. 645
20.2.1 Mode of operation.................................................................................................................645
20.3 Inverse characteristics............................................................................................................650
Section 21 Glossary....................................................................................................... 677

Technical manual
24
1MRK 505 384-UEN C Section 1
Introduction
Section 1 Introduction
1.1 This manual GUID-AB423A30-13C2-46AF-B7FE-A73BB425EB5F v19
The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function blocks, logic
diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data, sorted per
function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
1.1.1 Presumptions for Technical Data GUID-1E949E38-E04D-4374-A086-912C25E9F93C v2
The technical data stated in this document are only valid under the following circumstances:
1. Main current transformers with 1 A or 2 A secondary rating are wired to the IED 1 A rated
CT inputs.
2. Main current transformer with 5 A secondary rating are wired to the IED 5 A rated CT
inputs.
3. CT and VT ratios in the IED are set in accordance with the associated main instrument
transformers. Note that for functions which measure an analogue signal which do not
have corresponding primary quantity the 1:1 ratio shall be set for the used analogue inputs
on the IED. Example of such functions are: HZPDIF, ROTIPHIZ and STTIPHIZ.
4. Parameter IBase used by the tested function is set equal to the rated CT primary current.
5. Parameter UBase used by the tested function is set equal to the rated primary phase-to-
phase voltage.
6. Parameter SBase used by the tested function is set equal to:
• √3 × IBase × UBase
7. The rated secondary quantities have the following values:
• Rated secondary phase current Ir is either 1 A or 5 A depending on selected TRM.
• Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage Ur is within the range from 100 V to 120 V.
• Rated secondary power for three-phase system Sr = √3 × Ur × Ir
8. For operate and reset time testing, the default setting values of the function are used if
not explicitly stated otherwise.
9. During testing, signals with rated frequency have been injected if not explicitly stated
otherwise.
1.2 Intended audience GUID-C9B8127F-5748-4BEA-9E4F-CC762FE28A3A v11
This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel, who
use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in normal service.
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems, protection
equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in the IEDs. The
installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in handling electronic
equipment.

Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 384-UEN C
Introduction
1.3 Product documentation
1.3.1 Product documentation set GUID-3AA69EA6-F1D8-47C6-A8E6-562F29C67172 v16
Deinstalling & disposal

Planning & purchase
Decommissioning
Commissioning
Maintenance
Engineering
Operation
Installing
Engineering manual
Installation manual
Commissioning manual
Operation manual
Application manual
Technical manual
Communication
protocol manual
Cyber security
deployment guideline
IEC07000220-4-en.vsd
IEC07000220 V4 EN-US
Figure 1: The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle

The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the various
tools available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides instructions on how to set
up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The manual also recommends a
sequence for the engineering of protection and control functions, as well as communication
engineering for IEC 61850.
The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The manual provides
procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters are organized in the
chronological order in which the IED should be installed.
The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED. The manual
can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for assistance during the
testing phase. The manual provides procedures for the checking of external circuitry and
energizing the IED, parameter setting and configuration as well as verifying settings by
secondary injection. The manual describes the process of testing an IED in a station which is
not in service. The chapters are organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be
commissioned. The relevant procedures may be followed also during the service and
maintenance activities.
The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has been
commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring, controlling and setting of
the IED. The manual also describes how to identify disturbances and how to view calculated
and measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault.

Technical manual
Introduction
The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted per
function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical protection
function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance for calculating settings.
The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function blocks, logic
diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data, sorted per
function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols supported by

the IED. The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific implementations.
The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points specific to the
IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the corresponding communication
protocol manual.
The cyber security deployment guideline describes the process for handling cyber security
when communicating with the IED. Certification, Authorization with role based access control,
and product engineering for cyber security related events are described and sorted by
function. The guideline can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
1.3.2 Document revision history GUID-BD82A13A-6FA0-4E33-BDBF-23B5A0CF968F v1
Document Date Product revision History

revision
- 2017–05 2.2.0 First release for product version 2.2
A 2017-10 2.2.1 Ethernet ports with RJ45 connector added.
enhancements/updates made to GENPDIF, ZMFPDIS and
ZMFCPDIS.
B 2018-03 2.2.1 Document enhancements and corrections
C 2019-05 2.2.1 PTP enhancements and corrections
1.3.3 Related documents GUID-94E8A5CA-BE1B-45AF-81E7-5A41D34EE112 v7
Documents related to REQ650 Document numbers

Application manual 1MRK 505 383-UEN
Commissioning manual 1MRK 505 385-UEN
Product guide 1MRK 505 386-BEN
Technical manual 1MRK 505 384-UEN
Type test certificate 1MRK 505 386-TEN
650 series manuals Document numbers

Operation manual 1MRK 500 128-UEN
Engineering manual 1MRK 511 420-UEN
Installation manual 1MRK 514 027-UEN
Communication protocol manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 413-UUS
Communication protocol manual, IEC 60870-5-103 1MRK 511 416-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 1 1MRK 511 414-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 2 1MRK 511 415-UEN
Table continues on next page

Technical manual
Introduction
650 series manuals Document numbers

Communication protocol manual, LON 1MRK 511 417-UEN
Communication protocol manual, SPA 1MRK 511 418-UEN
Point list manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 419-UUS
Accessories guide IEC: 1MRK 514 012-UEN
ANSI: 1MRK 514 012-UUS
Cyber security deployment guideline 1MRK 511 421-UEN
Connection and Installation components 1MRK 513 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN
Application guide, Communication set-up 1MRK 505 382-UEN
1.4 Document symbols and conventions
1.4.1 Symbols GUID-2945B229-DAB0-4F15-8A0E-B9CF0C2C7B15 v13
The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could
result in electrical shock.
The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in
personal injury.
The caution hot surface icon indicates important information or warning about
the temperature of product surfaces.
Class 1 Laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes and do not
view directly with optical instruments.
The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the

concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard which
could result in corruption of software or damage to equipment or property.
The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.
The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project or
how to use a certain function.
Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand that
under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result in

Technical manual
Introduction
degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. It is important that the
user fully complies with all warning and cautionary notices.
1.4.2 Document conventions GUID-96DFAB1A-98FE-4B26-8E90-F7CEB14B1AB6 v8
• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The glossary
also contains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push button
icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use and .
• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press .
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.
• the character ^ in front of an input/output signal name indicates that the signal
name may be customized using the PCM600 software.
• the character * after an input signal name indicates that the signal must be
connected to another function block in the application configuration to achieve a
valid application configuration.
• Dimensions are provided both in inches and millimeters. If it is not specifically mentioned
then the dimension is in millimeters.
• Logic diagrams describe the signal logic of the function block and are bordered by dashed
lines.
In a logic diagram, input and output signal paths are shown as lines that touch the outer
border of the diagram. Input signals are always on the left-hand side and output signals
are on the right-hand side.
Input and output signals can be configured using PCM600. They can be connected to the
inputs and outputs of other functions and to binary inputs and outputs. Examples of input
signals are BLKTR, BLOCK, and VTSZ. Examples of output signals are TRIP, START, STL1,
STL2, and STL3.
• Frames with a shaded area on the right-hand side represent setting parameters.
These parameters can only be set via the PST or LHMI. Their values are high (1) only
when the corresponding setting parameter is set to the symbolic value specified
within the frame. Example is the signal Timer tPP=On. Their logical values
correspond automatically to the selected setting value.
• Internal signals are illustrated graphically and end approximately 2 mm from the
frame edge. If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the
same signal name is used where the signal should continue, see figure 2 and figure 3.
Example of the internal signal is BLK.
• Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another diagram
will be approximately 2 mm from the frame edge, see figure 3 and figure 4. Examples
are STNDL1N, STNDL2N, STNDL3N, STNDL1L2, STNDL2L3, and STNDL3L1.

Technical manual
Introduction
STZMPP
OR
STCND
AND STNDL1L2
L1L2
STNDL2L3
L2L3 AND
L3L1 AND STNDL3L1
AND STNDL1N
L1N
AND STNDL2N
L2N
STNDL3N
L3N AND
OR STPE
OR
VTSZ STND
OR AND
BLOCK
BLOCFUNC BLK
99000557-2.vsd
IEC99000557-TIFF V3 EN-US
Figure 2: Logic diagram example with intermediate output signals
IEC00000488-TIFF V1 EN-US
Figure 3: Logic diagram example with intermediate input signals

Technical manual
Introduction
Timer tPP=On
STZMPP AND tPP
AND
t
BLOCFUNC
OR OR
tPE
t
AND
Timer tPE=On AND
STZMPE 15ms
BLKTR AND t
TRIP
BLK OR
STL1 AND TRL1
STL2 AND TRL2
STL3 AND TRL3
IEC09000887-3-en.vsdx
Figure 4: Logic diagram example with a parameter input
Illustrations are used as an example and might show other products than the
one the manual describes. The example that is illustrated is still valid.
1.5 IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping GUID-C5133366-7260-4C47-A975-7DBAB3A33A96 v7
Function block names are used in ACT and PST to identify functions. Respective function block
names of Edition 1 logical nodes and Edition 2 logical nodes are shown in the table below.
Table 1: IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes
AGSAL AGSAL AGSAL
SECLLN0
ALMCALH ALMCALH ALMCALH
ALTIM - ALTIM
ALTMS - ALTMS
ALTRK - ALTRK
BRCPTOC BRCPTOC BRCPTOC
BTIGAPC B16IFCVI BTIGAPC
CCPDSC CCRPLD CCPDSC
CCRBRF CCRBRF CCRBRF
CCSSPVC CCSRDIF CCSSPVC
CMMXU CMMXU CMMXU

Technical manual
Introduction

CMSQI CMSQI CMSQI
CVGAPC GF2LLN0 GF2MMXN
GF2MMXN GF2PHAR
GF2PHAR GF2PTOV
GF2PTOV GF2PTUC
GF2PTUC GF2PTUV
GF2PTUV GF2PVOC
GF2PVOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
CVMMXN CVMMXN CVMMXN
DPGAPC DPGGIO DPGAPC
DRPRDRE DRPRDRE DRPRDRE
EF4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
EFPIOC EFPIOC EFPIOC
ETPMMTR ETPMMTR ETPMMTR
FUFSPVC SDDRFUF FUFSPVC
HZPDIF HZPDIF HZPDIF
INDCALH INDCALH INDCALH
ITBGAPC IB16FCVB ITBGAPC
L4UFCNT L4UFCNT L4UFCNT
LCPTTR LCPTTR LCPTTR
LD0LLN0 LLN0 LLN0
LDLPSCH LDLPDIF LDLPSCH
LFPTTR LFPTTR LFPTTR
LMBRFLO LMBRFLO LMBRFLO
LOVPTUV LOVPTUV LOVPTUV
LPHD LPHD LPHD
LT3CPDIF LT3CPDIF LT3CGAPC
LT3CPDIF
LT3CPHAR
LT3CPTRC
MVGAPC MVGGIO MVGAPC
NS4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR PH1PTOC
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC
OC4PTOC OC4LLN0 GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH3PTOC
PH3PTOC PH3PTRC
PH3PTRC
OV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 OV2PTOV
OV2PTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PCFCNT PCGGIO PCFCNT
PHPIOC PHPIOC PHPIOC
QCBAY QCBAY BAY/LLN0

Technical manual
Introduction

QCRSV QCRSV QCRSV
RCHLCCH RCHLCCH RCHLCCH
REFPDIF REFPDIF REFPDIF
ROV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ROV2PTOV
ROV2PTOV
SCHLCCH SCHLCCH SCHLCCH
SCILO SCILO SCILO
SCSWI SCSWI SCSWI
SESRSYN RSY1LLN0 AUT1RSYN
AUT1RSYN MAN1RSYN
MAN1RSYN SYNRSYN
SYNRSYN
SLGAPC SLGGIO SLGAPC
SMBRREC SMBRREC SMBRREC
SMPPTRC SMPPTRC SMPPTRC
SP16GAPC SP16GGIO SP16GAPC
SPC8GAPC SPC8GGIO SPC8GAPC
SPGAPC SPGGIO SPGAPC
SSCBR SSCBR SSCBR
SSIMG SSIMG SSIMG
SSIML SSIML SSIML
SXCBR SXCBR SXCBR
SXSWI SXSWI SXSWI
T3WPDIF T3WPDIF T3WGAPC
T3WPDIF
T3WPHAR
T3WPTRC
TEIGAPC TEIGGIO TEIGAPC
TEILGAPC TEILGGIO TEILGAPC
TMAGAPC TMAGGIO TMAGAPC
TRPTTR TRPTTR TRPTTR
UV2PTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC UV2PTUV
UV2PTUV
VMMXU VMMXU VMMXU
VMSQI VMSQI VMSQI
VNMMXU VNMMXU VNMMXU
VSGAPC VSGGIO VSGAPC
WRNCALH WRNCALH WRNCALH
ZCLCPSCH ZCLCPLAL ZCLCPSCH
ZCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCPSCH

Technical manual
Introduction

ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH
ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF
ZMFPDIS ZMFLLN0 PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPTRC ZMFPTRC
ZMMMXU ZMMMXU

Technical manual
Available functions
Section 2 Available functions

GUID-F5776DD1-BD04-4872-BB89-A0412B4B5CC3 v1
The following tables list all the functions available in the IED. Those functions
that are not exposed to the user or do not need to be configured are not
described in this manual.
2.1 Back-up protection functions GUID-A8D0852F-807F-4442-8730-E44808E194F0 v15
IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Breaker

function name
REQ650 (B11)
Current protection
PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 1
OC4PTOC 51_671) Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps 1
EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection 1

EF4PTOC 51N Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps 1
67N2)
NS4PTOC 46I2 Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection 1
LCPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Celsius 1
LFPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Fahrenheit 1
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection 1
STBPTOC 50STB Stub protection 1
CCPDSC 52PD Pole discordance protection 1
BRCPTOC 46 Broken conductor check 1
Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage protection 1
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage protection 1
ROV2PTOV 59N Two step residual overvoltage protection 1
LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check 1
1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage

Technical manual
Available functions
2.2 Control and monitoring functions GUID-E3777F16-0B76-4157-A3BF-0B6B978863DE v19

function name
REQ650 (B11)
Control
SESRSYN 25 Synchrocheck, energizing check and synchronizing 1
SMBRREC 79 Autorecloser 1
QCBAY Bay control 1
LOCREM Handling of LR-switch positions 1
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of PSTO 1
SXCBR Circuit breaker 3
SCILO Interlocking 1
SCSWI Switch controller 5
SXSWI Circuit switch 3
XLNPROXY Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE 4
SLGAPC Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation 15
VSGAPC Selector mini switch 30
DPGAPC Generic communication function for Double Point indication 16
SPC8GAPC Single point generic control function 8 signals 5
AUTOBITS Automation bits, command function for DNP3.0 3
SINGLECMD Single command, 16 signals 4
I103CMD Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103GENCMD Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 50
I103POSCMD IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103 50
I103POSCMDV IED direct commands with position for IEC 60870-5-503 50
I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103USRCMD Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103 4
Secondary system supervision
CCSSPVC 87 Current circuit supervison 1
FUFSPVC Fuse failure supervision 1
Logic
SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic 6
SMAGAPC General start matrix block 6
STARTCOMB Start combinator 32
TMAGAPC Trip matrix logic 12
ALMCALH Logic for group alarm 5
WRNCALH Logic for group warning 5
INDCALH Logic for group indication 5
AND, GATE, INV, Basic configurable logic blocks (see Table 2) 40–420
LLD, OR,
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET, XOR
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1

Technical manual
Available functions

function name
REQ650 (B11)
B16I Boolean to integer conversion, 16 bit 18
BTIGAPC Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation, 16 16
bit
IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 18
ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with Logic Node representation 16
TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow 12
supervision
INTCOMP Comparator for integer inputs 30
REALCOMP Comparator for real inputs 30
Table 2: Total number of instances for basic configurable logic blocks

Basic configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 280
GATE 40
INV 420
LLD 40
OR 298
PULSETIMER 40
RSMEMORY 40
SRMEMORY 40
TIMERSET 60
XOR 40

function name
REQ650 (B11)
Monitoring
CVMMXN Power system measurement 6
CMMXU Current measurement 10
VMMXU Voltage measurement 6
phase-phase
CMSQI Current sequence 6
measurement
VMSQI Voltage sequence 6
measurement
VNMMXU Voltage measurement 6
phase-earth
AISVBAS General service value 1
presentation of analog
inputs
SSIMG 63 Insulation supervision for 21
gas medium
SSIML 71 Insulation supervision for 3
liquid medium

Technical manual
Available functions

function name
REQ650 (B11)
SSCBR Circuit breaker condition 3
monitoring
EVENT Event function 20
DRPRDRE, Disturbance report 1
A1RADR-A4RADR,
B1RBDR-
B22RBDR
SPGAPC Generic communication 64
function for single point
indication
SP16GAPC Generic communication 16
function for single point
indication 16 inputs
MVGAPC Generic communication 24
function for measured
values
BINSTATREP Logical signal status report 3
RANGE_XP Measured value expander 66
block
I103MEAS Measurands for IEC 1
60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined 3
signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103AR Function status auto- 1
recloser for IEC 60870-5-103
I103EF Function status earth-fault 1
for IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT Function status fault 1
protection for IEC
60870-5-103
I103IED IED status for IEC 1
60870-5-103
I103SUPERV Supervision status for IEC 1
60870-5-103
I103USRDEF Status for user defined 20
signals for IEC 60870-5-103
L4UFCNT Event counter with limit 30
supervision
TEILGAPC Running hour meter 6
Metering
PCFCNT Pulse-counter logic 16
ETPMMTR Function for energy 6
calculation and demand
handling

Technical manual
Available functions
2.3 Communication GUID-5F144B53-B9A7-4173-80CF-CD4C84579CB5 v17

function name
REQ650 (B11)
Station communication
LONSPA, SPA SPA communication protocol 1
ADE LON communciation protocol 1
HORZCOMM Network variables via LON 1
PROTOCOL Operation selection between SPA and IEC 60870-5-103 for SLM 1
RS485PROT Operation selection for RS485 1
RS485GEN RS485 1
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general protocol 1
CHSERRS485 DNP3.0 for EIA-485 communication protocol 1
CH1TCP, CH2TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1
CH3TCP, CH4TCP
CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication protocol 1
MSTSER DNP3.0 serial master 1
MST1TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1
MST2TCP,
MST3TCP,
MST4TCP
DNPFREC DNP3.0 fault records for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication 1
protocol
IEC 61850-8-1 IEC 61850 1
GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking 59
GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 16
GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a double point value 64
GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive an integer value 32
GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value 60
GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a single point value 64
GOOSEXLNRCV GOOSE function block to receive a switching device 9
MULTICMDRCV/ Multiple command and transmit 60/10
MULTICMDSND
OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial communication 1
RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication for RS485 1
AGSAL Generic security application component 1
LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0 1
SYSLLN0 IEC 61850 SYS LLN0 1
LPHD Physical device information 1
PCMACCS IED configuration protocol 1
SECALARM Component for mapping security events on protocols such as 1
DNP3 and IEC103
FSTACCS Field service tool access 1

Technical manual
Available functions

function name
REQ650 (B11)
IEC 61850-9-2 Process bus communication, 4 merging units 1-P31
ACTIVLOG Activity logging 1
ALTRK Service tracking 1
PRP IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy protocol 1-P23
HSR IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless redundancy 1-P24
PTP Precision time protocol 1
FRONTSTATUS Access point diagnostic for front Ethernet port 1
SCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for non-redundant Ethernet port 4
RCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for redundant Ethernet ports 2
DHCP DHCP configuration for front access point 1
QUALEXP IEC 61850 quality expander 32
2.4 Basic IED functions GUID-C8F0E5D2-E305-4184-9627-F6B5864216CA v13
Table 3: Basic IED functions

IEC 61850 or function Description
name
INTERRSIG Self supervision with internal event list
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module
BININPUT, Time synchronization
SYNCHCAN,
SYNCHGPS,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH,
SYNCHPPS, SNTP,
SYNCHSPA
TIMEZONE Time synchronization
IRIG-B Time synchronization
SETGRPS Number of setting groups
ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups
TESTMODE Test mode functionality
CHNGLCK Change lock function
SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMAI1 - SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase
ATHSTAT Authority status
ATHCHCK Authority check
AUTHMAN Authority management
FTPACCS FTP access with password
ALTMS Time master supervision
ALTIM Time management
COMSTATUS Protocol diagnostic

Technical manual
Available functions
Table 4: Local HMI functions

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Description
name
LHMICTRL Local HMI signals
LANGUAGE Local human machine language
SCREEN Local HMI Local human machine screen behavior
FNKEYTY1–FNKEYTY5 Parameter setting function for HMI in PCM600
FNKEYMD1–
FNKEYMD5
LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI
OPENCLOSE_LED LHMI LEDs for open and close keys
GRP1_LED1– Basic part for CP HW LED indication module
GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1–
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1–
GRP3_LED15

Technical manual
42
Analog inputs
Section 3 Analog inputs SEMOD55010-1 v3
3.1 Introduction SEMOD55003-5 v11
Analog input channels must be configured and set properly in order to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring, all directional
and differential functions, the directions of the input currents must be defined in order to
reflect the way the current transformers are installed/connected in the field ( primary and
secondary connections ). Measuring and protection algorithms in the IED use primary system
quantities. Setting values are in primary quantities as well and it is important to set the data
about the connected current and voltage transformers properly.
An AISVBAS reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This
analog channel's phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and remaining analog
channel's phase angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing
and commissioning of the IED, the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing and
service values reading.
The IED has the ability to receive analog values from primary equipment, that
are sampled by Merging units (MU) connected to a process bus, via the IEC
61850-9-2 LE protocol.
The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer input module

(TRM) type.
3.2 Function block SEMOD116577-1 v5
The hardware channels appear in the signal matrix tool (SMT) and in ACT when
a TRM is included in the configuration with the hardware configuration tool. In
the SMT or the ACT, they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of
the IED and used internally in the configuration.
3.3 Signals
PID-3923-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7
Table 5: TRM_7I_5U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1

Technical manual
Analog inputs

CH8(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 8



Technical manual
Analog inputs
3.4 Settings
SEMOD129840-4 v2
Dependent on ordered IED type.
PID-4153-SETTINGS v8
Table 8: AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PhaseAngleRef TRM40-Ch1 - Ch12 - - TRM40-Ch1 Reference channel
TRM41-Ch1 - Ch12 for phase angle
MU1-L1I - L4I presentation
MU1-L1U - L4U
MU2-L1I - L4I
MU2-L1U - L4U
MU3-L1I - L4I
MU3-L1U - L4U
MU4-L1I - L4I
MU4-L1U - L4U
MU5-L1I - L4I
MU5-L1U - L4U
MU6-L1I - L4I
MU6-L1U - L4U
MU7-L1I - L4I
MU7-L1U - L4U
MU8-L1I - L4I
MU8-L1U - L4U
MU9-L1I - L4I
MU9-L1U - L4U
MU10-L1I - L4I
MU10-L1U - L4U
MU11-L1I - L4I
MU11-L1U - L4U
MU12-L1I - L4I
MU12-L1U - L4U
GUID-72A8BEE0-2430-4C94-A1E0-9B6A0D149FE2 v1
All the visible parameter selections that are visible are not supported by the
650-series IED.
Table 9: TRM_7I_5U Non group settings (basic)

CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current

Technical manual
Analog inputs

VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage


Technical manual
Analog inputs



Technical manual
Analog inputs

3.5 Monitored data

PID-6531-MONITOREDDATA v3
Table 12: AISVBAS Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
Status INTEGER 0=Ok - Service value status
1=Error
2=AngRefLow
3=Uncorrelated
Table 13: TRM_7I_5U Monitored data

STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module status
1=Error

Technical manual
Analog inputs

1=Error

1=Error
3.6 Operation principle SEMOD55028-5 v9
The direction of a measured current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are
typically star connected and can be connected with the star point towards the object or away
from the object. This information must be set in the IED.
Once the CT direction settings is correctly entered the internal IED convention of the
directionality is defined as follows:
• Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction into the
protected object.
• Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction out from the
protected object.
For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see Figure 5)
• Forward means the direction is into the object.

• Reverse means the direction is out from the object.
Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object
Set parameter Set parameter

CTStarPoint CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
"ToObject" "FromObject"
en05000456.vsd
Figure 5: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

If the settings of the primary CT is correct, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject or ToObject
according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows towards the protected
object, and a Forward direction always looks towards the protected object.

Technical manual
Analog inputs
The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs and VTs are,
therefore, basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated secondary and primary currents
and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the IED with their rated ratios.
The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under IED Configuration/HW
Configuration/ADM in the Parameter Settings Tool or under Main menu/Configuration/
Analog modules in the HMI.
3.7 Technical data SEMOD55412-1 v1
M16988-1 v11
Table 16: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer
Description Value
Frequency
Rated frequency fr 50/60 Hz
Operating range fr ± 10%
Current inputs
Rated current Ir 1 or 5 A
Operating range (0-100) x Ir
Thermal withstand 100 × Ir for 1 s *)

30 × Ir for 10 s
10 × Ir for 1 min
4 × Ir continuously
Dynamic withstand 250 × Ir one half wave
Burden < 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A

< 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A
*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

Voltage inputs **)
Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V
Operating range 0 - 340 V

Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s
420 V continuously
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
< 80 mVA at 220 V
**) all values for individual voltage inputs
Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency
SEMOD53376-2 v6
Table 17: CT and VT circuit connectors

Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
terminals

Technical manual
Binary input and output modules
Section 4 Binary input and output modules

4.1 Binary input
4.1.1 Binary input debounce filter GUID-AE43976C-E966-484C-AF39-89B2B12F56DC v5
The debounce filter eliminates bounces and short disturbances on a binary input.
A time counter is used for filtering. The time counter is increased once in a millisecond when a
binary input is high, or decreased when a binary input is low. A new debounced binary input
signal is forwarded when the time counter reaches the set DebounceTime value and the
debounced input value is high or when the time counter reaches 0 and the debounced input
value is low. The default setting of DebounceTime is 1 ms.
The binary input ON-event gets the time stamp of the first rising edge, after which the counter
does not reach 0 again. The same happens when the signal goes down to 0 again.
4.1.2 Oscillation filter GUID-41B89E6F-50C3-44BF-9171-3CC82EB5CA15 v4
Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic fields from
for example nearby breakers. An oscillation filter is used to reduce the disturbance from the
system when a binary input starts oscillating.
An oscillation counter counts the debounced signal state changes during 1 s. If the counter
value is greater than the set value OscBlock, the input signal is blocked. The input signal is
ignored until the oscillation counter value during 1 s is below the set value OscRelease.
4.1.3 Settings
GUID-07348953-4A72-444B-A31A-030ABEA8E0C4 v1
OscBlock must always be set to a value greater than OscRelease. If this is not
done, oscillation detection will not function correctly, and the resulting
behaviour will be undefined.
4.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary input modules

Table 18: BIM Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

Technical manual
Binary input and output modules
4.1.3.2 Setting parameters for binary input/output module

Table 19: IOMIN Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - On Binary input/output module in
On operation (On) or not (Off)

Technical manual
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface

LHMI
5.1 Local HMI screen behaviour
5.1.1 Identification
GUID-84392EFF-4D3F-4A67-A6ED-34C6E98574D6 v1
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Local HMI screen behaviour SCREEN - -
5.1.2 Settings
5.2 Local HMI signals
GUID-03AB7AEE-87D3-4F3C-B6B9-B1EB1B538E38 v1

Local HMI signals LHMICTRL - -
5.2.2 Function block GUID-A8AC51E9-5BD7-4A80-9576-4816F14DD08D v2
LHMICTRL
CLRLEDS HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD
Figure 6: LHMICTRL function block
5.2.3 Signals
PID-3992-INPUTSIGNALS v6
Table 20: LHMICTRL Input signals

Name Type Default Description
CLRLEDS BOOLEAN 0 Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs

Technical manual
Table 21: LHMICTRL Output signals

HMI-ON BOOLEAN Backlight of the LCD display is active
RED-S BOOLEAN Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-S BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-F BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
CLRPULSE BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are
cleared
LEDSCLRD BOOLEAN Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not active
5.3 Basic part for LED indication module
GUID-6E36C0BC-F284-4C88-A4A8-9535D3BE8B14 v2

Basic part for LED indication module LEDGEN - -
Basic part for LED indication HW GRP1_LED1 - - -
module GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1 -
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1 -
GRP3_LED15
5.3.2 Function block GUID-BDB5797F-F27E-4FEE-9FDB-1C9E2F572BB6 v3
LEDGEN
BLOCK NEWIND
RESET ACK
Figure 7: LEDGEN function block
GRP1_LED1
^HM1L01R
^HM1L01Y
^HM1L01G
Figure 8: GRP1_LED1 function block

The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example. The 15 LEDs in each of the three groups have a
similar function block.

Technical manual
5.3.3 Signals
Table 22: LEDGEN Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Input to block the operation of the LEDs
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input to acknowledge/reset the indication LEDs
Table 23: LEDGEN Output signals

NEWIND BOOLEAN New indication signal if any LED indication input is set
ACK BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged
Table 24: GRP1_LED1 Input signals

HM1L01R BOOLEAN 0 Red indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01Y BOOLEAN 0 Yellow indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01G BOOLEAN 0 Green indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
5.3.4 Settings
Table 25: LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)

On
tRestart 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Defines the disturbance length
tMax 0.1 - 100.0 s 0.1 1.0 Maximum time for the definition of a
disturbance

Technical manual
Table 26: GRP1_LED1 Non group settings (basic)

SequenceType Follow-S - - Follow-S Sequence type for LED 1, local HMI
Follow-F alarm group 1
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_OFF Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is off
LabelRed 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_RED Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is red
LabelYellow 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_YELLOW Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is yellow
LabelGreen 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_GREEN Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is green
5.4 LCD part for HMI function keys control module GUID-EECAE7FA-7078-472C-A429-F7607DB884EB v2
GUID-E6611022-5EA3-420D-ADCD-9D1E7604EFEB v1

LCD part for HMI Function Keys FNKEYMD1 - - -
Control module FNKEYMD5
5.4.2 Function block

GUID-A803A728-5CFC-4606-98E4-793E873B99D4 v3
FNKEYMD1
^LEDCTL1 ^FKEYOUT1
Figure 9: FNKEYMD1 function block

Only the function block for the first button is shown above. There is a similar block for every
function key button.
5.4.3 Signals
Table 27: FNKEYMD1 Input signals

LEDCTL1 BOOLEAN 0 LED control input for function key
Table 28: FNKEYMD1 Output signals

FKEYOUT1 BOOLEAN Output controlled by function key

Technical manual
5.4.4 Settings
Table 29: FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)

Mode Off - - Off Output operation mode
Toggle
Pulsed
PulseTime 0.001 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse time for output controlled by
LCDFn1
LabelOn 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_ON Label for LED on state
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_OFF Label for LED off state
ReqAuthority Off - - On User authorization needed for
On function key operation
Table 30: FNKEYTY1 Non group settings (basic)

Type Off - - Off Function key type
Menu shortcut
Control
MenuShortcut - 0 Menu shortcut for function key
GUID-BCE87D54-C836-40EE-8DA7-779B767059AB v2
For setting ReqAuthority, when users are configured through local or central
account management, the default behavior of the function keys are to only
operate if a user is logged in, and the user have the required rights. This
authentication check can be configured to be bypassed per function key by
changing the ReqAuthority from ON to OFF. To be able to change this, the user
changing it have to have the Security advanced right.
MenuShortcut values are product dependent and created dynamically depending on the
product main menu.

Technical manual
5.5 Operation principle
5.5.1 Local HMI AMU0600442 v15
Figure 10: Local human-machine interface

The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements
• Keypad
• Display (LCD)
• LED indicators
• Communication port for PCM600
The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.

Technical manual
5.5.1.1 Keypad AMU0600428 v19
The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different views or
menus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications, provide help
and switch between local and remote control mode.
The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either as menu
shortcut or control buttons.

Technical manual
24
1
23
2
18
3
19
4
6 20
21
7 22
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Figure 11: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-buttons and
RJ-45 communication port
1...5 Function button

6 Close
7 Open
8 Escape
9 Left
10 Down
11 Up
12 Right
13 Key
14 Enter
15 Remote/Local
16 Uplink LED
17 Not in use
18 Multipage
19 Menu
20 Clear
21 Help

Technical manual
22 Communication port
23 Programmable indication LEDs
24 IED status LEDs
5.5.1.2 Display GUID-55739D4F-1DA5-4112-B5C7-217AAF360EA5 v13
The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome liquid crystal display (LCD) with a resolution of 320
x 240 pixels. The character size can vary. The amount of characters and rows fitting the view
depends on the character size and the view that is shown.
The display view is divided into four basic areas.
Figure 12: Display layout
1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)

Technical manual
• The path shows the current location in the menu structure. If the path is too long to be
shown, it is truncated from the beginning, and the truncation is indicated with three dots.
• The content area shows the menu content.
• The status area shows the current IED time, the user that is currently logged in and the
object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with PCM600.
• If text, pictures or other items do not fit in the display, a vertical scroll bar appears on the
right. The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if it does not fit in the
display horizontally. Truncation is indicated with three dots.
Figure 13: Truncated path

The number after : (colon sign) at the end of the function instance, for example, 1 in SMAI1:1,
indicates the number of that function instance.
The function key button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the function
buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a feedback signal for
the function button control action. The LED is connected to the required signal with PCM600.

Technical manual
GUID-C98D972D-D1D8-4734-B419-161DBC0DC97B V1 EN-US
Figure 14: Function button panel

The indication LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the indication LEDs. Three
indication LED pages are available.
GUID-5157100F-E8C0-4FAB-B979-FD4A971475E3 V1 EN-US
Figure 15: Indication LED panel

The function button and indication LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each panel is
shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button. Pressing the ESC
button clears the panel from the display. Both panels have a dynamic width that depends on
the label string length.
5.5.1.3 LEDs AMU0600427 v15
The LHMI includes three status LEDs above the display: Ready, Start and Trip.
There are 15 programmable indication LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can indicate
three states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The texts related to each three-color LED
are divided into three panels.
There are 3 separate panels of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in one LED
group can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be indicated since there are
three LED groups. The LEDs are lit according to priority, with red being the highest and green

Technical manual
the lowest priority. For example, if on one panel there is an indication that requires the green
LED to be lit, and on another panel there is an indication that requires the red LED to be lit, the
red LED takes priority and is lit. The LEDs can be configured with PCM600 and the operation
mode can be selected with the LHMI or PCM600.
Information panels for the indication LEDs are shown by pressing the Multipage button.
Pressing that button cycles through the three pages. A lit or un-acknowledged LED is indicated
with a highlight. Such lines can be selected by using the Up/Down arrow buttons. Pressing the
Enter key shows details about the selected LED. Pressing the ESC button exits from
information pop-ups as well as from the LED panel as such.
The Multipage button has a LED. This LED is lit whenever any LED on any panel is lit. If there are
un-acknowledged indication LEDs, then the Multipage LED blinks. To acknowledge LEDs, press
the Clear button to enter the Reset menu (refer to description of this menu for details).
There are two additional LEDs which are next to the control buttons and . These
LEDs can indicate the status of two arbitrary binary signals by configuring the
OPENCLOSE_LED function block. For instance, OPENCLOSE_LED can be connected to a circuit
breaker to indicate the breaker open/close status on the LEDs.
Figure 16: OPENCLOSE_LED connected to SXCBR
5.5.2 LED configuration alternatives
5.5.2.1 Functionality GUID-1A03E0EF-C10F-4797-9D9F-5CCA86CA29EB v5
The function blocks LEDGEN and GRP1_LEDx, GRP2_LEDx and GRP3_LEDx (x=1-15) controls and
supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of
the function blocks are configured with PCM600. The input signal for each LED is selected
individually using SMT or ACT. Each LED is controlled by the GRPn_LEDx (n=1-3) function block
that controls the color and the operating mode.
Each indication LED on local HMI can be set individually to operate in 6 different sequences;
two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence types are intended to
be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or restarting mode, with reset
functionality. The other two are intended to be used as signalling system in collecting mode
with acknowledgment functionality.
5.5.2.2 Status LEDs GUID-4822DF9C-E343-442B-B3F1-3FA8CD8DF234 v4
There are three status LEDs above the LCD in front of the IED: green, yellow and red.

Technical manual
The green LED has a fixed function that presents the healthy status of the IED. The yellow and
red LEDs are user configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate that a disturbance report
is triggered (steady) or that the IED is in test mode (flashing). The red LED can be used to
indicate a trip command.
Here is a typical configuration of the status LEDs:
• Green LED: unlit > no power; blinking > startup or abnormal situation (IED is not in
service); steady > IED is in service
• Yellow LED: unlit > no attention required; blinking > IED is in Testmode (IED is not in
normal service); steady > at least one of the signals configured to turn the yellow LED on
has been active
• Red LED: unlit > no attention required; blinking > user performs a common write from
PCM600; steady > at least one of the signals configured to turn the red LED on has been
active
The yellow and red status LEDs are configured in the disturbance recorder function, DRPRDRE,
by connecting a start or trip signal from the actual function to a BxRBDR binary input function
block using the PCM600, and configuring the setting to Off, Start or Trip for that particular
signal.
5.5.2.3 Indication LEDs
Operating modes GUID-B67F1ED3-900B-4D34-8EEB-A3005999CE50 v4
Collecting mode
• LEDs that are used in the collecting mode of operation are accumulated continuously until
the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable when the LEDs are used as a
simplified alarm system. When all three inputs (red, yellow and green) are connected to
different sources of events for the same function block, collecting mode shows the
highest priority LED color that was activated since the latest acknowledgment was made.
If a number of different indications were made since the latest acknowledgment, it is not
possible to get a clear view of what triggered the latest event without looking at the
sequence of events list. A condition for getting the sequence of events is that the signals
have been engineered in the disturbance recorder.
Re-starting mode
• In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs and
activates only those which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined for re-
starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a
restart at a new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the
reset of the activated input signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed. In
sequence 6, the restarting or reset mode means that upon occurrence of any new event,
all previous indications will be reset. This facilitates that only the LED indications related
to the latest event is shown.
Acknowledgment/reset GUID-E6727E8F-C28B-4295-AE21-BC5643363805 v3
• From local HMI

• The active LED indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual
acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a common signal
for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is positive edge triggered,
not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset is performed via the button and
menus on the LHMI.

Technical manual
• From function input

• The active LED indications can also be acknowledged/reset via an input, CLRLEDS, to
the function block LHMICTRL. This input can for example be configured to a binary
input operated from an external push button or a function button. The function is
positive edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the button is
continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects indications active at
the moment when the button is first pressed.
• Automatic reset
• The automatic reset can only be performed for LED indications defined for re-
starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When the
automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting indications will be
indicated with a steady light.
Operating sequence GUID-DFCA880B-308C-4334-94DF-97C7765E8C13 v5

The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type, the LED follows the input
signal completely. For the Latched type, each LED latches to the corresponding input signal
until it is reset.
The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED separately.
The following 6 sequences are available:
• Sequence 1: Follow-S
• Sequence 2: Follow-F
• Sequence 3: LatchedAck-F-S
• Sequence 4: LatchedAck-S-F
• Sequence 5: LatchedColl-S
• Sequence 6: LatchedReset-S
For sequence 1 and 2, which are of the Follow type, the acknowledgment (Ack ) /reset function
is not applicable because the indication shown by the LED follows its input signal. Sequence 3
and 4, which are of the Latched type with acknowledgement, are only working in collecting
(Coll) mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and collecting mode while
Sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and re-starting (Reset) mode. The letters S
and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady and F = Flash.
At the activation of the input signal to any LED, the indication on the corresponding LED
obtains a color that corresponds to the activated input, and operates according to the
selected sequence diagrams shown below.
In the sequence diagrams the different statuses of the LEDs are shown using the following
symbols:
= No indication = Steady light = Flash
G= Green Y= Yellow R= Red

IEC09000311.vsd
Figure 17: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams
Sequence 1 (Follow-S) SEMOD56072-39 v4

This sequence follows the corresponding input signals all the time with a steady light. It does
not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its
operation.

Technical manual
Activating
signal
LED
IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
Figure 18: Operating Sequence 1 (Follow-S)

GUID-107FE952-3B4C-4C01-831A-3147E652327C v4
If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to the same LED, the priority color
it shows is in accordance with the color described above. An example of the operation when
two colors are activated in parallel to the same LED is shown in figure19.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
LED G G R G
Figure 19: Operating sequence 1, two colors
Sequence 2 (Follow-F) SEMOD56072-47 v2

This sequence is the same as Sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead of
showing steady light.
Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S SEMOD56072-50 v2

This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is independent
of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the indication starts
flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal is not present any
more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a steady light.
Activating
signal
LED
Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
Figure 20: Operating Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S

GUID-CC607709-5344-4C88-AA97-6395FD335E55 v5
The sequence described below is valid only if the same function block is used
for all three colour LEDs.
When an acknowledgment is performed, all indications that appear before the indication with
higher priority has been reset, will be acknowledged, independent of if the low priority
indication appeared before or after acknowledgment. In figure 21 it is shown the sequence

Technical manual
when a signal of lower priority becomes activated after acknowledgment has been performed
on a higher priority signal. The low priority signal will be shown as acknowledged when the
high priority signal resets.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
R R G
LED
Acknow
Figure 21: Operating Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S), 2 colors involved

GUID-A652A49D-F016-472D-8D38-6D3E75DAB1DB v3
If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained. Acknowledgment of
indications with higher priority will acknowledge also low priority indications, which are not
visible according to figure 22.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED
LED G Y R R Y
Acknow.
Figure 22: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 1

GUID-071B9EB5-A1D2-49C5-9458-4D21B7E068BE v3
If an indication with higher priority appears after acknowledgment of a lower priority
indication the high priority indication will be shown as not acknowledged according to figure
23.

Technical manual
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED
LED G G R R Y
Acknow.
Figure 23: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 2
Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F) SEMOD56072-64 v1

This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light have
been alternated.
Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S SEMOD56072-67 v4

This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of the
input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to sequence 3 and 4
is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the reset that is, immediately
after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active
signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.
Activating
signal
LED
Reset
Figure 24: Operating Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S

GUID-4D52D221-F54F-4966-95B1-6ED6C536CEC9 v3
That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with lower
priority still is active at the time of reset, the LED will change color according to figure25.

Technical manual
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
R G
LED
Reset
Figure 25: Operating sequence 5, two colors
Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S SEMOD56072-75 v4

In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs set to
Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S. Also in this case indications that are still activated will not be
affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the positive edge of that the manual reset
has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. LEDs set for
sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences.
Timing diagram for sequence 6 SEMOD56072-86 v4

Figure 26 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
Figure 26: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same

disturbance
Figure 27 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.

Technical manual
Disturbance Disturbance
tRestart tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
Figure 27: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

Figure 28 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has
reset but before tRestart has elapsed.
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
Figure 28: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same

disturbance but with reset of activating signal between
Figure 29 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

Technical manual
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
Figure 29: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset
5.5.3 Function keys
5.5.3.1 Functionality GUID-BED38E9A-C90D-4B7F-AA20-42821C4F6A1C v3
Local Human-Machine-Interface (LHMI) has five function buttons, directly to the left of the
LCD, that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons. Each button has an
indication LED that can be configured in the application configuration.
When used as a menu shortcut, a function button provides a fast way to navigate between
default nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can control a binary signal.
5.5.3.2 Operation principle GUID-977C3829-B19B-457E-8A4D-45317226EF22 v3
Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled from the LHMI
function keys. By pressing a function button on the LHMI, the output status of the actual
function block will change. These binary outputs can in turn be used to control other function
blocks, for example, switch control blocks, binary I/O outputs etc.
FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function block also has a number of settings and parameters that
control the behavior of the function block. These settings and parameters are normally set
using the PST.
Operating sequence GUID-84CA7C61-4F83-4F86-A07F-BF9EC4E309BF v5

The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or PULSED.
Setting OFF
This mode always sets the outputs to a low value (0).

Technical manual
Input value
Output value
Figure 30: Sequence diagram for setting OFF

Setting TOGGLE
In this mode the output toggles each time the function key has been pressed for more than
500ms. Note that the input attribute is reset each time the function block executes. The
function block execution is marked with a dotted line below.
Input value
500ms 500ms 500ms
Output value
Figure 31: Sequence diagram for setting TOGGLE

Setting PULSED
In this mode the output sets high (1) when the function key has been pressed for more than
500ms and remains high according to set pulse time. After this time the output will go back to
0. The input attribute is reset when the function block detects it being high and there is no
output pulse.
Note that the third positive edge on the input attribute does not cause a pulse, since the edge
was applied during pulse output. A new pulse can only begin when the output is zero; else the
trigger edge is lost.
Input value
500ms 500ms 500ms 500ms
pulse time pulse time pulse time

Output value
Figure 32: Sequence diagram for setting PULSED
Input function GUID-8EA4AE21-7A74-403A-84AE-D5CEF9292A63 v2

All function keys work the same way: When the LHMI is configured so that a certain function
button is of type CONTROL, then the corresponding input on this function block becomes
active, and will light the yellow function button LED when high. This functionality is active even
if the function block operation setting is set to off. It has been implemented this way for

Technical manual
safety reasons; the idea is that the function key LEDs should always reflect the actual status of
any primary equipment monitored by these LEDs.
5.5.3.3 Enabling and Disabling Authority on Function keys GUID-27413370-00F4-477D-886F-30359C788B55 v1
When users are configured through local or central account management, the default behavior
of the function keys are to only operate if a user is logged in, and the user have the required
rights. This authentication check can be configured to be bypassed per function key by
changing the ReqAuthority from ON to OFF. To be able to change this, the user changing it
have to have the Security advanced right.
Authority can be disabled using parameter Authority. Each function key has the parameter
Authority, which can be enabled or disabled using LHMI or PCM 600. User must have Security
Advanced rights to configure the Authority parameter of the function key.
The possible values for the Authority parameter are as below:
• Enabled: Requires authentication

• Disabled: No user authentication
If there is no User Account Management or Central Account Management

configured in the IED then this parameter has no effect and the function key
can be operated without any authentication.

Technical manual
Current protection
Section 6 Current protection

6.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC IP14506-1 v6
M14880-1 v5

Instantaneous phase overcurrent PHPIOC 50
protection
3I>>
SYMBOL-Z V1 EN-US
6.1.2 Functionality M12910-3 v14
6.1.3 Function block M12602-3 v6
PHPIOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRL1
ENMULT TRL2
TRL3
Figure 33: PHPIOC function block
6.1.4 Signals IP11433-1 v2
Table 31: PHPIOC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Three phase current
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable current start value multiplier
Table 32: PHPIOC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal from any phase
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1

Technical manual
Current protection
6.1.5 Settings IP11434-1 v2
Table 33: PHPIOC Group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode 2 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Select operation mode 2-out of 3 / 1-
1 out of 3 out of 3
IP>> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate phase current level in % of
IBase
Table 34: PHPIOC Group settings (advanced)

IP>>Min 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum used operate phase current
level in % of IBase, if IP>> is less than
IP>>Min then IP>> is set to IP>>Min
IP>>Max 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum used operate phase current
level in % of IBase, if IP>> is greater
than IP>>Max then IP>> is set to
IP>>Max
StValMult 0.5 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for operate current level
Table 35: PHPIOC Non group settings (basic)

GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
6.1.6 Monitored data

Table 36: PHPIOC Monitored data

IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
6.1.7 Operation principle M12913-3 v8
The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT)
block. The RMS value of each phase current is derived from the fundamental frequency
components, as well as sampled values of each phase current. These phase current values are
fed to the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output function PHPIOC. In a
comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the function
(IP>>).
If a phase current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this
phase is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRLn (n=1,2,3) for
this phase and the TRIP signal that is common for all three phases.

Technical manual
Current protection
There is an operation mode (OpMode) setting: 1 out of 3 or 2 out of 3. If the parameter is set to
1 out of 3, any phase trip signal will be activated. If the parameter is set to 2 out of 3, at least
two phase signals must be activated for trip.
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current (StValMult)
via a binary input (ENMULT). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed,
for example, due to transformer inrush currents.
The operation current value IP>>, is limited to be between IP>>Max and IP>>Min. The default
values of the limits are the same as the setting limits for IP>>, and the limits can only be used
for reducing the allowed range of IP>>. This feature is used when remote setting of the
operation current value is allowed, making it possible to ensure that the operation value used
is reasonable. If IP>> is set outside IP>>Max and IP>>Min, the closest of the limits to IP>> is
used by the function. If IP>>Max is smaller then IP>>Min, the limits are swapped. The principle
of the limitation is shown in Figure 34.
IP>>Max
MAX hi
u y
IP>>_used
IP>>
MIN lo
IP>>Min
Figure 34: Logic for limitation of used operation current value
PHPIOC can be blocked using the binary input BLOCK.
6.1.8 Technical data IP11435-1 v1
M12336-1 v13
Table 37: PHPIOC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of IBase -

Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Max. = 15 ms
Max. = 40 ms
Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -
6.2 Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps

OC4PTOC SEMOD129998-1 v8

Technical manual
Current protection
M14885-1 v6

Directional phase overcurrent OC4PTOC 51_67
protection, four steps
TOC-REVA V2 EN-US
Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps (OC4PTOC) has an inverse or definite
time delay for each step.
All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available together with an optional user
defined time characteristic.
The directional function needs voltage as it is voltage polarized with memory. The function can
be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.
A second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to block each
step individually.

Technical manual
Current protection
OC4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TR1
BLOCK TR2
BLKTR TR3
BLKST1 TR4
BLKST2 TRL1
BLKST3 TRL2
BLKST4 TRL3
ENMULT1 TR1L1
ENMULT2 TR1L2
ENMULT3 TR1L3
ENMULT4 TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
TR3L1
TR3L2
TR3L3
TR4L1
TR4L2
TR4L3
START
ST1
ST2
ST3
ST4
STL1
STL2
STL3
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
ST3L1
ST3L2
ST3L3
ST4L1
ST4L2
ST4L3
ST2NDHRM
DIRL1
DIRL2
DIRL3
STDI RCND
Figure 35: OC4PTOC function block
6.2.4 Signals
Table 38: OC4PTOC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step1

Technical manual
Current protection

ENMULT1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1
Table 39: OC4PTOC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
ST1L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L1

Technical manual
Current protection

ST2NDHRM BOOLEAN Second harmonic detected
DIRL1 INTEGER Direction for phase1
STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded start and directional information
6.2.5 Settings
Table 40: OC4PTOC Group settings (basic)

On
AngleRCA 40 - 65 Deg 1 55 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
AngleROA 40 - 89 Deg 1 80 Relay operation angle (ROA)
StartPhSel 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1
2 out of 3 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3)
3 out of 3
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. step 1
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I1> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 1000 Operating phase current level for step
1 in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Def time delay or add time delay for
inverse char of step 1
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time
delay for step 1

Technical manual
Current protection

IMin1 1 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in
% of IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse
curves for step 1
I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for
step 1
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
2 in % of IBase
delay for step 2
% of IBase
curves for step 2
step 2
Forward
Reverse

Technical manual
Current protection

ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
3 in % of IBase
delay for step 3
% of IBase
curves for step 3
step 3
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
4 in % of IBase
delay for step 4

Technical manual
Current protection

% of IBase
curves for step 4
step 4
Table 41: OC4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

IMinOpPhSel 1 - 100 %IB 1 7 Minimum current for phase selection
in % of IBase
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 % 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in
% of fundamental curr
I1>Min 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum used operating phase
current level for step 1 in % of IBase, if
I1> is less than I1>Min then I1> is set to
I1>Min
I1>Max 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum used operating phase
I1> is greater than I1>Max then I1> is
set to I1>Max
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 1
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer
programmable curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
HarmBlock1 Off - - Off Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
On restrain
I2> is less than I2>Min then I2> is set
to I2>Min
set to I2>Max
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Technical manual
Current protection

On restrain
to I3>Min
set to I3>Max
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
On restrain
to I4>Min
set to I4>Max
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step
IEC Reset 4
ANSI reset

Technical manual
Current protection

On restrain
Table 42: OC4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

MeasType DFT - - DFT Selection between DFT and RMS
RMS measurement
Value groups

Table 43: OC4PTOC Monitored data

DIRL1 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
2=Reverse
0=No direction
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC is divided into four different
sub-functions. For each step x , where x is step 1, 2, 3 and 4, an operation mode is set by
DirModex: Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse.

Technical manual
Current protection
The protection design can be divided into four parts:
• The direction element

• The harmonic restraint blocking function
• The four step overcurrent function
• The mode selection
If VT inputs are not available or not connected, setting parameter DirModex

shall be left to default value, Non-directional.
4 step overcurrent
Direction dirPh1Flt element faultState
faultState
Element One element for each
dirPh2Flt step
I3P dirPh3Flt START
U3P
TRIP
Harmonic harmRestrBlock
Restraint
Element
enableDir
Mode Selection
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
Figure 36: Functional overview of OC4PTOC

M12883-16 v11
A common setting for all steps, StartPhSel, is used to specify the number of phase currents to
be high to enable operation. These settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3.
Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the function OC4PTOC, it
is possible to select the type of the measurement used for all overcurrent stages. Either
discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS) can be selected.
If the DFT option is selected, only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency component of
each phase current is derived. The influence of the DC current component and higher harmonic
current components are almost completely suppressed. If the RMS option is selected, then the
true RMS value is used. The true RMS value includes the contribution from the current DC
component as well as from the higher current harmonic in addition to the fundamental
frequency component.
In a comparator, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the
function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>) for each phase current. If a phase current is larger than the set
operation current, outputs START, STx, STL1, STL2 and STL3 are activated without delay.
Output signals STL1, STL2 and STL3 are common for all steps. This means that the lowest set
step will initiate the activation. The START signal is common for all three phases and all steps.
It shall be noted that the selection of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the
operation of directional part of OC4PTOC.

Technical manual
Current protection
Service values for individually measured phase currents are available on the local HMI for
OC4PTOC function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in service operational
checking of the function.
A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in relation to
the fundamental current is used.
The function can be directional.The direction of a fault is given as the current angle in relation
to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the directional function are
dependent on the fault type. The selection of the measured value (DFT or RMS) does not
influence the operation of the directional part of OC4PTOC. To enable directional
measurement at close-in faults, causing a low measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a
combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage (15%). The following
combinations are used.
Phase-phase short circuit:
U refL1L 2 = U L1 - U L 2 I dirL1L 2 = I L1 - I L 2
EQUATION1449 V1 EN-US (Equation 1)
U refL 2 L 3 = U L 2 - U L 3 I dirL 2 L 3 = I L 2 - I L 3
U refL 3 L1 = U L 3 - U L1 I dirL 3 L1 = I L 3 - I L1
Phase-earth short circuit:
U refL1 = U L1 I dirL1 = I L1
U refL 2 = U L 2 I dirL 2 = I L 2
U refL 3 = U L 3 I dirL 3 = I L 3
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds 5% of the
set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can be used for all unsymmetrical faults
including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same positive
sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored.
After 100 ms, the following occurs:
• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (7% of the set
terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals in.

Technical manual
Current protection
• If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.

• If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in the
reverse direction remains in operation.
• If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets until the
positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function and an
angle window ROADir.
Reverse
Uref
RCA
ROA
ROA Forward
Idir
en05000745.vsd
Figure 37: Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection

The default value of AngleRCA is –55°. The parameter AngleROA gives the angular distance
from AngleRCA to define the directional borders.
A minimum current for the directional phase start current signal can be set. IMinOpPhSel is the
start level for the directional evaluation of IL1, IL2 and IL3. The directional signals release the
overcurrent measurement in the respective phases if their current amplitudes are higher than
the start level (IMinOpPhSel) and the direction of the current is according to the set direction
of the step.
If no blocking signals are active, the start signal will start the timer of the steps. The time
characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or an inverse time delay
characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time delay characteristics is available. It is
also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic.
The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in section "Inverse
characteristics".

Technical manual
Current protection
Characteristx=DefTime
|IOP| AND
tx TRx
a OR
a>b
Ix> b
AND
STx
txmin
BLKSTx AND
BLOCK
Inverse
Characteristx=Inverse
DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse
AND
REVERSE_Int
IEC12000008.vsd
IEC12000008.vsd
Figure 38: Simplified logic diagram for OC4PTOC
I3P
DFWDLx
U3P DFWDLxx
DREVLx
Directional
Element
AngleRCA DREVLxx FORWARD_int
Directional
AngleROA Release REVERSE_int
Block
STLx
Greater
IMinOpPhSel Comparator
x‐ means three phases 1,2 and 3
xx – means phase to phase 12,23,31
Figure 39: OC4 directional release block diagram

Different types of reset time can be selected as described in section "Inverse characteristics".
There is a possibility to activate a preset change (IxMult x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the set operation

current via a binary input ENMULTx (enable multiplier). In some applications the operation
value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switching state.

Technical manual
Current protection
The operation current value Ix>, is limited to be between Ix>Max and Ix>Min. The default values
of the limits are the same as the setting limits for Ix>, and the limits can only be used for
reducing the allowed range of Ix>. This feature is used when remote setting of the operation
current value is allowed, making it possible to ensure that the operation value used is
reasonable. If Ix> is set outside Ix>Max and Ix>Min, the closest of the limits to Ix> is used by
the function. If Ix>Max is smaller then Ix>Min, the limits are swapped. The principle of the
limitation is shown in Figure 40.
Ix>Max
MAX hi
u y
Ix>_used
Ix>
MIN lo
Ix>Min
The STDIRCND output provides an integer signal that depends on the start and directional
evaluation and is derived from a binary coded signal as described in Table 44.
Table 44: Code description for STDIRCND output signal

STDIRCND Description
bit 0 (1) General start
bit 1 (2) Direction detected in forward
bit 2 (4) Direction detected in reverse
bit 3 (8) Start in phase L1
bit 4 (16) Forward direction detected in phase L1
bit 5 (32) Reverse direction detected in phase L1
All four steps in OC4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The binary input
BLKSTx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of the respective step.
The start signals from the function can be blocked by the binary input BLKST.The trip signals
from the function can be blocked by the binary input BLKTR.
GUID-E3980B2D-EEDA-4BF1-A07D-E7B721130554 v6
A harmonic restrain of the directional phase overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC can be
chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency
component in a phase current exceeds the preset level defined by the parameter 2ndHarmStab
setting, any of the four overcurrent stages can be selectively blocked by the parameter
HarmBlockx setting. When the 2nd harmonic restraint feature is active, the OC4PTOC function
output signal ST2NDHRM will be set to the logical value one.

Technical manual
Current protection
BLOCK
a
a>b
0.07*IBase b
a
a>b
b
Extract second AND
IOP
harmonic current a
a>b
component b
2ndH_BLOCK_Int
Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab
Figure 41: Second harmonic blocking
When DirModex is set to Forward/Reverse and Ix> is set at its minimum value,
that is, 5.0% of IBase, the operation from the respective overcurrent step takes
place at 20.0% of IBase. This is done to avoid unintentional maloperations
during unbalanced loading conditions that might appear in power systems and
the unbalanced loading condition might lead to a neutral current in the range
of 10.0% to 15.0% of IBase.
6.2.8 Technical data

M12342-1 v21
Table 45: OC4PTOC technical data

Operate current, step 1-4 (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of -

lBase
Minimum operate current, step 1-4 (1-10000)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (40.0–65.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Relay operating angle (ROA) (40.0–89.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, step (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

1-4 greater
Minimum operate time for inverse curves , (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
step 1-4 greater
Inverse time characteristics, see table 580, 16 curve types See table 580, table 581 and
table 581 and table 582 table 582
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to Min. = 15 ms -
2 x Iset
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
to 0
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to Min. = 5 ms -
10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Technical manual
Current protection

Reset time, start non-directional at 10 x Iset Min. = 20 ms -
to 0 Max. = 35 ms
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Operate frequency, directional overcurrent 38-83 Hz -
Operate frequency, non-directional 10-90 Hz -
overcurrent
6.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC IP14508-1 v3
M14887-1 v4

Instantaneous residual overcurrent EFPIOC 50N
protection
IN>>
IEF V1 EN-US
The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC) has a low transient overreach and
short tripping times to allow the use for instantaneous earth-fault protection, with the reach
limited to less than the typical eighty percent of the line at minimum source impedance.
EFPIOC is configured to measure the residual current from the three-phase current inputs and
can be configured to measure the current from a separate current input.
EFPIOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK
BLKAR
ENMULT
Figure 42: EFPIOC function block
6.3.4 Signals IP11448-1 v2

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 46: EFPIOC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLKAR BOOLEAN 0 Block input for auto reclose
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable current multiplier
Table 47: EFPIOC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
Table 48: EFPIOC Group settings (basic)

On
IN>> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate residual current level in % of
IBase
Table 49: EFPIOC Group settings (advanced)

IN>>Min 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum used operate residual
current level in % of IBase, if IN>> is
less than IN>>Min then IN>> is set to
IN>>Min
IN>>Max 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum used operate residual
current level in % of IBase, if IN>> is
greater than IN>>Max then IN>> is set
to IN>>Max
StValMult 0.5 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for operate current level
Table 50: EFPIOC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Table 51: EFPIOC Monitored data

IN REAL - A Residual current

Technical manual
Current protection
The sampled analog residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block.
From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current, as well as from the
sample values the equivalent RMS value is derived. This current value is fed to the
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC). In a comparator the RMS value is
compared to the set operation current value of the function (IN>>).
If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator is
set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRIP.
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current via a binary
input (enable multiplier ENMULT). In some applications the operation value needs to be
changed, for example, due to transformer inrush currents.
The operation current value IN>>, is limited to be between IN>>Max and IN>>Min. The default
values of the limits are the same as the setting limits for IN>>, and the limits can only be used
for reducing the allowed range of IN>>. This feature is used when remote setting of the
operation current value is allowed, making it possible to ensure that the operation value used
is reasonable. If IN>> is set outside IN>>Max and IN>>Min, the closest of the limits to IN>> is
used by the function. If IN>>Max is smaller then IN>>Min, the limits are swapped. The principle
of the limitation is shown in Figure 43.
IN>>Max
MAX hi
u y
IN>>_used
IN>>
MIN lo
IN>>Min
EFPIOC function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals from the
function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be activated during single pole
trip and autoreclosing sequences.
M12340-2 v9
Table 52: EFPIOC technical data

Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of lBase -

Max. = 25 ms
Max. = 25 ms
Operate time at 0 to 10 x Min. = 5 ms -

Iset Max. = 15 ms

Technical manual
Current protection

Max. = 35 ms
Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -
6.4 Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps

EF4PTOC IP14509-1 v8
M14881-1 v6

Directional residual overcurrent EF4PTOC 51N_67N
4(IN>)
protection, four steps
4
alt
4
TEF-REVA V2 EN-US
EF4PTOC has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step.
All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user-
defined characteristic.
EF4PTOC can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each step.
IDir, UPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either zero sequence or negative
sequence.
A second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step.
The residual current can be calculated by summing the three-phase currents or taking the
input from the neutral CT.

Technical manual
Current protection
EF4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIN1
I3PPOL* TRIN2
I3PDIR* TRIN3
BLOCK TRIN4
BLKTR TRSOTF
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 STIN1
BLKST3 STIN2
BLKST4 STIN3
ENMULT1 STIN4
ENMULT2 STSOTF
ENMULT3 STFW
ENMULT4 STRV
CBPOS 2NDHARMD
CLOSECB
OPENCB
Figure 44: EF4PTOC function block
6.4.4 Signals IP11453-1 v2
Table 53: EF4PTOC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Group connection for operate current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
I3PPOL GROUP - Group connection for polarizing current
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Group connection for directional current
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (Start and trip)
CBPOS BOOLEAN 0 Breaker position
CLOSECB BOOLEAN 0 Breaker close command
OPENCB BOOLEAN 0 Breaker open command

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 54: EF4PTOC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TRIN1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TRSOTF BOOLEAN Trip signal from earth fault switch onto fault function
STIN1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1
STSOTF BOOLEAN Start signal from earth fault switch onto fault function
STFW BOOLEAN Start signal forward direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start signal reverse direction
2NDHARMD BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic block signal
Table 55: EF4PTOC Group settings (basic)

On
EnDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA)
polMethod Voltage - - Voltage Type of polarization
Current
Dual
UPolMin 1 - 100 %UB 1 1 Minimum voltage level for polarization
in % of UBase
IPolMin 2 - 100 %IB 1 5 Minimum current level for polarization
in % of IBase
RNPol 0.50 - 1000.00 Ohm 0.01 5.00 Real part of source impedance used
for current polarisation
XNPol 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm 0.01 40.00 Imaginary part of source imp. used for
current polarisation
IN>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level in % of IBase for
Direction release
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 % 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in
% of fundamental curr
BlkParTransf Off - - Off Enable blocking at energizing of
On parallel transformers

Technical manual
Current protection

UseStartValue IN1> - - IN4> Current level blk at parallel transf
IN2> (step1, 2, 3 or 4)
IN3>
IN4>
SOTF Off - - Off SOTF operation mode (Off/SOTF/
SOTF Undertime/SOTF&Undertime)
UnderTime
SOTF&UnderTime
ActivationSOTF Open - - Open Select signal to activate SOTF: CB-
Closed Open/ -Closed/ -Close cmd
CloseCommand
StepForSOTF Step 2 - - Step 2 Select start from step 2 or 3 to start
Step 3 SOTF
HarmBlkSOTF Off - - Off Enable harmonic restrain function in
On SOTF
tSOTF 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay for SOTF
t4U 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Switch-onto-fault active time
ActUnderTime CB position - - CB position Select signal to activate under time
CB command (CB Pos / CB Command)
tUnderTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay for under time
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (Off, Non-
Non-directional dir, Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN1> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Residual current operate level for step
1 in % of IBase
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 1 selected
time characteristic
IMin1 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum operate residual current for
step 1 in % of IBase
time characteristic step 1
IN1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current
setting value for step 1
HarmBlock1 Off - - On Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
On restrain

Technical manual
Current protection

Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
2 in % of IBase
time characteristic
IMin2 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum operate residual current for
On restrain
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
3 in % of IBase

Technical manual
Current protection

time characteristic
On restrain
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
4 in % of IBase
time characteristic
On restrain

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 56: EF4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

IN1>Min 1 - 2500 %IB 1 1 Minimum used operate residual
IN1> is less than IN1>Min then IN1> is
set to IN1>Min
IN1>Max 1 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum used operate residual
IN1> is greater than IN1>Max then IN1>
is set to IN1>Max
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step1
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse
reset time curve for step 1
set to IN2>Min
IN2> is greater than IN2>Max then
IN2> is set to IN2>Max
ANSI reset

Technical manual
Current protection

set to IN3>Min
ANSI reset
set to IN4>Min
ANSI reset

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 57: EF4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
SeqTypeIDir Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for directional
Neg seq current
SeqTypeIPol Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing
Neg seq current
SeqTypeUPol Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing
Neg seq voltage

Table 58: EF4PTOC Monitored data

IOp REAL - A Operating current level
UPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
IPol REAL - A Polarizing current level
UPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing angle between voltage and
current
IPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing current angle
6.4.7 Operation principle IP12992-1 v2
M13941-51 v7
This function has the following four analog inputs on its function block in the configuration
tool:
1. I3P, input used for the operating quantity. Supplies the zero-sequence magnitude
measuring functionality.
2. U3P, input used for the voltage polarizing quantity. Supplies either the zero or the
negative sequence voltage to the directional functionality
3. I3PPOL, input used for the current polarizing quantity. Provides polarizing current to the
directional functionality. This current is normally taken from the grounding of a power
transformer.
4. I3PDIR, input used for directional detection. Supplies either the zero or the negative
sequence current to the directional functionality.
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the
configuration tool in PCM600.
6.4.7.1 Operating quantity within the function M13941-58 v9
The function always uses residual current (3I0) for its operating quantity. The residual current
can be:
1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the
fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function input
I3P). This dedicated IED CT input can be, for example, connected to:

Technical manual
Current protection
• parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases (Holm-

Green connection).
• one single core balance current instrument transformer (cable CT).
• one single current instrument transformer located between power system star point
and earth (current transformer located in the star point of a star connected
transformer winding).
• one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a protected
object (current transformer located between two star points of double star shunt
capacitor bank).
2. calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog input of
the pre-processing block, connected to EF4PTOC function Analog Input I3P, is not
connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600). In such a case, the pre-
processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block
by using the following formula (will take 3I0 from SMAI AI3P and will be connected to
I3PDIR and I3P inputs.
If the zero sequence current is selected,
Iop = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor magnitude is
used within the EF4PTOC protection to compare it with the set operation current value of the
four steps (IN1>, IN2>, IN3> or IN4>).
If the residual current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-
directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal will,
without delay, activate the output signal STINx (x=step 1-4) for this step and a common START
signal.
6.4.7.2 Internal polarizing M13941-82 v11
A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the direction to the
earth fault (forward/reverse).
The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.
Voltage polarizing
When voltage polarizing is selected, the protection will use the residual voltage -3U0 as the
polarizing quantity U3P.
This voltage can be:
1. directly measured (when a dedicated VT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the
fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function input
U3P). This dedicated IED VT input shall be then connected to the open delta winding of a
three-phase main VT.
2. calculated from three-phase voltage input within the IED (when the fourth analog input of
the pre-processing block, connected to EF4PTOC analog function input U3P, is NOT
connected to a dedicated VT input of the IED in PCM600). In such a case, the pre-

Technical manual
Current protection
processing block will calculate -3U0 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing
block by using the following formula:
UPol = -3U 0 = -(UL1 + UL2 + UL3)

where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.
In order to use this, all three phase-to-earth voltages must be connected to three
IED VT inputs.
The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus, the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived.
This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating directional current, in order to
determine the direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse). In order to enable voltage
polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger than a minimum level defined by
setting parameter UPolMin.
It shall be noted that residual voltage (-3U0) or negative sequence voltage (-3U2) is used to
determine the location of the earth fault. This ensures the required inversion of the polarizing
voltage within the earth-fault function.
Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected, the function will use an external residual current (3I0) as
the polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be:
1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the
fourth analog input of the pre-processing block, connected to EF4PTOC function input
I3PPOL). This dedicated IED CT input is then typically connected to one single current
transformer located between power system star point and earth (current transformer
located in the star point of a star connected transformer winding).
• For some special line protection applications, this dedicated IED CT input can be
connected to a parallel connection of current transformers in all three phases (Holm-
Green connection).
2. calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog input
into the pre-processing block, connected to EF4PTOC function analog input I3PPOL, is
NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600). In such case, the pre-
processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block
by using the following formula:
IPol = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

where:
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the polarizing current is derived. This phasor is then

Technical manual
Current protection
multiplied with the pre-set equivalent zero-sequence source impedance in order to calculate
the equivalent polarizing voltage UIPol in accordance with the following formula:
UIPol = Z 0s × IPol = (RNPol + j × XNPol) × IPol

which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to
determine the direction to the earth fault (forward/reverse).
In order to enable current polarizing, the magnitude of the polarizing current shall be bigger
than a minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.
Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected, the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage based
and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
UTotPol=UPol  UIPol=UPol  Z 0s  IPol  UPol   RNPol  jXNPol   Ipol

IECEQUATION2408 V2 EN-US (Equation 13)
UPol and IPol can be either zero sequence component or negative sequence component
depending upon the user selection.
Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol will be used, together with the phasor
of the operating current, to determine the direction of the earth fault (forward/reverse).
6.4.7.3 External polarizing for earth-fault function M13941-144 v6
The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this setting is
selected, it is possible via the function binary input BLKSTx to provide external directional
control (that is, torque control) by, for example, using one of the following functions if
available in the IED:
1. Distance protection directional function.

2. Negative sequence polarized general current and voltage multi purpose protection
function.
6.4.7.4 Directional detection for earth fault function GUID-FC382DD3-E2C8-455E-8CD5-1DE1793DD178 v6
Zero sequence components will be used for detecting directionality for the earth fault
function. In some cases, zero sequence quantities might detect directionality incorrectly. In
such a scenario, negative sequence quantities will be used. The user can select either zero
sequence components or negative sequence components for detecting directionality with the
parameter SeqTypeIPol. I3PDIR input is always connected to the same source as I3P input.
6.4.7.5 Base quantities within the protection M13941-152 v6
The base quantities are entered as global settings for all functions in the IED. Base current
(IBase) shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes.
Base voltage (UBase) shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object
in primary kV.
6.4.7.6 Internal earth-fault protection structure M13941-157 v5
The protection is internally divided into the following parts:

Technical manual
Current protection
1. Four residual overcurrent steps.

2. Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent steps with integrated directional
comparison step for communication based earth-fault protection schemes (permissive or
blocking).
3. Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in blocking during
switching of parallel transformers.
4. Switch on to fault feature with integrated Under-Time logic for detection of breaker
problems during breaker opening or closing sequence.
6.4.7.7 Four residual overcurrent steps M13941-166 v8
Each overcurrent step uses operating quantity Iop (residual current) as the measuring
quantity. Each of the four residual overcurrent steps has the following built-in facilities:
• Directional mode can be set to Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. By this parameter

setting the directional mode of the step is selected.
• Residual current start value.
• Type of operating characteristic (inverse or definite time). By this parameter setting it is
possible to select inverse or definite time delay for the earth-fault protection. Most of the
standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are available. For the complete list of
available inverse curves, please refer to section "Inverse characteristics".
• Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset / ANSI Reset). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the step. For the complete list of
available reset curves, please refer to section "Inverse characteristics".
• Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite time
delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay and parameters to
define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
• Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (On/Off). By this parameter setting it is
possible to prevent operation of the step if the second harmonic content in the residual
current exceeds the preset level.
• Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external binary signal. By
this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual current pickup value when
function binary input ENMULTx has logical value 1.
• The operation current value INx>, is limited to be between INx>Max and INx>Min. The
default values of the limits are the same as the setting limits for INx>, and the limits can
only be used for reducing the allowed range of INx>. This feature is used when remote
setting of the operation current value is allowed, making it possible to ensure that the
operation value used is reasonable. If INx> is set outside INx>Max and INx>Min, the closest
of the limits to INx> is used by the function. If INx>Max is smaller then INx>Min, the limits
are swapped. The principle of the limitation is shown in Figure 45.
INx>Max
MAX hi
u y
INx>_used
INx>
MIN lo
INx>Min
Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in Figure 46.

Technical manual
Current protection
BLKTR
EMULTX
IMinx Characteristx=DefTime
X T b
a>b
F a
tx TRINx
AND AND
|IOP|
a OR t
a>b
b
STINx
INxMult AND
X T
INx> F
AND Inverse
BLKSTx
AND
BLOCK Characteristx=Inverse
txmin
2ndHarm_BLOCK_Int
OR t
HarmRestrainx=Off
DirModex=Off OR STEPx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse
AND
REVERSE_Int
IEC10000008.vsd
Figure 46: Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent step x, where x = step 1, 2, 3 or 4
The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output signals for
respective step, and STINx and TRINx, can be blocked from the binary input BLKSTx. The trip
signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

function M13941-179 v11
At least one of the four residual overcurrent steps shall be set as directional in
order to enable execution of the directional supervision element and the
integrated directional comparison function.
The protection has an integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current Iop is
always used, the polarizing method is determined by the parameter setting polMethod. The
polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the following three ways:
1. When polMethod = Voltage, UPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

2. When polMethod = Current, IPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
3. When polMethod = Dual, UPol + IPol · ZNPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as shown
in Figure 47, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault.

Technical manual
Current protection
Operating area
STRV
0.6 * IN>DIR
Characteristic for reverse
release of measuring steps
-RCA -85 deg
Characteristic
for STRV 40% of
IN>DIR RCA +85 deg
RCA
65° Upol = -3U 0
-RCA +85 deg
RCA -85 deg

Characteristic for forward
release of measuring steps
IN>DIR
STFW
I op = 3I0
Operating area
Characteristic
for STFW IEC11000243-1-en.ai
Figure 47: Operating characteristic for earth-fault directional element using the zero
sequence components
The relevant setting parameters for the directional supervision element are:
• The directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as Iop is bigger than
40% of IN>Dir and the directional condition is fulfilled in the set direction.
• The relay characteristic angle AngleRCA, which defines the position of forward and reverse
areas in the operating characteristic.
The directional comparison will set the output binary signals:
1. STFW=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos(φ - AngleRCA) is bigger than
setting parameter IN>Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in forward
direction.
2. STRV=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos(φ - AngleRCA) is bigger than 60% of
setting parameter IN>Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in reverse
direction.
These signals shall be used for communication based earth-fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step is shown in Figure 48:

Technical manual
Current protection
| IopDir |
a
a>b STRV
b AND
REVERSE_Int
0.6
X
a
a>b STFW
IN>Dir b AND
FORWARD_Int
X
0.4
FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
polMethod=Voltage
OR
Characteristic
UPolMin
Directional
polMethod=Dual UPol IPolMin
T
I3PDIR
polMethod=Current 0.0 F
OR
UTotPol
IPol AND REVERSE_Int
T RVS
0.0 F
UIPol STAGE1_DIR_Int
RNPol Complex X T STAGE2_DIR_Int
XNPol Number 0.0 F STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND
Figure 48: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step
6.4.7.9 Second harmonic blocking element M13941-200 v8
A harmonic restrain can be chosen for each step by a parameter setting HarmBlockx. If the
ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in
the residual current exceeds the preset level (defined by parameter 2ndHarmStab), output
signal 2NDHARMD is set to logical value one and the harmonic restraining feature to the
function block will be applicable.
Blocking from the 2nd harmonic element activates if all of three criteria are satisfied:
1. The fundamental frequency component of the current > 1% of IBase

2. The second harmonic component > 1% of IBase
3. The ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency
component in the residual current exceeds the preset level defined by the parameter
2ndHarmStab setting
In addition to the basic functionality explained above, the 2nd harmonic blocking can be set in
such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature might be required to
stabilize EF4PTOC during switching of parallel transformers in the station. In case of parallel
transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current. If one of the transformers is in
operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in, the asymmetric inrush current of the
switched-in transformer will cause partial saturation of the transformer already in service. This
is called transferred saturation. The 2nd harmonic of the inrush currents of the two

Technical manual
Current protection
transformers is in phase opposition. The summation of the two currents thus gives a small 2nd
harmonic current. The residual fundamental current is however significant. The inrush current
of the transformer in service before the parallel transformer energizing, is a little delayed
compared to the first transformer. Therefore, we have high 2nd harmonic current component
initially. After a short period this current is however small and the normal 2nd harmonic
blocking resets. If the BlkParTransf function is activated, the 2nd harmonic restrain signal is
latched as long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step
current level by using setting UseStartValue.
This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic seal-in feature
is activated when all of the following three conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:
1. Feature is enabled by entering setting parameter BlkParTransf = On.

2. Basic 2nd harmonic restraint feature has been active for at least 70ms.
3. Residual current magnitude is higher than the set start value for one of the four residual
overcurrent stages. By a parameter setting UseStartValue it is possible to select which
one of the four start values that will be used (IN1> or IN2> or IN3> or IN4>).
Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated, the basic 2nd harmonic blocking signal is
sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined by parameter setting
UseStartValue (see condition 3 above).
Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in Figure 49.

Technical manual
Current protection
BLOCK
a
a>b
0.07*IBase b
a
a>b
b
Extract second AND
IOP
harmonic current a
a>b
component b
Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab
q-1
t=70ms OR
t AND OR 2ndH_BLOCK_Int
BlkParTransf=On
a
a>b
b
UseStartValue
IN1>
IN2>
IN3>
IN4>
q-1 = unit delay

Figure 49: Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel
Transformers feature
6.4.7.10 Switch on to fault feature M13941-211 v5
Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are the switch on to fault logic
(SOTF) and the under-time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate SOTF, the
under-time logic or both. When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk to close it onto a
permanent fault, for example during an autoreclosing sequence. The SOTF logic will enable
fast fault clearance during such situations. The time during which SOTF and under-time logics
will be active after activation is defined by the setting parameter t4U.
The SOTF logic uses the start signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected by setting
parameter StepForSOTF. The setting parameter ActivationSOTF can be set for activation of CB
position open change, CB position closed change or CB close command. In case of a residual
current start from step 2 or 3 (dependent on setting) the function will give a trip after a set
delay tSOTF. This delay is normally set to a short time (default 200 ms).
The under-time logic acts as a circuit breaker pole-discordance protection, but it is only active
immediately after breaker switching. The under-time logic can only be used in solidly or low
impedance grounded systems.
The under-time logic always uses the start signal from the step 4. The under-time logic will
normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF function. The under-time

Technical manual
Current protection
logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint feature. This enables high sensitivity
even if power transformer inrush currents can occur at breaker closing. This logic is typically
used to detect asymmetry of CB poles immediately after switching of the circuit breaker. The
under-time logic is activated either from change in circuit breaker position or from circuit
breaker close and open command pulses. This selection is done by setting parameter
ActUnderTime. In case of a start from step 4 this logic will give a trip after a set delay
tUnderTime. This delay is normally set to a relatively short time (default 300 ms).
SOTF
200 ms
Open
t
t4U
200 ms
Closed
t ActivationSOTF
tSOTF
Close command AND
AND t
STIN2
StepForSOTF
STIN3
SOTF
BLOCK
OFF
SOTF
UNDERTIME TRIP
UnderTime
tUnderTime
SOTF or
2nd Harmonic AND
HarmResSOFT t UnderTime
OR
Open
Close OR
t4U
Close command ActUnderTime

AND
STIN4
Figure 50: Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and under-time features
M13941-3 v6
Simplified logic diagram for the complete EF4PTOC function is shown in Figure 51:

Technical manual
Current protection
signal to communication scheme

Directional Check
Element
4 step over current

INPol Direction
operatingCurrent element
Element
3U0 One element for each
earthFaultDirection step
3I0
angleValid
I3PDIR
DirMode
enableDir
harmRestrBlock
3I0 Harmonic
Restraint 1
Element TRIP

start step 2, 3 and 4
Blocking at parallel
transformers
SwitchOnToFault
TRSOTF
CB
DirMode pos
or cmd
enableDir
Mode
Selection enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
Figure 51: Functional overview of EF4PTOC
M15223-1 v18
Table 59: EF4PTOC technical data

Operate current, step 1-4 (1-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of -

IBase
Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
(RCA)
Operate current for directional release (1–100)% of IBase For RCA ±60 degrees:
±2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

step 1-4 greater
Minimum operate time for inverse curves, (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
step 1-4 greater
Inverse time characteristics, see Table 16 curve types See Table 580, Table 581 and
580, Table 581 and Table 582 Table 582
Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir
Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Real part of source Z used for current (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

polarization

Technical manual
Current protection

Imaginary part of source Z used for (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -
current polarization
*Operate time, start non-directional at 0 Min. = 15 ms -
to 2 x Iset Max. = 30 ms
*Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Min. = 15 ms -

Iset to 0 Max. = 30 ms
*Operate time, start non-directional at 0 Min. = 5 ms -

to 10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms
*Reset time, start non-directional at 10 x Min. = 20 ms -


*Note: Operate time and reset time are only valid if harmonic blocking is turned off for a step.
6.5 Four step directional negative phase sequence

overcurrent protection NS4PTOC GUID-E8CF8AA2-AF54-4FD1-A379-3E55DCA2FA3A v1
GUID-E1720ADA-7F80-4F2C-82A1-EF2C9EF6A4B4 v1

Four step negative sequence NS4PTOC 46I2
overcurrent protection I2
4
alt
4
6.5.2 Functionality GUID-485E9D36-0032-4559-9204-101539A32F47 v6
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection (NS4PTOC) has an
inverse or definite time delay independent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user
defined characteristic.
The directional function is voltage polarized.
NS4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.

Technical manual
Current protection
6.5.3 Function block GUID-8EDB8B12-0D86-4F6B-A1FB-F5D0C72AA545 v2
NS4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
I3PDIR* TR1
U3P* TR2
BLOCK TR3
BLKTR TR4
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 ST1
BLKST3 ST2
BLKST4 ST3
ENMULT1 ST4
ENMULT2 STFW
ENMULT3 STRV
ENMULT4
Figure 52: NS4PTOC function block
6.5.4 Signals
Table 60: NS4PTOC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Group connection for operate current
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Group connection for directional current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
Table 61: NS4PTOC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TR1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1

Technical manual
Current protection

STFW BOOLEAN Forward directional start signal
STRV BOOLEAN Reverse directional start signal
6.5.5 Settings
Table 62: NS4PTOC Group settings (basic)

On
EnDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
UPolMin 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Minimum voltage level for polarization
in % of UBase
I2>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level in % of IBase for
Direction release
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-1> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Negative sequence current op level for
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of step 1 when definite
time char. is selected
time characteristic
IMin1 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum current for step 1
I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current

Technical manual
Current protection

Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
time characteristic
IMin2 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum current for step 2
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

Technical manual
Current protection

time characteristic
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
time characteristic
Table 63: NS4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

ANSI reset

Technical manual
Current protection

time curve for step
ANSI reset
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse reset
ANSI reset
ANSI reset

Technical manual
Current protection

Table 64: NS4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Table 65: NS4PTOC Monitored data

IOp REAL - A Operating current level
UPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
UPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing angle between voltage and
current
6.5.7 Operation principle GUID-8923EC0B-A5BA-431B-9699-EB67E2637560 v3
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function has the following
three “Analog Inputs” on its function block in the configuration tool:
1. I3P, input used for “Operating Quantity”.

2. U3P, input used for “Polarizing Quantity”.
3. I3PDIR, input used for "Directional finding"
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the
Configuration Tool within PCM600.
6.5.7.1 Operating quantity within the function GUID-8F0A5BDE-AC98-4188-9085-42A8DF00C476 v3
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function always uses negative
sequence current (I2) for its operating quantity. The negative sequence current is calculated
from three-phase current input within the IED. The pre-processing block calculates I2 from the
first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
1
I2 =
3
(
× IL1 + a × IL 2 + a × IL 3
2
)

Technical manual
Current protection
where:
a is so called operator which gives a phase shift of 120 deg, that is, a = 1∠120
deg
a2 similarly gives a phase shift of 240 deg, that is, a2 = 1∠240 deg
The phasor magnitude is used within the NS4PTOC protection to compare it with the set
operation current value of the four steps (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If the negative sequence current
is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-directional mode a signal
from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal, without delay, activates the
output signal STx (x=1 - 4) for this step and a common START signal.
6.5.7.2 Internal polarizing facility of the function GUID-B00FE98B-F269-4F1B-AC03-68250798851B v3
A polarizing quantity is used within the protection to determine the direction to the fault
(Forward/Reverse).
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function uses the voltage
polarizing method.
NS4PTOC uses the negative sequence voltage -U2 as polarizing quantity U3P. This voltage is
calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED. The pre-processing block calculates -
U2 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
1
UPol = -U 2 = - × (UL1 + a 2 × UL 2 + a × UL3 )
3
EQUATION2267 V2 EN-US
where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.
To use this all three phase-to-earth voltages must be connected to three IED VT
inputs.
This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine
the direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse).To enable voltage polarizing the magnitude of
polarizing voltage must be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting UpolMin.
Note that –U2 is used to determine the location of the fault. This ensures the required
inversion of the polarizing voltage within the function.
6.5.7.3 External polarizing for negative sequence function GUID-21930E81-1B40-4BA4-B1D8-3B365327AEF6 v1
The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this setting is
selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx (where x indicates the relevant
step within the protection) to provide external directional control (that is, torque control) by
for example using one of the following functions if available in the IED:

Technical manual
Current protection
• Distance protection directional function

• Negative sequence polarized general current and voltage multi purpose protection
function
6.5.7.4 Internal negative sequence protection structure GUID-A6B9B3F1-A1FE-4653-A8AF-61FCCF19CE95 v1
The protection is internally divided into the following parts:
• Four negative sequence overcurrent steps

• Directional supervision element for negative sequence overcurrent steps with integrated
directional comparison step for communication based negative sequence protection
schemes (permissive or blocking)
Each part is described separately in the following sections.
6.5.7.5 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages GUID-D8ACB136-2BA6-4ADA-A096-5C38BD12DB72 v2
Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity I2 (negative sequence current) as measuring
quantity. Every of the four overcurrent stage has the following built-in facilities:
• Operating mode (Off/ Non-directional /Forward / Reverse). By this parameter setting the
operating mode of the stage is selected. Note that the directional decision (Forward/
Reverse) is not made within the overcurrent stage itself. The direction of the fault is
determined in common “Directional Supervision Element” described in the next
paragraph.
• Negative sequence current pickup value.
• Type of operating characteristic (Inverse or Definite Time). By this parameter setting it is
possible to select Inverse or definite time delay for negative sequence overcurrent
function. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are available. For the
complete list of available inverse curves, refer to Chapter "Inverse characteristics"
• Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset /ANSI reset).By this parameter
setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the stage. For the complete list of
available reset curves, refer to Chapter "Inverse characteristics"
• Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite time
delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay and parameters to
define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
• Multiplier for scaling of the set negative sequence current pickup value by external binary
signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase negative sequence current
pickup value when function binary input ENMULTx has logical value 1.
Simplified logic diagram for one negative sequence overcurrent stage is shown in the
following figure:

Technical manual
Current protection
BLKTR
Characteristx=DefTime AND
TRx
|IOP| AND
tx
a OR
a>b
ENMULTx b
STx
IxMult AND
X T
Ix> F
txmin
BLKSTx AND
BLOCK
Inverse
Characteristx=Inverse
DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse
AND
REVERSE_Int
IEC09000683.vsd
Figure 53: Simplified logic diagram for negative sequence overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2, 3 or 4
NS4PTOC can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signals from
NS4PTOC for each stage can be blocked from the binary input BLKSTx. The trip signals from
NS4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

function GUID-F54E21F7-7C99-41D6-BEC6-2D6EC6D2B2A3 v3
At least one of the four negative sequence overcurrent steps must be set as
directional in order to enable execution of the directional supervision element
and the integrated directional comparison function.
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as shown
in figure 54, to determine the direction of the fault.

Technical manual
Current protection
Reverse
Area
AngleRCA Upol=-U2
Forward
Area
Iop = I2
Figure 54: Operating characteristic for fault directional element
Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:
• Directional element is internally enable to operate as soon as Iop is bigger than 40% of
I>Dir and the directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
• Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward and reverse
areas in the operating characteristic.
Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, set NS4PTOC
output binary signals:
1. STFW=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in forward area, see fig
54 (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than setting I>Dir)
2. STRV=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in the reverse area, see fig
54. (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting I>Dir)
These signals must be used for communication based fault teleprotection communication
schemes (permissive or blocking).
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step is shown in figure 55:

Technical manual
Current protection
|Iop|
a a>
STRV
b b REVERSE_Int
AND
0.6
X
a a>
STFW
I>Dir b b FORWARD_Int
AND
X
0.4
FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
C h a r a c e ri s ti c
D i r e c ti o n a l
UPolMin
IPolMin
t
Iop
UPol
AND REVERSE_Int
RVS
STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND
IEC07000067-4.vsd
IEC07000067-4 V2 EN-US
Figure 55: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step
6.5.8 Technical data GUID-10E9194D-3AE9-4D0F-867E-473E6F4BF443 v1
GUID-E83AD807-8FE0-4244-A50E-86B9AF92469E v6
Table 66: NS4PTOC technical data

Operate current, step 1 - 4 (1-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of -

IBase
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
step 1 - 4 greater
Minimum operate time for inverse (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
curves, step 1 - 4 greater
Inverse time characteristics, see table 16 curve types See table 580, table 581 and table
580, table 581 and table 582 582
Minimum operate current, step 1 - 4 (1.00 - 10000.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees


Technical manual
Current protection

Operate current for directional release (1–100)% of IBase For RCA ±60 degrees:
±2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate time, start non-directional at Min. = 15 ms -

0 to 2 x Iset Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Min. = 15 ms -

Operate time, start non-directional at Min. = 5 ms -

0 to 10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, start non-directional at 10 Min. = 20 ms -

x Iset to 0 Max. = 35 ms

Transient overreach <10% at τ = 100 ms -
6.6 Thermal overload protection, one time constant,

Celsius/Fahrenheit LCPTTR/LFPTTR IP14512-1 v7
M17106-1 v7

Thermal overload protection, one LCPTTR 26
time constant, Celsius
Thermal overload protection, one LFPTTR 26

time constant, Fahrenheit
The increasing utilization of the power system closer to the thermal limits has generated a
need of a thermal overload protection for power lines.
A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the
introduction of the thermal overload protection can allow the protected circuit to operate
closer to the thermal limits.
The three-phase current measuring protection has an I2t characteristic with settable time
constant and a thermal memory. The temperature is displayed in either Celsius or Fahrenheit,
depending on whether the function used is Thermal overload protection (LCPTTR) (Celsius) or
(LFPTTR) (Fahrenheit).

Technical manual
Current protection
An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the line is
tripped.
Estimated time to trip before operation, and estimated time to reclose after operation are
presented.
LCPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR ALARM
ENMULT LOCKOUT
AMBTEMP
SENSFLT
RESET
LFPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR ALARM
ENMULT LOCKOUT
AMBTEMP
SENSFLT
RESET
Figure 56: LCPTTR/LFPTTR function bloc
6.6.4 Signals
Table 67: LCPTTR Input signals

SIGNAL
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or more lines
AMBTEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature sensor
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter
Table 68: LFPTTR Input signals

SIGNAL
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or more lines
AMBTEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature sensor
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 69: LCPTTR Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
START BOOLEAN Start Signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal
Table 70: LFPTTR Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
START BOOLEAN Start Signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal
6.6.5 Settings
Table 71: LCPTTR Group settings (basic)

On
TRef 0 - 300 Deg C 1 90 End temperature rise above ambient
of the line when loaded with IRef
IRef 0 - 400 %IB 1 100 The load current (in % of IBase)
leading to TRef temperature
IMult 1-5 - 1 1 Current multiplier when function is
used for two or more lines
Tau 1 - 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line in minutes.
AlarmTemp 0 - 200 Deg C 1 80 Temperature level for start (alarm)
TripTemp 0 - 300 Deg C 1 90 Temperature level for trip
ReclTemp 0 - 300 Deg C 1 75 Temperature for reset of lockout after
trip
tPulse 0.05 - 0.30 s 0.01 0.10 Operate pulse length. Minimum one
execution cycle
AmbiSens Off - - Off External temperature sensor available
On
DefaultAmbTemp -50 - 100 Deg C 1 20 Ambient temperature used when
AmbiSens is set to Off.
DefaultTemp -50 - 300 Deg C 1 50 Temperature raise above ambient
temperature at startup
Table 72: LCPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 73: LFPTTR Group settings (basic)

On
TRef 0 - 600 Deg F 1 160 End temperature rise above ambient
of the line when loaded with IRef
IRef 0 - 400 %IB 1 100 The load current (in % of IBase)
leading to TRef temperature
IMult 1-5 - 1 1 Current multiplier when function is
used for two or more lines
Tau 1 - 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line in minutes.
AlarmTemp 0 - 400 Deg F 1 175 Temperature level for start (alarm)
TripTemp 0 - 600 Deg F 1 195 Temperature level for trip
ReclTemp 0 - 600 Deg F 1 170 Temperature for reset of lockout after
trip
tPulse 0.05 - 0.30 s 0.01 0.10 Operate pulse length. Minimum one
execution cycle
AmbiSens Off - - Off External temperature sensor available
On
DefaultAmbTemp -50 - 250 Deg F 1 60 Ambient temperature used when
AmbiSens is set to Off.
DefaultTemp -50 - 600 Deg F 1 100 Temperature raise above ambient
temperature at startup
Table 74: LFPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Table 75: LCPTTR Monitored data

TTRIP INTEGER - - Estimated time to trip (in min)
TENRECL REAL - - Estimated time to reset of lockout (in
min)
TEMP REAL - deg Calculated temperature of the device
TEMPAMB REAL - deg Ambient temperature used in the
calculations
TERMLOAD REAL - - Temperature relative to operate
temperature

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 76: LFPTTR Monitored data

TTRIP INTEGER - - Estimated time to trip (in min)
TENRECL REAL - - Estimated time to reset of lockout (in
min)
TEMP REAL - Temperatur Calculated temperature of the device
e
Fahrenheit
TEMPAMB REAL - Temperatur Ambient temperature used in the
e calculations
Fahrenheit
TERMLOAD REAL - - Temperature relative to operate
temperature
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the RMS
value is derived. These phase current values are fed to the thermal overload protection, one
time constant LCPTTR/LFPTTR function. The temperature is displayed either in Celsius or
Fahrenheit, depending on whether LCPTTR/LFPTTR function is selected.
From the largest of the three-phase currents a final temperature is calculated according to the
expression:
2
æ I ö
Q final =ç ÷÷ × Tref
ç I ref
è ø
where:
I is the largest phase current,
Iref is a given reference current and
Tref is steady state temperature rise corresponding to Iref
The ambient temperature is added to the calculated final temperature. If this temperature is
larger than the set operate temperature level, TripTemp, a START output signal is activated.
The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:

Technical manual
Current protection
æ Dt
ö
Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) × ç1 - e t ÷
-
è ø
where:
Qn is the calculated present temperature,
Qn-1 is the calculated temperature at the previous time step,
Qfinal is the calculated final temperature with the actual current,
Dt is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and

t is the set thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable)
The actual temperature of the protected component (line or cable) is calculated by adding the
ambient temperature to the calculated temperature, as shown above. The ambient
temperature can be taken from a separate sensor or can be given a constant value. The
calculated component temperature is available as a real figure signal, TEMP.
When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the output signal
ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip level TripTemp the
output signal TRIP is set.
There is also a calculation of the present time to operate with the present current. This
calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the operation
temperature:
æQ - Qoperate ö
toperate = -t × ln ç final
ç Q final - Q n ÷÷
è ø
The calculated time to trip is available as a real figure signal, TTRIP.
After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection, there can be a lockout to reconnect the
tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when the device temperature
is above the set lockout release temperature setting ReclTemp.
The time to lockout release is calculated by the following cooling time calculation. The thermal
content of the function can be reset with input RESET.
æQ - Qlockout _ release ö
tlockout _ release = -t × ln ç final ÷÷
ç Q - Q
è final n ø
In the above equation, the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient
temperature. The calculated time to reset of lockout is available as a real figure signal,
TENRECL. This signal is enabled when the LOCKOUT output is activated.
In some applications the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines. This is often
used where one bay connects several parallel cables. By setting the parameter IMult to the
number of parallel lines (cables) the actual current on one line is used in the protection

Technical manual
Current protection
algorithm by dividing the measured current by the total number of cables. To activate this
option the input ENMULT must be activated.
The protection has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated temperature is
reset to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when secondary injected current
has given a calculated “false” temperature level.
START
Final Temp > Trip Temp
TEMP
Calculation of actual
temperature
AMBTEMP ALARM
Actual Temp > Alarm Temp
I3P
Calculation of final
temperature
ENMULT
TRIP
Actual Temp > Trip Temp

SENSFLT
LOCKOUT
Lockout logic
Actual Temp < Recl Temp

BLOCK
TTRIP
Calculation of time to trip
BLKTR
TENRECL
Calculation of time to reset
of lockout
Figure 57: Functional overview of LCPTTR/LFPTTR

Technical manual
Current protection

M12352-1 v15
Table 77: LCPTTR/LFPTTR technical data

Reference current (2-400)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Reference temperature (0-300)°C, (0 - 600)°F ±1.0°C, ±2.0°F

Operate time: Time constant t = (1–1000) IEC 60255-149, ±5.0% or ±200
minutes ms whichever is greater
 
 I , Ip
2 2 
t < σ ln  
 2 TTrip , TAmb 2 
I , T √ I ref

 ref 
TTrip= set operate temperature

TAmb = ambient temperature
Tref = temperature rise above ambient at Iref
Iref = reference load current
I = actual measured current
Ip = load current before overload occurs
Alarm temperature (0-200)°C, (0-400)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F

Operate temperature (0-300)°C, (0-600)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F
Reset level temperature (0-300)°C, (0-600)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F
6.7 Breaker failure protection CCRBRF IP14514-1 v6
M14878-1 v5

Breaker failure protection, 3-phase CCRBRF 50BF
activation and output
3I>BF
SYMBOL-U V1 EN-US
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures a fast backup tripping of the surrounding
breakers in case the own breaker fails to open. CCRBRF measurement criterion can be current
based, CB position based or an adaptive combination of these two conditions.
A current based check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to achieve
high security against inadvertent operation.
CB position check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is small.
CCRBRF provides three different options to select how t1 and t2 timers are run:

Technical manual
Current protection
1. By external start signals which is internally latched

2. Follow external start signal only
3. Follow external start signal and the selected FunctionMode
CCRBRF can be single- or three- phase initiated to allow its use with single phase tripping
applications. For the three-phase application of the CCRBRF the current criteria can be set to
operate only if “2 elements operates out of three phases and neutral” for example; two phases
or one phase plus the residual current start. This gives a higher security to the backup trip
command.
The CCRBRF function can be programmed to give a single- or three- phase retrip to its own
breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect initiation due to
mistakes during testing.
CCRBRF
I3P* TRBU
BLOCK TRBU2
START TRRET
STL1 TRRETL1
STL2 TRRETL2
STL3 TRRETL3
CBCLDL1 CBALARM
CBCLDL2 STALARM
CBCLDL3
CBFLT
Figure 58: CCRBRF function block
6.7.4 Signals
Table 78: CCRBRF Input signals

I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
START BOOLEAN 0 Three phase start for breaker failure protection function
STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal for phase L1
CBCLDL1 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L1
CBFLT BOOLEAN 0 CB faulty, unable to trip. Backup trip instantaneously

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 79: CCRBRF Output signals

TRBU BOOLEAN Backup trip by breaker failure protection function
TRBU2 BOOLEAN Second backup trip by breaker failure protection function
TRRET BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function
TRRETL1 BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L1
CBALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for faulty circuit breaker
STALARM BOOLEAN External start signal timed out, when by setting StartMode
the external start signal is followed (i.e. when is NOT Latched)
6.7.5 Settings
Table 80: CCRBRF Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
Table 81: CCRBRF Group settings (basic)

On
FunctionMode Current - - Current Selection of measurement principle:
CB Pos Current / CB Position / Current or CB
Current or CB Pos Position
StartMode LatchedStart - - LatchedStart Select how t1 and t2 timers are run: By
FollowStart external start signals which is
FollowStart&Mod internally latched / Follow the external
e start signal only / Follow external
start signal and selected
FunctionMode
tStartTimeout 0.5 - 600.0 s 0.1 1.0 Time delay after which the external
start signal will be ignored, when by
setting StartMode the external start
signal is followed (i.e. when is NOT
Latched)
BuTripMode 2 out of 4 - - 1 out of 3 Select backup trip mode when t2
1 out of 3 timer expires and current
1 out of 4 measurement is used: 2 elements
operate out of three phases and
neutral / 1 element operates out of
three phases / 1 element operates out
of three phases and neutral
RetripMode Off - - Off Select retrip mode when t1 timer
UseFunctionMode expires: Off / use FunctionMode to
Always check / always without any check
IPh> 5 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate phase current level in % of
IBase

Technical manual
Current protection

IN> 2 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate residual current level in % of
IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of retrip
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of backup trip
t2MPh 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of backup trip at multi-
phase start. It can be used to speed
up backup trip command for multi-
phase faults on OHLs
tPulse 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Minimum trip pulse duration
Table 82: CCRBRF Group settings (advanced)

I>BlkCBPos 5 - 200 %IB 1 20 I> in % of IBase to block operation
based on CB Position when
FunctionMode=Current or CB Pos
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.030 Additional time delay which is added
to t2. It can be used as a second
backup trip
tCBAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay for alarm when faulty
circuit breaker indicated

Table 83: CCRBRF Monitored data

IL1 REAL - A Measured current in phase L1
IN REAL - A Measured residual current
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF is initiated from the protection trip command, either from
protection functions within the IED or from external protection devices.
To this function the three-phase current input and/or change to: the breaker normally open
auxiliary contact (i.e. "52a" or "closed") shall be connected. On OHL feeders where single pole
auto-reclosing is used, auxiliary contact from each CB pole shall be connected separately
Phase selective start signals enable single pole retrip functionality. This means that a second
attempt to open the same breaker can be done phase-selective. The retrip attempt is made
after a set time delay t1. For transmission lines, single pole trip and auto-reclosing is often
used. The retrip function can be phase selective if it is initiated from the phase selective line
protection.
The retrip function can be done with or without current check. With this current check, the
retrip is only performed if thecurrent through the circuit breaker is larger than the operate
current level.

Technical manual
Current protection
The retrip function can be performed with or without CB position check according to table 84.
Table 84: Dependencies between parameters RetripMode and FunctionMode

RetripMode FunctionMode Description
Retrip Off N/A the retrip function is not activated
CB Pos Check Current retrip is done if phase current is
larger than the operate level after
retrip time has elapsed
Contact retrip is done when auxiliary
contact position indicates that
breaker is still closed after retrip
time has elapsed
Current&Contact both methods according to above
are used but taken into account
also I>BlkCont
No CBPos Check Current retrip is done without check of
current level
Contact retrip is done without check of
auxiliary contact position
Current&Contact retrip is done without check of
current level or auxiliary contact
position
The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will start the
backup trip timer. The function detects the successful breaker opening, either by detection of
low current through RMS evaluation and a special adapted current algorithm or by open
contact indication. The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker
opening, that is, fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current and/or contact
detection has not detected breaker opening before the backup timer has run its time a backup
trip is initiated.
Further the following possibilities are available:
•
• The minimum length of the retrip pulse, the backup trip pulse and the second backup trip
pulse are settable. This pulse duration is defined by a parameter setting tPulse. The retrip
pulse, the backup trip pulse and the second backup trip pulse will however sustain as long
as there is an indication of closed breaker.
• If the current detection is used it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3
where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of 4 where it
is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high residual current
and 2 out of 4 where at least two currents (phase current and/or residual current) shall be
high for breaker failure detection.
• The current detection level for the residual current can be set different from the setting of
phase current detection.
• It is possible to have different backup time delays for single-phase faults and for multi-
phase faults.
• It is possible to have this option activated for small load currents only.
• It is possible to have instantaneous backup trip function if a signal is high if the circuit
breaker is incapable to clear faults, for example, at low gas pressure.

Technical manual
Current protection
30 ms
START
STL1 OR BFP Started L1
150 ms
AND S
SR Q t
R
BLOCK
OR Time out L1
Reset L1 AND
Retrip Time Out L1
Backup Time Out L1
IEC09000976-3-en-us.vsd
Figure 59: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF starting logic
IP>
a
a>b
b
FunctionMode Current
OR AND Reset L1
OR
1 Contact Time out L1

Current and Contact OR
AND
Current High L1
IL1
BFP Started L1 AND CB Closed L1
OR
a AND AND
a>b OR AND
I>BlkCont b
CBCLDL1 Contact Closed L1

AND
Figure 60: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF , CB position evaluation
t1 TRRETL3
BFP Started L1 From other
t Retrip Time Out L1
phases TRRETL2 OR
TRRET
tPulse
RetripMode No CBPos Check AND
OR TRRETL1
OR
1 30ms
OR
CB Pos Check
AND
CB Closed L1
CBFLT
Figure 61: Simplified logic scheme of the retrip logic function

Technical manual
Current protection
BUTripMode
1 out of 3
2 out of 4
OR
1 1 out of 4 AND
Current high L1
BFP Started L1
AND
IN
a
a>b
IN> b
Contact Closed L1
OR
OR
Current High L2
From other AND Backup Time Out L1
Current High L3
phases
Current High L1
CBFLT
AND
t2
30ms Backup Trip L1
BFP Started L1 t AND
OR
t2MPh
AND t
AND
OR OR
tPulse
From other Backup Trip L2 OR TRBU
OR
phases Backup Trip L3
BFP Started L2 AND
From other
phases BFP Started L3 OR tPulse
t3
OR
TRBU2
S Q
SR
t
AND R
IEC09000979-5-en-us.vsd
Figure 62: Simplified logic scheme of the backup trip logic function
M12353-1 v15
Table 85: CCRBRF technical data

Operate phase current (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
Reset ratio, phase current > 95% -

Operate residual current (2-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -

Phase current level for blocking of contact (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
function ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% -

Operate time for current detection 10 ms typically -
Reset time for current detection 10 ms maximum * -
Time delay for retrip at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for backup trip at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for backup trip at multi-phase start (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is
at 0 to 2 x Iset greater
Additional time delay for a second backup trip (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is
at 0 to 2 x Iset greater

Technical manual
Current protection

Time delay for alarm for faulty circuit breaker (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
greater
Minimum trip pulse duration (0.010-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±5 ms whichever is
greater
* Valid for product version 2.2.3 or later
6.8 Stub protection STBPTOC IP14515-1 v3
M17108-1 v2

Stub protection STBPTOC 50STB
3I>STUB
SYMBOL-T V1 EN-US
When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance and the line disconnector is opened
in multi-breaker arrangements the voltage transformers will mostly be outside on the
disconnected part. The primary line distance protection will thus not be able to operate and
must be blocked.
The stub protection (STBPTOC) covers the zone between the current transformers and the
open disconnector. The three-phase instantaneous overcurrent function is released from a
normally open, NO (b) auxiliary contact on the line disconnector.
STBPTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR
RELEASE
Figure 63: STBPTOC function block
6.8.4 Signals
Table 86: STBPTOC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
RELEASE BOOLEAN 0 Release of stub protection

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 87: STBPTOC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN General trip
START BOOLEAN General start
6.8.5 Settings
Table 88: STBPTOC Group settings (basic)

On
ReleaseMode Release - - Release Release of stub protection
Continuous
I> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate current level in % of IBase
Table 89: STBPTOC Group settings (advanced)

tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay
Table 90: STBPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Table 91: STBPTOC Monitored data

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block.
From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each
phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to a comparator in the stub
protection function STBPTOC. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set
operating current value of the function I>.
If a phase current is larger than the set operating current the signal from the comparator for
this phase is activated. This signal will, in combination with the release signal from line
disconnection (RELEASE input), activate the timer for the TRIP signal. If the fault current

Technical manual
Current protection
remains during the timer delay t, the TRIP output signal is activated. The function can be
blocked by activation of the BLOCK input.
STUB PROTECTION FUNCTION
BLOCK
TRIP
STIL1 AND
STIL2 OR
STIL3
RELEASE
en05000731.vsd
Figure 64: Simplified logic diagram for Stub protection

M12350-1 v12
Table 92: STBPTOC technical data

Operating current (5-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (50-2500)% of IBase -

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
greater
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -
Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, start at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 10 ms -
Max. = 20 ms
6.9 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC SEMOD171761-1 v3
SEMOD172362-2 v2

Broken conductor check BRCPTOC - 46

Technical manual
Current protection
6.9.2 Functionality SEMOD171805-5 v6
Conventional protection functions cannot detect the broken conductor condition. Broken
conductor check BRCPTOC function, consisting of continuous phase selective current
unsymmetrical check on the line where the IED is connected, gives an alarm or trip at detecting
broken conductors.
6.9.3 Function block SEMOD171906-11 v4
BRCPTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR
Figure 65: BRCPTOC function block
6.9.4 Signals
Table 93: BRCPTOC Input signals

SIGNAL
Table 94: BRCPTOC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Operate signal of the protection logic
START BOOLEAN Start signal of the protection logic
6.9.5 Settings
Table 95: BRCPTOC Group settings (basic)

On
Iub> 50 - 90 %IM 1 50 Highest and lowest phase currents
difference in % of highest phase
current
IP> 5 - 100 %IB 1 20 Minimum phase current for operation
of Iub> in % of IBase
tOper 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Operate time delay

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 96: BRCPTOC Group settings (advanced)

tReset 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay in reset
Table 97: BRCPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Table 98: BRCPTOC Monitored data

IUNBAL REAL - - Measured unbalance of phase
currents
6.9.7 Operation principle SEMOD171791-5 v5
Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC) detects a broken conductor condition by detecting the
asymmetry between currents in the three phases. The current-measuring elements
continuously measure the three-phase currents.
The current asymmetry signal output START is set on if:
• The difference in currents between the phase with the lowest current and the phase with
the highest current is greater than set percentage Iub> of the highest phase current
• The highest phase current is greater than the minimum setting value IP>.
• The lowest phase current is below 50% of the minimum setting value IP>
The third condition is included to avoid problems in systems involving parallel lines. If a
conductor breaks in one phase on one line, the parallel line will experience an increase in
current in the same phase. This might result in the first two conditions being satisfied. If the
unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period longer than the set time tOper the TRIP output is
activated.
The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in figure 66
BRCPTOC is disabled (blocked) if:
• The IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the local HMI test menu
(BlockBRC=Yes).
• The input signal BLOCK is high.
The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block
command from external devices, or can be software connected to other internal functions of
the IED itself to receive a block command from internal functions.
The output trip signal TRIP is a three-phase trip. It can be used to command a trip to the circuit
breaker or for alarm purpose only.

Technical manual
Current protection
TEST
TEST-ACTIVE
and
Block BRCPTOC=Yes
START
Function Enable
BLOCK or
tOper
TRIP
and t
Unsymmetrical
Current Detection
STI
IL1<50%IP>
IL2<50%IP> or
IL3<50%IP>
Figure 66: Simplified logic diagram for Broken conductor check BRCPTOC
6.9.8 Technical data SEMOD171939-1 v1
SEMOD175200-2 v7
Table 99: BRCPTOC technical data

Minimum phase current for operation (5–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Unbalance current operation (50–90)% of maximum current ±1.0% of Ir
Independent operate time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is

greater
Independent reset time delay (0.010-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
greater
Start time at current change from Ir to Min. = 25 ms -
0 Max. = 35 ms
Reset time at current change from 0 to Min. = 5 ms -

Ir Max. = 20 ms

Technical manual
148
Voltage protection
Section 7 Voltage protection

7.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV IP14544-1 v3
M16876-1 v7

Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27
3U<
V2 EN-US
SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions. The two-
step undervoltage protection function (UV2PTUV) can be used to open circuit breakers to
prepare for system restoration at power outages or as a long-time delayed back-up to the
primary protection.
UV2PTUV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
It has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to the system service voltage.
UV2PTUV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
Figure 67: UV2PTUV function block

Technical manual
Voltage protection
7.1.4 Signals
Table 100: UV2PTUV Input signals

U3P GROUP - Three phase voltages
SIGNAL
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
Table 101: UV2PTUV Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip

Technical manual
Voltage protection
7.1.5 Settings
Table 102: UV2PTUV Group settings (basic)

On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 1
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1
2 out of 3 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
U1< 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT)
in % of UBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
curves for step 1
delay for step 1
IntBlkSel1 Off - - Off Internal (low level) blocking mode,
Block of trip step 1
Block all
IntBlkStVal1 1 - 50 %UB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in
% of UBase, step 1
tBlkUV1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level)
blocking for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase,
step 1
On
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
3 out of 3
U2< 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT)
curves for step 2
delay for step 2
IntBlkSel2 Off - - Off Internal (low level) blocking mode,
Block of trip step 2
Block all

Technical manual
Voltage protection

IntBlkStVal2 1 - 50 %UB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in
% of UBase, step 2
tBlkUV2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level)
blocking for step 2
step 2
Table 103: UV2PTUV Group settings (advanced)

tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve
Frozen timer type for step 1
Linearly
decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
Time curve step 2
Linearly
decreased
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 2

Technical manual
Voltage protection
Table 104: UV2PTUV Non group settings (basic)

ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhPh RMS
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
Value groups

Table 105: UV2PTUV Monitored data

UL1 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L1
Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) is used to detect low power system voltage. If
one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding START signal
is generated. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate
the START outputs: the measured voltages 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, or 3 out of 3 have to be lower
than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal.
UV2PTUV has two voltage-measuring steps with separate time delays. If the voltage remains
below the set value for the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid
an unwanted trip due to the disconnection of the related high-voltage equipment, a voltage-
controlled blocking of the function is available: if the voltage is lower than the set blocking
level, the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is generated. The time delay
characteristic is individually chosen for each step and can be either definite time delay or
inverse time delay.
To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.
7.1.7.1 Measurement principle M15326-6 v7
Depending on the value of the ConnType parameter, UV2PTUV can be set to measure phase-
to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase fundamental value, phase-to-earth true RMS value
or phase-to-phase true RMS value, and compares it against the set values, U1< and U2<. The
voltage-related settings are made in percentage of the base voltage which is set in kV phase-
to-phase voltage. This means operation for phase-to-earth voltage under:
UBase(kV )
U (%) ·
3
and operation for phase-to-phase voltage under:

Technical manual
Voltage protection
U < (%) × UBase(kV)

When the phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected, the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root of three.
7.1.7.2 Time delay M15326-10 v12
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay
(IDMT). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available:
• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• customer programmable inverse curve
The type A curve is described as:
k
t=
æ Un < -U ö
ç ÷
è Un < ø
where:
Un< Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage
The type B curve is described as:
k × 480
t= 2.0
+ 0.055
æ Un < - U ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è Un < ø
The customer programmable curve can be created as:
é ù
ê ú
ê k×A ú
t=ê pú
+D
ê æ Un < - U ö ú
êçB × -C÷ ú
ëè Un < ø û
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There
will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate
for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un< down to Un< · (1.0 – CrvSatn/100) the used

Technical manual
Voltage protection
voltage will be: Un< · (1.0 – CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter
must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details of the
different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics".
Voltage
UL1
UL2
UL3
IDMT Voltage
Time
Figure 68: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration
Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the user set
time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by
some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start
condition, with respect to the measured voltage, ceases during the delay time, and is not
fulfilled again within a user-defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and
tIReset1 and tIReset2 pickup for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset.
After leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not
sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. For the undervoltage
function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations
during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer: the timer is reset
instantaneously, the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly
decreased during the reset time. See figure 69 and figure 70.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage Measured
START Voltage
HystAbs1
TRIP
U1<
Time
START
TRIP
Time
Integrator Frozen Timer
Time
Linearly
Instantaneous
decreased IEC05000010-5-en.vsdx
Figure 69: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

Technical manual
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
START
START
HystAbs1 Measured Voltage
TRIP
U1<
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Time
Instantaneous Linearly decreased
IEC05000011-en-4.vsdx
Figure 70: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
Definite timer delay
When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure 71. Detailed
information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in figure 72 and figure
73 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s, instantaneous reset of the definite time
delayed stage is ensured.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
ST1
U t1
a tReset1
TR1
t
a<b t
U1< R
b
AND
Figure 71: Logic diagram for step 1, DT operation
U1<
ST1
TR1
tReset1
t1
Figure 72: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 reset
U1<
ST1
TR1
tReset1
t1
Figure 73: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 operation

Technical manual
Voltage protection
7.1.7.3 Blocking M15326-20 v8
It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV partially or completely, by

binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the trip output
of step 1, or both the trip and the START outputs of step 1, are blocked. The characteristic of
the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal blocking can also be set to Off
resulting in no voltage based blocking. Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also
for step 2.
In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will get very
low. The event will START both the under voltage function and the blocking function, as seen in
figure 74. The delay of the blocking function must be set less than the time delay of under
voltage function.
U Disconnection
Normal voltage
U1<
U2<
tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2
Time
Block step 1
Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
Figure 74: Blocking function

Technical manual
Voltage protection
7.1.7.4 Design M15326-35 v9
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral voltages or
the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS filters of input voltage
signals are used. The voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the lowest
voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to
achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the START condition. The design
of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV is schematically shown in Figure 75.
UL1 Comparator ST1L1

UL1 < U1< Voltage Phase Phase 1
Selector
OpMode1 ST1L2
UL2 Comparator Phase 2
1 out of 3
UL2 < U1< 2 out of 3 ST1L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 Start t1
UL3 Comparator t1Reset
UL3 < U1< IntBlkStVal1 &
OR ST1
Trip
Output
START Logic TR1L1
Step 1 TR1L2
Time integrator TRIP
MinVoltSelector tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3
TR1
OR
Comparator ST2L1
UL1 < U2< Voltage Phase Phase 1
Selector
OpMode2 ST2L2
Comparator Phase 2
UL2 < U2< 1 out of 3
2 out of 3 Start t2 ST2L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 t2Reset
Comparator IntBlkStVal2 &
UL3 < U2< Trip ST2
Output OR
Logic
START TR2L1
Step 2
TR2L2
Time integrator TRIP
MinVoltSelector tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3
TR2
OR
START
OR
TRIP
OR
Figure 75: Schematic design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV

Technical manual
Voltage protection
M13290-1 v15
Table 106: UV2PTUV technical data

Operate voltage, low and high step (1.0–100.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Internal blocking level, step 1 and step (1–50)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

2
Inverse time characteristics for step 1 - See table 589
and step 2, see table 589
Definite time delay, step 1 at 1.2 x Uset (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40ms whichever is
to 0 greater
Definite time delay, step 2 at 1.2 x Uset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40ms whichever is
to 0 greater
Minimum operate time, inverse (0.000–60.000) s ±0.5% or ±40ms whichever is

characteristics greater
Operate time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time 5 ms typically at 1.2 x Uset to -
0
7.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV IP14545-1 v3
M17002-1 v8

Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59
3U>
SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN V2 EN-US
7.2.2 Functionality OV2PTOV M13798-3 v16
Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as sudden
power loss, tap changer regulating failures, and open line ends on long lines.
OV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed.
OV2PTOV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
OV2PTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
Figure 76: OV2PTOV function block
7.2.4 Signals
Table 107: OV2PTOV Input signals

U3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase voltage input
SIGNAL
Table 108: OV2PTOV Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip

Technical manual
Voltage protection

7.2.5 Settings
Table 109: OV2PTOV Group settings (basic)

On
On
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
3 out of 3
U1> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT)
curves for step 1
delay for step 1
step 1
On
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
3 out of 3
U2> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT)
curves for step 2
delay for step 2
step 2

Technical manual
Voltage protection
Table 110: OV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)

Time curve step 1
Linearly
decreased
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
Time curve step 2
Linearly
decreased
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 2
Table 111: OV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhPh DFT
PhN RMS
PhPh RMS
Value groups

Technical manual
Voltage protection

Table 112: OV2PTOV Monitored data

Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV is used to detect high power system voltage.
OV2PTOV has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or three-phase voltages
increase above the set value, a corresponding START signal is issued. OV2PTOV can be set to
START/TRIP, based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being above
the set point. If the voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the
chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps, and can be either
definite time or inverse time delayed.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage UBase, which is
set in kV, phase-to-phase.
OV2PTOV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase

fundamental value, phase-to-earth RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value. The choice of
measuring is done by the parameter ConnType.
The setting of the analog inputs are given as primary phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase
voltage. OV2PTOV will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set percentage of the set
base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase-to-earth voltage over:
U > (%) × UBase( kV )

3
and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:
U > (%) × UBase(kV)

When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root of three.
All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1> for
Step 1 and U2> for Step 2. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements
to activate the START outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have
to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis is included.
7.2.7.2 Time delay M15330-10 v11
(IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• inverse curve C
k
t=
æ U - Un > ö
ç ÷
è Un > ø
where:
Un> Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage
k  480
t 2.0
 0.035
 U  Un  
 32   0.5 
 U n  
The type C curve is described as:
k × 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
æ U - Un > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è Un > ø
The customer programmable curve is defined by the below equation, where A, B, C, D, k and p
are settings:
k×A
t= p
+D
æ U -Un > ö
çB× -C÷
è Un > ø

Technical manual
Voltage protection
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There
will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate
for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up to Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used
voltage will be: Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter
CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time delay
integration, see figure 77. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in
section "Inverse characteristics".
Voltage
IDMT Voltage
UL1
UL2
UL3
Time
Figure 77: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration
Operation of the trip signal requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode
(DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If
the START condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and
is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time
and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding START output is reset, after
that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the
signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. The hysteresis value for each step is settable
HystAbsn (where n means either 1 or 2 respectively) to allow a high and accurate reset of the
function. For OV2PTOV the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage
fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer:
either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or
the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP
U1>
HystAbs1 Measured
Voltage
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Integrator Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer
t
Instantaneous Time
IEC09000055‐3‐en.vsdx
Figure 78: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at

Technical manual
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
START TRIP
START HystAbs1
U1>
Measured
Voltage
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Time
Linearly
Instantaneous decreased
Figure 79: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
Definite time delay
When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure 80. Detailed
82 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s (where n means either 1 or 2 respectively),
instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
ST1
U tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TR1
U1>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay
Figure 80: Logic diagram for step 1, definite time delay, DT operation
U1>
START
TRIP
tReset1
t1
Figure 81: Example for step 1, Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset
U1>
START
TRIP
tReset1
t1
Figure 82: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

Technical manual
Voltage protection
7.2.7.3 Blocking M15330-20 v8
It is possible to block Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV partially or completely, by

binary input signals where:

7.2.7.4 Design M15330-34 v8
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-earth voltages or
the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters or true RMS filters of input voltage
signals are used. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the
highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is
included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the START condition.
The design of Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) is schematically described in
figure 83.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
UL1 Comparator ST1L1

UL1 > U1> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST1L2
UL2 Comparator OpMode1 Phase 2
UL2 > U1> 1 out of 3
Start ST1L3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 t1
UL3 Comparator t1Reset
UL3 > U1> & ST1
OR
Trip
START Output TR1L1
Logic
Time integrator Step 1 TR1L2

TRIP
MaxVoltSelect tIreset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3
OR TR1
Comparator ST2L1
UL1 > U2> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST2L2
Comparator OpMode2 Phase 2
UL2 > U2> 1 out of 3
Start ST2L3
2 out of 3
Phase 3 t2
3 out of 3
Comparator t2Reset
UL3 > U2> & ST2
OR
Trip
START Output TR2L1
Logic
Time integrator Step 2 TR2L2

MaxVoltSelect tIreset2 TRIP
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3
TR2
OR
START
OR
TRIP
OR
IEC05000013-WMF V2 EN-US
Figure 83: Schematic design of Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV
M13304-1 v14
Table 113: OV2PTOV technical data

Operate voltage, step 1 and 2 (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

Inverse time characteristics for steps 1 - See table 588

and 2, see table 588
Definite time delay, low step (step 1) at (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is
0 to 1.2 x Uset greater
Definite time delay, high step (step 2) at (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is

Technical manual
Voltage protection

Minimum operate time, Inverse (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is
characteristics greater
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 20 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Reset time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x -
Uset
7.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV IP14546-1 v4
SEMOD54295-2 v6

Two step residual overvoltage ROV2PTOV 59N
protection
2(U0>)

Table 114: ROV2PTOV Monitored data

ULevel REAL - kV Magnitude of measured voltage
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV is used to detect a high residual voltage.
The residual voltage can be measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a
power transformer or from a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary windings
are connected in an open delta. Another possibility is to measure the three phase-to-earth
voltages, and calculate the corresponding residual voltage internally in the IED. ROV2PTOV has
two steps with separate time delays. If the residual voltage remains above the set value for a
time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding TRIP signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either definite
time delay or inverse time delay.
The voltage-related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV, phase-
phase. The set UBase value is divided by sqrt(3) before the set value is calculated.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1> and
U2>.
To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a settable hysteresis has been included.
7.3.3.2 Time delay M15331-10 v11
(IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• inverse curve C
k
t=
æ U - Un > ö
ç ÷
è Un > ø
where:
Un> Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage
k  480
t 2.0
 0.035
 U  Un  
 32   0.5 
 U n  
The type C curve is described as:
k × 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
æ U - Un > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è U> ø
The customer programmable curve can be created as:
k×A
t= p
+D
æ U -Un > ö
çB× -C÷
è Un > ø

Technical manual
Voltage protection
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero, the time delay will be infinite. There
will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate
for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up to Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used
voltage will be: Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter
CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse
characteristics".
TRIP signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode
(DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode
(IDMT).
If the START condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and
is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time
and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding START output is reset, after
the defined reset time has elapsed.
Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition must be
fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.
Also, notice that for the overvoltage function, IDMT reset time is constant and does not
depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period.
There are three ways to reset the timer: the timer is reset instantaneously, the timer value is
frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See
figure 84 and figure 85.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP
U1>
HystAbs1 Measured
Voltage
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Integrator Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer
t
Instantaneous Time
Figure 84: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

Technical manual
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
START TRIP
START HystAbs1
U1>
Measured
Voltage
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Time
Linearly
Instantaneous decreased
Figure 85: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
Definite time delay
When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure 86. Detailed
88 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s, instantaneous reset of the definite time
delayed stage is ensured.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
ST1
U tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TR1
U1>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay
Figure 86: Logic diagram for step 1, Definite time delay, DT operation
U1<
ST1
TR1
tReset1
t1
Figure 87: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset
U1<
ST1
TR1
tReset1
t1
Figure 88: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

Technical manual
Voltage protection
7.3.3.3 Blocking M15331-18 v7
It is possible to block two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV partially or

completely by binary input signals where:

BLKST2: blocks all start and trip inputs related to step 2
7.3.3.4 Design M15331-32 v7
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage. Recursive Fourier
filters filter the input voltage signal for the rated frequency. The residual voltage is compared
to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic integration. The design of
the function is schematically described in figure 89.
UN Comparator Phase 1 ST1

UN > U1>
Start TR1
START t1
tReset1
&
Trip
Time integrator Output
tIReset1 TRIP
Logic
ResetTypeCrv1
Step 1
ST2
Comparator Phase 1
UN > U2> TR2
Start
t2
START tReset2
& START
Trip OR
Time integrator Output
TRIP Logic
tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TRIP
Step 2 OR
Figure 89: Schematic design of Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV

Technical manual
Voltage protection

M13317-2 v14
Table 115: ROV2PTOV technical data

Operate voltage, step 1 - step 2 (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
Inverse time characteristics for low - See table 590

and high step, see table 590
Definite time delay low step (step 1) at (0.00–6000.00) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is
Definite time delay high step (step 2) (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is

at 0 to 1.2 x Uset greater
Minimum operate time (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is

greater
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 20 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Reset time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -
7.4 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV SEMOD171453-1 v3
SEMOD171954-2 v2

Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV - 27
Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV ) is suitable for use in networks with an automatic system
restoration function. LOVPTUV issues a three-pole trip command to the circuit breaker, if all
three phase voltages fall below the set value for a time longer than the set time and the circuit
breaker remains closed.
The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
LOVPTUV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
CBOPEN
VTSU
Figure 90: LOVPTUV function block
7.4.4 Signals
Table 116: LOVPTUV Input signals

U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block the all outputs
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker open
VTSU BOOLEAN 0 Block from voltage circuit supervision
Table 117: LOVPTUV Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
START BOOLEAN Start signal
7.4.5 Settings
Table 118: LOVPTUV Group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
UPE 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate voltage in % of base voltage
UBase
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Operate time delay
Table 119: LOVPTUV Group settings (advanced)

tPulse 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Duration of TRIP pulse
tBlock 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to block when all 3ph
voltages are not low
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay for enable the function
after restoration

Technical manual
Voltage protection
Table 120: LOVPTUV Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
The operation of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV is based on line voltage measurement.
LOVPTUV is provided with a logic, which automatically recognizes if the line was restored for
at least tRestore before starting the tTrip timer. All three phases are required to be low before
the output TRIP is activated. The START output signal indicates start.
Additionally, LOVPTUV is automatically blocked if only one or two phase voltages have been
detected low for more than tBlock.
LOVPTUV operates again only if the line has been restored to full voltage for at least tRestore.
Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure and open circuit breaker information
signals, by their connection to dedicated inputs of the function block.
Due to undervoltage conditions being continuous the trip pulse is limited to a length set by
setting tPulse.
The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse-failure function (BLKU input) and the
information about the open position (CBOPEN) of the associated circuit breaker.
The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block
command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of
the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. LOVPTUV is also
blocked when the IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the HMI test
menu. (Blocked=Yes).

Technical manual
Voltage protection
TEST
TEST-ACTIVE
&
Blocked = Yes
START
BLOCK >1
Function Enable tTrip tPulse TRIP
STUL1N & t
STUL2N &
only 1 or 2 phases are low for
Latched at least 10 s (not three)
STUL3N Enable
&
tBlock
>1 t
CBOPEN Reset Enable

>1
&
VTSU
tRestore
>1 Set Enable
t
>1
Line restored for
at least 3 s
Figure 91: Simplified diagram of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV

SEMOD175210-2 v6
Table 121: LOVPTUV technical data

Operate voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Pulse timer when (0.050–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

disconnecting all three phases
Time delay for enabling the (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
functions after restoration
Operate time delay when (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
disconnecting all three phases
Time delay to block when all (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
three phase voltages are not
low

Technical manual
184
Section 8 Secondary system supervision

8.1 Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC IP14555-1 v5
M14870-1 v5

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC - 87
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of many
protection functions such as differential, earth-fault current and negative-sequence current
functions.
Current circuit supervision (CCSSPVC) compares the residual current from a three phase set of
current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input taken from
another set of cores on the current transformer.
A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to block
protection functions expected to give inadvertent tripping.
CCSSPVC
I3P* FAIL
IREF* ALARM
BLOCK
Figure 92: CCSSPVC function block
Signal ISIREF must be connected in the configuration.
8.1.4 Signals
Table 122: CCSSPVC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase current input
SIGNAL
IREF GROUP - Residual reference current input
SIGNAL

Technical manual
Table 123: CCSSPVC Output signals

FAIL BOOLEAN Detection of current circuit failure
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for current circuit failure
8.1.5 Settings
Table 124: CCSSPVC Group settings (basic)

On
IMinOp 10 - 200 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate current differential
level in % of IBase
Table 125: CCSSPVC Group settings (advanced)

Ip>Block 20 - 500 %IB 1 150 Block of the function at high phase
current, in % of IBase
Table 126: CCSSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC compares the absolute value of the vectorial sum of the
three phase currents |ΣIphase| and the absolute value of the residual current |Iref| from
another current transformer set, see figure 93.
The FAIL output will be set to high when the following criteria are fulfilled:
• The numerical value of the difference |ΣIphase| – |Iref| is higher than 80% of the numerical
value of the sum |ΣIphase| + |Iref|.
• The numerical value of the current |ΣIphase| – |Iref| is equal to or higher than the set
operate value IMinOp.
• No phase current has exceeded Ip>Block during the last 10 ms.
• CCSSPVC is enabled by setting Operation = On.
The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being activated for
more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM will be issued. In this case
the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the AND-gate resets. This prevents
unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase current supervision element(s)
operate, for example, during a fault.

Technical manual
IL1 IL1 I>1.054 * IMinOp

IL2 IL2 +
IL3 IL3  -
+ +
I ref Iref + x -
0,8
I>IP>Block
10 ms AND
OR FAIL
OR t
40 ms 100 ms
170 ms 3000 ms ALARM

OPERATION
BLOCK
Figure 93: Simplified logic diagram for Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC
The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, which is shown in Figure 94.
| åI phase | - | I ref |
Slope = 1
Operation
Slope = 0.8
area
I MinOp
| åI phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd
Figure 94: Operate characteristics
Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S I phase | + |
I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 1.

M12358-1 v10
Table 127: CCSSPVCtechnical data

Operate current (10-200)% of IBase ±10.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±10.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, Operate current >90%

Block current (20-500)% of IBase ±5.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Reset ratio, Block current >90% at (50-500)% of IBase

Technical manual
8.2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC IP14556-1 v3
M14869-1 v4

Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC - -
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function (FUFSPVC) is to block voltage measuring
functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer and the IED in
order to avoid inadvertent operations that otherwise might occur.
The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different detection methods, negative
sequence and zero sequence based detection and an additional delta voltage and delta current
detection.
The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in isolated or high-
impedance earthed networks. It is based on the negative-sequence quantities.
The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low impedance
earthed networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities.
The selection of different operation modes is possible by a setting parameter in order to take
into account the particular earthing of the network.
A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the fuse
failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in practice is
more associated with voltage transformer switching during station operations.
FUFSPVC
I3P* BLKZ
U3P* BLKU
BLOCK 3PH
CBCLOSED DLD1PH
MCBOP DLD3PH
DISCPOS STDI
BLKTRIP STDIL1
STDIL2
STDIL3
STDU
STDUL1
STDUL2
STDUL3
Figure 95: FUFSPVC function block

Technical manual
8.2.4 Signals
Table 128: FUFSPVC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Current connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
CBCLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Active when circuit breaker is closed
MCBOP BOOLEAN 0 Active when external MCB opens protected voltage circuit
DISCPOS BOOLEAN 0 Active when line disconnector is open
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operation of function when active
Table 129: FUFSPVC Output signals

BLKZ BOOLEAN Start of current and voltage controlled function
BLKU BOOLEAN General start of function
3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase start of function
DLD1PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in at least one phase
DLD3PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in all three phases
STDI BOOLEAN Common start signal of sudden change in current
STDIL1 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current, phase L1
STDU BOOLEAN Common start signal of sudden change in voltage
STDUL1 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase L1

Technical manual
8.2.5 Settings
Table 130: FUFSPVC Group settings (basic)

On
OpMode Off - - UZsIZs Operating mode selection
UNsINs
UZsIZs
UZsIZs OR
UNsINs
UZsIZs AND
UNsINs
OptimZsNs
3U0> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of residual overvoltage
element in % of UBase
3I0< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of residual undercurrent
element in % of IBase
3U2> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of neg seq overvoltage
element in % of UBase
3I2< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of neg seq undercurrent
element in % of IBase
OpDUDI Off - - Off Operation of change based function
On Off/On
DU> 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level of change in phase
voltage in % of UBase
DI< 1 - 100 %IB 1 15 Operate level of change in phase
current in % of IBase
UPh> 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of phase voltage in % of
UBase
IPh> 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of phase current in % of
IBase
SealIn Off - - On Seal in functionality Off/On
On
USealln< 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of seal-in phase voltage
in % of UBase
IDLD< 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Operate level for open phase current
detection in % of IBase
UDLD< 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level for open phase voltage
detection in % of UBase
Table 131: FUFSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Technical manual

Table 132: FUFSPVC Monitored data

3I0 REAL - A Magnitude of zero sequence current
3I2 REAL - A Magnitude of negative sequence
current
3U0 REAL - kV Magnitude of zero sequence voltage
3U2 REAL - kV Magnitude of negative sequence
voltage
8.2.7 Operation principle
8.2.7.1 Zero and negative sequence detection M13677-3 v5
The zero and negative sequence function continuously measures the currents and voltages in
all three phases and calculates, see figure 96:
• the zero-sequence voltage 3U0

• the zero-sequence current 3I0
• the negative sequence current 3I2
• the negative sequence voltage 3U2
The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0> and 3I0<, 3U2> and
3I2<.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zero-sequence
voltage is higher than the set value 3U0> and the measured zero-sequence current is below the
set value 3I0<.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured negative sequence
voltage is higher than the set value 3U2> and the measured negative sequence current is below
the set value 3I2<.
A drop out delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence current will
prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the two line ends.

Technical manual
Sequence Detection
3I0< CurrZeroSeq
IL1
Zero 3I0
sequence
filter 100 ms CurrNegSeq
a
IL2 a>b t
b
Negative 3I2
sequence
IL3 filter FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND
100 ms
a
a>b t
3I2
VoltZeroSeq
UL1
Zero
sequence a 3U0
a>b
b
filter
UL2 VoltNegSeq
Negative
sequence a 3U2
a>b
UL3 filter b
3U2>
Figure 96: Simplified logic diagram for sequence detection part

The calculated values 3U0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3U2 are available as service values on local HMI and
monitoring tool in PCM600.
Input and output signals M13677-19 v6

The output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ as well as the signals DLD1PH and DLD3PH from dead
line detections are blocked if any of the following conditions occur:
• The input BLOCK is activated

• The input BLKTRIP is activated and the internal signal FuseFailStarted is not present
• The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off
• The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from
the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)
The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure supervision
function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block command
from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the IED itself
in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be
connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.
The input BLKTRIP is intended to be connected to the trip output from any of the protection
functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the operation of the fuse
failure is blocked; a fixed drop-out timer prolongs the block for 100 ms. The aim is to increase
the security against unwanted operations during the opening of the breaker, which might
cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse failure might operate.
The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is activated. The
dead line detection signal has a 200 ms drop-out time delay.
The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit. The
MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block all the voltage related
functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpMode selector. The
additional drop-out timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the
unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the
main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker.

Technical manual
The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the output signal BLKU in
order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The
impedance protection function is not affected by the position of the line disconnector since
there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the distance protection. If
DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is connected to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it
signifies that the line is disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated.
The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions
(undervoltage protection, energizing check and so on) except for the impedance protection.
The function output BLKZ shall be used for blocking the impedance protection function.
8.2.7.2 Delta current and delta voltage detection M13685-3 v7
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 97. The calculation of the changes
of currents and voltages is based on a sample analysis algorithm. The calculated delta
quantities are compared with their respective set values DI< and DU>. The algorithm detects a
fuse failure if a sufficient change in voltage without a sufficient change in current is detected
in each phase separately. The following quantities are calculated in all three phases:
• The change in voltage DU

• The change in current DI
The internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal is activated if the following conditions are fulfilled:
• The magnitude of the phase-ground voltage has been above UPh> for more than 1.5 cycles
(i.e. 30 ms in a 50 Hz system)
• The magnitudes of DU in three phases are higher than the corresponding setting DU>
• The magnitudes of DI in three phases are below the setting DI<
In addition to the above conditions, at least one of the following conditions shall be fulfilled in
order to activate the internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal:
• The magnitude of the phase currents in three phases are higher than the setting IPh>
• The circuit breaker is closed (CBCLOSED = True)
The first criterion means that detection of failure in three phases together with high current
for the three phases will set the output. The measured phase current is used to reduce the risk
of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is low, a voltage drop in the
system (not caused by fuse failure) may be followed by current change lower than the setting
DI<, and therefore a false fuse failure might occur.
The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled at the same time as
circuit breaker is closed. If CBCLOSED input is connected to FALSE , then only the first criterion
can enable the delta function.If the DUDI detections of three phases set the internal signal
FuseFailDetDUDI at the level high, then the signal FuseFailDetDUDI will remain high as long as
the voltages of three phases are lower then the setting Uph>.
In addition to fuse failure detection, two internal signals DeltaU and DeltaI are also generated
by the delta current and delta voltage DUDI detection algorithm. The internal signals DelatU
and DeltaI are activated when a sudden change of voltage, or respectively current, is detected.
The detection of the sudden change is based on a sample analysis algorithm. In particular
DelatU is activated if at least three consecutive voltage samples are higher then the setting
DU>. In a similar way DelatI is activated if at least three consecutive current samples are higher
then the setting DI<. When DeltaU or DeltaI are active, the output signals STDUL1, STDUL2,
STDUL3 and respectively STDIL1, STDIL2, STDIL3, based on a sudden change of voltage or
current detection, are activated with a 20 ms time off delay. The common start output signals

Technical manual
STDU or STDI are activated with a 60 ms time off delay, if any sudden change of voltage or
current is detected.
The delta function (except the sudden change of voltage and current detection)
is deactivated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to Off.
DUDI Detection
DUDI detection Phase 1
DeltaIL1
IL1
IL2
IL3 DI detection based on sample analysis OR
DI<
UL1
DU detection based on sample analysis

AND
DU>
1.5 cycle 20 ms DeltaUL1
a
a>b t t
UPh> b
IL1 DeltaIL2
IL2 DUDI detection Phase 2
DeltaUL2
IL3
UL2 Same logic as for phase 1
IL1 DeltaIL3
DUDI detection Phase 3
IL2
DeltaUL3
IL3
UL3 Same logic as for phase 1
UL1
a
ab
IPh> b AND
OR AND
CBCLOSED AND OR
UL2
a
ab
b AND
OR AND
AND OR
UL3
a
ab
b AND
OR AND
AND OR FuseFailDetDUDI
AND
Figure 97: Simplified logic diagram for the DU/DI detection part

Technical manual
intBlock
STDI
AND
20 ms
DeltaIL1 STDIL1
t AND
OR
20 ms
DeltaIL2
t STDIL2
AND
20 ms
DeltaIL3
t
STDIL3
AND
STDU
AND
20 ms
DeltaUL1 STDUL1
t AND
OR
20 ms
DeltaUL2
t STDUL2
AND
20 ms
DeltaUL3
t
STDUL3
AND
Figure 98: Internal signals DeltaU or DeltaI and the corresponding output signals
8.2.7.3 Dead line detection M13679-44 v4
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 99. A dead phase condition is
indicated if both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their respective setting
values UDLD< and IDLD<. If at least one phase is considered to be dead the output DLD1PH
and the internal signal DeadLineDet1Ph is activated. If all three phases are considered to be
dead the output DLD3PH is activated

Technical manual
Dead Line Detection

IL1
a
a<b AllCurrLow
b
AND
IL2
a
a<b
b
IL3
a
a<b
b
IDLD<
DeadLineDet1Ph
UL1
a AND
a<b
b OR DLD1PH
AND
UL2
a AND
a<b
b
AND DLD3PH
UL3 AND
a AND
a<b
b
UDLD<
intBlock
Figure 99: Simplified logic diagram for Dead Line detection part
8.2.7.4 Main logic GUID-D474A49E-D3A8-438C-B7E4-E527FEC2F335 v6
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 100. The fuse failure supervision
function (FUFSPVC) can be switched on or off by the setting parameter Operation to On or
Off.
For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an operation mode selector,
OpMode, has been introduced to make it possible to select different operating modes for the
negative and zero sequence based algorithms. The different operation modes are:
• Off. The negative and zero sequence function is switched off.

• UNsINs. Negative sequence is selected.
• UZsIZs. Zero sequence is selected.
• UZsIZs OR UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work in parallel
(OR-condition for operation).
• UZsIZs AND UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work in series
(AND-condition for operation).
• OptimZsNs. Optimum of negative and zero sequence current (the function that has the
highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will be activated).
The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to On. When selected it
operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms.
As soon as any fuse failure situation is detected, signals FuseFailDetZeroSeq,

FuseFailDetNegSeq or FuseFailDetDUDI, and the specific functionality is released, the function
will activate the output signal BLKU. The output signal BLKZ will be activated as well if the
internal dead phase detection, DeadLineDet1Ph, is not activated at the same time. The output
BLKU can be used for blocking voltage related measuring functions (under voltage protection,
energizing check, and so on). The output BLKZ shall be used to block the impedance
protection functions.
If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting parameter
SealIn is set to On it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase voltages is below the set

Technical manual
value USealIn<. This will keep the BLKU and BLKZ signals activated as long as any phase
voltage is below the set value USealIn<. If all three phase voltages drop below the set value
USealIn< and the setting parameter SealIn is set to On the output signal 3PH will also be
activated. The signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ will now be active as long as any phase voltage is
below the set value USealIn<.
If SealIn is set to On the fuse failure condition lasting more then 5 seconds is stored in the non-
volatile memory in the IED. At start-up of the IED (due to auxiliary power interruption or re-
start due to configuration change) it uses the stored value in its non-volatile memory and re-
establishes the conditions that were present before the shut down. All phase voltages must be
restored above USealIn< before fuse failure is de-activated and resets the signals BLKU, BLKZ
and 3PH.
The output signal BLKU will also be active if all phase voltages have been above the setting
USealIn< for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence voltage has been above the
set value 3U0> and 3U2> for more than 5 seconds, all phase currents are below the setting
IDLD< (criteria for open phase detection) and the circuit breaker is closed (input CBCLOSED is
activated).
If a MCB is used then the input signal MCBOP is to be connected via a binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit. The
MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block all the voltage related
functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpMode or OpDUDI. An
additional drop-out timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the
unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the
main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker.
The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the output signal BLKU in
order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The
impedance protection function does not have to be affected since there will be no line currents
that can cause malfunction of the distance protection.

Technical manual
Fuse failure detection

Main logic
TEST
TEST ACTIVE
AND
BlocFuse = Yes
BLOCK intBlock
OR
BLKTRIP 20 ms 100 ms
AND t t
FusefailStarted
All UL < USealIn<

OR
AND
3PH
AND
SealIn = On AND
AND
Any UL < UsealIn<
FuseFailDetDUDI
AND 5s
OpDUDI = On
OR t
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND
AND
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
UNsINs OR
UZsIZs OR
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
OpMode
UZsIZs AND UNsINs
OptimZsNs
OR
CurrZeroSeq
a AND
CurrNegSeq a>b
b
AND
DeadLineDet1Ph 200 ms
AND BLKZ
t OR AND
150 ms
MCBOP t
AND BLKU
60 s
t OR OR
All UL > UsealIn<
AND
VoltZeroSeq 5s
VoltNegSeq OR t
AllCurrLow
CBCLOSED
DISCPOS IEC10000033-2-en.vsd
Figure 100: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main logic

Technical manual

M16069-1 v12
Table 133: FUFSPVCtechnical data

Operate voltage, zero sequence (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate current, zero sequence (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir
Operate voltage, negative sequence (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate current, negative sequence (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir
Operate voltage change level (1-100)% of UBase ±10.0% of Ur
Operate current change level (1–100)% of IBase ±10.0% of Ir
Operate phase voltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate phase current (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir
Operate phase dead line voltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate phase dead line current (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir
Operate time, start, 1 ph, at 1 x Ur to 0 Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start, 1 ph, at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms

Technical manual
200
Control
Section 9 Control
9.1 Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing
SESRSYN IP14558-1 v4
M14889-1 v4

Synchrocheck, energizing check, and SESRSYN 25
synchronizing
sc/vc
SYMBOL-M V1 EN-US
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct moment
including the breaker closing time, which improves the network stability.
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing (SESRSYN) function checks that the
voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least one side dead
to ensure that closing can be done safely.
SESRSYN function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and 1½ breaker
or ring busbar arrangements.
Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can have
different settings.
For systems, which can run asynchronously, a synchronizing feature is also provided. The main
purpose of the synchronizing feature is to provide controlled closing of circuit breakers when
two asynchronous systems are in phase and can be connected. The synchronizing feature
evaluates voltage difference, phase angle difference, slip frequency and frequency rate of
change before issuing a controlled closing of the circuit breaker. Breaker closing time is a
setting.

Technical manual
Control
SESRSYN
U3PBB1* SYNOK
U3PBB2* AUTOSYOK
U3PLN1* AUTOENOK
U3PLN2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
B1QOPEN TSTENOK
B1QCLD USELFAIL
B2QOPEN B1SEL
B2QCLD B2SEL
LN1QOPEN LN1SEL
LN1QCLD LN2SEL
LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR
LN2QCLD SYNFAIL
UB1OK UOKSYN
UB1FF UDIFFSYN
UB2OK FRDIFSYN
UB2FF FRDIFFOK
ULN1OK FRDERIVA
ULN1FF UOKSC
ULN2OK UDIFFSC
ULN2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE UDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
UBUS
ULINE
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
Figure 101: SESRSYN function block
9.1.4 Signals
Table 134: SESRSYN Input signals

U3PBB1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1, busbar 1
SIGNAL
U3PBB2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1, busbar 2
SIGNAL
U3PLN1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1, line 1
SIGNAL
U3PLN2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1, line 2
SIGNAL
BLKSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Block synchronizing
BLKSC BOOLEAN 0 Block synchro check
BLKENERG BOOLEAN 0 Block energizing check
B1QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1
B1QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1
B2QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2
B2QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2

Technical manual
Control

LN1QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line1
LN1QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to line1
LN2QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line2
LN2QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to line2
UB1OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer OK
UB1FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure
UB2OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer OK
UB2FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN1OK BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer OK
ULN1FF BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN2OK BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer OK
ULN2FF BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure
STARTSYN BOOLEAN 0 Start synchronizing
TSTSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Set synchronizing in test mode
TSTSC BOOLEAN 0 Set synchro check in test mode
TSTENERG BOOLEAN 0 Set energizing check in test mode
AENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of automatic energizing mode
MENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of manual energizing mode
Table 135: SESRSYN Output signals

SYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK output
AUTOSYOK BOOLEAN Auto synchro check OK
AUTOENOK BOOLEAN Automatic energizing check OK
MANSYOK BOOLEAN Manual synchro check OK
MANENOK BOOLEAN Manual energizing check OK
TSTSYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK test output
TSTAUTSY BOOLEAN Auto synchro check OK test output
TSTMANSY BOOLEAN Manual synchro check OK test output
TSTENOK BOOLEAN Energizing check OK test output
USELFAIL BOOLEAN Selected voltage transformer fuse failed
B1SEL BOOLEAN Bus1 selected
B2SEL BOOLEAN Bus2 selected
LN1SEL BOOLEAN Line1 selected
LN2SEL BOOLEAN Line2 selected
SYNPROGR BOOLEAN Synchronizing in progress
SYNFAIL BOOLEAN Synchronizing failed
UOKSYN BOOLEAN Voltage amplitudes for synchronizing above set limits
UDIFFSYN BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFSYN BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFFOK BOOLEAN Frequency difference in band for synchronizing

Technical manual
Control

FRDERIVA BOOLEAN Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing
UOKSC BOOLEAN Voltage amplitudes above set limits
UDIFFSC BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit
FRDIFFA BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation
PHDIFFA BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto operation
FRDIFFM BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Manual operation
PHDIFFM BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual Operation
INADVCLS BOOLEAN Inadvertent circuit breaker closing
UDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of voltage in p.u of set voltage base
value
FRDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of frequency
PHDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of phase angle
UBUS REAL Bus voltage
ULINE REAL Line voltage
MODEAEN INTEGER Selected mode for automatic energizing
MODEMEN INTEGER Selected mode for manual energizing
9.1.5 Settings
Table 136: SESRSYN Group settings (basic)

On
OperationSynch Off - - Off Operation for synchronizing function
On Off/On
UHighBusSynch 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for
synchronizing in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineSynch 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for
synchronizing in % of UBaseLine
UDiffSynch 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.10 Voltage difference limit for
synchronizing in p.u of set voltage
base value
FreqDiffMin 0.003 - 0.250 Hz 0.001 0.010 Minimum frequency difference limit
for synchronizing
FreqDiffMax 0.050 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.200 Maximum frequency difference limit
for synchronizing
CloseAngleMax 15.0 - 30.0 Deg 1.0 15.0 Maximum closing angle between bus
and line for synchronizing
FreqRateChange 0.000 - 0.500 Hz/s 0.001 0.300 Maximum allowed frequency rate of
change
tBreaker 0.000 - 1.000 s 0.001 0.080 Closing time of the breaker
tClosePulse 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Breaker closing pulse duration
tMaxSynch 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 600.00 Resets synch if no close has been
made before set time
tMinSynch 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Minimum time to accept
synchronizing conditions

Technical manual
Control

OperationSC Off - - On Operation for synchronism check
On function Off/On
UHighBusSC 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for
synchrocheck in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineSC 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for
synchrocheck in % of UBaseLine
UDiffSC 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.15 Voltage difference limit for
synchrocheck in p.u of set voltage
base value
FreqDiffA 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between
bus and line Auto
FreqDiffM 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between
bus and line Manual
PhaseDiffA 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between
bus and line Auto
PhaseDiffM 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between
bus and line Manual
tSCA 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck
Auto
tSCM 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck
Manual
AutoEnerg Off - - DLLB Automatic energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnerg Off - - Both Manual energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnergDBDL Off - - Off Manual dead bus, dead line energizing
On
UHighBusEnerg 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for energizing
check in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineEnerg 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for energizing
check in % of UBaseLine
ULowBusEnerg 10.0 - 80.0 %UBB 1.0 40.0 Voltage low limit bus for energizing
check in % of UBaseBus
ULowLineEnerg 10.0 - 80.0 %UBL 1.0 40.0 Voltage low limit line for energizing
check in % of UBaseLine
UMaxEnerg 50.0 - 180.0 %UB 1.0 115.0 Maximum voltage for energizing in %
of UBase, Line and/or Bus
tAutoEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for automatic energizing
check
tManEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for manual energizing
check

Technical manual
Control
Table 137: SESRSYN Non group settings (basic)

SelPhaseBus1 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for busbar1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
GblBaseSelBus 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, Bus
GblBaseSelLine 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, Line
SelPhaseBus2 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for busbar2
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
SelPhaseLine1 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for line1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
SelPhaseLine2 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for line2
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
CBConfig No voltage sel. - - No voltage sel. Select CB configuration
Double bus
1 1/2 bus CB
1 1/2 bus alt. CB
Tie CB
Table 138: SESRSYN Non group settings (advanced)

PhaseShift -180 - 180 Deg 1 0 Additional phase angle for selected
line voltage

Table 139: SESRSYN Monitored data

UDIFFME REAL - - Calculated difference of voltage in p.u
of set voltage base value
FRDIFFME REAL - Hz Calculated difference of frequency
PHDIFFME REAL - deg Calculated difference of phase angle
UBUS REAL - kV Bus voltage
ULINE REAL - kV Line voltage

Technical manual
Control
9.1.7.1 Basic functionality M14832-3 v8
The synchrocheck feature measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and compares
them to set limits. The output for closing operation is given when all measured quantities are
simultaneously within their set limits.
The energizing check feature measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to both
high and low threshold detectors. The output is given only when the actual measured
quantities match the set conditions.
The synchronizing feature measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and also
determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit breaker, from the
measured slip frequency. The output is given only when all measured conditions are
simultaneously within their set limits. The closing of the output is timed to give closure at the
optimal time including the time needed for the circuit breaker and the closing circuit
operation.
The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are measured
in the IED centrally and are available for the SESRSYN function for evaluation. By setting the
phases used for SESRSYN, with the settings SelPhaseBus1, SelPhaseBus2, SelPhaseLine1 and
SelPhaseLine2, a compensation is made automatically for the voltage amplitude difference
and the phase angle difference caused if different setting values are selected for both sides of
the breaker. If needed, an additional phase angle adjustment can be done for selected line
voltage with the PhaseShift setting.
For double bus single circuit breaker and 1½ circuit breaker arrangements, the SESRSYN
function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage selection. For double bus
single circuit breaker arrangements, selection of the correct voltage is made using auxiliary
contacts of the bus disconnectors. For 1½ circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage
selection is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors as well as the circuit
breakers.
The internal logic for each function block as well as, the input and outputs, and the setting
parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this document. For
application related information, please refer to the application manual.
9.1.7.2 Logic diagrams IP14739-1 v1
M14833-3 v5
The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the SESRSYN function
components such as Synchrocheck, Synchronizing, Energizing check and Voltage selection,
and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.
Synchrocheck M14834-3 v15

When the function is set to OperationSC = On, the measuring will start.
The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for UHighBusSC
and UHighLineSC.
If both sides are higher than the set values, the measured values are compared with the set
values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference: FreqDiffA, FreqDiffM,
PhaseDiffA, PhaseDiffM and UDiffSC. If additional phase angle adjustment is done with the
PhaseShift setting, the adjustment factor is deducted from the line voltage before the
comparison of the phase angle values.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must not
deviate from the rated frequency more than ±5Hz. The frequency difference between the bus
frequency and the line frequency is measured and may not exceed the set value FreqDiff.

Technical manual
Control
Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available and
used for the manual closing and autoreclose functions respectively, as required.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN function
and selective block of the Synchrocheck function respectively. Input TSTSC will allow testing of
the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output.
The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured conditions
match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can be delayed
independently for MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions.
A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions. UOKSC
shows that the voltages are high, UDIFFSC, FRDIFFA, FRDIFFM, PHDIFFA, PHDIFFM shows
when the voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference are out of limits.
Output INADVCLS, inadvertent circuit breaker closing, indicates that the circuit breaker has
been closed at wrong phase angle by mistake. The output is activated, if the voltage
conditions are fulfilled at the same time the phase angle difference between bus and line is
suddenly changed from being larger than 60 degrees to smaller than 5 degrees.
Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchrocheck.
OperationSC = On
AND TSTAUTSY
AND
invalidSelection AND
OR AUTOSYOK
AND
0-60 s
AND t
tSCA
UDiffSC 50 ms
AND t
UHighBusSC
UOKSC
AND
UHighLineSC
UDIFFSC
1
1
FRDIFFA
FreqDiffA
1
PHDIFFA
PhaseDiffA
UDIFFME
voltageDifferenceValue
FRDIFFME
frequencyDifferenceValue
PHDIFFME
phaseAngleDifferenceValue
32 ms 100 ms
AND t INADVCLS
PhDiff > 60° AND
PhDiff < 5°
Figure 102: Simplified logic diagram for the auto synchrocheck function
Synchronizing SEMOD171603-4 v12

When the function is set to OperationSynch = On the measuring will be performed.

Technical manual
Control
The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set values for
UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch, which is a supervision that the voltages are both live.
Also the voltage difference is checked to be smaller than the set value for UDiffSynch, which is
a p.u value of set voltage base values. If both sides are higher than the set values and the
voltage difference between bus and line is acceptable, the measured values are compared with
the set values for acceptable frequency FreqDiffMax and FreqDiffMin, rate of change of
frequency FreqRateChange and phase angle CloseAngleMax.
The measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum frequency will
initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation to be sent at
the right moment including the set tBreaker time. The calculation of the operation pulse sent
in advance is using the measured SlipFrequency and the set tBreaker time. To prevent
incorrect closing pulses, a maximum closing angle between bus and line is set with
CloseAngleMax. Table 140 below shows the maximum settable value for tBreaker when
CloseAngleMax is set to 15 or 30 degrees, at different allowed slip frequencies for
synchronizing. To minimize the moment stress when synchronizing near a power station, a
narrower limit for CloseAngleMax needs to be used.
Table 140: Dependencies between tBreaker and SlipFrequency with different CloseAngleMax values
tBreaker [s] (max settable value) tBreaker [s] (max settable value) SlipFrequency [Hz]
with CloseAngleMax = 15 degrees with CloseAngleMax = 30 degrees (BusFrequency - LineFrequency)
[default value] [max value]
0.040 0.080 1.000
0.050 0.100 0.800
0.080 0.160 0.500
0.200 0.400 0.200
0.400 0.810 0.100
1.000 0.080
0.800 0.050
1.000 0.040
At operation the SYNOK output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function
resets. The function will also reset if the synchronizing conditions are not fulfilled within the
set tMaxSynch time. This prevents that the function is, by mistake, maintained in operation for
a long time, waiting for conditions to be fulfilled.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN
function and block of the Synchronizing function respectively. TSTSYNCH will allow testing of
the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate output.

Technical manual
Control
OperationSynch=On
TSTSYNCH
STARTSYN
invalidSelection
SYNPROGR
AND
BLOCK AND
S
BLKSYNCH OR
R
UDiffSynch
50 ms SYNOK
AND
UHighBusSynch AND t
UHighLineSynch OR
FreqDiffMax TSTSYNOK
AND
FreqDiffMin
tClosePulse
FreqRateChange
AND
fBus&fLine ± 5Hz
tMaxSynch
CloseAngleMax AND
SYNFAIL
PhaseDiff=Close pulse in advance
FreqDiff
Close pulse
in advance
tBreaker
=IEC06000636=5=en=Original.vsd
Figure 103: Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function
Energizing check M14835-3 v12

Voltage values are measured in the IED and are available for evaluation by the Energizing check
function.
The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are live or
dead. This is done by comparing with the set values UHighBusEnerg and ULowBusEnerg for
bus energizing and UHighLineEnerg and ULowLineEnerg for line energizing.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must not
deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz.
The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the Automatic
functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs AUTOENOK and MANENOK
respectively will be activated if the fuse supervision conditions are fulfilled. The output signal
can be delayed independently for MANENOK and AUTOENOK conditions. The Energizing
direction can also be selected by an integer input AENMODE respective MENMODE, which for
example, can be connected to a Binary to Integer function block (B16I). Integers supplied shall
be 1=Off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both. Not connected input will mean that the setting is done
from Parameter Setting tool. The active position can be read on outputs MODEAEN resp
MODEMEN. The modes are 0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and 3=Both.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN
function respective block of the Energizing check function. TSTENERG will allow testing of the
function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output.

Technical manual
Control
manEnergOpenBays
MANENOK
OR
TSTENERG
BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK
selectedFuseOK
UHighBusEnerg
DLLB tManEnerg
AND
OR t
AND
OR
ULowLineEnerg AND
ManEnerg BOTH
ULowBusEnerg
DBLL
AND
UHighLineEnerg
TSTENOK
ManEnergDBDL AND AND
UMaxEnerg
fBus and fLine ±5 Hz
Figure 104: Manual energizing
TSTENERG
BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK
selectedFuseOK
UHighBusEnerg
DLLB 50ms tAutoEnerg
AND
OR t t
AND OR
AUTOENOK
ULowLineEnerg AND
BOTH
AutoEnerg
ULowBusEnerg
DBLL
AND
UHighLineEnerg
TSTENOK
UMaxEnerg AND
fBus and fLine ±5 Hz
Figure 105: Automatic energizing

Technical manual
Control
BLKENERG
BLOCK OR manEnergOpenBays
AND
ManEnerg
1½ bus CB
CBConfig AND
B1QOPEN
LN1QOPEN AND
OR
B1QCLD
B2QOPEN
AND
LN2QOPEN
1½ bus alt. CB AND OR

AND
OR
B2QCLD
AND
Tie CB
AND
AND
OR
AND
Figure 106: Open bays
Fuse failure supervision M14837-3 v11

External fuse failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary
inputs that are configured to the inputs of SESRSYN function in the IED. Alternatively, the
internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be used when available. There are two
alternative connection possibilities. Inputs labelled OK must be connected if the available
contact indicates that the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs labelled FF must be connected if
the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is faulty.
The UB1OK/UB2OK and UB1FF/UB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and the
ULN1OK/ULN2OK and ULN1FF/ULN2FF inputs are related to the line voltage. Configure them
to the binary input or function outputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of
the busbar and line voltages. In the event of a fuse failure, the energizing check function is
blocked. The synchronizing and the synchrocheck function requires full voltage on both sides,
thus no blocking at fuse failure is needed.
Voltage selection M14836-3 v9

The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformers for the
different arrangements is a basic part of the SESRSYN function and determines the voltages
fed to the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check functions. This includes the
selection of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages and MCB supervision.
The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig.
If No voltage sel. is set the voltages used will be U-Line1 and U-Bus1. This setting is also used in
the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure supervision for the used
inputs must also be connected.
The voltage selection function, selected voltages, and fuse conditions are used for the
Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check inputs.

Technical manual
Control
For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts to supply
Disconnector Open and Closed positions but, it is also possible to use an inverter for one of
the positions.
If breaker or disconnector positions not are available for deciding if energizing is allowed, it is
considered to be allowed to manually energize. This is only allowed for manual energizing in
1½ breaker and Tie breaker arrangements. Manual energization of a completely open diameter
in 1 1/2 CB switchgear is allowed by internal logic.
Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars M14838-3 v9
The setting CBConfig selected for Double Bus activates the voltage selection for single CB and
double busbars. This function uses the binary input from the disconnectors auxiliary contacts
B1QOPEN-B1QCLD for Bus 1, and B2QOPEN-B2QCLD for Bus 2 to select between bus 1 and bus
2 voltages. If the disconnector connected to bus 1 is closed and the disconnector connected to
bus 2 is opened the bus 1 voltage is used. All other combinations use the bus 2 voltage. The
outputs B1SEL and B2SEL respectively indicate the selected Bus voltage.
The function checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage transformers.
Inputs UB1OK-UB1FF supervise the MCB for Bus 1 and UB2OK-UB2FF supervises the MCB for
Bus 2. ULN1OK and ULN1FF supervises the MCB for the Line voltage transformer. The inputs
fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can alternatively be used dependent on the available signal. If a VT
failure is detected in the selected voltage source an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output
signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a VT failure. This output as well as the
function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic diagram is shown in
figure 107.
B1QOPEN
B1SEL
B1QCLD AND
B2QOPEN B2SEL
AND
1
B2QCLD
invalidSelection
AND
bus1Voltage busVoltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR
OR selectedFuseOK
AND
UB2OK AND
UB2FF OR USELFAIL
AND
ULN1OK
ULN1FF OR
BLOCK
en05000779-2.vsd
Figure 107: Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double
busbars

Technical manual
Control
Voltage selection for a 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement M14839-3 v8

Note that with 1½ breaker schemes three Synchrocheck functions must be used for the
complete diameter. Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker and the Tie breaker is described.
With the setting parameter CBConfig the selection of actual CB location in the 1 1/2 circuit
breaker switchgear is done. The settings are: 1 1/2 Bus CB, 1 1/2 alt. Bus CB or Tie CB.
This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and circuit
breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the SESRSYN function. For the bus
circuit breaker one side of the circuit breaker is connected to the busbar and the other side is
connected either to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar depending on the best selection of voltage
circuit.
Inputs LN1QOPEN-LN1QCLD, B1QOPEN-B1QCLD, B2QOPEN-B2QCLD, LN2QOPEN-LN2QCLD are

inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The
outputs LN1SEL, LN2SEL and B2SEL will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a
reference to the fixed Bus 1 voltage, which indicates B1SEL.
The fuse supervision is connected to ULN1OK-ULN1FF, ULN2OK-ULN2FF and with alternative

Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available from each fuse (MCB).
The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 voltage on one side and the other
side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2 voltage. Four different output combinations are
possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.
• The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed.

• The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1 circuit breaker
is closed.
• The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed.
• The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2 circuit breaker
is closed.
The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If a VT failure
is detected in the selected voltage an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal is true
if the selected bus or line voltages have a MCB trip. This output as well as the function can be
blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function block diagram for the voltage selection of a
bus circuit breaker is shown in figure 108 and for the tie circuit breaker in figure 109.

Technical manual
Control
LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD
B1QOPEN
LN2SEL
B1QCLD AND AND
B2SEL
OR
LN2QOPEN
AND invalidSelection
LN2QCLD AND
AND
B2QOPEN
B2QCLD AND
line1Voltage lineVoltage
line2Voltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK
UB1FF OR
OR selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
AND
UB2FF OR
USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR
ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR
BLOCK
en05000780-2.vsd
Figure 108: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1/2
breaker arrangement

Technical manual
Control
LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD
B1SEL
1
B1QOPEN AND
AND
B1QCLD AND
line1Voltage busVoltage
bus1Voltage
LN2QOPEN
LN2SEL
LN2QCLD AND
B2SEL
1
invalidSelection
OR
B2QOPEN AND
AND
B2QCLD AND
line2Voltage lineVoltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR
OR selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
AND
UB2FF OR
USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR
ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR
BLOCK
en05000781-2.vsd
Figure 109: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1/2
breaker arrangement.

M12359-1 v15
Table 141: SESRSYN technical data

Phase shift, jline - jbus (-180 to 180) degrees -
Voltage high limit for synchronizing and (50.0-120.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

synchrocheck ±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Reset ratio, synchrocheck > 95% -

Frequency difference limit between bus (0.003-1.000) Hz ±2.5 mHz
and line for synchrocheck

Technical manual
Control

Phase angle difference limit between bus (5.0-90.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
and line for synchrocheck
Voltage difference limit between bus and (0.02-0.5) p.u ±0.5% of Ur
line for synchronizing and synchrocheck
Time delay output for synchrocheck when (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
angle difference between bus and line greater
jumps from “PhaseDiff” + 2 degrees to
“PhaseDiff” - 2 degrees
Frequency difference minimum limit for (0.003-0.250) Hz ±2.5 mHz
synchronizing
Frequency difference maximum limit for (0.050-1.000) Hz ±2.5 mHz
synchronizing
Maximum allowed frequency rate of (0.000-0.500) Hz/s ±10.0 mHz/s
change
Maximum closing angle between bus and (15-30) degrees ±2.0 degrees
line for synchronizing
Breaker closing pulse duration (0.050-1.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
greater
tMaxSynch, which resets synchronizing (0.000-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
function if no close has been made before greater
set time
Minimum time to accept synchronizing (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
conditions greater
Voltage high limit for energizing check (50.0-120.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
Reset ratio, voltage high limit > 95% -

Voltage low limit for energizing check (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio, voltage low limit < 105% -

Maximum voltage for energizing (50.0-180.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
Time delay for energizing check when (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is
voltage jumps from 0 to 90% of Urated greater
Operate time for synchrocheck function Min. = 15 ms –
when angle difference between bus and Max. = 30 ms
line jumps from “PhaseDiff” + 2 degrees to
“PhaseDiff” - 2 degrees
Operate time for energizing function Min. = 70 ms –
when voltage jumps from 0 to 90% of Max. = 90 ms
Urated
9.2 Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 phase

operation SMBRREC IP14559-1 v6

Technical manual
Control
M14890-1 v7
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 SMBRREC 79
phase
5(0 -->1)
The auto recloser (SMBRREC) function provides:
• high-speed and/or delayed auto reclosing

• single and/or three phase auto reclosing
• support for single or multi-breaker applications.
The auto recloser can be used for delayed busbar restoration.
Up to five reclosing shots can be performed. The first shot can be single-, two-, and /or three-
phase depending on the type of the fault and the selected auto reclosing mode.
Several auto reclosing functions can be provided for multi-breaker arrangements. A priority
circuit allows one circuit breaker to reclose first and the second will only close if the fault
proved to be transient.
Each auto reclosing function can be configured to co-operate with the synchrocheck function.
SMBRREC
ON BLOCKED
OFF SETON
BLKON READY
BLKOFF ACTIVE
RESET SUCCL
INHIBIT UNSUCCL
START INPROGR
STARTHS 1PT1
TRSOTF 2PT1
SKIPHS 3PT1
ZONESTEP 3PT2
TR2P 3PT3
TR3P 3PT4
THOLHOLD 3PT5
CBREADY PERMIT1P
CBCLOSED PREP3P
PLCLOST CLOSECB
SYNC WFMASTER
WAIT COUNT1P
RSTCOUNT COUNT2P
MODEINT COUNT3P1
COUNT3P2
COUNT3P3
COUNT3P4
COUNT3P5
COUNTAR
MODE
ABORTED
SYNCFAIL
INHIBOUT
Figure 110: SMBRREC function block

Technical manual
Control
9.2.4 Signals
Table 142: SMBRREC Input signals

ON BOOLEAN 0 Switch AR On (at ExternalCtrl = On)
OFF BOOLEAN 0 Switch AR Off (at ExternalCtrl = On)
BLKON BOOLEAN 0 Set AR in blocked state
BLKOFF BOOLEAN 0 Release AR from blocked state
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset AR to initial conditions
INHIBIT BOOLEAN 0 Interrupt and inhibit reclosing sequence
START BOOLEAN 0 Start reclosing sequence
STARTHS BOOLEAN 0 Start high-speed reclosing without synchrocheck
TRSOTF BOOLEAN 0 Continue to shots 2-5 at a trip from switch-on-to-fault
SKIPHS BOOLEAN 0 Skip high speed shot and continue with delayed shots
ZONESTEP BOOLEAN 0 Coordinate local AR with down stream devices
TR2P BOOLEAN 0 Two phase trip occurred
TR3P BOOLEAN 0 Three phase trip occurred
THOLHOLD BOOLEAN 0 Hold AR in wait state
CBREADY BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker is ready
CBCLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker status
PLCLOST BOOLEAN 0 Power line carrier or other form of permissive signal is lost
SYNC BOOLEAN 0 Synchrocheck conditions are fulfilled
WAIT BOOLEAN 0 Wait for master
RSTCOUNT BOOLEAN 0 Reset counters
MODEINT INTEGER 0 Integer input used to set reclosing mode (alternative to
setting)
Table 143: SMBRREC Output signals

BLOCKED BOOLEAN AR is blocked
SETON BOOLEAN AR is operative
READY BOOLEAN AR is ready for a new sequence
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Reclosing sequence in progress
SUCCL BOOLEAN Reclosing is successful
UNSUCCL BOOLEAN Reclosing is unsuccessful
INPROGR BOOLEAN Reclosing in progress, inactive during reclaim time
1PT1 BOOLEAN Single-phase reclosing is in progress for shot 1
2PT1 BOOLEAN Two-phase reclosing is in progress for shot 1
3PT1 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing is in progress for shot 1

Technical manual
Control

PERMIT1P BOOLEAN Single-phase trip is permitted
PREP3P BOOLEAN Three-phase trip is prepared
CLOSECB BOOLEAN Close command for circuit breaker
WFMASTER BOOLEAN Wait signal to slave issued by master for sequential reclosing
COUNT1P INTEGER Number of single-phase reclosing shots
COUNT2P INTEGER Number of two-phase reclosing shots
COUNT3P1 INTEGER Number of three-phase shot 1 reclosings
COUNTAR INTEGER Number of total reclosing shots
MODE INTEGER Integer output for reclosing mode
ABORTED BOOLEAN General abort
SYNCFAIL BOOLEAN AR sequence is aborted by synchrocheck conditions not
fulfilled
INHIBOUT BOOLEAN AR sequence is aborted via INHIBIT input
9.2.5 Settings
Table 144: SMBRREC Group settings (basic)

On
ExternalCtrl Off - - Off To be set On if AR is to be used with
On external control
ARMode 3 phase - - 1/2/3ph AR mode selection
1/2/3ph
1/2ph
1ph+1*2ph
1/2ph+1*3ph
1ph+1*2/3ph
t1 1Ph 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 1.000 Dead time for shot 1, single-phase
reclosing
t1 3Ph 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 6.000 Dead time for shot 1, delayed three-
phase reclosing with synchrocheck
conditions
t1 3PhHS 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 0.400 Dead time for shot 1, high speed
three-phase reclosing
tReclaim 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Reclaim time
tSync 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum wait time for fulfilled
synchrocheck conditions
tLongStartInh 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Maximum allowed start pulse duration
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Circuit breaker closing pulse duration

Technical manual
Control

tCBClosedMin 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Minimum time that circuit breaker
must be closed before new sequence
is allowed
tUnsucCl 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximun wait time for circuit breaker
closing before indicating unsuccessful
Priority None - - None Priority selection between adjacent
Low terminals
High
tWaitForMaster 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Maximum wait time for release from
master
LongStartInhib Off - - On To be set ON if AR is to be used with
On maximum allowed start pulse
duration check
Table 145: SMBRREC Group settings (advanced)

NoOfShots 1 - - 1 Max number of reclosing shots
2
3
4
5
StartByCBOpen Off - - Off To be set ON if AR is to be started by
On circuit breaker open position
CBReadyType CO - - CO Circuit breaker ready signal type
OCO
t1 2Ph 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 1.000 Dead time for shot 1, two-phase
reclosing
t2 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Dead time for shot 2, three-phase
reclosing
reclosing
reclosing
reclosing
Extended t1 Off - - Off Extend dead time at loss of
On permissive channel
tExtended t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Extend three-phase dead time
duration
tInhibit 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Reset time for reclosing inhibit
CutPulse Off - - Off Shorten circuit breaker closing pulse
On at a new start
Follow CB Off - - Off Advance to next shot if circuit breaker
On has been closed during dead time
AutoContinue Off - - Off Continue with next reclosing shot if
On circuit breaker did not close
tAutoContWait 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Wait time after close command before
proceeding to next shot
UnsucClByCBChk NoCBCheck - - NoCBCheck Unsuccessful closing signal obtained
CB check by checking circuit breaker position
BlockByUnsucCl Off - - Off Block AR at unsuccessful reclosing
On

Technical manual
Control

ZoneSeqCoord Off - - Off Coordination of down stream devices
On to local protection unit’s AR
tSuccessful 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Delay time before indicating
successful reclosing
tSlaveDeadTime 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Wait time for the slave to close when
WAIT input has reset
9.2.6.1 Terminology explanation GUID-EA0760DF-8F0B-4146-8A42-3F20E75E1053 v1
Before describing the auto reclosing function it is first necessary to define the following
terminology:
• a shot is an attempt from the function to close a circuit breaker

• multi-shot is where more than one shot is attempted
• dead time is the time between a start of the function and the attempt to close the circuit
breaker
• reclaim time is the time from the circuit breaker closing command till the reset of the
function, should the auto reclosing attempt be successful and no new start is received
• high-speed shot is generally used for an application where the dead time is less than 1
second and synchrocheck is not required
• delayed auto reclosing is generally regarded as an application where the dead time is
greater than 1 second and where typically synchrocheck is required
• sequence is the auto reclosing cycle beginning with start and ending with successful,
unsuccessful or aborted reclosing as a result
• status is the state which the auto reclosing function have reached in the sequence
9.2.6.2 Status descriptions GUID-AFC069D6-ADA5-4D97-9699-8C9F058458EB v1
The auto reclosing function can be in one of the following five statuses:
“Inactive” GUID-BF80C969-FCBE-4CAB-BF71-9590A2DB433C v1
The auto recloser is in “inactive” status when the following conditions are fulfilled:
• the auto recloser is set to On and

• either the circuit breaker is not closed
• or the circuit breaker is not ready
The function will not react on any start from protection trips while in “inactive” status and
no automatic reclosing is possible.
“Ready” GUID-04F154EC-E236-40A4-A3E0-7624A2F6B132 v1
The function is in “ready” status when the following conditions are fulfilled:
• the circuit breaker is ready

• the circuit breaker must have been closed for more that the set time in setting:
tCBClosedMin
• the function is not in “blocked” status
• the function is not in “in progress” status
Only in “ready” status a start of the auto reclosing sequence is possible.

Technical manual
Control
“In progress” GUID-24F8890F-A8FA-4A6F-B9E8-08BDB17B9A0D v1

The function is in “in progress” status when the following condition is fulfilled:
• the auto reclosing sequence is started
Start can be initiated by either protection trip command or circuit breaker position change.
The second starting alternative is only possible when enabled by a setting.
In “in progress” status the dead time starts and the status ceases when the dead time expires.
Then circuit breaker close command is given and the function changes its state into the
"reclaim time" status.
“Reclaim time” GUID-D838C380-C74B-498C-82D6-3364E2F6BA22 v1

The auto recloser is in “reclaim time” status while the following conditions are fulfilled:
• the reclaim time has not yet expired

• the status is not interrupted by either a new start signal or a block signal
A new start signal during “reclaim time” status forces the function to proceed to next shot and
change state into “in progress” status, as long as the last shot is not reached.
“Blocked” GUID-9C38B1BE-3772-49AE-B4B3-391CE15D5CD2 v1
The function is in “blocked” status when an external blocking signal exists. No auto reclosing is
possible in “blocked” status. Only an external signal for cancellation of the blocking can cancel
this status.
9.2.6.3 Description of the status transition GUID-C12DF571-AC0D-4A04-9B9E-D53E15A24331 v1
From Table 146 below it is possible to see which status transitions are possible. When the auto
recloser is for instance in “inactive” status only two transition are possible:
• transition to “ready” status when the circuit breaker is ready and closed
• transition to “blocked” status by external blocking
The empty cells in the table indicate that no such transition is possible.

Technical manual
Control
Table 146: Status transition matrix

To → inactive ready in progress reclaim time blocked
From ↓ (dead time)
inactive activate activate BLKON
CBCLOSED and
CBREADY
ready deactivate activate START activate BLKON
CBCLOSED or or activate
CBREADY or STARTHS
activate INHIBIT
or RESET
in progress activate INHIBIT when activate BLKON
(dead time) or RESET CBCLOSED
issued
reclaim time activate RESET activate START activate BLKON
or INHIBIT and the last
shot has not
been reached
yet
blocked deactivate activate
CBCLOSED or BLKOFF and
CBREADY and CBCLOSED and
activate CBREADY
BLKOFF
9.2.6.4 Functional sequence description GUID-C73A160D-330B-4627-B8F0-A31C9B3F7417 v1
To comprehend this chapter better it is essential to first read chapters “Status

descriptions“ and “Description of the status transition” carefully.
The logic for most of the explained inputs, outputs, settings and internal signals, described in
this chapter, is shown in Figure 116. Other figures mentioned are in some way connected or
cooperate with Figure 116.
Before going into details in the following chapters, the short functional/feature summary is
given below.
The auto reclosing function is multi-shot capable and suitable for both high-speed and
delayed auto reclosing. The function can be set to perform a single-shot, two-shot, three-shot,
four-shot or five-shot reclosing sequence. Dead times for all shots can be set independently.
An auto recloser sequence can be initiated by:
• protection operation
• circuit breaker operation (when enabled by setting StartByCBOpen=On)
At the end of the dead time, provided that other conditions are fulfilled, a circuit breaker close
command signal is given. The other conditions to be fulfilled are:
• input signal SYNC is true, which typically indicates that power systems on the two sides of
the circuit breaker are in synchronism
• and that input signal CBREADY is true, typically indicating that circuit breaker springs are
charged.
If a circuit breaker close command is given successfully at the end of the dead time, a reclaim
time starts. If the circuit breaker does not trip again within reclaim time, the auto recloser
indicates a successful reclosing and resets into "ready" status. If the protection trips again
during the reclaim time, the sequence advances to the next shot. If all reclosing attempts have

Technical manual
Control
been made and the circuit breaker does not remain closed, the auto recloser indicates an
unsuccessful reclosing. Each time a breaker close command is given, a shot counter is
incremented by one.
Operation Off and On GUID-D868C9CF-CDB1-48AA-8B31-60C447FBD1D3 v1

The auto recloser can be switched Off or On with a setting or by external control inputs. With
the setting Operation = On, the auto recloser is activated and with the setting Operation = Off
it is deactivated. With the settings Operation = On and ExternalCtrl = On, the activation and
deactivation is made by signal pulses to the ON and OFF inputs, for example, from a control
system or by a control switch.
If the input conditions CBCLOSED and CBREADY, from the circuit breaker, are not fulfilled
while switching the auto recloser on, the auto recloser changes into “inactive” status and the
output SETON is activated (high). The auto recloser is not ready for auto reclosing. If, however,
the circuit breaker is closed and ready when switching the auto recloser on, the output READY
is activated and the function is prepared to start the auto reclosing cycle. The circuit breaker
must have been closed for at least the set value for setting tCBClosedMin before a start is
accepted. The logic for Off or On operation is shown in Figure 111.
Operation
AND OR S SETON
ExternalCtrl
R
ON AND
OR
OFF AND
StartByCBOpen
START AND
STARTHS AND
100ms OR
AND OR initiate
100ms
AND
TRSOTF
startThermal AND
CBReady
120ms
CBREADY OR S
t AND start
AND
AND
tCBClosedMin R
CBCLOSED
t
cbClosed AND
count0 AND READY
inhibit
OR
INHIBIT
Figure 111: Simplified logic for Operation Off/On and starting
Mode selection GUID-25A24DC8-80C8-4C42-A084-D25712049F06 v1

The auto reclosing mode is selected with the setting ARMode. As an alternative to the setting,
the mode can be selected by connecting an integer, for example from function block B16I, to
the MODEINT input. The six possible modes are described in Table 147 below with their
corresponding MODEINT integer value.

Technical manual
Control
When a valid integer is connected to the input MODEINT the selected setting ARMode will be
invalid and the MODEINT input value will be used instead. The selected mode is reported as an
integer on the MODE output.
Please note that tripping mode of the IED is defined in Trip Logic function block SMPPTRC. For
example for two-phase faults either 2ph or 3ph tripping and consequent auto reclosing can be
selected
Table 147: Type of reclosing shots at different settings of “ARMode” or integer inputs to "MODEINT"
MODEINT (Integer) ARMode Type of fault 1st shot 2nd - 5th shot
1ph 3ph 3ph
1 3ph 2ph 3ph 3ph
3ph 3ph 3ph
1ph 1ph 3ph
2 1/2/3ph 2ph 2ph 3ph
3ph 3ph 3ph
1ph 1ph 3ph
3 1/2ph 2ph 2ph 3ph
3ph - -
1ph 1ph 3ph
4 1ph+1x2ph 2ph 2ph -
3ph - -
1ph 1ph 3ph
5 1/2ph+1x3ph 2ph 2ph 3ph
3ph 3ph –
1ph 1ph 3ph
6 1ph+1x2/3ph 2ph 2ph -
3ph 3ph -
Auto reclosing shots GUID-817797BE-FAFC-4BC7-B288-F19416459DCE v1

A maximum of five auto reclosing shots can be selected with the setting NoOfShots. Every
shot has its own dead time setting.
The first shot differs from the other shots by the possibility to extend its dead time and to
utilize up to four different time settings for it.
For the first shot, there are separate settings for single-, two- and three-phase dead times, t1
1Ph, t1 2Ph and t1 3Ph. If only the START input signal is applied, and an auto-reclosing program
with single-phase reclosing is selected, the auto reclosing dead time t1 1Ph will be used. If one
of the TR2P or TR3P inputs is activated in in parallel with the START input, the auto reclosing
dead time for either two-phase or three-phase auto reclosing is used.
There is also a separate time setting facility for three-phase high-speed auto reclosing, t1
3PhHS. This high-speed auto reclosing is activated by the STARTHS input and is used when
auto reclosing is done without the requirement of synchrocheck conditions to be fulfilled. The
high-speed dead time shall be set shorter than normal first shot three-phase dead time. Note
that if high-speed three-phase shot is not successful the auto reclosing sequence will continue
with shot two.
A time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the dead time delay for the first shot. It
is intended to come into use if the communication channel for permissive line protection is
lost. In a case like this there can be a significant time difference in fault clearance at the two

Technical manual
Control
line ends, where a longer auto reclosing dead time can be useful. This time extension is
controlled by the setting Extended t1 and the PLCLOST input. The logic for control of extended
dead time is shown in Figure112 and Figure 116. Time extension delay is not possible to add to
the three-phase high-speed auto reclosing dead time, t1 3PhHS.
Extended t1
AND extendTime
PLCLOST
OR
initiate AND
AND
start
Figure 112: Control of extended dead time

Shots 2 to 5 are all three-phase shots and have only one corresponding time setting each, t2
3Ph, t3 3Ph, t4 3Ph and t5 3Ph.
Starting auto reclosing GUID-7794EA6E-7D73-46BD-A623-65DED8E45D05 v1

When a start is applied to the auto function, it status will change from “ready” status to “in
progress” status. When the dead time has expired, the close command is issued and the
reclaim time is started and the “in progress” status will change to “reclaim time” status.
The usual way to start a reclosing sequence, is to start it when a selective line protection
tripping has occurred, by applying a signal to the START input. If the auto reclosing mode with
only three-phase reclosing is selected, activation of the START input will start the three-phase
dead timer. When alternatively the START input signal is applied, and an auto reclosing mode
with single-phase reclosing is selected, the auto reclosing dead time for single-phase is used.
However if one of the TR2P or TR3P inputs is activated in connection with the START input, the
auto reclosing dead time for two-phase or three-phase auto reclosing is used. The STARTHS
input (start high-speed reclosing) can also be used to start a separate, high-speed three-phase
dead time in which case the synchrocheck condition will be bypassed.
To start a new auto reclosing cycle, a number of conditions of input signals need to be fulfilled.
The inputs are:
• CBREADY: circuit breaker is ready for a reclosing cycle, for example, charged operating
gear.
• CBCLOSED: to ensure that the circuit breaker was closed when the line fault occurred and
start was applied. The CBCLOSED condition must be present for more that the settable
time tCBClosedMin.
• no BLKON or INHIBIT signal is present.
When the start has been accepted, the internal signals “start” and “initiate” are set. The
internal signal “start” is latched and the internal signal “initiate” follows the length of the
signal on the START input. The latched signal “start” can be interrupted by a signal to the
INHIBIT input.
The simplified logic is shown in Figure 111.
The auto recloser is normally started by selective tripping. It is either a zone 1 or

communication aided trip, or a general trip. If the general trip is used the auto recloser must
be blocked, via the INHIBIT input, from all back-up tripping. The breaker failure function must
always be connected to inhibit the auto recloser. START makes a first shot with synchrocheck
conditions to be fulfilled, STARTHS makes its first shot without any fulfilled synchrocheck
conditions. The TRSOTF “trip by switch onto fault” input starts shots 2 to 5. It may be
connected to the “switch onto fault” output of line protection if multi-shot auto reclosing is
used.

Technical manual
Control
In normal circumstances, the auto recloser is started with a protection trip command which
resets quickly due to fault clearing. In case the start signal lasts for a too long time, the user
can set a maximum start pulse duration tLongStartInh. This start pulse duration time is
controlled by setting LongStartInhib. When the start pulse duration signal is longer than the
set maximum start pulse duration, the auto reclosing sequence will be interrupted in the same
way as if the INHIBIT input was set to true. The logic for the control of long start pulse
duration is shown in Figure 113.
LongStartInhib
start
AND
tLongStartInh
initiate
t
longStartInhibit
OR
Extended t1 AND
t13PhExtTimeout
Figure 113: Control of long start pulse duration

If the user wants to start the auto recloser from circuit breaker open position instead of the
protection trip signals, this starting mode is selected by enabling a setting StartByCBOpen.
Typically, a circuit breaker auxiliary contact of type normally open (NO) shall be connected to
the CBCLOSED and START inputs. Then the circuit breaker status change from closed to open
will generate an auto reclosing start pulse of limited length (100ms) subject to the usual auto
recloser checks. The auto reclosing sequence continues then as usual. Signals from manual
tripping and other functions, which shall prevent auto reclosing, need to be connected to the
INHIBIT input. The logic for start from circuit breaker open position is shown in Figure 111.
The function can also be set to proceed to the next reclosing shot (if selected) even if the
external start signal is not received but the breaker is still not closed. The user can set a
required time delay for the auto recloser to proceed without a new start with setting
tAutoContWait. Also the synchrocheck conditions not fulfilled will also make the auto recloser
to proceed to next shot. This automatic proceeding of shots is controlled by setting
AutoContinue and is shown in figure 114.
tAutoContWait
t
AND
commandCloseCB
AND S
R
OR
AND
OR
cbClosed AND autoInitiate
synchroCheckOK
AutoContinue
Figure 114: Automatic proceeding of shots
Blocking, resetting and inhibiting auto reclosing GUID-82719FE0-02E4-48FB-9685-2146480F3653 v1

The BLKON input is used to block the auto recloser for example, when certain special service
conditions arise. The auto recloser can also be blocked by an unsuccessful reclosing attempt.

Technical manual
Control
This is controlled by the setting BlockByUnsucCl. When the auto recloser is blocked it
immediately resets to its initial conditions and the ACTIVE output is unactivated. The
BLOCKED output indicates that the auto recloser is blocked. To unblock the auto recloser the
BLKOFF input must be activated.
The RESET input is used to reset the auto recloser to its initial conditions. When initial starting
conditions are fulfilled again, after a reset, the auto recloser is ready for a new reclosing
sequence.
If the INHIBIT input is activated it is reported on the INHIBOUT output. To ensure reliable
interruption and temporary blocking of the auto recloser a reset time delay tInhibit is used.
The auto recloser will be blocked the time set in tInhibit after the deactivation of the INHIBIT
input. The following internal inhibit signals are also affected by the setting tInhibit:
• inhibitWaitForMaster: after expiration of the tWaitForMaster time for the WAIT input to
reset, the reclosing cycle of the slave is inhibited.
• longStartInhibit: if start pulse duration is longer than the tLongStartInh time, the
reclosing cycle is inhibited.
The ABORTED output indicates that the auto recloser is inhibited while it was in one of
following internal states:
• inProgress: auto recloser is started and dead time is in progress.

• reclaimTimeStarted: the circuit breaker closing command has started the reclaim timer.
• wait: an auto recloser, acting as slave, is waiting for a release from the master to proceed
with its own reclosing sequence.
The SYNCFAIL output indicates that the auto recloser is inhibited because the synchrocheck or
energizing check condition has not been fulfilled within the set time interval, tSync. The
ABORTED output will also be activated.
The behavior of the functionality described above is described in Table 148 and Table 149
below.
Table 148: BLKON, BLKOFF, RESET, INHIBIT and SYNC behavior when the function is in "ready" status
Output → READY ACTIVE BLOCKED INHIBOUT ABORTED SYNCFAIL

Input ↓
None of below True False False False False False
inputs
activated
BLKON pulse False False True False False False
BLKOFF pulse True False False False False False
RESET pulse False False False False False False
INHIBIT pulse False False False True False False
SYNC True False False False False False
Table 149: BLKON, BLKOFF, RESET, INHIBIT and SYNC behavior when the function is in "in progress" status
Output → READY ACTIVE BLOCKED INHIBOUT ABORTED SYNCFAIL

Input ↓
None of below False True False False False False
inputs
activated
BLKON pulse False False True False False False

Technical manual
Control
BLKOFF pulse True False False False False False

RESET pulse False False False False False False
INHIBIT pulse False False False True True False
No SYNC False False False False True True
Auto reclosing sequence GUID-78AAE7CD-702E-407B-94D2-6A70BAFC8E70 v1

When the function has started and the dead time has elapsed during the auto reclosing
sequence, certain conditions must be fulfilled before the circuit breaker closing command is
issued. In three-phase reclosing, a synchrocheck and/or energizing check can be used. It is
possible to use a synchrocheck function in the same physical device or an external one. The
synchrocheck release signal shall be connected to the auto reclosing SYNC input. If reclosing
without synchrocheck is preferred the SYNC input can be set to TRUE (set high) permanently.
The synchrocheck release signal is not checked for single-phase or two-phase auto reclosing.
When a three-phase high-speed reclosing started by STARTHS input, synchronization is not
checked either, and the state of the SYNC input is disregarded. The SYNC input shall be true
within a set time interval, tSync. If it is not, the auto reclosing is interrupted and the SYNCFAIL
and ABORTED outputs are activated.
By choosing CBReadyType = CO (circuit breaker ready for a Close-Open sequence) the

readiness of the circuit breaker is also checked before issuing the circuit breaker closing
command. If the circuit breaker has a readiness contact of type CBReadyType = OCO (circuit
breaker ready for an Open-Close-Open sequence) this condition may not be fulfilled during the
dead time and at the moment of auto reclosure. The Open-Close-Open condition was however
checked at the start of the auto reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the circuit breaker is
prepared for a Close-Open sequence.
The reclaim timer, tReclaim, is started each time a circuit breaker closing command is given. If
no start occurs within this time, the auto recloser will reset. A new start received in “reclaim
time” status will move the auto recloser to “in progress” status and next shot as long as the
final shot is not reached. The auto recloser will reset and enter “inactive” status if a new start
is given during the final reclaim time. This will also happen if the circuit breaker has not been
closed within set time interval tUnsucCl after each circuit breaker close command. The latter
case is controlled by setting UnsucClByCBChk. The auto reclosing sequence is considered
unsuccessful for both above cases and the UNSUCCL output is activated.
If the circuit breaker closing command is given and the circuit breaker is closed within the set
time interval tUnsucCl, the SUCCL output is activated after the set time interval tSuccessful.
The logic for successful and unsuccessful reclosing indication is shown in Figure 115.

Technical manual
Control
initiate
reclaimTimeStarted AND
OR
AND UNSUCCL
OR tUnsucCl S
AND t unsuccessful
cbClosed
AND
UnsucClByCBChk
count0
OR R
tUnsucCl tSuccessful
AND SUCCL
commandCloseCB t AND S t
R
OR
Figure 115: Successful/Unsuccessful

Figure 116 shows the logic for most parts of an auto reclosing sequence. Figure 116 should be
read together with the other logic diagrams to get the whole picture.

Technical manual
ZoneSeqCoord
232
ZONESTEP AND
Control
MODEINT MODE
Section 9
start ARMode
initiate inProgress
TR2P and INPROGR
TR3P NoOfShots 1PT1
startThermal OR 2PT1
selection 3PT1
Dead time
reclaimTimeStarted 3PT2
tExtended t1 tExtended t1 is 3PT3
extendTime added to t1 1Ph inhibitThermalStart 3PT4
t
or t1 2ph or t1 3Ph 3PT5
SKIPHS Skips high-speed shot (t1 3PhHS) and PREP3P
continues with delayed shot (t1 3Ph) AND tReclaim PERMIT1P
AND t 1
t1 1Ph OR
t1 2Ph OR
Dead t1 3PhHS AND
t13PhExtTimeout
time inhibit
t1 3PH OR OR
settings t2 3PH synchroCheckOK
t3 3PH OR BlockByUnsucCl
t4 3PH AND
t5 3PH unsuccessful AND ACTIVE
1
t OR OR
AND S
Figure 116: Auto reclosing sequence

tSlaveDeadTime AND
slaveDeadTime sets every dead timer R
t BLOCKED
sequence. The outputs are:

to tSlaveDeadTime
tSync
SYNC AND t SYNCFAIL
inProgress AND
reclaimTimeStarted OR
CBReadyType wait AND ABORTED
CB OR
AND
readiness
AND inhibitWaitForMaster tInhibit
CBReady check t
OR
longStartInhibit count0
OR Counter COUNT1P
inhibitThermalStart COUNT2P
CutPulse inProgress COUNT3P1
AND Set COUNT3P2
OR COUNT3P3
OR COUNT3P4
AND
AND COUNT3P5
Reset COUNTAR

tPulse
Follow CB CLOSECB
OR
AND AND
cbClosed
50ms commandCloseCB
RSTCOUNT
RESET
BLKON
BLKOFF
INHIBIT INHIBOUT
A number of outputs from the function keeps track of the actual state in the auto reclosing
Technical manual
Breaker protection REQ650
1MRK 505 384-UEN C
Control
• INPROGR: any dead time is in progress

• 1PT1, 2PT1, 3PT1, 3PT2, 3PT3, 3PT4 and 3PT5: dead time is in progress for respective shot
and fault type
• ACTIVE: during dead time + reclaim time
• COUNTAR: total number of auto reclosing shots
• COUNT1P, COUNT2P, COUNT3P1, COUNT3P2, COUNT3P3, COUNT3P4 and COUNT3P5:
number of circuit breaker close commands made for respective shot
• STATUS: reports, only through the IEC 61850 protocol, the actual status of the function.
The possible statuses are described in Table 150 below. Their mapping to output signals and
their corresponding IEC 61850 integer value is also given in the table. Mapping from
IEC 61850 Ed2 standard is also shown for the AutoRecSt data object.
Table 150: Auto reclosing status reported by IEC 61850 in priority order
Data object AutoRecSt Description for mapped Mapped output signals / Description in IEC61850
value signals Comments Ed2
1 Ready READY Ready
2 In Progress INPROGR In Progress
3 Successful SUCCL Successful
4 Waiting for trip
5 Trip issued by protection
6 Fault disappeared
7 Wait to complete CLOSECB Wait to complete
8 Circuit breaker closed
9 Cycle unsuccessful UNSUCCL
10
-1 Aborted by synchrocheck SYNCFAIL
fail
11 Aborted ABORTED Aborted
-2 Set On, Not Ready SETON = 1, READY = 0,
ACTIVE = 0, SUCCL = 0,
UNSUCC = 0, INPROG = 0
-3 Set Off, Not Ready SETON = 0
-99 Others Means that auto recloser
is in transitional state,
that should not be visible
in steady state situation
There are several counters within the function. One for each shot and type of fault and one
overall counter for total number of circuit breaker closing commands. All counters can be reset
to zero using either the HMI command or the RSTCOUNT input or by an IEC 61850 command.
The circuit breaker closing command, CLOSECB output is a pulse with settable duration by
setting tPulse. For circuit breakers without anti-pumping function, close pulse cutting can be
used. This is controlled by the setting CutPulse. In case of a new auto recloser start pulse, the
breaker closing command pulse is cut (interrupted). The minimum duration of the closing
pulse is always 50ms.
The prepare three-phase trip, PREP3P output is usually connected to the trip function
SMPPTRC to force the coming trip to be three-phase. If the auto recloser cannot make a single-
phase or two-phase reclosing, the start from the trip function should be three-phase.

Technical manual
Control
The permit single-phase trip, PERMIT1P output is the inverse of the PREP3P output. It can be
connected to a binary output relay for connection to external protection or trip relays. In case
of a total loss of auxiliary power, the output relay drops and does not allow single-phase trip.
The setting Follow CB can be used to prevent close command to be issued when dead time has
expired and circuit breaker is already closed (e.g. by manual close command). If a new start is
received after the dead time expiration the auto recloser will advance to next shot.
If input SKIPHS is activated, and simultaneously STARTHS input is initiated then actually
normal three-phase shot one with dead time "t1 3Ph" will be started.
The ZONESTEP input is used when coordination between local auto reclosers and down
stream auto reclosers is needed. If function is in "ready" status and this input is activated the
auto recloser increases its actual shot number by one and enters directly the “reclaim time”
status for shot one. If a start is received during the reclaim time, the function will proceed with
the next shot (e.g. starting dead time for shot two). Every new pulse on the ZONESTEP input
will further increase the shot number. Note that ZONESTEP input will have such effect only if
local start signal was not activated, as shown in Figure 116. The setting NoOfShots limits of
course the maximum number of available shots. This functionality is controlled by the setting
ZoneSeqCoord.
By activating the THOLHOLD input the auto recloser is set on hold. It can be connected to a
thermal overload protection trip signal which resets only when the thermal content has fallen
to an acceptable level, for example, 70%. As long as the signal is high, indicating that the line is
hot, the auto reclosing is halted. When the signal resets, a reclosing cycle will continue. This
may cause a considerable delay between start of the auto recloser and the breaker closing
command. An external logic limiting this time and activating the INHIBIT input can be used.
The THOLHOLD input can also be used to set the auto recloser on hold, for longer or shorter
time periods, for other purposes if for some reason the auto recloser needs to be halted. The
logic for thermal protection hold is shown in Figure 117.
start inhibitThermalStart
THOLHOLD AND AND S
q-1 20ms
startThermal
AND
inhibit OR
Figure 117: Thermal protection hold

The auto recloser is set as master or slave in multi-breaker arrangements with sequential
reclosing with the setting Priority. The auto recloser for the first circuit breaker, e.g. near the
busbar, is set as master (when Priority=High) and the auto recloser for the second circuit
breaker is set as slave (when Priority=Low). While the master is in progress, it issues the
WFMASTER output. After an unsuccessful reclosing the WFMASTER output is also maintained
by the UNSUCCL output.
When activating the WAIT input, in the auto recloser set as slave, every dead timer is changed
to the value of setting tSlaveDeadTime and holds back the auto reclosing operation. When the
WAIT input is reset at the time of a successful reclosing of the first circuit breaker, the slave is
released to continue the reclosing sequence after the set tSlaveDeadTime. The reason for
shortening the time, for the normal dead timers with the value of tSlaveDeadTime, is to give
the slave permission to react almost immediately when the WAIT input resets. The mimimum
settable time for tSlaveDeadTime is 0.1sec because both master and slave should not send the
breaker closing command at the same time. The slave should take the duration of the breaker
closing time of the master into consideration before sending the breaker closing command. A
setting tWaitForMaster sets a maximum wait time for the WAIT input to reset. If the wait time

Technical manual
Control
expires, the reclosing cycle of the slave is inhibited. The maximum wait time, tWaitForMaster
for the second circuit breaker is set longer than the auto reclosing dead time plus a margin for
synchrocheck conditions to be fulfilled for the first circuit breaker. Typical setting is 2sec. In
single circuit breaker applications, the setting Priority is set to None. The logic for master-
slave is shown in Figure 118.
Master:
High (Master)
Priority
WFMASTER
inProgress AND
unsuccessful OR
Slave:
Low (Slave)
Priority
inhibitWaitForMaster
AND
start tWaitForMaster
AND t
WAIT
wait
AND slaveDeadTime
AND S
inhibit
commandCloseCB R
OR
reclaimTimeStarted
Figure 118: Master-Slave

If reclosing of the first circuit breaker is unsuccessful, the UNSUCCL output connected to the
INHIBIT input of the slave unit interrupts the reclosing sequence of the latter. The signals can
be cross-connected to allow simple changing of the priority by just setting the High and the
Low priorities without changing the configuration. The CBCLOSED inputs from each circuit
breaker are important in multi-breaker arrangements to ensure that the circuit breaker was
closed at the beginning of the sequence. If the High priority breaker was not closed its auto
reclosing sequence will not start and the low priority breaker will just continue its auto
reclosing sequence in accordance with its normal settings.
9.2.6.5 Time sequence diagrams M12458-10 v5
Some examples of the timing of internal and external signals at typical transient and
permanent faults are shown below in Figure 119 to 122.

Technical manual
Control
Fault
CBCLOSED
Closed Open Closed
CBREADY
START
SYNC
tReclaim
READY
INPROGR
1PT1
ACTIVE
CLOSECB t1 1Ph tPulse
PREP3P
SUCCL
Time
Figure 119: Transient single-phase fault, single-phase reclosing
Fault
CBCLOSED Open
Closed Open C C
CBREADY
START
TR3P
SYNC
READY
INPROGR
3PT1 t1 3Ph
3PT2 t2 3Ph
ACTIVE tReclaim
CLOSECB tPulse tPulse
PREP3P
UNSUCCL
Time
Figure 120: Permanent fault, three-phase trip, two-shot reclosing

Technical manual
Control
Fault
CBCLOSED
CBREADY
START
TR3P
SYNC
READY
INPROGR
1PT1
3PT1
3PT2
CLOSECB t1 1Ph
PREP3P
UNSUCCL tReclaim
Figure 121: Permanent single-phase fault, single-phase trip, single-shot reclosing,

ARMode=1/2/3ph
Fault
CBCLOSED
CBREADY
START
TR3P
SYNC
READY
INPROGR
1PT1
3PT1
3PT2
t2 3Ph
CLOSECB t1 1Ph
PREP3P
UNSUCCL tReclaim
Figure 122: Permanent single-phase fault, single-phase trip, two-shot reclosing,

ARMode=1ph + 1*2ph

Technical manual
Control

M12379-1 v13
Table 151: SMBRREC technical data

Dead time:
shot 1 “t1 1Ph” (0.000-120.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
shot 1 “t1 2Ph” whichever is greater
shot 1 “t1 3Ph “
shot 1 “t1 3PhHS”
Dead time: (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
shot 2 “t2 3Ph” whichever is greater
shot 3 “t3 3Ph”
shot 4 “t4 3Ph”
shot 5 “t5 3Ph”
Extend three-phase dead time duration “tExtended t1” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
whichever is greater
Minimum time that circuit breaker must be closed before (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
new sequence is allowed “tCBClosedMin” whichever is greater
Wait time for the slave to close when WAIT input has (0.100-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
reset “tSlaveDeadTime” whichever is greater
Maximum allowed start pulse duration “tLongStartInh” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
Circuit breaker closing pulse duration “tPulse” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
Reclaim time ”tReclaim” (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
Maximum wait time for release from master (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
“tWaitForMaster” whichever is greater
Reset time for reclosing inhibit “tInhibit” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
Wait time after close command before proceeding to (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
next shot “tAutoContWait” whichever is greater
Maximum wait time for fulfilled synchrocheck conditions (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
“tSync” whichever is greater
Delay time before indicating successful reclosing (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±50 ms
“tSuccessful” whichever is greater
Maximum wait time for circuit breaker closing before (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
indicating unsuccessful “tUnsucCl” whichever is greater
9.3 Interlocking IP15572-1 v2
9.3.1 Logical node for interlocking SCILO IP14138-1 v2
9.3.1.1 Identification
GUID-3EC5D7F1-FDA0-4F0E-9391-08D357689E0C v3

Logical node for interlocking SCILO - 3

Technical manual
Control
9.3.1.2 Functionality M15048-3 v6
The Logical node for interlocking SCILO function is used to enable a switching operation if the
interlocking conditions permit. SCILO function itself does not provide any interlocking
functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in separate function blocks containing
the interlocking logic.
9.3.1.3 Function block M15049-3 v6
SCILO
POSOPEN EN_OPEN
POSCLOSE EN_CLOSE
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN
Figure 123: SCILO function block
9.3.1.4 Signals
Table 152: SCILO Input signals

POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open position of switch device
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Closed position of switch device
OPEN_EN BOOLEAN 0 Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled
CLOSE_EN BOOLEAN 0 Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled
Table 153: SCILO Output signals

EN_OPEN BOOLEAN Open operation at closed or interm. or bad pos. is enabled
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN Close operation at open or interm. or bad pos. is enabled
9.3.1.5 Logic diagram M15086-3 v6
The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if the
interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a defined end position
for example, open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this case EN_OPEN) is false. The
enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same time only in the intermediate
and bad position state and if they are enabled by the interlocking function. The position inputs
come from the logical nodes Circuit breaker/Circuit switch (SXCBR/SXSWI) and the enable
signals come from the interlocking logic. The outputs are connected to the logical node Switch
controller (SCSWI). One instance per switching device is needed.

Technical manual
Control
POSOPEN SCILO
POSCLOSE =1 1
EN_OPEN
&
>1
&
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN & EN_CLOSE
>1
&
en04000525.vsd
Figure 124: SCILO function logic diagram
9.4 Apparatus control IP14560-1 v3
The apparatus control functions are used for control and supervision of circuit breakers,
disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given after
evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchrocheck, operator
place selection and external or internal blockings.
The complete apparatus control function is not included in this product, and
the information below is included for understanding of the principle for the use
of QCBAY, LOCREM, LOCREMCTRL, SCILO, SCSWI, SXSWI, SXCBR, XLNPROXY.
The apparatus control function APC10 for up to 10 apparatuses is used for control and
supervision of circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. Permission
to operate is given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking,
synchrocheck, operator place selection and external or internal blockings.
Apparatus control features:
• Select-Execute principle to give high reliability

• Selection function to prevent simultaneous operation
• Selection and supervision of operator place
• Command supervision
• Block/deblock of operation
• Block/deblock of updating of position indications
• Substitution of position and quality indications
• Overriding of interlocking functions
• Overriding of synchrocheck
• Operation counter
• Suppression of mid position
Two types of command models can be used:
• Direct with normal security

• SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security
In normal security, the command is processed and the resulting position is not supervised.
However with enhanced security, the command is processed and the resulting position is
supervised.

Technical manual
Control
Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position is not
supervised. Enhanced security means that the command is evaluated with an additional
supervision of the status value of the control object. The command sequence with enhanced
security is always terminated by a CommandTermination service primitive and an AddCause
telling if the command was successful or if something went wrong.
Control operation can be performed from the local HMI with authority control if so defined.
The switch controller SCSWI initializes and supervises all functions to properly select and
operate switching primary apparatuses. Each of the 10 switch controllers SCSWI may handle
and operate on one three-phase apparatus.
Each of the 3 circuit breaker controllers SXCBR provides the actual position status and pass
the commands to the primary circuit breaker and supervises the switching operation and
positions.
Each of the 9 circuit switch controllers SXSWI provides the actual position status and pass the
commands to the primary disconnectors and earthing switches and supervises the switching
operation and positions.
A bay can handle, for example a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or a capacitor bank. The
different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the apparatus control
functions directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic sequences.
Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a Substation

Automation system, the object-oriented approach with a function block that handles the
interaction and status of each process object ensures consistency in the process information
used by higher-level control functions.
Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and supervised by one
function block (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type of signals used for the control of a
breaker or a disconnector are almost the same, the same function block type is used to handle
these two types of apparatuses.
The SCSWI function block is connected either to an SXCBR function block (for circuit breakers)
or to an SXSWI function block (for disconnectors and earthing switches). The physical process
in the switchyard is connected to these two function blocks via binary inputs and outputs.
Four types of function blocks are available to cover most of the control and supervision within
the bay. These function blocks are interconnected to form a control function reflecting the
switchyard configuration. The total number used depends on the switchyard configuration.
These types are:
• Bay control QCBAY

• Switch controller SCSWI
• Circuit breaker SXCBR
• Circuit switch SXSWI
The functions Local Remote (LOCREM) and Local Remote Control (LOCREMCTRL), to handle
the local/remote switch, also belong to the apparatus control function.
The principles of operation, function blocks, input and output signals and setting parameters
for all these functions are described below.

Technical manual
Control
9.4.3 Error handling GUID-6C31D291-74E8-46A3-8FC2-D3959C2458A5 v7
Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be set
with a value. Table 154 describes the cause values given on local HMI. The translation to
AddCause values specified in IEC 61850-8-1 is shown in Table 155. For IEC 61850-8-1 edition 2
only addcauses defined in the standard are used, for edition 1 also a number of vendor specific
causes are used. The values are available in the command response to commands from IE
C61850-8-1 clients. An output L_CAUSE on the function block for Switch controller (SCSWI),
Circuit breaker (SXCBR) and Circuit switch (SXSWI) indicates the value of the cause during the
latest command if the function specific command evaluation has been started. The causes
that are not always reflected on the output L_CAUSE, with description of the typical reason are
listed in table 156.
Table 154: Values for "cause" signal

Cause Name Description Supported
number
0 None Control action successfully executed X
1 Not-supported Given for Cancel request with Direct Control in Ready state X
2 Blocked-by-switching- Not successful since one of the downstream Loc switches X
hierarchy like in CSWI has the value TRUE
3 Select-failed Cancelled due to an unsuccessful selection (select service) X
4 Invalid-position Control action is aborted due to invalid switch position (Pos X
in XCBR or XSWI)
5 Position-reached Switch is already in the intended position (Pos in XCBR or X
XSWI)
6 Parameter-change-in- Control action is blocked due to running parameter change X
execution
7 Step-limit Control action is blocked, because tap changer has reached X
the limit (EndPosR or EndPosL in YLTC)
8 Blocked-by-Mode Control action is blocked, because the LN (CSWI or XCBR/ X
XSWI) is in a mode (Mod) which doesn’t allow any switching
9 Blocked-by-process Control action is blocked due to some external event at X
process level that prevents a successful operation, for
example blocking indication (EEHealth in XCBR or XSWI)
10 Blocked-by- Control action is blocked due to interlocking of switching X
interlocking devices (in CILO attribute EnaOpn.stVal=”FALSE” or
EnaCls.stVal=”FALSE”
11 Blocked-by- Control action with synchrocheck is aborted due to exceed X
synchrocheck of time limit and missing synchronism condition
12 Command-already-in- Control, select or cancel service is rejected, because control X
execution action is already running
13 Blocked-by-health Control action is blocked due to some internal event that X
prevents a successful operation (Health)
14 1-of-n-control Control action is blocked because another control action in X
a domain (for example, substation) is already running (in
any XCBR or XSWI of that domain, the DPC.stSeld=”TRUE”)
15 Abortion-by-cancel Control action is aborted due to cancel service X
16 Time-limit-over Control action is terminated due to exceed of some time X
limit
17 Abortion-by-trip Control action is aborted due to a trip (PTRC with X
ACT.general=”TRUE”)
18 Object-not-selected Control action is rejected, because control object was not X
selected

Technical manual
Control
Cause Name Description Supported

number
19 Object-already- Select action is not executed because the addressed object X
selected is already selected
20 No-access-authority Control action is blocked due to lack of access authority X
21 Ended-with- Control action executed but the end position has overshoot
overshoot
22 Abortion-due-to- Control action is aborted due to deviation between the
deviation command value and the measured value
23 Abortion-by- Control action is aborted due to the loss of connection with
communication-loss the client that issued the control
24 Blocked-by-command Control action is blocked due to the data attribute X
CmdBlk.stVal is TRUE
26 Inconsistent- The parameters between successive control services are X
parameters not consistent, for example the ctlNum of Select and
Operate service are different
27 Locked-by-other- Another client has already reserved the object X
client
-22 Wrong-Ctl-model Command from client uses wrong control model X
-23 Blocked-by-command Blocked by command X
-24 Blocked-for-open- Blocked for Open command X
cmd
-25 Blocked-for-close- Blocked for Close Command X
cmd
-30 Long-operation-time Operation time too long X
-31 Switch-not-start- Switch did not start moving X
moving
-32 Persistent- Switch stopped in intermediate state X
intermediate-state
-33 Switch-returned-to- Switch returned to the initial position X
init-pos
-34 Switch-in-bad-state Switch is in a bad position state X
-35 Not-expected-final- Switch did not reach the expected final position X
position
Table 155: Translation of cause values for IEC 61850 edition 2 and edition 1
Internal Cause AddCause in IEC 61850-8-1 Name
Number
Ed 2 Ed 1
0 25 0 None
1 1 1 Not-supported
2 2 2 Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
3 3 3 Select-failed
4 4 4 Invalid-position
5 5 5 Position-reached
6 6 6 Parameter-change-in-execution
7 7 7 Step-limit
8 8 8 Blocked-by-Mode
9 9 9 Blocked-by-process

Technical manual
Control
Internal Cause AddCause in IEC 61850-8-1 Name

Number
Ed 2 Ed 1
10 10 10 Blocked-by-interlocking
11 11 11 Blocked-by-synchrocheck
12 12 12 Command-already-in-execution
13 13 13 Blocked-by-health
14 14 14 1-of-n-control
15 15 1 Abortion-by-cancel
16 16 16 Time-limit-over
17 17 17 Abortion-by-trip
18 18 18 Object-not-selected
19 19 3 Object-already-selected
20 20 3 No-access-authority
24 24 -23 Blocked-by-command
26 26 6 Inconsistent-parameters
27 27 12 Locked-by-other-client
-22 0 -22 Wrong-Ctl-model
-23 24 -23 Blocked-by-command
-24 9 -24 Blocked-for-open-cmd
-25 9 -25 Blocked-for-close-cmd
-30 16 -30 Long-operation-time
-31 16 -31 Switch-not-start-moving
-32 4 -32 Persistent-intermediate-state
-33 22 -33 Switch-returned-to-init-pos
-34 4 -34 Switch-in-bad-state
-35 22 -35 Not-expected-final-position
Table 156: Cause values not reflected on the output L_CAUSE

Cause number Cause description Conditions
3 Select-failed Canceled due to an unsuccessful selection
(select service)
8 Blocked-by-Mode Control action is blocked because the LN
(CSWI) is in a mode (Mod) which doesn’t allow
any switching or does not match the mode of
the command.
12 Command-already-in-execution Control, select or cancel service is rejected
because control action is already running.
13 Blocked-by-health Control action is blocked due to some internal
event that prevents a successful operation
(Health).
16 Time-limit-over Control action is terminated due to exceed of
some time limit.
18 Object-not-selected Control action is rejected because control
object was not selected.
19 Object-already-selected Select action is not executed because the
addressed object is already selected.

Technical manual
Control
Cause number Cause description Conditions

20 No-access-authority Control action is blocked due to lack of access
authority.
26 Inconsistent-parameters The parameters between successive control
services are not consistent, for example the
ctlNum of Select and Operate service are
different.
27 Locked-by-other-client Another client has already reserved the object.
9.4.4 Bay control QCBAY IP15597-1 v2
The Bay control (QCBAY) function is used together with Local remote and local remote control
functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. QCBAY also provides blocking
functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within the bay.
QCBAY
LR_OFF PSTO
LR_LOC UPD_BLKD
LR_REM CMD_BLKD
LR_VALID LOC
BL_UPD STA
BL_CMD REM
Figure 125: QCBAY function block
9.4.4.3 Signals
Table 157: QCBAY Input signals

LR_OFF BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Off position
LR_LOC BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Local position
LR_REM BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Remote position
LR_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Data representing the L/R switch position is valid
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the position updates
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the command
Table 158: QCBAY Output signals

PSTO INTEGER Value for the operator place allocation
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position is blocked
CMD_BLKD BOOLEAN Function is blocked for commands

Technical manual
Control

LOC BOOLEAN Local operation allowed
STA BOOLEAN Station operation allowed
REM BOOLEAN Remote operation allowed
9.4.4.4 Settings
Table 159: QCBAY Non group settings (basic)

AllPSTOValid Priority - - Priority Override Priority of originators,
No priority commands from both local, station
and remote are allowed
RemoteIncStation No - - No Both Station and Remote control are
Yes allowed but not Local when local
remote switch is in remote
9.4.4.5 Operation principle

M13446-4 v8
The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and blocking
conditions to other functions within the bay for example, switch control functions and voltage
control functions. The functionality of the Bay control (QCBAY) function is mainly described by
the LLN0 node in the IEC 61850-8-1 edition 2 standard, applied to one bay. In IEC 61850 edition
1 the functionality is not described by the LLN0 node or any other node, therefore the Bay
control function is represented as a vendor specific node in edition 1.
Local panel switch M13446-7 v8

The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch
connected to this function can have three positions (remote/local/off). The positions are here
defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from station and/or remote level and
local means that operation is allowed from the IED level. The local/remote switch is also on the
control/protection IED itself, which means that the position of the switch and its validity
information are connected internally, not via I/O boards. When the switch is mounted
separately from the IED the signals are connected to the function via I/O boards.
When the local panel switch (or LHMI selection, depending on the set source to select this) is in
Off position, all commands from remote and local level will be ignored. If the position for the
local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output will always be set to faulty state (3), which
means no possibility to operate.
To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the function
blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to QCBAY.
Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) M13446-16 v10

The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source To
Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/remote switch position
according to Table 160. In addition, there are two settings and one command that affect the
value of the PSTO signal.
If the setting AllPSTOValid is set to No Priority and the LR-switch position is in Local or Remote
state, the PSTO output is set to 5 (all), that is, it is permitted to operate from local, station and
remote level without any priority. When the external panel switch is in Off position, the PSTO
output shows the actual state of the switch that is, 0. In this case, it is not possible to control
anything. The LocSta command value is forced to FALSE if AllPSTOValid is set to No priority.

Technical manual
Control
If the setting RemoteIncStation is set to Yes and the LR-switch position is in Remote state, the
PSTO output is set to 2 (Station or Remote), that is, it is permitted to operate from both
station and remote level without any priority.
If the LR-switch position is in Remote state, and AllPSTOValid is set to Priority and
RemoteIncStation is set to No, the switching between station and remote level control is done
through the command LocSta. The command is accessible only through the IEC 61850 Edition
2 protocol.
Table 160: PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions
Local panel AllPSTOValid RemoteInc LocSta.CtlV PSTO LED Possible
switch (setting) Station al value indications on locations that
positions (setting) (command) LHMI shall be able
to operate
0 = Off - - - 0 Remote and Not possible
Local Off to operate
1 = Local Priority - - 1 Remote Off, Local Panel
Local On
1 = Local No priority - - 5 Remote and Local,
Local On Station or
Remote level
without any
priority
2 = Remote Priority No TRUE 6 Remote On, Station level
Local Off
2 = Remote Priority No FALSE 7 Remote On, Remote level
Local Off
2 = Remote Priority Yes - 2 Remote On, Station or
Local Off Remote level
2 = Remote No priority - - 5 Remote and Local,
Local On Station or
Remote level
without any
priority
3 = Faulty - - - 3 Remote and Not possible
Local to operate
Flashing
Blockings M13446-50 v6
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide the
possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured within a
complete bay.
The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:
• Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs related to
apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
• Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all configured
functions within the bay.
The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined in
the IED, otherwise the default authority level can handle the control without LogOn. The users
and passwords are defined with the IED Users tool in PCM600.

Technical manual
Control
9.4.5 Local/Remote switch LOCREM IP16319-1 v3
M17086-3 v11
The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are connected via the
function blocks local remote (LOCREM) and local remote control (LOCREMCTRL) to the Bay
control (QCBAY) function block. The parameter ControlMode in function block LOCREM is set
to choose if the switch signals are coming from the local HMI or from an external hardware
switch connected via binary inputs.
LOCREM
CTRLOFF OFF
LOCCTRL LOCAL
REMCTRL REMOTE
LHMICTRL VALID
Figure 126: LOCREM function block
LOCREMCTRL
^PSTO1 HMICTR1
^PSTO2 HMICTR2
^PSTO3 HMICTR3
^PSTO4 HMICTR4
^PSTO5 HMICTR5
^PSTO6 HMICTR6
^PSTO7 HMICTR7
^PSTO8 HMICTR8
^PSTO9 HMICTR9
^PSTO10 HMICTR10
^PSTO11 HMICTR11
^PSTO12 HMICTR12
Figure 127: LOCREMCTRL function block
9.4.5.2 Signals
Table 161: LOCREM Input signals

CTRLOFF BOOLEAN 0 Disable control
LOCCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Local in control
REMCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Remote in control
LHMICTRL INTEGER 0 LHMI control
Table 162: LOCREM Output signals

OFF BOOLEAN Control is disabled
LOCAL BOOLEAN Local control is activated
REMOTE BOOLEAN Remote control is activated
VALID BOOLEAN Outputs are valid

Technical manual
Control
Table 163: LOCREMCTRL Input signals

PSTO1 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 1
Table 164: LOCREMCTRL Output signals

HMICTR1 INTEGER Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input
9.4.5.3 Settings
Table 165: LOCREM Non group settings (basic)

ControlMode Internal LR-switch - - Internal LR- Control mode for internal/external LR-
External LR- switch switch
switch

Technical manual
Control
9.4.5.4 Operation principle M17087-3 v9
The function block Local remote (LOCREM) handles the signals coming from the local/remote
switch. The connections are seen in Figure 128, where the inputs on function block LOCREM
are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used. When the local HMI is used, the
inputs are not used. The switching between external and local HMI source is done through the
parameter ControlMode. The outputs from the LOCREM function block control the output
PSTO (Permitted Source To Operate) on Bay control (QCBAY).
LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM
LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM
LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO 10 HMICTR 10
PSTO 11 HMICTR 11
PSTO 12 HMICTR 12
Figure 128: Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with two bays and
two screen pages
If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can be
different for the included bays. When the local HMI is used the position of the local/remote
switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen page that is presented
on the local HMI. The function block Local remote control (LOCREMCTRL) controls the
presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote position to applicable bay and screen page.
The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined in
the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control without
LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the IED Users tool in PCM600.
9.4.6 Switch controller SCSWI IP15603-1 v2

Technical manual
Control
The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly select and
operate switching primary apparatuses.
SCSWI
BLOCK EXE_OP
PSTO EXE_CL
L_SEL SEL_OP
L_OPEN SEL_CL
L_CLOSE SELECTED
AU_OPEN RES_RQ
AU_CLOSE START_SY
BL_CMD CANC_SY
RES_GRT POSITION
RES_EXT OPENP OS
SY_INPRO CLOSEPOS
SYNC_OK POLEDISC
EN_OPEN CMD_BLK
EN_CLOSE L_CAUSE
XPOSL1* POS_INTR
XPOSL2* XEXINF
XPOSL3*
Figure 129: SCSWI function block
9.4.6.3 Signals
Table 166: SCSWI Input signals

PSTO INTEGER 2 Operator place selection
L_SEL BOOLEAN 0 Select signal from local panel
L_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local panel
L_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local panel
AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local automation function
AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local automation function
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the command
RES_GRT BOOLEAN 0 Positive acknowledge that all reservations are made
RES_EXT BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is made externally
SY_INPRO BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing function in progress
SYNC_OK BOOLEAN 0 Closing is permitted at set to true by the synchrocheck
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Enables open operation
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Enables close operation
XPOSL1 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL

Technical manual
Control
Table 167: SCSWI Output signals

EXE_OP BOOLEAN Execute command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Execute command for close direction
SEL_OP BOOLEAN Selected for open command
SEL_CL BOOLEAN Selected for close command
SELECTED BOOLEAN Select conditions are fulfilled
RES_RQ BOOLEAN Request signal to the reservation function
START_SY BOOLEAN Starts the external synchronizing function
CANC_SY BOOLEAN Cancels the external synchronizing function, started through
START_SY
POSITION INTEGER Position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position indication
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Closed position indication
POLEDISC BOOLEAN The positions for poles L1-L3 are not equal after a set time
CMD_BLK BOOLEAN Commands are blocked
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
POS_INTR BOOLEAN Stopped in intermediate position
XEXINF GROUP SIGNAL Execution information to XCBR, XSWI & XLNPROXY
GUID-7DABB496-EABE-48A4-8078-7ED5D6D4FE14 v2
AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE are used to issue automated commands as e.g. for
load shedding for opening respectively closing to the SCSWI function. They
work without regard to how the operator place selector, PSTO, is set. In order
to have effect on the outputs EXE_OP and EXE_CL, the corresponding enable
input, EN_OPEN respectively EN_CLOSE must be set, and that no interlocking is
active.
L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are used for local command sequence connected
to binary inputs. In order to have effect, the operator place selector, PSTO,
must be set to local or to remote with no priority. If the control model used is
Select before operate, Also the corresponding enable input must be set, and no
interlocking is active. The L_SEL input must be set before L_OPEN or L_CLOSE
is operated, if the control model is Select before operate.
If one multi-phase XCBR/XSWI or two single-phase XCBR/XSWI are used for a

two- or three-phase system, two or more of the inputs XPOSL1, XPOSL2 and
XPOSL3 are connected to the same source.

Technical manual
Control
9.4.6.4 Settings
Table 168: SCSWI Non group settings (basic)

CtlModel Dir Norm - - SBO Enh Specifies control model type
SBO Enh
PosDependent Always permitted - - Always Permission to operate depending on
Not perm at permitted the position
00/11
tSelect 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time between select and
execute signals
tResResponse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Allowed time from reservation request
to reservation granted
tSynchrocheck 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 10.00 Allowed time for synchrocheck to fulfil
close conditions
tSynchronizing 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 0.00 Supervision time to get the signal
synchronizing in progress
tExecutionFB 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time from command
execution to termination
tPoleDiscord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Allowed time to have discrepancy
between the poles
SuppressMidPos Off - - On Mid-position is suppressed during
On time tIntermediate; tIntermediate is
set on each connected XCBR/XSWI
function individually
InterlockChk Sel & Op phase - - Sel & Op phase Selection if interlock check should be
Op phase done in select phase

M13484-4 v4
The Switch controller (SCSWI) is provided with verification checks for the select - execute
sequence, that is, checks the conditions prior each step of the operation are fulfilled. The
involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking, reservation, blockings and
synchrocheck.
Control handling M13484-6 v7

.
Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are "direct with normal
security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". The parameter CtlModel
defines which one of the two control models is used. The control model "direct with normal
security" does not require a select whereas, the "SBO with enhanced security" command model
requires a select before execution. The command sequence for a command with control mode
SBO with enhanced security is shown in figure 130, with control mode direct with normal
security is shown in figure 131.

Technical manual
Control
Reservation SXCBR /
Client SCSWI
logic SXSWI
select
SEL_CL = TRUE
RES_RQ = TRUE
tReservation
Response
tSelect
RES_GRT = TRUE
SELECTED = TRUE
selectAck/AddCause = 0
requestedPosition = 10
opRcvd = TRUE
EXE_CL
opOK = TRUE, tOpOk

operateAck/AddCause = 0
operateAck/AddCause = 0
tExecutionFB
POSITION = 00, timeStamp

cmdTermination/AddCause = 0

cmdTermination/AddCause = 0
SELECTED = FALSE
SEL_CL = FALSE
RES_RQ = FALSE
RES_GRT = FALSE
IEC15000416-2-EN.vsdx
Figure 130: Example of command sequence for a successful close command when the
control model SBO with enhanced security is used
Reservation SwitchCtrl Switch

client
core core core
requestedPosition = 10
opRcvd = TRUE
RES_RQ
tReservation
Response
RES_GRT = TRUE
EXE_CL
opOK = TRUE, tOpOk
operateAck/AddCause = 0 operateAck/AddCause = 0
POSITION = 00, timeStamp POSITION = 00, timeStamp

cmdTermination/
POSITION = 10, timeStamp AddCause = 0
RES_RQ = FALSE
RES_GRT = FALSE
Figure 131: Example of command sequence for a successful close command when the
control model direct with normal security is used
Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position is not
supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is supervised in three
steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position. Each step ends up
with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step in the command sequence is finished.
If an error occurs in one of the steps in the command sequence, the sequence is terminated.
The last error (L_CAUSE) can be read from the function block and used for example at
commissioning.

Technical manual
Control
There is no relation between the command direction and the actual position.
For example, if the switch is in closed position it is possible to execute a close
command.
Before an execution command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter

PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no execution
command is sent. If the parameter is false the execution command is sent independent of the
position value.
Evaluation of position M13484-14 v5

The position output from the switches (SXCBR or SXSWI) is connected to the switch controller
SCSWI. The XPOSL1, XPOSL2 and XPOSL3 input signals receive the position, time stamps and
quality attributes of the position which is used for further evaluation.
In the case when there are two or more one-phase switches connected to the switch control
function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the switches to the resulting multi-
phase position. In the case when the position differ between the one-phase switches,
following principles will be applied:
All switches in open position: switch control position = open

All switches in closed position: switch control position = closed
At least one switch in open position and the switch control position = intermediate
other(s) in closed position:
Any switch in intermediate position: switch control position = intermediate
Any switch in bad state: switch control position = bad state
The time stamp of the output multi-phase position from switch control will have the time
stamp of the last changed phase when it reaches the end position. When it goes to
intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first changed phase.
In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will change
position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole discordance and is
supervised by this function. In case of a pole discordance situation, that is, the positions of the
one-phase switches are not equal for a time longer than the setting tPoleDiscord, an error
signal POLEDISC will be set.
In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values from the
switch modules circuit breaker (SXCBR)/circuit switch (SXSWI). At error the "cause" value with
highest priority is shown.
Blocking principles M13484-37 v5

The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY) and via the
IEC 61850 communication from the operator place.
The different blocking possibilities are:
• Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of position.

• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function is
active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and
functional and configuration data is visible.
The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this function,
that is, no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other functions. The above
blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Technical manual
Control
Dependence on operator place GUID-AB327F15-AF44-4ACC-8FA5-2A52AE4AE090 v4

For the commands from a communication protocol, such as IEC 61850-8-1, and through the
inputs L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE, the operator place is evaluated, and only the commands
from enabled operator places are accepted, see Table 160. Commands through the inputs
L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are always from the local operator place. For commands through
the inputs AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE, the operator place is not evaluated. If the operator place is
set to Off, the commands through the inputs AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE are not accepted.
Interaction with synchrocheck and synchronizing functions M13484-47 v5

The Switch controller (SCSWI) works in conjunction with the synchrocheck and the
synchronizing function (SESRSYN). It is assumed that the synchrocheck function is
continuously in operation and gives the result to SCSWI. The result from the synchrocheck
function is evaluated during the close execution. If the operator performs an override of the
synchrocheck, the evaluation of the synchrocheck state is omitted. When there is a positive
confirmation from the synchrocheck function, SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the
switch function Circuit breaker (SXCBR).
When there is no positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, SCSWI will send a
start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send the closing command to
SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled, see Figure 132. If no synchronizing
function is included, the timer for supervision of the "synchronizing in progress signal" is set
to 0, which means no start of the synchronizing function. SCSWI will then set the attribute
"blocked-by-synchrocheck" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in Figure 136.
SCSWI SXCBR
EXE_CL
OR CLOSE
SYNC_OK
START_SY
CANC_SY
SY_INPRO
SESRSYN
CLOSECB
Synchro Synchronizing
check function
Figure 132: Example of interaction between SCSWI, SESRSYN (synchrocheck and

synchronizing function) and SXCBR function
Time diagrams M13484-51 v7

The Switch controller (SCSWI) function has timers for evaluating different time supervision
conditions. These timers are explained here.
The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute
command signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command execution after
the selection of the object to operate.

Technical manual
Control
select
execute command
tSelect
timer t1 t1>tSelect, then long-
operation-time in 'cause'
is set
en05000092.vsd
Figure 133: tSelect
The Long-operation-time cause is only given on the output L_CAUSE. It is not

sent on protocols since the selection has already received a positive response,
and no operation has been issued. If an operation is issued after the time out,
the negative response is Object-not-selected.
The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the
reservation, that is, the time between reservation request and the feedback reservation
granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.
select
reservation request RES_RQ
reservation granted RES_GRT

t1>tResResponse, then 1-
tResResponse
of-n-control in 'cause' is
timer t1
set
Figure 134: tResResponse

The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the command
termination, see Figure 135.

Technical manual
Control
execute command
position L1 open
close
position L2 open
close
position L3 open
close
cmd termination L1
cmd termination L2
cmd termination L3
cmd termination *
position open
close
t1>tExecutionFB, then
tExecutionFB timer long-operation-time in
t1 'cause' is set
* The cmd termination will be delayed one execution sample . APCtExecutionFB=IEC0

5000094=2=en=Original
.vsd
Figure 135: tExecutionFB

The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between the
execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true at the time the
execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will not start. The start signal
for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck conditions are not fulfilled.
The parameter tSynchronizing is used to define the maximum allowed time between the start
signal for synchronizing and the confirmation that synchronizing is in progress.
execute command
SYNC_OK
tSynchrocheck
t1
START_SY
SY_INPRO
tSynchronizing t2>tSynchronizing, then

t2 blocked-by-synchrocheck in
'cause' is set
en05000095.vsd
Figure 136: tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing
9.4.7 Circuit breaker SXCBR IP15614-1 v3

Technical manual
Control
The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the actual status of positions and to
perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the
form of circuit breakers via binary output boards and to supervise the switching operation and
position.
SXCBR
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE SUBSTED
BL_OPEN OP_BLKD
BL_CLOSE CL_BLKD
BL_UPD UPD_BLKD
POSOP EN POSITION
POSCLOSE OPENP OS
CBOPCAP CLOSEPOS
TR_OPEN TR_POS
TR_CLOSE CNT_VAL
RS_CNT L_CAUSE
EEH_WARN EEHEALTH
EEH_ALM CBOPCAP
XIN
Figure 137: SXCBR function block
9.4.7.3 Signals
Table 169: SXCBR Input signals

LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
CBOPCAP INTEGER 3 Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = CO, 4 = OCO,
5 = COCO, 6+ = More
TR_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TR_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
EEH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment
XIN GROUP - Execution information from CSWI
SIGNAL

Technical manual
Control
Table 170: SXCBR Output signals

XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI for XCBR and XSWI
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
SUBSTED BOOLEAN Indication that the position is substituted
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
POSITION INTEGER Apparatus position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
TR_POS INTEGER Truck position indication
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health. 1=No warning or alarm,
2=Warning, 3=Alarm
CBOPCAP INTEGER Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = CO, 4 = OCO,
5 = COCO, 6+ = More
9.4.7.4 Settings
Table 171: SXCBR Non group settings (basic)

tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Allowed time for intermediate
position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open
command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close
command
InitialCount 0 - 20000 - 1 0 Initial number of operations (Initial
count value)

M13487-4 v8
The circuit breaker function (SXCBR) is used by other functions such as, for example, switch
controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC 61850 client residing in
another IED or the operator place. This switch function executes commands, evaluates block
conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a
switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of
erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value, see Table 154.

Technical manual
Control
SXCBR has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be
read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from local HMI, a binary input or
remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point Generic Control
8 signals (SPC8GAPC) for example. The health of the external equipment, the switch, can be
monitored according to IEC 61850-8-1. The operation counter functionality and the external
equipment health supervision are independent sub-functions of the circuit breaker function.
Local/Remote switch M13487-7 v4

One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXCBR to indicate the local/remote switch
position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that
change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means
that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all
commands (for change of position) are rejected, even trip commands from protection
functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in Figure 138.
Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR
From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level
en05000096.vsd
Figure 138: Local/Remote switch

SXCBR includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that
they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch controller, protection
functions and autoreclosure.
The blocking possibilities are:
• Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for the open command.
• Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for the close command.
• Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values.
Other signals related to the position will be reset.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function is active,
but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and
The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Substitution M13487-22 v5
The substitution part in SXCBR is used for manual set of the position and quality of the switch.
The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because that the real
process value is erroneous for some reason. SXCBR will then use the manually entered value
instead of the value for positions determined by the process.
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position

indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is
enabled, the other signals related to the position follow the substituted
position. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory. If the
function is blocked or blocked for update when the substitution is released, the
position value is kept the same as the last substitution value, but the quality is
changed to "questionable, old data", indicating that the value is old and not
reliable.

Technical manual
Control
When the position of the SXCBR is substituted, its IEC 61850-8-1 data object is
marked as “substituted", in addition to the substituted quality, but the position
quality of the connected SCSWI is not dependent on the substitution indication
in the quality, so it does not show that it is derived from a substituted value.

There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate.
tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is
sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 139
explains these two timers during the execute phase.
EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
t1 attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove
if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
tIntermediate
en05000097.vsd
Figure 139: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be sent
to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have
different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration
parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 140 shows the principle of the execute output pulse. The
AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect on both execute output pulses.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
Figure 140: Execute output pulse

Technical manual
Control
If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or
tClosePulse.
The execute output pulses are reset when:
• the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse
is set to true
• the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
• an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has elapsed.
If the breaker reaches the final position before the execution pulse time has
elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the function waits for the end of the
execution pulse before telling the activating function that the command is
completed.
There is one exception to the first item above: if the primary device is in open position and an
open command is executed or if the primary device is in closed position and a close command
is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when
tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false, the
execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS =1) when
a command is executed, the execute output pulse resets only when timer
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.
An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in
Figure 141 .
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE
tOpenPulse
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer
en05000099.vsd
Figure 141: Open command with open position indication
9.4.8 Circuit switch SXSWI IP15620-1 v2

Technical manual
Control
The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to provide the actual status of positions and
to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in
the form of disconnectors or earthing switches via binary output boards and to supervise the
switching operation and position.
SXSWI
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE SUBSTED
BL_OPEN OP_BLKD
BL_CLOSE CL_BLKD
BL_UPD UPD_BLKD
POSOP EN POSITION
POSCLOSE OPENP OS
SWOPCAP CLOSEPOS
RS_CNT CNT_VAL
EEH_WARN L_CAUSE
EEH_ALM EEHEALTH
XIN SWOPCAP
Figure 142: SXSWI function block
9.4.8.3 Signals
Table 172: SXSWI Input signals

LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
SWOPCAP INTEGER 4 Switch operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = C, 4 = O and C
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
EEH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment
SIGNAL

Technical manual
Control
Table 173: SXSWI Output signals

XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI for XCBR and XSWI
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
SUBSTED BOOLEAN Indication that the position is substituted
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
POSITION INTEGER Apparatus position indication
2=Warning, 3=Alarm
SWOPCAP INTEGER Switch operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = C, 4 = O and C
9.4.8.4 Settings
Table 174: SXSWI Non group settings (basic)

position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open
command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close
command
SwitchType Load Break - - Disconnector 1=LoadBreak,2=Disconnector,3=Earth
Disconnector Sw,4=HighSpeedEarthSw
Earthing Switch
HS Earthing
Switch
InitialCount 0 - 20000 - 1 0 Initial number of operations (Initial
count value)

M16494-3 v8
The users of the Circuit switch (SXSWI) are other functions such as for example, switch
controller, protection functions, autorecloser function, or a 61850 client residing in another IED
or the operator place. SXSWI executes commands, evaluates block conditions and evaluates
different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be

Technical manual
Control
allowed, SXSWI performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the
function indicates an appropriate "cause" value, see Table 154.
SXSWI has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be
read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary input or remotely from
the operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point Generic Control 8 signals
(SPC8GAPC), for example.
Also, the health of the external equipment, the switch, can be monitored according to IEC
61850-8-1.
Local/Remote switch M16494-6 v4

One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXSWI to indicate the local/remote switch
position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that
change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means
that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all
commands (for change of position) from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands
from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is
described in Figure 143.
Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR
From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level
en05000096.vsd
Figure 143: Local/Remote switch

SXSWI includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that
they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch controller, protection
functions and autorecloser.
The blocking possibilities are:
• Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command.
• Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command.
• Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values.
Other signals related to the position will be reset.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function is active,
but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and
The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Substitution M16494-21 v7
The substitution part in SXSWI is used for manual set of the position and quality of the switch.
The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because the real
process value is erroneous of some reason. SXSWI will then use the manually entered value
instead of the value for positions determined by the process.

Technical manual
Control
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position

indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is
enabled, the other signals related to the position follow the substituted
position. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory. If the
function is blocked or blocked for update when the substitution is released, the
position value is kept the same as the last substitution value, but the quality is
changed to "questionable, old data", indicating that the value is old and not
reliable.
When the position of the SXSWI is substituted, its IEC 61850-8-1 data object is
marked as “substituted", in addition to the substituted quality, but the position
quality of the connected SCSWI is not dependent on the substitution indication
in the quality, so it does not show that it is derived from a substituted value.

There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate.
tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is
sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 144
explains these two timers during the execute phase.
EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
tStartMove
if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
tIntermediate
en05000097.vsd
Figure 144: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be sent
to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have
different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration
parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 145 shows the principle of the execute output pulse. The
AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect on both execute output pulses.

Technical manual
Control
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
Figure 145: Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or
tClosePulse.
The execute output pulses are reset when:
• the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse
is set to true
• the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
• an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has elapsed.
If the controlled primary device reaches the final position before the execution
pulse time has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the function waits for
the end of the execution pulse before telling the activating function that the
command is completed.
There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position and
an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position and a close
command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration
parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when
tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the
execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS =1) when
a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only when timer
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.
An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in
Figure 146.

Technical manual
Control
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE
tOpenPulse
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer
en05000099.vsd
Figure 146: Open command with open position indication
9.4.9 Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY
9.4.9.1 Functionality GUID-11F9CA1C-8E20-489B-822B-34DACC59553A v1
The proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE (XLNPROXY) gives an internal
representation of the position status and control response for a switch modelled in a breaker
IED. This representation is identical to that of an SXCBR or SXSWI function.
9.4.9.2 Function block GUID-408513CD-A87E-45E8-8E44-24E153947F02 v1
XLNPROXY
BEH* XPOS
BEH_VALID* SELECTED
LOC* OP_BLKD
LOC_VALID* CL_BLKD
BLKOPN* OPENPOS
BLKOPN_V* CLOSEPOS
BLKCLS* CNT_VAL
BLKCLS_V* L_CAUSE
POSVAL* EEHEALTH
POSVAL_V* OPCAP
OPCNT*
OP_CNT_V*
BLK
BLK_VAL
STSELD
STSELD_V
OPRCVD
OPRCVD_V
OPOK
OPOK_VAL
EEHEALTH
EEH_VAL
OPCAP
OPCAP_V
COMMVALID
XIN
Figure 147: XLNPROXY function block

Technical manual
Control
9.4.9.3 Signals
Table 175: XLNPROXY Input signals

BEH INTEGER -1 Behaviour
BEH_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on BEH input
LOC BOOLEAN 0 Local control behaviour
LOC_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on LOC input
BLKOPN BOOLEAN 0 Block opening
BLKOPN_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on BLKOPN input
BLKCLS BOOLEAN 0 Block closing
BLKCLS_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on BLKCLS input
POSVAL INTEGER 0 Switch position, Pos.stVal
POSVAL_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on POSVAL input
OPCNT INTEGER -1 Operation counter
OPCNT_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on OPCNT input
BLK BOOLEAN 0 Dynamic blocking of function described by the LN
BLK_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on BLK input
STSELD BOOLEAN 0 The controllable data is in the status "selected”
STSELD_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on STSELD input
OPRCVD BOOLEAN 0 Operate command for a controllable data object received
OPRCVD_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on OPRCVD input
OPOK BOOLEAN 0 Operate command for a controllable data object accepted
OPOK_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on OPOK input
EEHEALTH INTEGER -1 External equipment health
EEHEALTH_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on EEHEALTH input
OPCAP INTEGER -1 Operating capability
OPCAP_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on OPCAP input
COMMVALID BOOLEAN 0 Communication valid
SIGNAL
Table 176: XLNPROXY Output signals

XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI
SELECTED BOOLEAN Select conditions are fulfilled

Technical manual
Control

2=Warning, 3=Alarm
OPCAP INTEGER Switch / breaker operating capability
9.4.9.4 Settings
Table 177: XLNPROXY Non group settings (basic)

SwitchType Circuit Breaker - - Circuit Breaker 0 = CB, 1 = Load Break, 2 =
Load Break Disconnector, 3 = Earthing Switch, 4 =
Disconnector High Speed Earthing Switch
Earthing Switch
HS Earth Switch
position
GUID-A4CCC681-D4D8-4534-905D-1D8AD40E923B v1
The default values of the inputs BEH, OPCNT, EEHEALTH and OPCAP are set to
-1 to denote that they are not connected.
9.4.9.5 Operation principle GUID-D2679E0E-ABB5-46F0-AD9C-F6E8E8099534 v1
The proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE (XLNPROXY) is intended to be used
when the switch (XCBR/XSWI) is modelled and controlled in a breaker IED or similar unit on the
process bus. XLNPROXY packages the signals from the GOOSE receive function, normally
GOOSEXLNRCV, into the same format as used from SXCBR and SXSWI to SCSWI. It makes a
similar evaluation of the command response as SXCBR and SXSWI when a command is issued
from the connected SCSWI.
9.4.9.6 Position supervision GUID-95C72346-A577-4F0A-8584-8E1593B9B947 v1
XLNPROXY has two outputs for position indication: OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS. Position is a
double point indication and the OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS are binary outputs intended to be
used for condition logics to protection and control functions
Normally, the position outputs, OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS, follow the value of the input
POSVAL. However, if the POSVAL_V input is FALSE, the communication is lost (COMMVALID =
FALSE), or the quality of the position received is bad, the OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS are both
set to FALSE.
9.4.9.7 Command response evaluation GUID-A2CDC1AE-A6F5-478B-B6E5-3442C54212D8 v1
The command evaluation is triggered through the group input XIN that is connected to the
SCSWI function controlling the switch.

Technical manual
Control
If an operation is initiated by the SCSWI, the XLNPROXY function checks if the switch is
blocked for the operation direction and that the position moves to the desired position within
the two time limits tStartMove and tIntermediate. The default values for tStartMove and
tIntermediate are for a breaker. The typical values for a disconnector are:
• tStartMove = 3s
• tIntermediate = 15s
In most cases, tStartMove and tIntermediate can be set to the same values as
in the source XCBR or XSWI function. However, if the time limits are set very
close to the actual movement times of the apparatus, compensation may be
needed for the communication delays and differences in cycle time of the
XLNPROXY function and the source function. The compensation should be in
the range of 0 - 5ms.
When the switch has started moving, it issues a response to the SCSWI function that the
operation has started. If it does not start moving within tStartMove, the command is deemed
as failed, and a cause is raised on the L_CAUSE output and sent to the SCSWI. The different
causes it can identify are listed in order of priority in table 1. The detection of the different
ways of blocking is done while waiting for movement of the switch, but the cause is not given
until the tStartMove has elapsed.
Table 178: Possible cause values from XLNPROXY

Cause No Cause Description Conditions
8 Blocked-by-Mode The BEH input is 5.
2 Blocked-by-switching- The LOC input indicates that only local commands
hierarchy are allowed for the breaker IED function.
-24 Blocked-for-open-cmd The BLKOPN is active indicating that the switch is
blocked for open commands.
-25 Blocked-for-close-cmd The BLKCLS is active indicating that the switch is
blocked for close commands.
9 Blocked-by-process If the Blk input is connected and active indicating
that the switch is dynamically blocked. Or if the
OPCAP input is connected, it indicates that the
operation capability of the switch is not enough to
perform the command.
5 Position-reached Switch is already in the intended position.
-31 Switch-not-start-moving Switch did not start moving within tStartMove.
-32 Persistent-intermediate-state The switch stopped in intermediate state for longer
than tIntermediate.
-33 Switch-returned-to-init-pos Switch returned to the initial position.
-34 Switch-in-bad-state Switch is in a bad position.
-35 Not-expected-final-position Switch did not reach the expected final position.
The L_CAUSE output keeps its output value until a new command sequence has been started.
If the quality of the position or the communication becomes bad, the command evaluation
replaces the uncertain position value with intermediate position. Thus, as long as the quality is
bad, all commands will result in the cause Persistant-intermediate-state, -32.
If the switch in the merging unit has the behaviour set to Test or Test blocked, when the
IED has the behaviour On or Blocked, all data from the switch is regarded as invalid. Thus, any
command will fail with the cause PersistantiIntermediate-state, -32, and if selection is used for

Technical manual
Control
the switch, all attempts to select the connected SCSWI will fail with the cause Select-failed, 3,
from the SCSWI.
It is possible to speed up the command response for when the command has been started by
the switch in the breaker IED by connecting the inputs OPOK and OPOK_VAL. Then the
blocking check is only done until OPOK is activated and confirmation of that the command has
been started is given to the SCSWI function.
If the inputs STSELD and STSELD_V are connected, the switch in the breaker IED is assumed to
use selection. Then the SCSWI will wait for a selected indication, STSELD input of XLNPROXY,
before accepting selection, this information is transferred to the SCSWI function from the
XLNPROXY through the group connection XPOS. If STSELD is not activated within tSelect of
the SCSWI function, the selection is deemed failed and it gives a negative selection
acknowledgement to the command issuer with the cause Select-failed. Further, if the
communication is lost, or the data received is deemed invalid, the selection will also fail with
cause Select-failed from the SCSWI.
9.5 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI

presentation SLGAPC SEMOD114936-1 v5
SEMOD167845-2 v3

Logic rotating switch for function SLGAPC - -
selection and LHMI presentation
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGAPC) (or the
selector switch function block) is used to get an enhanced selector switch functionality
compared to the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches are
used extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions operating on pre-set values.
Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and
an extended purchase portfolio. The selector switch function eliminates all these problems.

Technical manual
Control
SLGAPC
BLOCK ^P01
PSTO ^P02
UP ^P03
DOWN ^P04
^P05
^P06
^P07
^P08
^P09
^P10
^P11
^P12
^P13
^P14
^P15
^P16
^P17
^P18
^P19
^P20
^P21
^P22
^P23
^P24
^P25
^P26
^P27
^P28
^P29
^P30
^P31
^P32
SWPOSN
Figure 148: SLGAPC function block
9.5.4 Signals
Table 179: SLGAPC Input signals

UP BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
DOWN BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command
Table 180: SLGAPC Output signals

P01 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 1

Technical manual
Control

SWPOSN INTEGER Switch position (integer)
9.5.5 Settings
Table 181: SLGAPC Non group settings (basic)

On
NrPos 2 - 32 - 1 32 Number of positions in the switch
OutType Pulsed - - Steady Output type, steady or pulse
Steady
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate pulse duration, in [s]
tDelay 0.000 - s 0.010 0.000 Time delay on the output, in [s]
60000.000
StopAtExtremes Disabled - - Disabled Stop when min or max position is
Enabled reached

Technical manual
Control

Table 182: SLGAPC Monitored data

SWPOSN INTEGER - - Switch position (integer)

SEMOD114931-4 v8
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGAPC) function has
two operating inputs – UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the UP input, the function
will activate the output next to the present activated output, in ascending order (for example
if the present activated output is P03 and one activates the UP input then the output P04 will
be activated). When a signal is received on the DOWN input, the function will activate the
output next to the present activated output, in descending order (for example if the present
activated output is P03 and one activates the DOWN input then the output P02 will be
activated). Depending on the output settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In
case of steady signals, the output will be active till the time it receives next operation of UP/
DOWN inputs. Also, depending on the settings one can have a time delay between activation of
the UP or DOWN input signals and the output activation.
Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application Configuration
Tool, there are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the desired position directly
(without activating the intermediate positions), either locally or remotely, using a “select
before execute” dialog. One can block the function operation, by activating the BLOCK input.
In this case, the present position will be kept and further operation will be blocked. The
operator place (local or remote) is specified through the PSTO input. If any operation is
allowed the signal INTONE from the Fixed signal function block can be connected. SLGAPC
function block has also an integer value output, that generates the actual position number.
The positions and the block names are fully settable by the user. These names will appear in
the menu, so the user can see the position names instead of a number.
9.5.7.1 Graphical display SEMOD114931-35 v4
There are two possibilities for SLGAPC
• if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual position
names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters).
• if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions, but only the
first three letters of the name will be used.
In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it when building
the Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the control, the following
sequence of commands will ensure:

Technical manual
Control
From the graphical display:
Control
Control Sing le Line Diagram
Measurements Comma nds
Events
Disturb ance r eco rds
Settings
Diagno stics
Test
Chang e to the "Switche s" pag e Reset
of the SLD by left-righ t arrows. Authori zation
Sele ct switch by up-down Lan guage
arro ws
../Control/SLD/Switch
O I ../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control SMBRREC control

WFM Sele ct switch. Pre ss the
WFM
I or O key. A dialo g b ox
Pilo t se tup app ears.
Pilo t se tup
OFF OFF
Damage control
P: Disc N: Disc Fe
DAL
The pos will not b e mod ified
(outputs will not b e activa ted) unt il OK Cancel
you press the Enter button for O.K.
../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control
WFM
Pilo t se tup
OFF
Damage control
DFW
Figure 149: Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
From the single line diagram on local HMI.
9.6 Selector mini switch VSGAPC SEMOD158754-1 v3
SEMOD167850-2 v4

Selector mini switch VSGAPC - 43
The Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function block is a multipurpose function used for a variety
of applications, as a general purpose switch.

Technical manual
Control
VSGAPC can be controlled from the menu, from a symbol on the single line diagram (SLD) on
the local HMI or from Binary inputs.
VSGAPC
BLOCK BLOCKED
PSTO POSITION
IPOS1 POS1
IPOS2 POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21
Figure 150: VSGAPC function block
9.6.4 Signals
Table 183: VSGAPC Input signals

IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input
Table 184: VSGAPC Output signals

BLOCKED BOOLEAN The function is active but the functionality is blocked
POSITION INTEGER Position indication, integer
POS1 BOOLEAN Position 1 indication, logical signal
POS2 BOOLEAN Position 2 indication, logical signal
CMDPOS12 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 1 to position 2
CMDPOS21 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 2 to position 1
9.6.5 Settings
Table 185: VSGAPC Non group settings (basic)

On
CtlModel Dir Norm - - Dir Norm Specifies the type for control model
SBO Enh according to IEC 61850
Mode Steady - - Pulsed Operation mode
Pulsed
tSelect 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 30.000 Max time between select and execute
signals
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Command pulse lenght

Technical manual
Control
Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function can be used for double purpose, in the same way as
switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used:
• for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through the IPOS1 and
IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the POS1 and POS2 outputs, or
to IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
• for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and distributed in the
configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command from the local
HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command from the local
HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
It is important for indication in the SLD that a symbol is associated with a

controllable object, otherwise the symbol won't be displayed on the screen. A
symbol is created and configured in GDE tool in PCM600.
The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of operators place,
operation from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote). An INTONE connection from
Fixed signal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow operation from local HMI.
As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit representation,
where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the desired result.
The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the name of the
string that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.
IPOS1 IPOS2 Name of displayed string Default string value

0 0 PosUndefined P00
1 0 Position1 P01
0 1 Position2 P10
1 1 PosBadState P11
9.7 Generic communication function for Double Point

indication DPGAPC SEMOD55384-1 v4
GUID-E16EA78F-6DF9-4B37-A92D-5C09827E2297 v3

Generic communication function for DPGAPC - -
Double Point indication

Technical manual
Control
Generic communication function for Double Point indication (DPGAPC) function block is used
to send double point position indications to other systems, equipment or functions in the
substation through IEC 61850-8-1 or other communication protocols. It is especially intended
to be used in the interlocking station-wide logics.
Figure 151: DPGAPC function block
9.7.4 Signals SEMOD55883-1 v2
Table 186: DPGAPC Input signals

OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open indication
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close indication
VALID BOOLEAN 0 Valid indication
Table 187: DPGAPC Output signals

POSITION INTEGER Double point indication
9.7.5 Settings ABBD8E283863 v4
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
When receiving the input signals, DPGAPC sends the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the systems,
equipment or functions that requests and thus subscribes on these signals. To be able to get
the signals into other systems, equipment or functions, one must use other tools, described in
the Engineering manual, and define which function block in which systems, equipment or
functions should receive this information.
More specifically, DPGAPC function reports a combined double point position indication
output POSITION, by evaluating the value and the timestamp attributes of the inputs OPEN
and CLOSE, together with the logical input signal VALID.
When the input signal VALID is active, the values of the OPEN and CLOSE inputs determine the
two-bit integer value of the output POSITION. The timestamp of the output POSITION will have
the latest updated timestamp of the inputs OPEN and CLOSE.

Technical manual
Control
When the input signal VALID is inactive, DPGAPC function forces the position to intermediated
state.
When the value of the input signal VALID changes, the timestamp of the output POSITION will
be updated as the time when DPGAPC function detects the change.
Refer to Table 188 for the description of the input-output relationship in terms of the value
and the quality attributes.
Table 188: Description of the input-output relationship

POSITION
VALID OPEN CLOSE
Value Description
0 - - 0 Intermediate
1 0 0 0 Intermediate
1 1 0 1 Open
1 0 1 2 Closed
1 1 1 3 Bad State
9.8 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC SEMOD176448-1 v3
SEMOD176456-2 v3

Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC - -
The Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) function block is a collection of 8 single
point commands that can be used for direct commands for example reset of LEDs or putting
IED in "ChangeLock" state from remote. In this way, simple commands can be sent directly to
the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is
supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary inputs and SPGAPC function blocks.
The commands can be pulsed or steady with a settable pulse time.
SPC8GAPC
BLOCK ÔUT1
PSTO ÔUT2
ÔUT3
ÔUT4
ÔUT5
ÔUT6
ÔUT7
ÔUT8
Figure 152: SPC8GAPC function block

Technical manual
Control
9.8.4 Signals
Table 189: SPC8GAPC Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the function operation
Table 190: SPC8GAPC Output signals

OUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
9.8.5 Settings
Table 191: SPC8GAPC Non group settings (basic)

On
PulseMode1 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 1
tPulse1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 1
Latched output 2
Latched output 3
Latched output 4
Latched output 5
Latched output 6
Latched output 7

Technical manual
Control

Latched output 8
The PSTO input selects the operator place (LOCAL, REMOTE or ALL). One of the eight outputs
is activated based on the command sent from the operator place selected. The settings
Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will determine if the signal will be
pulsed (and how long the pulse is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will block the operation of the
function – in case a command is sent, no output will be activated.
PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions. Although,
PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or ALL operator places, only REMOTE
operator place is used in SPC8GAPC function.
9.9 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0

AUTOBITS SEMOD158589-1 v3
GUID-C3BB63F5-F0E7-4B00-AF0F-917ECF87B016 v4

AutomationBits, command function
AUTOBITS - -
for DNP3
Automation bits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600 to get into the
configuration of the commands coming through the DNP3 protocol. The AUTOBITS function
plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC 61850) and MULTICMDRCV (for LON).

Technical manual
Control
AUTOBITS
BLOCK ^CMDBIT1
PSTO ^CMDBIT2
^CMDBIT3
^CMDBIT4
^CMDBIT5
^CMDBIT6
^CMDBIT7
^CMDBIT8
^CMDBIT9
^CMDBIT10
^CMDBIT11
^CMDBIT12
^CMDBIT13
^CMDBIT14
^CMDBIT15
^CMDBIT16
^CMDBIT17
^CMDBIT18
^CMDBIT19
^CMDBIT20
^CMDBIT21
^CMDBIT22
^CMDBIT23
^CMDBIT24
^CMDBIT25
^CMDBIT26
^CMDBIT27
^CMDBIT28
^CMDBIT29
^CMDBIT30
^CMDBIT31
^CMDBIT32
Figure 153: AUTOBITS function block
9.9.4 Signals
Table 192: AUTOBITS Input signals

Table 193: AUTOBITS Output signals

CMDBIT1 BOOLEAN Command out bit 1

Technical manual
Control

9.9.5 Settings
Table 194: AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)

On
AutomationBits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can be mapped as a
Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in DNP3. This object
contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To operate an AUTOBITS
output point, send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The
remaining parameters will be regarded were appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-
time=300, count=5 would give 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.
There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in the same way
the setting Operation: On/Off does. That means that, upon activation of the BLOCK input, all
32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The BLOCK acts like an overriding, the function still
receives data from the DNP3 master. Upon deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx
outputs will be set by the DNP3 master again, momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input

Technical manual
Control
determines the operator place. The command can be written to the block while in “Remote”. If
PSTO is in “Local” then no change is applied to the outputs.
9.10 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD SEMOD119849-1 v2
GUID-2217CCC2-5581-407F-A4BC-266CD6808984 v1

Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD - -
The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or from the local
HMI. The command function block has outputs that can be used, for example, to control high
voltage apparatuses or for other user defined functionality.
SINGLECMD
BLOCK ÔUT1
ÔUT2
ÔUT3
ÔUT4
ÔUT5
ÔUT6
ÔUT7
ÔUT8
ÔUT9
ÔUT10
ÔUT11
ÔUT12
ÔUT13
ÔUT14
ÔUT15
ÔUT16
Figure 154: SINGLECMD function block
9.10.4 Signals
Table 195: SINGLECMD Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block single command function

Technical manual
Control
Table 196: SINGLECMD Output signals

OUT1 BOOLEAN Single command output 1
9.10.5 Settings
Table 197: SINGLECMD Non group settings (basic)

Steady
Pulsed
Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) function has 16 binary output signals. The outputs
can be individually controlled from a substation automation system or from the local HMI.
Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of 13 characters in PCM600.
The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration setting is done
via the local HMI or PCM600 and is common for the whole function block. The length of the
output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode, SINGLECMD function has a memory to remember
the output values at power interruption of the IED. Also a BLOCK input is available used to
block the updating of the outputs.
The output signals, OUT1 to OUT16, are available for configuration to built-in functions or via
the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.

Technical manual
288
Logic
Section 10 Logic
10.1 Tripping logic SMPPTRC IP14576-1 v4
SEMOD56226-2 v7

Tripping logic SMPPTRC 94
1 -> 0
A function block for protection tripping and general start indication is always provided as a
basic function for each circuit breaker. It provides a settable pulse prolongation time to ensure
a trip pulse of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct co-operation
with autoreclosing functions.
The trip function block includes a settable latch function for the trip signal and circuit breaker
lockout.
The trip function can collect start and directional signals from different application functions.
The aggregated start and directional signals are mapped to the IEC 61850 logical node data
model.
SMPPTRC
BLOCK TRIP
BLKLKOUT TRL1
TRIN TRL2
TRINL1 TRL3
TRINL2 TR1P
TRINL3 TR2P
PSL1 TR3P
PSL2 CLLKOU T
PSL3 START
1PTRZ STL1
1PTREF STL2
P3PTR STL3
SETLKOUT STN
RSTLKOUT FW
STDI R REV
Figure 155: SMPPTRC function block

Technical manual
Logic
10.1.4 Signals
GUID-2918ECA6-4D98-493F-A33C-2D33DE64AE3B v1
Table 198: SMPPTRC Input signals

BLKLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT)
TRIN BOOLEAN 0 Trip all phases
TRINL1 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase L1
PSL1 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L1
1PTRZ BOOLEAN 0 Input for phase selective carrier aided trip
1PTREF BOOLEAN 0 Input for phase selective earth fault trip
P3PTR BOOLEAN 0 Prepare all tripping to be three-phase
SETLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function
RSTLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout function
STDIR INTEGER 0 General start direction input
GUID-D6B3DFE3-F7DF-4602-B57E-764DC9EB0D4A v1
Table 199: SMPPTRC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN General trip output signal
TR1P BOOLEAN Trip single-pole
TR2P BOOLEAN Trip two-pole
TR3P BOOLEAN Trip three-pole
CLLKOUT BOOLEAN Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)
STN BOOLEAN Start signal from neutral
FW BOOLEAN General forward signal
REV BOOLEAN General reverse signal

Technical manual
Logic
10.1.5 Settings
GUID-6D6424B9-B676-4D9B-949A-33C74BDC5711 v1
Table 200: SMPPTRC Group settings (basic)

On
Program 3 phase - - 1ph/3ph Three ph; single or three ph; single,
1ph/3ph two or three ph trip
1ph/2ph/3ph
tTripMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Minimum duration of trip output
signal
tWaitForPHS 0.020 - 0.500 s 0.001 0.050 Secure 3-pole trip when phase
selection failed
Table 201: SMPPTRC Group settings (advanced)

TripLockout Off - - Off Latch TRIP output when SETLKOUT
On input is activated
AutoLock Off - - Off Activate CLLKOUT output when TRIP
On output is activated
tEvolvingFault 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Secure 3-pole tripping at evolving
faults
The duration of the trip output signal is settable (tTripMin). The pulse length should be long
enough to secure the opening of the circuit breaker.
There is a single input (TRIN) through which all trip output signals from the protection
functions within the IED or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs'
binary inputs are routed. It has a single three-phase trip output (TRIP) to connect to one or
more of the IEDs' binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring this
signal.

Technical manual
Logic
Simplified logic where setting

Program = 3 phase
BLKLKOUT
Final Tripping Circuits

3 phase BLKLKOUT TRIP
TRIP
BLOCK TRL1
BLOCK TRIPALL TRIPALL TRL1
TRIN TRL2
TRIN TRIPL1 TRL2
TRINL1 TRL3
TRINL1 TRIPL2 TRL3
TRINL2
TRINL2 TRIPL3 TR1P
TRINL3
TRINL3 SETLKOUT TR2P
1PTRZ TR3P
1PTRZ RSTLKOUT TR3P
1PTREF CLLKOUT
1PTREF CLLKOUT
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT

Program = 1ph/3ph
BLKLKOUT
BLOCK
TRIP
BLKLKOUT TRIP
1ph/3ph TRL1
TRIPALL TRL1
Phase Segregated TRL2
BLOCK TRIPL1 TRIPL1 TRL2
TRIN TRL3
TRIN L1TRIP L1TRIP TRIPL2 TRIPL2 TRL3
TRINL1 TR1P
TRINL1 L2TRIP L2TRIP TRIPL3 TRIPL3 TR1P
TRINL2
TRINL2 L3TRIP L3TRIP SETLKOUT TR2P
TRINL3 TR3P
TRINL3 P3PTR RSTLKOUT TR3P
PSL1 CLLKOUT
PSL1 CLLKOUT
PSL2
PSL2
PSL3
PSL3
1PTRZ
1PTRZ
1PTREF
1PTREF
P3PTR
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT

Program = 1ph/2ph/3ph
BLKLKOUT
BLOCK
TRIP
BLKLKOUT TRIP
1ph/2ph/3ph TRL1
TRIPALL TRL1
Phase Segregated BLOCK TRIPL1 TRL2
TRIPL1 TRL2
TRIN TRL3
TRIN L1TRIP L1TRIP TRIPL2 TRIPL2 TRL3
TRINL1 TR1P
TRINL1 L2TRIP L2TRIP TRIPL3 TRIPL3 TR1P
TRINL2 TR2P
TRINL2 L3TRIP L3TRIP SETLKOUT TR2P
TRINL3 P3PTR TR3P
TRINL3 RSTLKOUT TR3P
PSL1 CLLKOUT
PSL1 CLLKOUT
PSL2
PSL2
PSL3
PSL3
1PTRZ
1PTRZ
1PTREF
1PTREF
P3PTR
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT
IEC10000266=2=en=Original.vsdx
Figure 156: Simplified logic diagrams with different program modes

SMPPTRC function has separate inputs (TRINL1, TRINL2, TRINL3) which are used for single-
phase and two-phase tripping from the functions which offer phase segregated trip outputs.
The inputs 1PTRZ and 1PTREF enable single- phase and two-phase tripping for those functions
which do not have their own phase selection capability (i.e. which have just a single trip
output). An example of such a protection function is the residual overcurrent protection. The
SMPPTRC function has two inputs for these functions, one for impedance tripping (1PTRZ
used for carrier-aided tripping commands from the scheme communication logic), and one for
earth fault tripping (1PTREF used for tripping from a residual overcurrent protection). External
phase selection for these two trip signals shall be provided via inputs PSL1, PSL2 and PSL3.

Technical manual
Logic
A timer tWaitForPHS, secures a three-phase trip command for these two trip signals in the
absence of the external phase selection signals.
The SMPPTRC function has three trip outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3 (besides the three-phase trip
output TRIP), one per phase, to connect to one or more of the IEDs’ binary outputs, as well as
to other functions within the IED requiring these signals. These three output signals shall be
used as trip signals for individual circuit breaker poles. These signals are important for
cooperation with the autorecloser SMBRREC function.
The SMPPTRC function is equipped with logic which secures correct operation for evolving
faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A binary input P3PTR is provided which
will force all tripping to be three-phase. This input is required in order to cooperate with the
SMBRREC function.
In multi-breaker arrangements, one SMPPTRC function block is used for each circuit breaker.
The lockout function

A tripped circuit breaker can be locked out and prevented from closing by the output close
lockout (CLLKOUT). The reset lockout (RSTLKOUT) is the input for deactivating and resetting
the output close lockout CLLKOUT.
CLLKOUT can be set by an external trip signal from another protection function via the input
SETLKOUT or internally via a three-phase trip with the setting AutoLock = On. If CLLKOUT is
set by an external trip signal from another protection function and setting TripLockout = On,
all trip outputs are set true.
The BLKLKOUT input blocks the circuit breaker lockout output CLLKOUT.
Directional data
Merged directional data from application functions can be provided to the trip function
(SMPPTRC) via the start matrix function (SMAGAPC) connected to the STDIR input.
The directional input signal STDIR is a coded integer signal which may contain up to 14
individual Boolean signals; see Figure 161:
STDIRX=[b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7, b8, b9, b10, b11, b12, b13, b14]
b0= START (start)
b1= FW (forward)
b2= REV (reverse)
b3= STL1 (start L1)
b4= FWL1 (forward L1)
b5= REVL1 (reverse L1)
b6= STL2 (start L2)
b9= STL3 (start L3)
b12= STN (start N)
b13= FWN (forward N)
b14= REVN (reverse N)

Technical manual
Logic
The indications for general start START and phase-wise starts STL1, STL2 and STL3, and
neutral STN and general directional forward FW and reverse REV are all available as outputs on
the trip function.
All start and directional outputs are mapped to the IEC 61850 logical node data model of the
trip function. The time stamping is updated each time an operate or start signal is changed:
• The common DIR output (general) is mapped as:
dirGeneral
0 unknown
1 forward
2 backward (reverse)
3 both
• The phase wise directional outputs (DIRL1, DIRL2, DIRL3 and DIRN) are mapped as:
dirPhsA, dirPhsB, dirPhsC, dirNeut

0 unknown
1 forward
2 backward (reverse)
10.1.6.1 Logic diagram M12258-7 v6
tTripMin
BLOCK TRIPALL
OR
AND t
TRINL1
TRINL2
TRINL3
TRIN OR
1PTREF
1PTRZ
IEC05000517=4=en=Original..vsdx
Figure 157: Three-phase front logic — simplified logic diagram

Technical manual
Logic
TRIN
TRINL1
L1TRIP
OR
PSL1
AND
TRINL2
L2TRIP
OR
PSL2
AND
TRINL3
L3TRIP
OR
PSL3
AND
-LOOP
OR OR
OR
AND
AND
OR
tWaitForPHS
-LOOP t
OR
1PTREF AND
AND
1PTRZ OR
Figure 158: Phase segregated front logic
tTripMin
BLOCK
OR TRIPL1
L1TRIP AND t OR
tEvolvingFault
t TRIP
AND
L2TRIP
L3TRIP
OR
P3PTR
Figure 159: Simplified additional logic per phase, Program = 1ph/3ph or 1ph/2ph/3ph

Technical manual
Logic
BLKLKOUT
TRIPL1
TRL1
OR
TRIPL2
TRL2
OR
TRIPL3
TRL3
OR
TRIP
TRIPALL OR
OR
-LOOP
OR
AND
TR3P
AND
10 ms To ensure that the

AND fault is single phase TR1P
t
OR 5 ms To ensure that the

fault is two phase TR2P
t
AND
AND
AND OR
OR
-LOOP
AND
-LOOP
AND
AutoLock
CLKLKOUT
OR AND
SETLKOUT OR AND
3ms
RSTLKOUT t
AND
TripLockout
-LOOP
Figure 160: Final tripping circuits
Directional logic
IntToBits
STDIR START START
in b0
FW STL1
b1
REV STL2
b2
STL1 STL3
b3
FWL1 STN
b4
REVL1
b5
STL2
b6
FWL2 FW
b7
REVL2 BitsToInt
b8 dirGeneral (61850 Standard)
STL3
b9 0 = unknown
FWL3 b0 out
b10 DIR 1 = forward
REVL3 b1 2 = backward (reverse)
b11
STN 3 = both
b12
FWN REV
b13
REVN
b14
b15
BitsToInt dirPhsA (61850 Standard)

0 = unknown
AND b0 out DIRL1
b0 = START 1 = forward
b1 2 = backward (reverse)
b1 = FW
b2 = REV
b3 = STL1 XOR
b4 = FWL1
b5 = REVL1
b6 = STL2 AND
b7 = FWL2
b8 = REVL2
b9 = STL3 BitsToInt dirPhsB (61850 Standard)
b10 = FWL3
0 = unknown
b11 = REVL3 AND b0 out DIRL2
1 = forward
b12 = STN b1 2 = backward (reverse)
b13 = FWN
b14 = REVN
b15 = N/A XOR
AND
BitsToInt dirPhsC (61850 Standard)

0 = unknown
AND b0 out DIRL3
1 = forward
XOR
AND
BitsToInt dirNeut (61850 Standard)

0 = unknown
AND b0 out DIRN
1 = forward
XOR
AND
Figure 161: The directional logic

Technical manual
Logic

M12380-1 v14
Table 202: SMPPTRC technical data

Trip action 3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph -
Minimum trip pulse length (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
3-pole trip delay (0.020-0.500) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Evolving fault delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
10.2 General start matrix block SMAGAPC
10.2.1 Identification GUID-C6D3DE50-03D2-4F27-82FF-623E81D019F4 v1
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

Generat start matrix block SMAGAPC - -
10.2.2 Functionality GUID-BA516165-96DE-4CD9-979B-29457C7653C0 v3
The Start Matrix (SMAGAPC) merges start and directional output signals from different
application functions and creates a common start and directional output signal (STDIR) to be
connected to the Trip function, see Figure 162.
The purpose of this functionality is to provide general start and directional information for the
IEC 61850 trip logic data model SMPPTRC.
10.2.3 Function block GUID-99B1DF71-F7C4-4954-8688-BC709C3C2A16 v1
SMAGAPC
BLOCK STDIR
STDIR1
STDIR2
STDIR3
STDIR4
STDIR5
STDIR6
STDIR7
STDIR8
STDIR9
STDIR10
STDIR11
STDIR12
STDIR13
STDIR14
STDIR15
STDIR16
Figure 162: SMAGAPC function block

Technical manual
Logic
10.2.4 Signals
Table 203: SMAGAPC Input signals

STDIR1 INTEGER 0 Start direction input 1
Table 204: SMAGAPC Output signals

STDIR INTEGER Common start direction output
10.2.5 Settings
Table 205: SMAGAPC Group settings (basic)

On
10.2.6 Operation principle GUID-02403756-5715-4D6B-9308-540D72979BD0 v3
Start matrix
The Start Matrix function requires that a protection function delivers the directional output
signals in a fixed order to Start Matrix.
A directional input signal STDIRX of the Start Matrix is of type word. Each input contains 14
individual Boolean signals, which are positioned as, see Figure 164.

Technical manual
Logic
b0= START (start)
b1= FW (forward)
b2= REV (reverse)
b3= STL1 (startL1)
b4= FWL1 (forwardL1)
b5= REVL1 (reverseL1)
b6= STL2 (startL2)
b9= STL3 (startL3)
b12= STN (startN)
b13= FWN (forwardN)
b14= REVN (reverseN)
The StartMatrix function contains two function: the START criteria and the DIRECTION criteria,
see Figure 163.
The START criteria is to ensure that a forward and reverse signal shall come together with a
start signal to pass through the block. This is done individually for each protection function
connected to the StartMatrix via the STDIRX inputs, see Figure 164.
All STDIROUT signals are then connected via an OR gate, see Figure 163.
The DIRECTION criteria allow either forward or reverse (phase-wise forward FWLx or forward
neutral FWN or phase-wise reverse REVLx or reverse neutral REVN) to pass through to the
general STDIR output. If both forward and reverse are active phase-wise (e.g. REVLx=FWLx =
True) or at neutral (e.g. FWN = REVN = True) at the same time, none will be shown, see Figure
165.

Technical manual
Logic
SMAGAPC
(StartMatrix)
START Criteria
STDIR1
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR2
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR3
STDIRX STDIROUT
DIRECTION Criteria
STDIR
≥1 STDIRIN STDIR
START Criteria
STDIR4
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR5
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR6
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR7
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR8
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR9
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR10
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR11
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR12
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR13
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR14
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR15
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR16
STDIRX STDIROUT
Figure 163: The StartMatrix function

Technical manual
Logic
START Criteria
START (in)
STL1 (in)
STL2 (in) ≥1 START (out)
STL3 (in)
IntToBits STN (in) BitsToint
STDIRX STDIROUT
in b0 START (in) STL1 (out) START (out) b0 out
b1 FW (in) STL2 (out) FW (out) b1
b2 REV (in) STL3 (out) REV (out) b2
b3 STL1 (in) STN (out) STL1 (out) b3
b4 FWL1 (in) FWL1 (out) b4
b5 REVL1 (in) REVL1 (out) b5
&
b6 STL2 (in) FW (in) STL2 (out) b6
≥1 FW (out)
b9 STL3 (in) STL3 (out) b9
b11 REVL3 (in) & REVL3 (out) b11
REV (in)
b12 STN (in) STN (out) b12
b13 FWN (in) ≥1 REV (out) FWN (out) b13
b14 REVN (in) REVN (out) b14
b15 N/A FALSE b15
& FWL1 (out)

FWL1 (in)
& REVL1 (out)

REVL1 (in)
& FWL2 (out)

FWL2 (in)
& REVL2 (out)

REVL2 (in)
& FWL3 (out)

FWL3 (in)
& REVL3 (out)

REVL3 (in)
& FWN (out)

FWN (in)
& REVN (out)

REVN (in)
Figure 164: The START Criteria function
DIRECTION Criteria
START (in) START (out)

IntToBits STL1 (in) STL1 (out) BitsToint
STDIRIN STL2 (in) STL2 (out) STDIR
in b0 START (in) START (out) b0 out
STL3 (in) STL3 (out)
b1 FW (in) FW (out) b1
STN (in) STN (out)
b2 REV (in) REV (out) b2
FW (in)
≥1 FW (out)
REV (in)
≥1 REV (out)
b12 STN (in) STN (out) b12
b13 FWN (in) FWN (out) b13
b14 REVN (in) REVN (out) b14
b15 N/A FALSE b15
& FWL1 (out)
FWL1 (in)
=1
REVL1 (in)
& REVL1 (out)
& FWL2 (out)
FWL2 (in)
=1
REVL2 (in)
& REVL2 (out)
& FWL3 (out)
FWL3 (in)
=1
REVL3 (in)
& REVL3 (out)
& FWN (out)
FWN (in)
=1
REVN (in)
& REVN (out)
Figure 165: The DIRECTION Criteria function
STARTCOMB
To make it possible to provide the directional information from a protection function, a
STARTCOMB block is used in between the application function and the Start Matrix function.
The STARTCOMB function has one block input and 14 Boolean inputs that convert the 14
Boolean inputs into a WORD output STDIR, see Figure 166.

Technical manual
Logic
b0= START (start)
b1= FW (forward)
b2= REV (reverse)
b3= STL1 (startL1)
b6= STL2 (startL2)
b9= STL3 (startL3)
b12= STN (startN)
b13= FWN (forwardN)
b14= REVN (reverseN)
STARTCOMB
BLOCK STDI R
START
FW
REV
STL1
FWL1
REVL1
STL2
FWL2
REVL2
STL3
FWL3
REVL3
STN
FWN
REVN
Figure 166: STARTCOMB
Protection functions
Some protection functions are provided with start and directional outputs, for example:
• Protection 1: General START, FW and REV

• Protection 2: Phase-wise STLx, FWLx and REVLx (where x = 1, 2 and 3)
• Protection 3: STN, FWN and REVN
• Protection 4: STDIR
Connection example
In Figure 167 below is an example how to connect start and directional signals from protection
functions via STARTCOMB and SMAGAPC to SMPPTRC.
Figure 167: Connection example of protection functions using STARTCOMB, SMAGAPC to

SMPPTRC

Technical manual
Logic
10.3 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC IP15121-1 v4
SEMOD167882-2 v3

Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC - -
The trip matrix logic (TMAGAPC) function is used to route trip signals and other logical output
signals to different output contacts on the IED.
The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these outputs can be connected to
physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs for settable pulse or
steady output.
TMAGAPC
BLOCK OUTPUT1
BLK1 OUTPUT2
BLK2 OUTPUT3
BLK3
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
Figure 168: TMAGAPC function block

Technical manual
Logic
10.3.4 Signals
Table 206: TMAGAPC Input signals

BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 1
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1

Technical manual
Logic
Table 207: TMAGAPC Output signals

OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 17 to 32
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 1 to 32
10.3.5 Settings
Table 208: TMAGAPC Group settings (basic)

On
PulseTime 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Output pulse time
OnDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output on delay time
OffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output off delay time
ModeOutput1 Steady - - Steady Mode for output ,1 steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput2 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput3 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed
Pulsed
The trip matrix logic (TMAGAPC) block is provided with 32 input signals and 3 output signals.
The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to provide grouping of
connected input signals to the three output signals from the function block.
Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:
1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 the first
output signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1.
2. when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 the
second output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1.
3. when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 the third
output signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1.
By use of the settings ModeOutput1, ModeOutput2, ModeOutput3, PulseTime, OnDelay and

OffDelay the behavior of each output can be customized. The OnDelay is always active and will
delay the input to output transition by the set time. The ModeOutput for respective output
decides whether the output shall be steady with an drop-off delay as set by OffDelay or if it
shall give a pulse with duration set by PulseTime. Note that for pulsed operation and that the
inputs are connected in an OR-function, a new pulse will only be given on the output if all
related inputs are reset and then one is activated again. For steady operation the OffDelay will
start when all related inputs have reset. Detailed logical diagram is shown in figure 169

Technical manual
Logic
PulseTime
t
&
ModeOutput1=Pulsed
INPUT 1
OUTPUT 1
Ondelay Offdelay
&
³1
³1 t t
INPUT 16
PulseTime
t
&
ModeOutput2=Pulsed
INPUT 17
OUTPUT 2
Ondelay Offdelay
&
³1
³1 t t
INPUT 32
PulseTime
t
&
ModeOutput3=Pulsed
OUTPUT 3
Ondelay Offdelay
&
³1
³1 t t
Figure 169: Trip matrix internal logic

Output signals from TMAGAPC are typically connected to other logic blocks or directly to
output contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit breaker(s) the pulse
time shall be set to at least 0.150 seconds in order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of
the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.

GUID-3AB1EE95-51BF-4CC4-99BD-F4ECDAACB75A v3
Table 209: Number of TMAGAPC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TMAGAPC 6 6 -
10.4 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH GUID-64EA392C-950F-486C-8D96-6E7736B592BF v1
10.4.1 Identification GUID-64EA392C-950F-486C-8D96-6E7736B592BF v1

Logic for group alarm ALMCALH - -
10.4.2 Functionality GUID-16E60E27-F7A8-416D-8648-8174AAC49BB5 v4
The group alarm logic function (ALMCALH) is used to route several alarm signals to a common
indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

Technical manual
Logic
10.4.3 Function block GUID-EA192656-71DD-4D44-A1D5-96B1B4937971 v1
ALMCALH
BLOCK ALARM
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
10.4.4 Signals
Table 210: ALMCALH Input signals

Table 211: ALMCALH Output signals

ALARM BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

Technical manual
Logic
10.4.5 Settings
Table 212: ALMCALH Group settings (basic)

On
10.4.6 Operation principle GUID-0405BB7B-7EF7-4546-92CD-F703AA0DD9F4 v2
The logic for group alarm ALMCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and one ALARM
output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order to provide
grouping of connected input signals to the output ALARM signal from the function block.
When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the ALARM output
signal will get logical value 1.
The function has a drop-off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a steady
signal.
Input 1
200 ms
ALARM
³1 t
Input 16
Figure 170: Group alarm logic

GUID-A05AF26F-DC98-4E62-B96B-E75D19F20767 v2
Table 213: Number of ALMCALH instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ALMCALH - - 5
10.5 Logic for group warning WRNCALH
10.5.1 Identification GUID-3EBD3D5B-F506-4557-88D7-DFC0BD21C690 v4

Logic for group warning WRNCALH - -
10.5.2 Functionality GUID-F7D9A012-3AD4-4D86-BE97-DF2A99BE5383 v4
The group warning logic function (WRNCALH) is used to route several warning signals to a
common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

Technical manual
Logic
10.5.3 Function block GUID-C909E4FB-3F7A-47F7-8988-36B159E2C7B2 v1
WRNCALH
BLOCK WARNING
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
10.5.4 Signals
Table 214: WRNCALH Input signals

Table 215: WRNCALH Output signals

WARNING BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

Technical manual
Logic
10.5.5 Settings
Table 216: WRNCALH Group settings (basic)

On
10.5.6 Operation principle GUID-71C65C20-7B6C-499F-BFCD-E418AA55F7EC v2
The logic for group warning WRNCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and 1 WARNING
grouping of connected input signals to the output WARNING signal from the function block.
When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the WARNING output
signal will get logical value 1.
signal.
INPUT1
200 ms
WARNING
³1 t
INPUT16

GUID-70B7357D-F467-4CF5-9F73-641A82D334F5 v2
Table 217: Number of WRNCALH instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
WRNCALH - - 5
10.6 Logic for group indication INDCALH
10.6.1 Identification GUID-3B5D4371-420D-4249-B6A4-5A168920D635 v4

Logic for group indication INDCALH - -
10.6.2 Functionality GUID-D8D1A4EE-A87F-46C6-8529-277FC1ADA9B0 v4
The group indication logic function (INDCALH) is used to route several indication signals to a
common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

Technical manual
Logic
10.6.3 Function block GUID-9D89E183-449A-4016-AB83-E57C8DDBA843 v1
INDCALH
BLOCK IND
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
10.6.4 Signals
Table 218: INDCALH Input signals

Table 219: INDCALH Output signals

IND BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

Technical manual
Logic
10.6.5 Settings
Table 220: INDCALH Group settings (basic)

On
10.6.6 Operation principle GUID-72B1B4E8-BC6C-4AF7-8B41-058241B944F8 v2
The logic for group indication INDCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and 1 IND
grouping of connected input signals to the output IND signal from the function block.
When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the IND output signal
will get logical value 1.
signal.
INPUT1
200 ms
IND
³1 t
INPUT16

GUID-EAA43288-01A5-49CF-BF5B-9ABF6DC27D85 v2
Table 221: Number of INDCALH instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDCALH - 5 -
10.7 Basic configurable logic blocks M11396-4 v18
The basic configurable logic blocks do not propagate the time stamp and quality of signals.
The list below shows a summary of the function blocks and their features.
These logic blocks are also available as part of an extension logic package.
• AND function block. The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions
with boolean variables. The AND function block has up to four inputs and two outputs.
One of the outputs is inverted.
• GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to pass from the
input to the output.
• INVERTER function block that inverts the input signal to the output.

Technical manual
Logic
• LLD function block. Loop delay used to delay the output signal one execution cycle.
• OR function block. The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with
boolean variables. The OR function block has up to six inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs is inverted.
• PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of
operation of outputs, settable pulse time.
• RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from two inputs
respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting
controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had
before the power interruption. RESET input has priority.
• SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from two inputs
respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting
controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had
before the power interruption. The SET input has priority.
• TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the input signal.
The timer has a settable time delay.
• XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean variables. XOR has two
inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal OUT is 1 if the
input signals are different and 0 if they are the same.
10.7.1 AND function block AND IP11013-1 v2
M11453-3 v4
The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The
AND function block has up to four inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.
10.7.1.1 Function block

M11452-3 v2
AND
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
Figure 171: AND function block
10.7.1.2 Signals
Table 222: AND Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1

Technical manual
Logic
Table 223: AND Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal
10.7.1.3 Technical data

GUID-D1179280-1D99-4A66-91AC-B7343DBA9F23 v3
Table 224: Number of AND instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
AND 60 60 160
10.7.2 Controllable gate function block GATE IP11021-1 v2
M11489-3 v2
The Controllable gate function block (GATE) is used for controlling if a signal should be able to
pass from the input to the output or not depending on a setting.

M11490-3 v2
GATE
INPUT OUT
Figure 172: GATE function block
10.7.2.2 Signals
Table 225: GATE Input signals

INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to gate
Table 226: GATE Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output from gate
10.7.2.3 Settings
Table 227: GATE Group settings (basic)

On

Technical manual
Logic

GUID-45DF373F-DC39-4E1B-B45B-6B454E8E0E50 v3
Table 228: Number of GATE instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
GATE 10 10 20
10.7.3 Inverter function block INV IP11011-1 v2

M11445-3 v1
INV
INPUT OUT
Figure 173: INV function block
10.7.3.2 Signals
Table 229: INV Input signals

INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input
Table 230: INV Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output

GUID-0EC4192A-EF03-47C0-AEC1-09B68B411A98 v3
Table 231: Number of INV instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INV 90 90 240
10.7.4 Loop delay function block LLD GUID-05D959B5-A55B-437C-8E8F-831A4A357E24 v2
GUID-64B24094-010D-4B8F-8B7B-DDD49499AAE5 v3
The Logic loop delay function block (LLD) function is used to delay the output signal one
execution cycle, that is, the cycle time of the function blocks used.

Technical manual
Logic

GUID-EE44CFDF-C8F7-4870-BD1C-98D9CD91FD97 v4
LLD
INPUT OUT
IEC15000144.vsd
Figure 174: LLD function block
10.7.4.2 Signals
Table 232: LLD Input signals

INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal
Table 233: LLD Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output signal delayed one execution cycle

GUID-B2E6F510-8766-4381-9618-CE02ED71FFB6 v2
Table 234: Number of LLD instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
LLD 10 10 20
10.7.5 OR function block IP11012-1 v3
M11449-3 v2
The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The
OR function block has up to six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.

M11448-3 v1
OR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
Figure 175: OR function block

Technical manual
Logic
10.7.5.2 Signals
Table 235: OR Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to OR gate
Table 236: OR Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output from OR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from OR gate

GUID-35A795D7-A6BD-4669-A023-43C497DBFB01 v4
Table 237: Number of OR instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
OR 78 60 160
10.7.6 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER IP11016-1 v2
M11466-3 v3
The pulse (PULSETIMER) function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting the
operation time of outputs. The PULSETIMER has a settable length. When the input is 1, the
output will be 1 for the time set by the time delay parameter t. Then it returns to 0.

M11465-3 v4
PULSETIMER
INPUT OUT
Figure 176: PULSETIMER function block
10.7.6.2 Signals
Table 238: PULSETIMER Input signals

INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to pulse timer

Technical manual
Logic
Table 239: PULSETIMER Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output from pulse timer
10.7.6.3 Settings
Table 240: PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)

t 0.000 - s 0.001 0.010 Time delay of function
90000.000

GUID-E05E5FB1-23E7-4816-84F2-1FBFFDFF2B43 v2
Table 241: Number of PULSETIMER instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
PULSETIMER 10 10 20 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms
10.7.7 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY GUID-9C93669F-078B-49EA-85B8-C4BB6A434734 v1
GUID-4C804DEA-3C83-4C20-82C6-BAD03BD48242 v4
The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory that can
reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORY function block has two
outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power interruption, the
flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption. For a Reset-Set
flip-flop, RESET input has higher priority over SET input.
Table 242: Truth table for RSMEMORY function block

RESET SET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1

GUID-50D5A4C0-59BF-44DE-86AC-47640ACD35A7 v3
RSMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT
Figure 177: RSMEMORY function block

Technical manual
Logic
10.7.7.2 Signals
Table 243: RSMEMORY Input signals

SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset
Table 244: RSMEMORY Output signals

10.7.7.3 Settings
Table 245: RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)

Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory
On function

GUID-BE6FD540-E96E-4F15-B2A2-12FFAE6C51DB v2
Table 246: Number of RSMEMORY instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
RSMEMORY 10 10 20
10.7.8 Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY IP11020-1 v2
M11485-3 v4
The Set-reset with memory function block (SRMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory that can set
or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORY function block has two
outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power interruption, the
flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption. The input SET has
priority.
Table 247: Truth table for SRMEMORY function block

SET RESET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted
value last value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0

Technical manual
Logic

M11484-3 v2
SRMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT
Figure 178: SRMEMORY function block
10.7.8.2 Signals
Table 248: SRMEMORY Input signals

SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset
Table 249: SRMEMORY Output signals

10.7.8.3 Settings
Table 250: SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)

Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory
On function

GUID-7A0F4327-CA83-4FB0-AB28-7C5F17AE6354 v2
Table 251: Number of SRMEMORY instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SRMEMORY 10 10 20
10.7.9 Settable timer function block TIMERSET IP11022-1 v2
M11494-3 v3
The Settable timer function block (TIMERSET) timer has two outputs for the delay of the input
signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also has an Operation
setting On and Off that controls the operation of the timer.

Technical manual
Logic
Input
tdelay
On
Off
tdelay
t
Figure 179: TIMERSET status diagram

M11495-3 v3
TIMERSET
INPUT ON
OFF
Figure 180: TIMERSET function block
10.7.9.2 Signals
Table 252: TIMERSET Input signals

INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to timer
Table 253: TIMERSET Output signals

ON BOOLEAN Output from timer, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output from timer, drop-out delayed
10.7.9.3 Settings
Table 254: TIMERSET Group settings (basic)

On
t 0.000 - s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n
90000.000

Technical manual
Logic

GUID-C6C98FE0-F559-45EE-B853-464516775417 v3
Table 255: Number of TIMERSET instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TIMERSET 15 15 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms
10.7.10 Exclusive OR function block XOR IP11018-1 v2
M11477-3 v4
The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output
signal OUT is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the same.
Table 256: Truth table for XOR function block

INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT
0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1

M11476-3 v1
XOR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
Figure 181: XOR function block
10.7.10.2 Signals
Table 257: XOR Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to XOR gate
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to XOR gate
Table 258: XOR Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output from XOR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from XOR gate

Technical manual
Logic

GUID-0B07F78C-10BD-4070-AFF0-6EE36454AA03 v2
Table 259: Number of XOR instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
XOR 10 10 20
10.8 Fixed signals FXDSIGN
SEMOD167904-2 v2

Fixed signals FXDSIGN - -
The Fixed signals function (FXDSIGN) has nine pre-set (fixed) signals that can be used in the
configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other function blocks to a
certain level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean, integer, floating point, string types of
signals are available.
One FXDSIGN function block is included in all IEDs.
FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
INTALONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF
Figure 182: FXDSIGN function block
10.8.4 Signals
Table 260: FXDSIGN Output signals

OFF BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed off
ON BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO INTEGER Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed one

Technical manual
Logic

INTALONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed all ones
REALZERO REAL Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL STRING String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL GROUP SIGNAL Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF GROUP SIGNAL Group signal fixed off
10.8.5 Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).
There are nine outputs from FXDSIGN function block:
• OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value

• ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value
• INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0
• INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1
• INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex)
• REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value
• STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value
• ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value
• GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value
10.9 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I SEMOD175715-1 v1
SEMOD175721-2 v2

Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I - -
Boolean to integer conversion, 16 bit (B16I) is used to transform a set of 16 boolean (logical)
signals into an integer.

Technical manual
Logic
B16I
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
Figure 183: B16I function block
10.9.4 Signals
Table 261: B16I Input signals

IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
Table 262: B16I Output signals

OUT INTEGER Output value

Technical manual
Logic

Table 263: B16I Monitored data

OUT INTEGER - - Output value
The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) will transfer a combination of up to 16

binary inputs INx, where 1≤x≤16, to an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the
table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum
of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the integer
values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx (where 1≤x≤16)
are activated, that is = Boolean 1, it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the
output OUT. The B16I function is designed for receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the
BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the output at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1≤x≤16.
The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT on
the function block B16I
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are
active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an
integer by the B16I function block.

Technical manual
Logic

GUID-65A2876A-F779-41C4-ACD7-7662D1E7F1F2 v3
Table 264: Number of B16I instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
B16I 6 4 8
10.10 Boolean to integer conversion with logical node

representation, 16 bit BTIGAPC SEMOD175753-1 v4
SEMOD175757-2 v5

Boolean to integer conversion with BTIGAPC - -
logical node representation, 16 bit
Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation, 16 bit (BTIGAPC) is used to
transform a set of 16 boolean (logical) signals into an integer. The block input will freeze the
output at the last value.
BTIGAPC
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
Figure 184: BTIGAPC function block

Technical manual
Logic
10.10.4 Signals
Table 265: BTIGAPC Input signals

Table 266: BTIGAPC Output signals

OUT INTEGER Output value

Table 267: BTIGAPC Monitored data

OUT INTEGER - - Output value
The Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function (BTIGAPC) will
transfer a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx, where 1≤x≤16, to an integer. Each INx
represents a value according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general
formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available

Technical manual
Logic
on the output OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT
is an integer. When all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are activated, that is = Boolean 1, it corresponds to
that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze
the logical outputs at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block BTIGAPC for 1≤x≤16.
the function block BTIGAPC.
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are
active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an
integer by the BTIGAPC function block.

GUID-3820F464-D296-4CAD-8491-F3F997359D79 v2
Table 268: Number of BTIGAPC instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
BTIGAPC 4 4 8
10.11 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16
SEMOD167941-2 v2

Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16 - -

Technical manual
Logic
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) is used to transform an integer into a set of 16
boolean (logical) signals.
IB16
BLOCK OUT1
INP OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
Figure 185: IB16 function block
10.11.4 Signals
Table 269: IB16 Input signals

INP INTEGER 0 Integer Input
Table 270: IB16 Output signals

OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1

Technical manual
Logic

10.11.5 Setting parameters ABBD8E242451 v4
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600)
With integer 15 on the input INP the OUT1 = OUT2 = OUT3= OUT4 =1 and the remaining OUTx =
0 for (5≤x≤16).
OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in accordance with
the table IB16_1. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.
In the above example when integer 15 is on the input INP the OUT1 has a value =1, OUT2 has a
value =2, OUT3 has a value =4 and OUT4 has a value =8. The sum of these OUTx is equal to 1 + 2
+ 4 + 8 = 15.
This follows the general formulae: The sum of the values of all OUTx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16 will be
equal to the integer value on the input INP.
The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) will transfer an integer with a value
between 0 to 65535 connected to the input INP to a combination of activated outputs OUTx
where 1≤x≤16. The sum of the values of all OUTx will then be equal to the integer on input INP.
The values of the different OUTx are according to the table below. When an OUTx is not
activated, its value is 0.
When all OUTx where 1≤x≤16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer
65535 is connected to input INP. The IB16 function is designed for receiving the integer input
locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16 for 1≤x≤16.
the function block IB16.
Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when

OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0

Technical manual
Logic

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx (where x = 1 to 16)
are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest integer that can be converted by the IB16
function block.

GUID-B45901F4-B163-4696-8220-7F8CAC84D793 v2
Table 271: Number of IB16 instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
IB16 6 4 8
10.12 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation ITBGAPC SEMOD158419-1 v3
SEMOD167944-2 v4

Integer to boolean 16 conversion ITBGAPC - -
with logic node representation
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function (ITBGAPC) is used to
transform an integer which is transmitted over IEC 61850 and received by the function to 16
boolean (logic) output signals.
ITBGAPC function can only receive remote values over IEC 61850 when the R/L (Remote/Local)
push button on the front HMI indicates that the control mode for the operator is in position R
(Remote i.e. the LED adjacent to R is lit), and the corresponding signal is connected to the
input PSTO ITBGAPC function block. The input BLOCK will freeze the output at the last received
value and blocks new integer values to be received and converted to binary coded outputs.

Technical manual
Logic
ITBGAPC
BLOCK OUT1
PSTO OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
Figure 186: ITBGAPC function block
10.12.4 Signals
Table 272: ITBGAPC Input signals

Table 273: ITBGAPC Output signals


Technical manual
Logic
10.12.5 Settings
GUID-F573CA16-4821-4203-970A-F7D01AF5E63B v1
This function does not have any setting parameters.
An example is used to explain the principle of operation: With integer 15 sent to and received
by the ITBGAPC function on the IEC 61850 the OUTx changes from 0 to 1 on each of the OUT1;
OUT2 OUT3 and OUT4. All other OUTx (5≤x≤16) remains 0. The boolean interpretation of this is
represented by the assigned values of each of the outputs OUT1 = 1; and OUT2 = 2; and OUT3=
4; and OUT4 = 8. The sum of these OUTx (1≤x≤4) is equal to the integer 15 received via the IEC
61850 network. The remaining OUTx = 0 for (5≤x≤16).
OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in accordance with
the Table 274. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.
The value of each OUTx for 1≤x≤16 (1≤x≤16) follows the general formulae: OUTx = 2x-1 The sum
of the values of all activated OUTx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16 will be equal to the integer value
received over IEC 61850 to the ITBGAPC_1 function block.
The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function (ITBGAPC) will
transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 communicated via IEC 61850 and
connected to the ITBGAPC function block to a combination of activated outputs OUTx where
1≤x≤16. The values represented by the different OUTx are according to Table 274. When an
OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.
The ITBGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a station computer - for
example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the
last value.
Table 274: Outputs and their values when activated


Technical manual
Logic
The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx (1≤x≤16) are active
equals 65535. This is the highest integer that can be converted to boolean by the ITBGAPC
function block.
The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer number that is
communicated to the ITBGAPC can only be written to the block while the PSTO is in position
“Remote”. If PSTO is in position ”Off” or ”Local”, then no changes are applied to the outputs.

GUID-A339BBA3-8FD0-429D-BB49-809EAC4D53B0 v2
Table 275: Number of ITBGAPC instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ITBGAPC 4 4 8
10.13 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and

overflow supervision TEIGAPC
10.13.1 Identification GUID-1913E066-37D1-4689-9178-5B3C8B029815 v3
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device

identificatio identificatio number
n n
Elapsed time integrator TEIGAPC - -
10.13.2 Functionality GUID-390D7433-0C1C-48B4-9A90-71AA148C3C35 v3
Elapsed Time Integrator (TEIGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the elapsed time
when a given binary signal has been high, see also Figure 187.
BLOCK
RESET
IN Time Integration ACCTIME
with Retain
q-1
a
OVERFLOW
AND
a>b
999 999 s b
a
WARNING
AND
a>b
tWarning b
a
ALARM
AND
a>b
tAlarm b
q-1 = unit delay IEC13000290-2-en.vsd
Figure 187: TEIGAPC logics

The main features of TEIGAPC

Technical manual
Logic
• Applicable to long time integration up to 999 999.9 seconds

• Supervision of overflow
• Possibility to define a warning and an alarm with the resolution of 10 milliseconds
• Retain the integration value
• Possibilities for blocking and reset of the total integrated time
• Report of the integrated time
10.13.3 Function block GUID-6D50A060-7751-405B-AEC1-FAE942EBDA64 v2
TEIGAPC
BLOCK WARNING
IN ALARM
RESET OVERFLOW
ACCTIME
Figure 188: TEIGAPC function block
10.13.4 Signals
Table 276: TEIGAPC Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the integration and block the other outputs
IN BOOLEAN 0 The input signal that is used to measure the elapsed time,
when its value is high
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset the integration time
Table 277: TEIGAPC Output signals

WARNING BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the warning limit
ALARM BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the alarm limit
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the overflow
limit
ACCTIME REAL Integrated elapsed time in seconds
10.13.5 Settings
Table 278: TEIGAPC Group settings (basic)

On
tWarning 1.00 - 999999.00 s 0.01 600.00 Time limit for warning supervision
tAlarm 1.00 - 999999.00 s 0.01 1200.00 Time limit for alarm supervision

Technical manual
Logic
10.13.6 Operation principle GUID-04CC8365-DCDE-4DC7-BEF0-6EF8382305DD v3
The elapsed time integrator (TEIGAPC) provides
• time integration, accumulating the elapsed time when a given binary signal has been high
• blocking and reset of the total integrated time
• supervision of limit transgression and overflow, the overflow limit is fixed to 999999.9
seconds
• retaining of the integrated value
Figure 189 describes the simplified logic of the function where the block “Time
Integration“ covers the logics for the first two items listed above while the block
“Transgression Supervision Plus Retain“ contains the logics for the last two.
Loop Delay
tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision WARNING
Plus Retain
ALARM
BLOCK
RESET ACCTIME
Time Integration
IN
Loop Delay
Figure 189: TEIGAPC Simplified logic

TEIGAPC main functionalities
• integration of the elapsed time when IN has been high

• applicable to long time integration (≤999 999.9 seconds)
• output ACCTIME presents integrated value in seconds
• integrated value is retained in nonvolatile memory
• any retained value with a warning/alarm/overflow is used as initiation value for the
integration following by a restart
• RESET: Reset of the integration value. Consequently all other outputs are also reset
• unconditionally on the input IN value
• reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero
• BLOCK: Freeze the integration and block/reset the other outputs
• unconditionally on the signal value
• BLOCK request overrides RESET request
• Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression
• overflow if output ACCTIME >999999.9 seconds
• alarm if ACCTIME > tAlarm
• warning if ACCTIME > tWarning

Technical manual
Logic
The ACCTIME output represents the integrated time in seconds while tOverflow, tAlarm and
tWarning are the time limit parameters in seconds.
tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits. They are also independent, that is, there is no
check if tAlarm > tWarning.
tAlarm and tWarning are possible to be defined with a resolution of 10 ms, depending on the
level of the defined values for the parameters.
The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 999999.9 seconds. The outputs freeze if an
overflow occurs.
10.13.6.1 Operation accuracy GUID-E0772193-9F6E-43DA-B642-2923565E5D4C v3
The accuracy of TEIGAPC depends on essentially three factors
• function cycle time

• the pulse length
• the number of pulses, that is, the number of rising and falling flank pairs
In principle, a shorter function cycle time, longer integrated time length or more pulses may
lead to reduced accuracy.
10.13.6.2 Memory storage GUID-6FDD6590-30F9-4CC1-AC9D-945544AB8688 v3
The value of the integrated elapsed time is retained in a non-volatile memory.

GUID-B258726E-1129-47C9-94F9-BE634A2085FA v4
Table 279: TEIGAPC Technical data

Function Cycle time (ms) Range or value Accuracy
Elapsed time integration 3 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever
is greater
8 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±100 ms
100 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±250 ms
Table 280: Number of TEIGAPC instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TEIGAPC 4 4 4
10.14 Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMP
10.14.1 Identification GUID-5992B0F2-FC1B-4838-9BAB-2D2542BB264D v1

Comparison of integer values INTCOMP Int<=>

Technical manual
Logic
10.14.2 Functionality GUID-A93564FA-0017-4939-A9C1-095DA0FD9832 v1
The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of integer values in the system relative
to each other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used for
monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other logics.
10.14.3 Function block GUID-EB28F45B-B1D0-452F-98B4-F96D7FA34069 v1
INTCOMP
INPUT INEQUAL
REF INHIGH
INLOW
10.14.4 Signals
Table 281: INTCOMP Input signals

INPUT INTEGER 0 Input value to be compared with reference value
REF INTEGER 0 Reference value to be compared with input value
Table 282: INTCOMP Output signals

INEQUAL BOOLEAN Input value is equal to the reference value
INHIGH BOOLEAN Input value is higher than the reference value
INLOW BOOLEAN Input value is lower than the reference value
10.14.5 Settings
Table 283: INTCOMP Group settings (basic)

EnaAbs Signed - - Signed Selection for absolute or signed
Absolute comparison
RefSource Set Value - - Set Value Selection for reference value either
Input REF input or setting
SetValue -2000000000 - - 1 100 Set value for reference
2000000000

Technical manual
Logic

Table 284: INTCOMP Monitored data

INEQUAL BOOLEAN - - Input value is equal to the reference
value
INHIGH BOOLEAN - - Input value is higher than the
reference value
INLOW BOOLEAN - - Input value is lower than the reference
value
10.14.7 Operation principle GUID-E9C1B863-ACA7-45C0-91F1-A51FE38755FE v2
The comparison can be done in two ways,
• Between 2 inputs, INPUT and REF

• Between INPUT and the value set by the user SetValue.
The selection of reference value for comparison can be done through setting RefSource. If
RefSource is selected as Input REF then the reference value for comparison is taken from
second input signal (REF). If RefSource is selected as Set Value then the reference value for
comparison is taken from setting (SetValue).
The comparison can be done either between absolute values or signed values and it depends
on the setting EnaAbs. If EnaAbs is selected as Absolute then both input and reference value is
converted into absolute values and comparison is done. If EnaAbs is selected as Signed then
the comparison is done without any conversion.
The function has three state outputs high, low and equal to condition. It will check the
following condition and give corresponding outputs.
• If the input is above the reference value then INHIGH is set HIGH
• If the input is below the reference value then INLOW is set HIGH
• If the input is equal to reference value then INEQUAL is set HIGH
EnaAbs
INPUT ABS T a
F
INHIGH
a>b
b
a INEQUAL
a=b
b
RefSource
REF ABS T
T
SetValue
F a INLOW
F a<b
b
Figure 190: Function logic diagram for INTCOMP

Technical manual
Logic
10.14.8 Technical data GUID-CEA332FF-838D-42B7-AEFC-C1E87809825E v3
Table 285: Number of INTCOMP instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INTCOMP 10 10 10
10.15 Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP
10.15.1 Identification GUID-0D68E846-5A15-4C2C-91A2-F81A74034E81 v1

Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP Real<=>
10.15.2 Functionality GUID-E17A88D7-D095-4F36-9CD5-64EBFD2A1DEA v1
The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of real value signals in the system
relative to each other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used for
monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other logics.
10.15.3 Function block GUID-8752DF2A-D131-4461-80C6-C52F9980D228 v1
REALCOMP
INPUT INEQUAL
REF INHIGH
INLOW
10.15.4 Signals
Table 286: REALCOMP Input signals

INPUT REAL 0.000 Input value to be compared with reference value
REF REAL 0.000 Reference value to be compared with input value
Table 287: REALCOMP Output signals

INEQUAL BOOLEAN Input value is equal to the reference value
INHIGH BOOLEAN Input value is higher than the reference value
INLOW BOOLEAN Input value is lower than the reference value

Technical manual
Logic
10.15.5 Settings
Table 288: REALCOMP Group settings (basic)

EnaAbs Signed - - Signed Selection for absolute or signed
Absolute comparison
RefSource Set Value - - Set Value Selection for reference value either
Input REF input or setting
SetValue -999.999 - - 0.001 0.001 Set value for reference
999.999
SetValPrefix milli - - unit Multiplication factor for SetValue
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
EqualBandHigh 0.10 - 50.00 % 0.01 0.50 Equal band high limit in % of
reference value
EqualBandLow 0.10 - 50.00 % 0.01 0.50 Equal band low limit in % of reference
value
10.15.6 Operation principle GUID-3FA699A8-D076-4E5E-BCB8-C6B7907573D1 v2
The comparison can be done in two ways,
1. Between 2 inputs, INPUT and REF

2. Between INPUT and the SetValue setting
The selection of reference value for comparison can be done through setting RefSource. If
RefSource is selected as Input REF then the reference value for comparison is taken from
second input signal (REF). If RefSource is selected as Set Value then the reference value for
comparison is taken from setting (SetValue).
Generally the inputs to the function are in SI units, but when the comparison is to be done with
respect to set level, then the user can set a value in any unit out of Milli to Giga range in setting
SetValue. The unit can be separately set with setting RefPrefix. Internally the function handles
the reference value for comparator as SetValue*RefPrefix.
Additionally the comparison can be done either between absolute values or signed values and
it depends on the setting EnaAbs. If EnaAbs is selected as Absolute then both input and
reference value is converted into absolute values and then comparison is done. If EnaAbs is
selected as Signed then the comparison is done without absolute conversion.

Technical manual
Logic
EnaAbs
INPUT
ABS T
F
High
Comparator
EqualBandHigh INHIGH
RefSource XOR INEQUAL
REF ABS T
T
F Low
SetValue F comparator
INLOW
SetValPrefix
EqualBandLow
Figure 191: Logic diagram for REALCOMP

This function has two settings EqualBandHigh and EqualBandLow to provide margins from
reference value for equal to condition. When the INPUT value is within high and low band,
output INEQUAL will get set.
In order to avoid oscillations at boundary conditions of equal band low limit and high limit,
hysteresis has been provided. If the INPUT is above the equal high level margin including
hysteresis, then INHIGH will set. Similarly if the INPUT is below the equal low level margin
including hysteresis, then INLOW will set.
INEQUAL Reset / INHIGH Set INEQUAL Set / INHIGH Reset
EqualBandHigh
Internal
Equal Band REF or SetValue Hysteresis for
equal band
EqualBandLow
INEQUAL Reset / INLOW Set INEQUAL Set / INLOW Reset

Figure 192: Operation principle of REALCOMP
When EnaAbs is set as absolute comparison and SetValue is set less than 0.2%
of the set unit then INLOW output will never pickups. During the above
mentioned condition, due to marginal value for avoiding oscillations of
function outputs, the INLOW output will never set.

Technical manual
Logic

GUID-62792FCB-B436-4034-9A08-C9FF918FF547 v1
REALCOMP function can compare the values from milli value level to giga value level and the
maximum expectable accuracy level from the function is 10 µ.
GUID-3FDD7677-1D86-42AD-A545-B66081C49B47 v4
Table 289: Number of REALCOMP instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
REALCOMP 10 10 10

Technical manual
Monitoring
Section 11 Monitoring
11.1 Measurements IP14593-1 v3
SEMOD56123-2 v8

Power system measurements CVMMXN -
P, Q, S, I, U, f
SYMBOL-RR V1 EN-US
Phase current measurement CMMXU -
SYMBOL-SS V1 EN-US
Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU -
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN-US
Current sequence component CMSQI -

measurement
I1, I2, I0
SYMBOL-VV V1 EN-US
Voltage sequence component VMSQI -

measurement
U1, U2, U0
SYMBOL-TT V1 EN-US
Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU -
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN-US
Measurement functions are used for power system measurement, supervision and reporting
to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for example, via IEC 61850.
The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power, reactive power,
currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficient production, transmission
and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the system operator fast and easy overview
of the present status of the power system. Additionally, it can be used during testing and
commissioning of protection and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and
connection of instrument transformers (CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic
comparison of the measured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper
operation of the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it can be used to verify
proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection function.

Technical manual
Monitoring
The available measured values from an IED are depending on the actual
hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit, low limit,
high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported, that is, the
measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact of noise in
the inputs.
Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level when
change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all changes since the
last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value can also be based on
periodic reporting.
Main menu/Measurement/Monitoring/Service values/CVMMXN
The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system quantities:
• P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

• PF: power factor
• U: phase-to-phase voltage amplitude
• I: phase current amplitude
• F: power system frequency
,
The measuring functions CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU provide physical quantities:
• I: phase currents (amplitude and angle) (CMMXU)

• U: voltages (phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) (VMMXU,
VNMMXU)
The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental

frequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current and voltage signals. The measured
power quantities are available either, as instantaneously calculated quantities or, averaged
values over a period of time (low pass filtered) depending on the selected settings.
It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of
rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.
The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware, (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component quantities:
• I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, amplitude and angle)

• U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, amplitude and angle).
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the
logic configuration made in PCM600.

Technical manual
Monitoring
CVMMXN
I3P* S
U3P* S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
U
U_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE
Figure 193: CVMMXN function block
CMMXU
I3P* IL1
IL1RANG
IL1ANGL
IL2
IL2RANG
IL2ANGL
IL3
IL3RANG
IL3ANGL
Figure 194: CMMXU function block
VMMXU
U3P* UL12
UL12RANG
UL12ANGL
UL23
UL23RANG
UL23ANGL
UL31
UL31RANG
UL31ANGL
Figure 195: VMMXU function block
CMSQI
I3P* 3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL
Figure 196: CMSQI function block

Technical manual
Monitoring
VMSQI
U3P* 3U0
3U0RANG
3U0ANGL
U1
U1RANG
U1ANGL
U2
U2RANG
U2ANGL
Figure 197: VMSQI function block
VNMMXU
U3P* UL1
UL1RANG
UL1ANGL
UL2
UL2RANG
UL2ANGL
UL3
UL3RANG
UL3ANGL
Figure 198: VNMMXU function block
11.1.4 Signals
Table 290: CVMMXN Input signals

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
Table 291: CVMMXN Output signals

S REAL Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE INTEGER Apparent Power range
P_INST REAL Active Power
P REAL Active Power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE INTEGER Active Power range
Q_INST REAL Reactive Power
Q REAL Reactive Power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE INTEGER Reactive Power range
PF REAL Power Factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE INTEGER Power Factor range
ILAG BOOLEAN Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD BOOLEAN Current is leading voltage
U REAL Calculated voltage magnitude of deadband value
U_RANGE INTEGER Calculated voltage range

Technical manual
Monitoring

I REAL Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
I_RANGE INTEGER Calculated current range
F REAL System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE INTEGER System frequency range
Table 292: CMMXU Input signals

SIGNAL
Table 293: CMMXU Output signals

IL1 REAL IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL1RANG INTEGER IL1 Amplitude range
IL1ANGL REAL IL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 294: VMMXU Input signals

SIGNAL
Table 295: VMMXU Output signals

UL12 REAL UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL12RANG INTEGER UL12 Amplitude range
UL12ANGL REAL UL12 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 296: CMSQI Input signals

SIGNAL
Table 297: CMSQI Output signals

3I0 REAL 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3I0RANG INTEGER 3I0 Amplitude range
3I0ANGL REAL 3I0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I1 REAL I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I1RANG INTEGER I1 Amplitude range
I1ANGL REAL I1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I2 REAL I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I2RANG INTEGER I2 Amplitude range
I2ANGL REAL I2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 298: VMSQI Input signals

SIGNAL
Table 299: VMSQI Output signals

3U0 REAL 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3U0RANG INTEGER 3U0 Amplitude range
3U0ANGL REAL 3U0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U1 REAL U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U1RANG INTEGER U1 Amplitude range
U1ANGL REAL U1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U2 REAL U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U2RANG INTEGER U2 Amplitude range
U2ANGL REAL U2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 300: VNMMXU Input signals

SIGNAL

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 301: VNMMXU Output signals

11.1.5 Settings SEMOD130322-4 v7
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are depending
on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
These six functions are not handled as a group, so parameter settings are only available in the
first setting group.
The following terms are used in the Unit and Description columns:
• UBase (UB): Base voltage in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for voltage
setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary voltage supervised
object.
• IBase (IB): Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting.
It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the supervised
object.
• SBase (SB): Base setting for power values in MVA.
Table 302: CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)

SLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of SBase
SLowLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
SMin 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
SMax 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
SRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
PMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
PMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase

Technical manual
Monitoring

PRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
QMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
QMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
QRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
PFMin -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Minimum value
PFMax -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Maximum value
PFRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
UMin 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UMax 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
URepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
IMin 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 5.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IMax 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
FrMin 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
FrMax 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 70.000 Maximum value
FrRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
On
Value groups

Technical manual
Monitoring

Mode L1, L2, L3 - - L1, L2, L3 Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
PowAmpFact 0.000 - 6.000 - 0.001 1.000 Amplitude factor to scale power
calculations
PowAngComp -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle compensation for phase shift
between measured I & U
k 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, U and I
Table 303: CVMMXN Non group settings (advanced)

SDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
SZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
SHiHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
SHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
SLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range,
common for all limits
PDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
PZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
PHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
PHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
PLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
PLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
PLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range,
QDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
QZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
QHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
QHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
QLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
QLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
QLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range,
PFDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
PFZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 100 500 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range

Technical manual
Monitoring

PFHiHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 High High limit (physical value)
PFHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.800 High limit (physical value)
PFLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -0.800 Low limit (physical value)
PFLowLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
PFLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range,
UDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
UZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
UHiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
ULowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
ULowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
ULimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range,
IDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
IZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
IHiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
ILowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
ILowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
ILimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range,
FrDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
FrZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 10 100 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
FrHiHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 65.000 High High limit (physical value)
FrHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 63.000 High limit (physical value)
FrLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 47.000 Low limit (physical value)
FrLowLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 45.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
FrLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range,
UGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of UBase
IGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of IBase
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage
at 5% of Ur
at 30% of Ur
at 100% of Ur
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current
at 5% of Ir
at 30% of Ir

Technical manual
Monitoring

at 100% of Ir
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of
Ir
Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100%
of Ir
Table 304: CMMXU Non group settings (basic)

IL1DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
IL1Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IL1Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
Value groups
IL1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
IL1AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 305: CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

IL1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
IL1HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IL1HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
at 5% of Ir
at 30% of Ir
IL1LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
IL1LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
at 100% of Ir
Ir
Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100%
of Ir
IL1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range,
0,001% of range
0,001% of range
Table 306: VMMXU Non group settings (basic)

UL12DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
On
UL12ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
UL12Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase

Technical manual
Monitoring

UL12Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL12RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
Value groups
UL12AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
0,001% of range
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
0,001% of range
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
Table 307: VMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

UL12HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL12HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL12LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL12LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
at 100% of Ur
UL12LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range,

Technical manual
Monitoring

Table 308: CMSQI Non group settings (basic)

3I0DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
3I0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
3I0Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
3I0Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
3I0RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
Value groups
3I0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range,
3I0AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
On
I1DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
I1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
I1Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
I1Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
I1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
I1AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
I2DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
I2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
I2Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase

Technical manual
Monitoring

I2Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
I2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
I2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range,
I2AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
Table 309: CMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

3I0HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
3I0HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
3I0LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
3I0LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
I1HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
I1HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
I1LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
I1LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
I1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range,
I2HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
I2HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
I2LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
I2LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
Table 310: VMSQI Non group settings (basic)

3U0DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
3U0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
3U0Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
3U0Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
Value groups
3U0RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
3U0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range,
3U0AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)

Technical manual
Monitoring

On
U1DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
U1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
U1Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
U1Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
U1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
U1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range,
U1AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
U2DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
U2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
U2Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
U2Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
U2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
U2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range,
U2AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
UAmpPreComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate
voltage at 5% of Ur
voltage at 30% of Ur
voltage at 100% of Ur
Table 311: VMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

3U0HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
3U0HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
3U0LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
3U0LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U1HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
U1HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
U1LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
U1LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase

Technical manual
Monitoring

U2HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
U2HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
U2LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
U2LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
Table 312: VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)

On
0,001% of range
Value groups
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
0,001% of range
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
0,001% of range

Technical manual
Monitoring

Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
Table 313: VNMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

at 100% of Ur

Table 314: CVMMXN Monitored data

S REAL - MVA Apparent Power magnitude of
deadband value
P REAL - MW Active Power magnitude of deadband
value
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive Power magnitude of
deadband value
PF REAL - - Power Factor magnitude of deadband
value
U REAL - kV Calculated voltage magnitude of
deadband value
I REAL - A Calculated current magnitude of
deadband value
F REAL - Hz System frequency magnitude of
deadband value

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 315: CMMXU Monitored data

IL1 REAL - A IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
IL1ANGL REAL - deg IL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
value
IL2ANGL REAL - deg IL2 Angle, magnitude of reported
value
value
IL3ANGL REAL - deg IL3 Angle, magnitude of reported
value
Table 316: VMMXU Monitored data

UL12 REAL - kV UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
UL12ANGL REAL - deg UL12 Angle, magnitude of reported
value
reported value
value
reported value
value
Table 317: CMSQI Monitored data

3I0 REAL - A 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
3I0ANGL REAL - deg 3I0 Angle, magnitude of reported
value
I1 REAL - A I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
I1ANGL REAL - deg I1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I2 REAL - A I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
I2ANGL REAL - deg I2 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 318: VMSQI Monitored data

3U0 REAL - kV 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
3U0ANGL REAL - deg 3U0 Angle, magnitude of reported
value
U1 REAL - kV U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
U1ANGL REAL - deg U1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U2 REAL - kV U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
U2ANGL REAL - deg U2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 319: VNMMXU Monitored data

UL1 REAL - kV UL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
value
reported value
value
reported value
value
11.1.7.1 Measurement supervision SEMOD54417-130 v4
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further
process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-processing blocks. The
number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED and built-in
options.
The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:
• Locally by means of the local HMI

• Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus
• Internally by connecting the analogue output signals to the Disturbance Report function
Phase angle reference SEMOD54417-303 v5

All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General setting
parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Zero point clamping SEMOD54417-137 v4

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the noise in the
input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general setting (XZeroDb where X
equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL1-3, UL12-31, I1, I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0). Observe that this
measurement supervision zero point clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping
used for the measurement values within CVMMXN.
Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity SEMOD54417-140 v5

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in the function block by
means of four defined operating thresholds, see figure 199. The monitoring has two different
modes of operating:
• Overfunction, when the measured quantity exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or High-high
limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
• Underfunction, when the measured quantity decreases under the Low limit (XLowLim) or
Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.
X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 199.
Y = Magnitude of the Measured Quantity
X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit
X_RANGE= 1 Hysteresis
High limit
X_RANGE=0
X_RANGE=0 t
Low limit
X_RANGE=2
Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4
Figure 199: Presentation of operating limits

Each analogue output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output
signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: High-high limit
exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit).
The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 199.
The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between the
operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring channel
separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.
Actual value of the measured quantity SEMOD54417-150 v4

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The measurement
is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting of the value to the
higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following basic reporting modes
are available:
• Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

• Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
• Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)

Technical manual
Monitoring
• Amplitude Deadband and 5s cyclic

• Amplitude Deadband and 30s cyclic
• Amplitude Deadband and 1min cyclic
Cyclic reporting SEMOD54417-158 v3

The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting (XRepTyp).
The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or integral dead-band
reporting.
In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when measured
value passes any of the defined threshold limits.
Y
Value Reported Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4
Y1 Y5
t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)
t
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Value 5
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt IEC05000500-2-en.vsdx
Figure 200: Periodic reporting
Amplitude dead-band supervision SEMOD54417-163 v6

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is larger
than the ±ΔY pre-defined limits that are set by user (XDbRepInt), then the measuring channel
reports the new value to a higher level. This limits the information flow to a minimum
necessary. Figure 201 shows an example with the amplitude dead-band supervision. The
picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time
interval of one execution cycle from each other.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Value Reported
Y

Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 Y
Y
Y2 Y
Y
Y
Y
Y1
Figure 201: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the ±ΔY limits for dead-band are automatically set around it.
The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by the ±ΔY
set limits.
Integral dead-band reporting SEMOD54417-167 v4

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit
(XDbRepInt), figure 202, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band supervision is
shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated
with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
The last value reported, Y1 in figure 202 serves as a basic value for further measurement. A
difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is
multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The absolute values of these integral
values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is
reported and set as a new base for the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3,
Y4 and Y5).
The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with small
variations that can last for relatively long periods.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
Value
(1st) Value
A Reported Y5
Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported
t
Figure 202: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision
Amplitude deadband and xx cyclic (xx: 5 sec, 30 sec, 1 min) GUID-297D6481-EDFA-4A38-BC9D-29538491254D v1

In this mode of operation, the reporting interval will be cyclic like in reporting type cyclic. This
cyclic time has three options: 5sec, 30 sec and 1 min.
Additionally, if a measuring value has changed from the last reported value, and the change is
larger than ±ΔY predefined limits that are set by user (XDbRepInt), then the measuring channel
reports the new value to a higher level immediately irrespective of cyclic trigger. See Figure
203 for example.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Value
Y1...Y7 : Cyclic reported values, depending upon time Δt.

Y’ and Y” : Deadband reported value, change is greater than setting
Value
Reported
Y5
Y6
Y’ -ΔY
+ΔY
Y1 Y7
Y2 Y4 Y”
Y3
Δt Δt Δt Δt Δt Δt
Time
Figure 203: Example of value reporting in mode dead band and xx cyclic (xx : 5 sec , 30
sec, 1 min)
11.1.7.2 Measurements CVMMXN SEMOD54417-172 v3
Mode of operation SEMOD54417-174 v7

The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage
input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure and calculate
above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the available VT inputs
connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by a parameter setting, which one of the
nine available measuring modes shall be used within the function. Available options are
summarized in the following table:

Technical manual
Monitoring
Set value Formula used for complex, Formula used for voltage Comment
for three-phase power calculation and current magnitude
parameter calculation
“Mode”
1 L1, L2, L3 Used when three phase-to-
* * *
S = U L1 × I L1 + U L 2 × I L 2 + U L 3 × I L 3 U = ( U L1 + U L 2 + U L 3 ) / 3 earth voltages are available
EQUATION1385 V1 EN-US (Equation 38) I = ( I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 ) / 3

2 Arone Used when two phase-to-
S = U L1 L 2 × I L*1 - U L 2 L 3 × I L* 3 U = ( U L1 L 2 + U L 2 L 3 ) / 2 phase voltages are
available
(Equation 40)
I = ( I L1 + I L 3 ) / 2
3 PosSeq Used when only
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq
*
U = 3 × U PosSeq symmetrical three phase
power shall be measured
(Equation 42)
I = I PosSeq
4 L1L2 Used when only UL1L2
S = U L1 L 2 × ( I L*1 - I L* 2 ) U = U L1 L 2 phase-to-phase voltage is
available
(Equation 44)
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 ) / 2

S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L* 2 - I L* 3 ) U = U L2 L3 phase-to-phase voltage is
available
(Equation 46)
I = ( I L2 + I L3 ) / 2

S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L* 3 - I L*1 ) U = U L 3 L1 phase-to-phase voltage is
available
(Equation 48)
I = ( I L 3 + I L1 ) / 2

7 L1 Used when only UL1 phase-
S = 3 × U L1 × I L*1 U = 3 × U L1 to-earth voltage is
available
(Equation 50)
I = I L1

S = 3 × U L 2 × I L* 2 U = 3 × U L2 to-earth voltage is
available
(Equation 52)
I = IL2

S = 3 × U L 3 × I L* 3 U = 3 × U L3 to-earth voltage is
available
(Equation 54)
I = I L3

* means complex conjugated value

Technical manual
Monitoring
It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the measurement
function calculates the three-phase power accurately. In other operating modes that is, from 3
to 9 it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power system is fully
symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF are
calculated in accordance with the following formulas:
P = Re( S )
Q = Im( S )
S = S = P2 + Q2
PF = cosj = P
S
Additionally to the power factor value, the two binary output signals from the function are
provided which indicates the angular relationship between the current and voltage phasors.
Binary output signal ILAG is set TRUE when current phasor is lagging behind voltage phasor.
Binary output signal ILEAD is set TRUE when current phasor is leading the voltage phasor.
Each analogue output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output
signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
Calibration of analog inputs SEMOD54417-293 v5

Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated to get 0.5
class measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and
100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant
and linear in between, see example in figure 204.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Figure 204: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase signal, in the group signals will be used as reference. The
amplitude and angle compensation will be used for other related input signals.
Low pass filtering SEMOD54417-233 v4

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to
introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, U, I and power
factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured
quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
X = k × X Old + (1 - k ) × X Calculated
where:
X is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle
XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle
k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately
given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay). When k is set to value
bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k shall be determined separately
for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.
Zero point clamping SEMOD54417-250 v5

In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not
present, it is possible for the end user to set the amplitudeIGenZeroDb level for current and
voltage measurement UGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either current or voltage

Technical manual
Monitoring
measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values for power (P, Q and S) and
power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the measurement supervision functionality,
included in CVMMXN, is using these values the zero clamping will influence the subsequent
supervision (observe the possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement
supervision, see section "Measurement supervision").
Compensation facility SEMOD54417-253 v5

In order to compensate for small amplitude and angular errors in the complete measurement
chain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it is possible to perform on
site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by setting the complex constant
which is then internally used within the function to multiply the calculated complex apparent
power S. This constant is set as amplitude (setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value
1.000) and angle (setting parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values
for these two parameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated
value (complex constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating
range (for example, around rated power) can be done at site. However, to perform this
calibration it is necessary to have an external power meter with high accuracy class available.
Directionality SEMOD54417-256 v7
If CT earthing parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and reactive
power will be always measured towards the protected object. This is shown in the following
figure 205.
Busbar
IED
P Q
Protected
Object
IEC09000038-1-EN V1 EN-US
Figure 205: Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements

Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow
from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative values when they
flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side of the power
transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have actually opposite
directional convention for active and reactive power measurements. This can be easily
achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the

Technical manual
Monitoring
active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the protected object
towards the busbar.
Frequency SEMOD54417-261 v2
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained from the
pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as an output.
11.1.7.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU SEMOD54417-264 v7
The Phase current measurement (CMMXU) function must be connected to three-phase current
input in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the function can be
calibrated to get better then 0.5 class measuring accuracy for internal use, on the outputs and
IEC 61850. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated
current. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see
figure 204.
Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each amplitude output
has a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The supervision output signal is an
integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
11.1.7.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU, VNMMXU SEMOD54417-268 v6
The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool
to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents when it comes to class 0.5
calibrations, see above.
The voltages (phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) are available on
the outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output
(ULxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see
section "Measurement supervision".
11.1.7.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI SEMOD54417-299 v6
The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CMSQI) or voltage

(VMSQI) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, other than X_RANG, are
calculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to calibrate the signals. Input
signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and transferred to corresponding output.
Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the outputs
(voltage and current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has a corresponding
supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see
section "Measurement supervision".

M12386-1 v16
Table 320: Power system measurement CVMMXN technical data

Frequency (0.95-1.05) x fr ±2.0 mHz
Voltage (10 to 300) V ±0.3% of U at U≤ 50 V

±0.2% of U at U> 50 V
Current (0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.8% of I at 0.1 x Ir< I < 0.2 x Ir
± 0.5% of I at 0.2 x Ir 0.5 x Sr
(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of P

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
cos φ> 0.7
Reactive power, Q (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr
(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sr
(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of Q

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
cos φ< 0.7
Apparent power, S (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr
(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S >0.5 x Sr
(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of S

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
Power factor, cos (φ) (10 to 300) V <0.02

(0.1-4.0) x Ir
(100 to 220) V <0.01

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
GUID-5E04B3F9-E1B7-4974-9C0B-DE9CD4A2408F v6
Table 321: CMMXU technical data

Current at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir
±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir
Phase angle at symmetrical (0.1-4.0) × Ir ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × Ir 50 V
Phase angle (10 to 300) V ±0.5 degrees at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2 degrees at U > 50 V
GUID-9B8A7FA5-9C98-4CBD-A162-7112869CF030 v5
Table 323: CMSQI technical data

Current positive sequence, I1 (0.1–4.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir
Three phase settings ±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir
Current zero sequence, 3I0 (0.1–1.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

Current negative sequence, I2 (0.1–1.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

Phase angle (0.1–4.0) × Ir ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × Ir < I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

±0.5 degrees at 0.5 × Ir 50 V
Voltage zero sequence, 3U0 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Voltage negative sequence, U2 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
GUID-ED634B6D-9918-464F-B6A4-51B78129B819 v6
Table 325: VNMMXU technical data

Voltage (5 to 175) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
11.2 Gas medium supervision SSIMG GUID-358AD8F8-AE06-4AEA-9969-46E5299D5B4B v3
GUID-AD96C26E-C3E5-4B21-9ED6-12E540954AC3 v4

Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG - 63
11.2.2 Functionality GUID-0692CD0D-F33E-4370-AC91-B216CAAAFC28 v6
Insulation supervision for gas medium (SSIMG) is used for monitoring the circuit breaker
condition. Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is used as input
signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based on received
information.
11.2.3 Function block

GUID-94B75A6D-973D-4F1F-8643-F2128AD31CC4 v3
SSIMG
BLOCK LOCKOUT
BLKALM PRESLO
SENPRES TEMPLO
SENTEMP ALARM
SENPRESALM PRESALM
SENPRESLO TEMPALM
SETPLO PRESSURE
SETTLO TEMP
RESETLO
Figure 206: SSIMG function block

Technical manual
Monitoring
11.2.4 Signals
GUID-89749F71-CAEB-4A57-A1F0-148CCF68E97E v2
Table 326: SSIMG Input signals

BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
SENPRES REAL 0.0 Pressure input from CB
SENTEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
SENPRESALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm signal
SENPRESLO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout signal
SETPLO BOOLEAN 0 Set pressure lockout
SETTLO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESETLO BOOLEAN 0 Reset pressure and temperature lockout
Table 327: SSIMG Output signals

LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level or temperature above lockout
level
PRESLO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
TEMPLO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level
ALARM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level or temperature above alarm level
PRESALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
TEMPALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
PRESSURE REAL Pressure service value
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium
11.2.5 Settings
Table 328: SSIMG Group settings (basic)

On
PresAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for pressure
PresLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Pressure lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the
medium
tPressureAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure alarm
tPressureLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure lockout
indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm

Technical manual
Monitoring

tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetPresAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure alarm
tResetPresLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture
lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm

Table 329: SSIMG Monitored data

PRESSURE REAL - - Pressure service value
TEMP REAL - deg Temperature of the insulation
medium
11.2.7 Operation principle GUID-359458EA-FFAA-4A44-A8E8-9469CA069C80 v7
Gas medium supervision SSIMG is used to monitor the gas pressure in the circuit breaker.
Binary inputs of gas density SENPRESALM, SENPRESLO, and gas pressure signal SENPRES, are
taken into account to initiate the alarm PRESALM and the lockout PRESLO. When SENPRES is
less than PresAlmLimit or binary signal from CB SENPRESALM is high, the gas pressure alarm
PRESALM will be initiated. Similarly, if pressure input SENPRES is less than PresLOLimit or
binary signal from CB SENPRESLO is high, PRESLO will be initiated.
There may be sudden change in pressure of the gas for a very small time, for which the
function need not to initiate any alarm. To avoid the intermittent alarm, two time delays
tPressureAlarm or tPressureLO have been included. If the pressure goes below the settings for
more than these time delays, the corresponding alarm PRESALM or lockout PRESLO will be
initiated. The SETPLO binary input is used for setting the gas pressure lockout PRESLO. The
PRESLO output retains the last value until it is reset by using the binary input RESETLO. The
binary input BLKALM can be used to block the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both
alarm and the lockout indications.
Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The signal is
monitored to detect high temperature.
When temperature input SENTEMP is above TempAlarmLimit, temperature alarm TEMPALM

will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input SENTEMP is above TempLOLimit, temperature
lockout TEMPLO will be initiated.
There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time, for which the
tTempAlarm or tTempLockOut have been included. If the temperature goes above the settings
for more than these time delays, the corresponding alarm TEMPALM or lockout TEMPLO will be
initiated. The SETTLO binary input is used for setting the temperature lockout TEMPLO. The
TEMPLO output retains the last value until it is reset by using the binary input RESETLO. The
binary input BLKALM can be used to block the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both
The output ALARM goes high if the pressure alarm condition or the temperature alarm
condition exists inside the circuit breaker. The output ALARM can be blocked by activating
BLOCK or BLKALM inputs.

Technical manual
Monitoring
The output LOCKOUT goes high if the pressure lockout condition or the temperature lockout
condition exists inside the circuit breaker and it resets by using the binary input RESETLO. The
output LOCKOUT can be blocked by activating BLOCK input.

GUID-F034B396-6600-49EF-B0A5-8ED96766A6A0 v8
Table 330: SSIMG Technical data

Pressure alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Pressure lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for pressure (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Time delay for pressure lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
lockout greater
11.3 Liquid medium supervision SSIML GUID-37669E94-4830-4C96-8A67-09600F847F23 v3
GUID-4CE96EF6-42C6-4F2E-A190-D288ABF766F6 v3

Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML - 71
11.3.2 Functionality GUID-3B1A665F-60A5-4343-85F4-AD9C066CBE8D v7
Insulation supervision for liquid medium (SSIML) is used for monitoring the oil insulated device
condition. For example, transformers, shunt reactors, and so on. Binary information based on
the oil level in the oil insulated devices are used as input signals to the function. In addition,
the function generates alarms based on the received information.

Technical manual
Monitoring
11.3.3 Function block GUID-AC82A86C-495D-4CBD-9BF9-3CC760591AA9 v3
SSIML
BLOCK LOCKOUT
BLKALM LVLLO
SENLEVEL TEMPLO
SENTEMP ALARM
SENLVLALM LVLALM
SENLVLLO TEMPALM
SETLLO LEVEL
SETTLO TEMP
RESETLO
Figure 207: SSIML function block
11.3.4 Signals
GUID-0C378BB3-2104-417F-94B5-16EFC55151FE v2
Table 331: SSIML Input signals

SENLEVEL REAL 0.0 Level input from CB
SENTEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
SENLVLALM BOOLEAN 0 Level alarm signal
SENLVLLO BOOLEAN 0 Level lockout signal
SETLLO BOOLEAN 0 Set level lockout
SETTLO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESETLO BOOLEAN 0 Reset level and temperature lockout
Table 332: SSIML Output signals

LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Level below lockout level or temperature above lockout level
LVLLO BOOLEAN Level below lockout level
TEMPLO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level
ALARM BOOLEAN Level below alarm level or temperature above alarm level
LVLALM BOOLEAN Level below alarm level
TEMPALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
LEVEL REAL Level service value
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium

Technical manual
Monitoring
11.3.5 Settings
Table 333: SSIML Group settings (basic)

On
LevelAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for level
LevelLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Level lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the
medium
tLevelAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level alarm
tLevelLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetLevelAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level alarm
tResetLevelLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture
lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm

Table 334: SSIML Monitored data

LEVEL REAL - - Level service value
TEMP REAL - deg Temperature of the insulation
medium
11.3.7 Operation principle GUID-F4340B59-90D0-4EA7-9FD8-F21D425C884A v8
Liquid medium supervision SSIML is used to monitor the oil level in the oil insulated devices.
Binary inputs of oil level SENLVLALM, SENLVLLO and oil level signal SENLEVEL are taken into
account to initiate the alarm LVLALM and the lockout LVLLO. When SENLEVEL is less than
LevelAlmLimit or binary signal from oil insulated device SENLVLALM is high, the oil level
indication alarm LVLALM will be initiated. Similarly, if oil level input SENLEVEL is less than
LevelLOLimit or binary signal from oil insulated device SENLVLLO is high, the oil level
indication lockout LVLLO will be initiated.
There may be sudden change in oil level for a very small time, for which the function need not
to initiate any alarm. To avoid the intermittent alarm, two time delays tLevelAlarm or
tLevelLockOut have been included. If the oil level goes below the settings for more than these
time delays, the corresponding alarm LVLALM or lockout LVLLO will be initiated. The SETLLO
binary input is used for setting the liquid level lockout LVLLO. The LVLLO output retains the
last value until it is reset by using the binary input RESETLO. The binary input BLKALM can be
used for blocking the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both alarms and the lockout
indication.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The signal is
monitored to detect high temperature.
When temperature input SENTEMP is above TempAlarmLimit, temperature alarm TEMPALM

will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input SENTEMP is above TempLOLimit, temperature
lockout TEMPLO will be initiated.
There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time, for which the
tTempAlarm or tTempLockOuthave been included. If the temperature goes above the settings
for more than these time delays, the corresponding alarm TEMPALM or lockout TEMPLO will be
initiated. The SETTLO binary input is used for setting the temperature lockout TEMPLO. The
TEMPLO output retains the last value until it is reset by using the binary input RESETLO. The
binary input BLKALM can be used for blocking the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both
The output ALARM goes high if the level alarm condition or the temperature alarm condition
exists in the oil insulated devices. The output ALARM can be blocked by activating BLOCK or
BLKALM inputs.
The output LOCKOUT goes high if the pressure lockout condition or the temperature lockout
condition exists in the oil insulated devices and it resets by using the binary input RESETLO.
The output LOCKOUT can be blocked by activating BLOCK input.

GUID-83B0F607-D898-403A-94FD-7FE8D45C73FF v8
Table 335: SSIMLTechnical data

Oil alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Oil lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for oil lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
lockout greater
11.4 Breaker monitoring SSCBR
11.4.1 Identification GUID-0FC081B2-0BC8-4EB8-9529-B941E51F18EE v7

Breaker monitoring SSCBR - -

Technical manual
Monitoring
11.4.2 Functionality GUID-E1FD74C3-B9B6-4E11-AA1B-7E7F822FB4DD v13
11.4.3 Function block GUID-B002ED61-5092-4E9E-AEB6-E4A4310BDAF2 v11
SSCBR
I3P* OPENPOS
BLOCK CLOSEPOS
BLKALM INVDPOS
TRIND TRCMD
POSOPEN TRVTOPAL
POSCLOSE TRVTCLAL
PRESALM OPERALM
PRESLO OPERLO
SPRCHRST CBLIFEAL
SPRCHRD MONALM
RSTCBWR IPOWALPH
RSTTRVT IPOWLOPH
RSTIPOW SPCHALM
RSTSPCHT GPRESALM
GPRESLO
Figure 208: SSCBR function block
11.4.4 Signals
Table 336: SSCBR Input signals

SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarm and lockout indication
TRIND BOOLEAN 0 Trip command from trip circuit
PRESALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm indication from CB
PRESLO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout indication from CB
SPRCHRST BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charging started indication signal
SPRCHRD BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charged indication signal
RSTCBWR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB remaining life and operation counter
RSTTRVT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB closing and opening travel times
RSTIPOW BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated I^CurrExponent
RSTSPCHT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB spring charging time
Table 337: SSCBR Output signals

OPENPOS BOOLEAN CB is in open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN CB is in closed position
INVDPOS BOOLEAN CB is in Invalid Position

Technical manual
Monitoring

TRCMD BOOLEAN Open command issued to CB
TRVTOPAL BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value
TRVTCLAL BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value
OPERALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds alarm limit
OPERLO BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds lockout limit
CBLIFEAL BOOLEAN Remaining life of CB reduced to Life alarm level
MONALM BOOLEAN CB 'not operated for long time' alarm
IPOWALPH BOOLEAN Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open travel time
exceeds alarm limit
IPOWLOPH BOOLEAN Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open travel time
exceeds lockout limit
SPCHALM BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value
GPRESALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
GPRESLO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
11.4.5 Settings
Table 338: SSCBR Non group settings (basic)

On
Value groups
PhSel Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Phase selection
Phase L2
Phase L3
RatedOperCurr 100.00 - 5000.00 A 0.01 1000.00 Rated operating current of the
breaker
OperNoRated 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Number of operations possible at
rated current
RatedFltCurr 500.00 - 99999.99 A 0.01 5000.00 Rated fault current of the breaker
OperNoFault 1 - 10000 - 1 1000 Number of operations possible at
rated fault current
tTrOpenAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for open travel time
tTrCloseAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for close travel time
OperAlmLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 200 Alarm level for number of operations
OperLOLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 300 Lockout level for number of
operations
AccSelCal Aux Contact - - Trip Signal Accumulated energy calculation
Trip Signal selection
CurrExponent 0.50 - 3.00 - 0.01 2.00 Current exponent value used for
energy calculation
AccStopCurr 5.00 - 100.00 %IB 0.01 10.00 RMS current level below which energy
accumulation stops
AlmAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Alarm level for accumulated
I^CurrExponent integrated over CB
open travel time

Technical manual
Monitoring

LOAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Lockout level for accumulated
I^CurrExponent integrated over CB
open travel time
SpChAlmTime 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 1.00 Alarm level for spring charging time
InitCBRemLife 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Initial value for remaining life
estimates
InactiveAlDays 0 - 9999 Day 1 2000 Alarm level for inactive days counter
Table 339: SSCBR Non group settings (advanced)

OpenTimeCorr -0.100 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.010 Correction for open travel time
CloseTimeCorr -0.100 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.010 Correction for close travel time
DirCoef -3.00 - -0.50 - 0.01 -1.50 Directional coefficient for CB life
calculation
CBLifeAlmLevel 1 - 99999 - 1 5000 Alarm level for CB remaining life
ContTrCorr -0.010 - 0.010 s 0.001 0.005 Correction for time difference in
auxiliary and main contacts open time
OperTimeDelay 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.020 Time delay between change of status
of trip output and start of main
contact separation
tDGasPresAlm 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure alarm
tDGasPresLO 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure lockout
InitCounterVal 0 - 9999 - 1 0 Initial value for number of operations
InitAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 9999.99 - 0.01 0.00 Initial value for accum I^CurrExponent
integr over CB open travel time value
InitInactDays 0 - 9999 Day 1 0 Initial value for inactive days
InactiveAlHrs 0 - 23 Hour 1 0 Alarm time for inactive days counter in
hours

Table 340: SSCBR Monitored data

TTRVOP REAL - ms Travel time of the CB during opening
operation
TTRVCL REAL - ms Travel time of the CB during closing
operation
NOOPER INTEGER - - Number of CB operation cycle
CBLIFEPH INTEGER - - CB Remaining life of respective phase
INADAYS INTEGER - - The number of days CB has been
inactive
IPOWPH REAL - - Accumulated I^CurrExponent
integrated over CB open travel time
SPCHT REAL - s The charging time of the CB spring

Technical manual
Monitoring
11.4.7 Operation principle GUID-3902D69C-1858-40DD-AD63-C33C381697BA v12
The breaker monitoring function includes metering and monitoring subfunctions. The
subfunctions can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding
parameter values are On and Off.
The operation of the subfunctions is described by the module diagram as shown in figure 209.
All the modules in the diagram are explained in subsequent sections.

Technical manual
Monitoring
I3P-ILRMSPH
POSCLOSE TTRVOP
POSOPEN CB Contact Travel TTRVCL
BLOCK Time TRVTOPAL
BLKALM TRVTCLAL
RSTTRVT
OPENPOS
CB Status CLOSEPOS
INVDPOS
CBLIFEAL
Remaining Life of CB
CBLIFEPH
RSTCBWR
TRCMD
Accumulated IPOWALPH
energy
I3P-IL IPOWLOPH
TRIND
IPOWPH
RSTIPOW
CB Operation OPERALM
Cycles NOOPER
CB Operation MONALM
Monitoring INADAYS
SPCHALM
SPRCHRST CB Spring Charge SPCHT
SPRCHRD Monitoring
RSTSPCHT
CB Gas Pressure GPRESALM

PRESALM Indication GPRESLO
PRESLO
Figure 209: Functional module diagram of breaker monitoring

Technical manual
Monitoring
11.4.7.1 Circuit breaker contact travel time GUID-3AF0EE8D-AA8E-4F83-9916-61B5D0D6B05B v13
The circuit breaker contact travel time sub function calculates the breaker contact travel time
for opening and closing operations. The operation of the breaker contact travel time
measurement is described in figure210.
POSCLOSE TTRVOP
Contact travel
POSOPEN time TTRVCL
calculation
RSTTRVT
TRVTOPAL
Alarm limit
BLOCK check TRVTCLAL
BLKALM
Figure 210: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker contact travel time
Contact travel time calculation

The contact travel time of the breaker is calculated from the time between the state of change
of auxiliary contacts. The opening travel time is measured between the opening of the
POSCLOSE and closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary contacts. Similarly, the closing travel time is
measured between the opening of the POSOPEN and closing of the POSCLOSE auxiliary
contacts. A compensation factor has been added to consider the time difference between
auxiliary contact operation and the actual physical opening of the breaker main contact.
Main Contact
1
0
POSCLOSE
POSOPEN
1
t1 tOpen t2 t3 tClose t4
tTravelOpen = tOpen + t1 + t2 tTravelClose = tClose + t3 + t4

Figure 211: Travel time calculation

There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the opening of
the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time difference t2 between the time when
the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is completely open. Therefore, a
correction factor needs to be added to get the actual opening time. This factor is added with
the OpenTimeCorr (t1+t2) setting. The closing time is calculated by adding the value set with
the CloseTimeCorr (t3+t4) setting to the measured closing time.
The last measured opening travel time (TTRVOP) and the closing travel time (TTRVCL) are given
as service values.
The values can be reset using the Clear menu on the LHMI or by activation the input RSTCBWR.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Alarm limit check

When the measured opening travel time is longer than the value set in the tTrOpenAlm setting,
the TRVTOPAL output is activated. Similarly, when the measured closing travel time is longer
than the value set in the tTrCloseAlm setting, the TRVTCLAL output is activated.
It is also possible to block the TRVTCLAL and TRVTOPAL alarm signals by activating the BLKALM
input.
11.4.7.2 Circuit breaker status GUID-390A1250-B258-4023-9A7D-0D7E19E13A6C v12
The circuit breaker status subfunction monitors the position of the circuit breaker, that is,
whether the breaker is in the open, closed or error position. The operation is described in
figure 212.
Phase current
I3P-ILRMSPH
check
OPENPOS
Contact
POSCLOSE position CLOSEPOS
indicator
POSOPEN INVDPOS
Figure 212: Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status
Phase current check

The module compares the phase current I3P-ILRMSPH to the AccStopCurr setting. If the
current in the selected phase exceeds the set level, it is reported to the contact position
indicator module as closed circuit breaker.
Contact position indicator

The circuit breaker status is open when the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low, the
POSOPEN input is high and the phase current is less than the setting AccStopCurr value. The
circuit breaker is closed when the POSOPEN input is low and the POSCLOSE input is high. The
breaker is in the error state if both auxiliary contacts have the same value or if the auxiliary
input contact POSCLOSE is low and the POSOPEN input is high but the current is above the
setting AccStopCurr.
The status of the breaker is indicated with the binary outputs OPENPOS, CLOSEPOS and
INVDPOS for open, closed and error position respectively.
11.4.7.3 Remaining life of circuit breaker GUID-C347406A-2B6F-42BD-B70B-51489AB51EAE v13
The Remaining life of circuit breaker subfunction is used to give an indication on the wear and
tear of the circuit breaker. Every time the breaker operates, the life of the circuit breaker
reduces due to wear. The breaker wear depends on the interrupted current. The remaining life
of the breaker is estimated from the circuit breaker trip curve provided by the manufacturer.
The remaining life is decreased by at least one when the circuit breaker is opened. The
operation of the remaining life of circuit breaker subfunction is described in figure 213.

Technical manual
Monitoring
I3P-ILRMSPH
CB remaining CBLIFEPH
POSCLOSE life estimation
RSTCBWR
Alarm limit
BLOCK CBLIFEAL
Check
BLKALM
Figure 213: Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit breaker
Circuit breaker remaining life estimation

If the interrupted current is less than the rated operating current set using the RatedOperCurr
setting, the remaining operations of the breaker are reduced by one operation. If the
interrupted current is more than the rated fault current set using the RatedFltCurr setting, the
remaining operations of the circuit breaker are reduced by the set OperNoRated divided by the
set OperNoFault value. If the tripping current is between these two values, the remaining life
of the circuit breaker is calculated based on the maintenance curve equation given by the
manufacturer. The OperNoRated parameter sets the number of operations the breaker can
perform at the rated current. The OperNoFault parameter sets the number of operations the
breaker can perform at the rated fault current.
Alarm limit check

When the remaining life of a circuit breaker phase drops below the CBLifeAlmLevel setting, the
life alarm CBLIFEAL is activated.
It is possible to deactivate the CBLIFEAL alarm signal by activating the binary input BLKALM.
The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be used by adding the value to the
InitCBRemLife parameter. The value can be reset using the Clear menu from LHMI or by
activating the input RSTCBWR.
11.4.7.4 Accumulated energy GUID-0163FF0F-6E18-4CDC-87AA-578304E0872E v12
The Accumulated energy subfunction calculates the accumulated energy (Iyt) based on current
samples, where the setting CurrExponent (y) ranges from 0.5 to 3.0. The operation is
described in figure 214.
The TRCMD output is enabled when either of the trip indications from the trip coil circuit TRIND
is high or the breaker status is OPENPOS.
I3P-IL
TRCMD
I3P-ILRMSPH Accumulated
POSCLOSE energy
calculation IPOWPH
TRIND
LRSTIPOW
IPOWALPH
Alarm limit
BLOCK Check IPOWLOPH
BLKALM
Figure 214: Functional module diagram for estimating accumulated energy

Technical manual
Monitoring
Accumulated energy calculation

Accumulated energy can be calculated either with TRIND or POSCLOSE by selecting the
AccSelCal parameter value accordingly.
The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE or TRIND input events. It ends when the RMS
current is lower than the AccStopCurr setting.
The ContTrCorr setting is used to determine the accumulated energy in relation to the time
the main contact opens. If the setting is positive, the calculation of energy starts after the
auxiliary contact has opened and the delay equal to the value of the ContTrCorr setting has
passed. When the setting is negative, the calculation starts in advance by the correction time
in relation to when the auxiliary contact opened.
Main Contact Main Contact

close close
open open
POSCLOSE 1 POSCLOSE 1
0 0
Energy Energy
Accumulation Accumulation
starts starts
ContTrCorr ContTrCorr
(Negative) (Positive)
Figure 215: Significance of correction factor setting

Accumulated energy can also be calculated by using the change of state of the trip output.
TRIND is used to get the instance of the trip output and the time delay between the trip
initiation and the opening of the main contact is introduced by the setting OperTimeDelay.
The accumulated energy output IPOWPH is provided as a service value. The value can be reset
by enabling RSTIPOW through LHMI or by activating the input RSTIPOW.
Alarm limit check

The IPOWALPH alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the set value
AlmAccCurrPwr.
IPOWLOPH is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the limit of the LOAccCurrPwr
setting.
The IPOWALPH and IPOWLOPH outputs can be blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM.
11.4.7.5 Circuit breaker operation cycles GUID-D3481D26-2E42-455E-8DB2-91538421F3B1 v10
The circuit breaker operation cycles subfunction counts the number of closing-opening
sequences of the breaker. The operation counter value is updated after each closing-opening
sequence. The operation is described in figure216.

Technical manual
Monitoring
POSCLOSE
Operation
POSOPEN NOOPER
counter
RSTCBWR
OPERALM
Alarm limit
BLOCK
Check
OPERLO
BLKALM
Figure 216: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation cycles
Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state of change of the
auxiliary contact inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.
The number of operations NOOPER is given as a service value. The old circuit breaker
operation counter value can be used by adding the value to the InitCounterVal parameter and
can be reset by Clear CB wear in the Clear menu on the LHMI or activating the input RSTCBWR.
Alarm limit check

OPERALM is generated when the number of operations exceeds the set value of the
OperAlmLevel threshold setting.
If the number of operations increases and exceeds the limit value set with the OperLOLevel
setting, the OPERLO output is activated.
The binary outputs OPERALM and OPERALO are deactivated when the BLKALM input is activated.
11.4.7.6 Circuit breaker operation monitoring GUID-6DAE4C6B-BD66-49CD-817D-08E4EBF47DE0 v9
The circuit breaker operation monitoring subfunction indicates the inactive days of the circuit
breaker and gives an alarm when the number of days exceed the set level. The operation of the
circuit breaker operation monitoring is shown in figure 217.
POSCLOSE
Inactive timer INADAYS
POSOPEN
Alarm limit MONALM

BLOCK
Check
BLKALM
Figure 217: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation monitoring
Inactive timer
The Inactive timer module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained in
the same open or closed state. The value is calculated by monitoring the states of the POSOPEN
and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.
The number of inactive days INADAYS is available as a service value. The initial number of
inactive days is set using the InitInactDays parameter.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Alarm limit check

MONALM is initiated when the number of inactive days and hours exceed the limit value defined
by the InactiveAlDays and InactivAlHrs setting. The alarm signal MONALM can be blocked by
activating the binary input BLKALM.
11.4.7.7 Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring GUID-F850A940-7890-4C37-8B31-6C7D5B30E582 v12
The circuit breaker spring charge monitoring subfunction calculates the spring charging time.
The operation is described in figure 218.
SPRCHRST
Spring charging
SPRCHRD time SPCHT
measurement
RSTSPCHT
Alarm limit
BLOCK SPCHALM
Check
BLKALM
Figure 218: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring charge indication
Spring charging time measurement

Spring charging time calculation will be initiated as soon as the circuit breaker is closed and
charging motor starts (NO contact of the device is connected to SPRCHRST) to store the energy
in the close spring. An indicator provided in the circuit breaker is displayed when the spring is
completely charged. This status is taken through NO contact and then connected to SPRCHRD.
The binary input SPRCHRST indicates the start of circuit breaker spring charging time.
SPRCHRD indicates that the circuit breaker spring is charged. The spring charging time is
calculated from the difference of these two signal timings. Spring charging indication is
described in figure 218.
The last measured spring charging time SPCHT is provided as a service value. The spring
charging time SPCHT can be reset on the LHMI or by activating the input RSTSPCHT.
Alarm limit check

If the time taken by the spring to charge is more than the value set with the SpChAlmTime
setting, the subfunction generates the SPCHALM alarm.
It is possible to block the SPCHALM alarm signal by activating the BLKALM binary input.
11.4.7.8 Circuit breaker gas pressure indication GUID-9D070D52-B499-4D45-9195-60181819184E v10
The circuit breaker gas pressure indication subfunction monitors the gas pressure inside the
arc chamber. The operation is described in figure 219.

Technical manual
Monitoring
PRESALM
tDGasPresAlm
BLOCK AND t GPRESALM
BLKALM
tDGasPresLO
PRESLO AND t GPRESLO
Figure 219: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure indication
When the PRESALM binary input is activated, the GPRESALM output is activated after a time
delay set with the tDGasPresAlm setting. The GPRESALM alarm can be blocked by activating the
BLKALM input.
If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the PRESLO binary input goes high, activating
the lockout alarm GPRESLO after a time delay set with the tDGasPresLO setting. The GPRESLO
alarm can be blocked by activating the BLKALM input.
The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the BLOCK input
deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The alarm signals from the function can be
blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM.

GUID-B6799420-D726-460E-B02F-C7D4F1937432 v9
Table 341: SSCBR Technical data

Alarm level for open and close (0 – 200) ms ±3 ms
travel time
Alarm level for number of (0 – 9999) -
operations
Independent time delay for spring (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
charging time alarm greater
Independent time delay for gas (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
pressure alarm greater
Independent time delay for gas (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
pressure lockout greater
CB Contact Travel Time, opening ±3 ms
and closing
Remaining Life of CB ±2 operations
Accumulated Energy ±1.0% or ±0.5 whichever is greater
11.5 Event function EVENT SEMOD120002-1 v2
SEMOD167950-2 v2

Event function EVENT -
S00946 V1 EN-US

Technical manual
Monitoring
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication, time-tagged
events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level. These events are
created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the Event function (EVENT).
The EVENT function block is used for LON and SPA communication.
Analog, integer and double indication values are also transferred through the EVENT function.
EVENT
BLOCK
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
ÎNPUT10
ÎNPUT11
ÎNPUT12
ÎNPUT13
ÎNPUT14
ÎNPUT15
ÎNPUT16
Figure 220: EVENT function block
11.5.4 Signals IP11335-1 v2
Table 342: EVENT Input signals

INPUT1 GROUP 0 Input 1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL

Technical manual
Monitoring

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
11.5.5 Settings IP11336-1 v2
Table 343: EVENT Non group settings (basic)

SPAChannelMask Off - - Off SPA channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
LONChannelMask Off - - Off LON channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
EventMask1 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 1
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

Technical manual
Monitoring

OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
MinRepIntVal1 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 1

Technical manual
Monitoring

The main purpose of the Event function (EVENT) is to generate events when the state or value
of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a state transition, for which
event generation is enabled.
Each EVENT function has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given a name from the
Application Configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to create single events, but are
also intended for double indication events. For double indications, only the first eight inputs,
1–8, must be used. Inputs 9–16 can be used for other types of events in the same EVENT block.
The EVENT function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.
Events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals and binary
input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processing module, while the
binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the input module. Time-tagging of the
events that are originated from internal logical signals have a resolution corresponding to the
execution cycle-time of the source application. Time-tagging of the events that are originated
from binary input signals have a resolution of 1 ms.
The outputs from the EVENT function are formed by the reading of status, events and alarms
by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each input is intended to
be used by the station level.
All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000
events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is
overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.
Events are produced according to set event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for
both the LON and SPA communication. An EventMask can be set individually for each input
channel. These settings are available:
• NoEvents
• OnSet
• OnReset
• OnChange
• AutoDetect

Technical manual
Monitoring
It is possible to define which part of the EVENT function generates the events. This can be
performed individually for communication types SPAChannelMask and LONChannelMask. For
each communication type these settings are available:
• Off
• Channel 1-8
• Channel 9-16
• Channel 1-16
For LON communication, events are normally sent to station level at change. It is also possible
to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each input channel.
To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturate the
EVENT function or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota limiter is implemented. If
an input creates events at a rate that completely consume the granted quota then further
events from the channel will be blocked. This block will be removed when the input calms down
and the accumulated quota reach 66% of the maximum burst quota. The maximum burst
quota per input channel is 45 events per second.
11.6 Disturbance report DRPRDRE IP14584-1 v2
M16055-1 v9
Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification device number
Disturbance report DRPRDRE - -
Disturbance report A1RADR - A4RADR - -
Disturbance report B1RBDR - B22RBDR - -
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary
system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the disturbance report
functionality.
Disturbance report (DRPRDRE), always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all
selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with a maximum of
40 analog and 352 binary signals.
The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:
• Event list
• Indications
• Event recorder
• Trip value recorder
• Disturbance recorder
• Settings information
The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding configuration,

starting conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.

Technical manual
Monitoring
A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AnRADR or BnRBDR function blocks,

which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All connected signals from start of pre-fault
time to the end of post-fault time will be included in the recording. Disturbance record will
have visible settings from all function instances that are configured in the application
configuration tool.
Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade format as a
reader file HDR, a configuration file CFG, and a data file DAT. The same applies to all events,
which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The local HMI is used to get information about
the recordings. The disturbance report files can be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis
using the disturbance handling tool.
11.6.3 Function block IP806-1 v1
M12510-3 v3
DRPRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED
Figure 221: DRPRDRE function block

SEMOD54843-4 v3
A4RADR
ÎNPUT31
ÎNPUT32
ÎNPUT33
ÎNPUT34
ÎNPUT35
ÎNPUT36
ÎNPUT37
ÎNPUT38
ÎNPUT39
ÎNPUT40
Figure 222: A4RADR function block, derived analog inputs

SEMOD54845-4 v6
B1RBDR
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
ÎNPUT10
ÎNPUT11
ÎNPUT12
ÎNPUT13
ÎNPUT14
ÎNPUT15
ÎNPUT16
Figure 223: B1RBDR function block, binary inputs, example for B1RBDR - B22RBDR

Technical manual
Monitoring
11.6.4 Signals
Table 344: DRPRDRE Output signals

DRPOFF BOOLEAN Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART BOOLEAN Disturbance recording started
RECMADE BOOLEAN Disturbance recording made
CLEARED BOOLEAN All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED BOOLEAN More than 80% of memory used
GUID-D025D5D9-A0F3-4A00-891A-63AD5F609A77
v3
Table 345: A4RADR Input signals

INPUT31 REAL 0 Analog channel 31
Table 346: B1RBDR Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 1

Technical manual
Monitoring
GUID-D3A8067F-80F8-4174-BD2D-4C43F4B99020 v3
B2RBDR to B22RBDR functions have the same input signal specifications as B1RBDR but with
different numbering:
• B2RBDR: INPUT17 to INPUT32 (binary channels 17 to 32)

11.6.5 Settings
Table 347: DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)

On
PreFaultRecT 0.05 - 9.90 s 0.01 0.10 Pre-fault recording time
PostFaultRecT 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.5 Post-fault recording time
TimeLimit 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Fault recording time limit
PostRetrig Off - - Off Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not
On (Off)
MaxNoStoreRec 10 - 100 - 1 100 Maximum number of stored
disturbances
ZeroAngleRef 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Trip value recorder, phasor reference
channel
OpModeTest Off - - Off Operation mode during test mode
On
SetInfoInDRep Disable - - Enable Enable Disturbance report settings
Enable functionality
GUID-E05EEC82-CB90-4E73-B9C9-4C16FD95FCBF v1
A2RADR to A4RADR functions have the same Non group settings (basic) as A1RADR but with
different numbering:
• A2RADR: Operation11 to Operation20


Technical manual
Monitoring
A2RADR to A4RADR functions have the same Non group settings (advanced) as A1RADR but
with different numbering (examples given in brackets):
• A2RADR: 11 to 20 (NomValue11, nominal value for analog channel 11)

Table 348: B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)

TrigDR01 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED01 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 1
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip

Technical manual
Monitoring

On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary
channel 1 (IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
channel 2 (IEC -60870-5-103)

Technical manual
Monitoring

-60870-5-103)
channel 3 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 4
(IEC -60870-5-103)
channel 4 (IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
channel 5 (IEC -60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
channel 6 (IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
channel 7 (IEC -60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
channel 8 (IEC -60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
channel 9 (IEC -60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
channel 10 (IEC -60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
channel 11 (IEC -60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
channel 12 (IEC -60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
channel 13 (IEC -60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
channel 14 (IEC -60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)

Technical manual
Monitoring

channel 15 (IEC -60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
channel 16 (IEC -60870-5-103)
Table 349: B1RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

TrigLevel01 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 1
IndicationMa01 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 1
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show

Technical manual
Monitoring

Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
GUID-8702C5B9-05A3-4E61-8952-C66483FFDFE2 v4
B2RBDR to B22RBDR functions have the same Non group settings (basic) as B1RBDR but with
different numbering (examples given in brackets):
• B2RBDR: 17 to 32 (SetLED17, set LED on HMI for binary channel 17)

B2RBDR to B22RBDR functions have the same Non group settings (advanced) as B1RBDR but
with different numbering (examples given in brackets):
• B2RBDR: 17 to 32 (IndicationMa17, indication mask for binary channel 17)


Technical manual
Monitoring


Table 350: DRPRDRE Monitored data

MemoryUsed INTEGER - % Memory usage (0-100%)
UnTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 1
activated
OvTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 1
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated

Technical manual
Monitoring

activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated

Technical manual
Monitoring

activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated

Technical manual
Monitoring

activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
FaultNumber INTEGER - - Disturbance fault number

M12155-6 v13
Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply the operator,
analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events in the system.
The functions included in the disturbance report are:
• Event list (EL)

• Indications (IND)
• Event recorder (ER)
• Trip value recorder (TVR)
• Disturbance recorder (DR)
• Settings information
Figure 224 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions and function
blocks. Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER) and Indications (IND) uses information from the
binary input function blocks (BxRBDR).Trip value recorder (TVR) uses analog information from
the analog input function blocks (AxRADR). Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE acquires
information from both AxRADR and BxRBDR.
Figure 224: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings, each with
the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list function is working

Technical manual
Monitoring
continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time, and so on. Settings

information function contains all the visible settings, parameter information of components
configured in ACT, runtime status and IEC61850 behavior that is added to the disturbance
record header file. These settings information is recorded in XML format and then grouped for
each function instance in the HDR file. The function, setting names and Enum values are same
as in the HMI and can be translated to the selected HMI language. All setting values are
updated along with the units. If the setting values are related to the global base value, then the
setting value is scaled and updated with corresponding global base unit. All information in the
disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash memories. This implies that no information is
lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each report will get an identification number in the
interval from 0-999.
Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded when the
memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new one. The total
recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling frequency, number
of analog and binary channels and recording time and settings information (refer Figure 226
for the recording times definition). Figure 225 shows the number of recordings versus the
total recording time tested for a typical configuration. In a 50 Hz system, it is possible to
record 100 disturbance recordings where the average recording time for each disturbance
recording file is 3.4 seconds with 40 analog and 96 binary signals in each recording. The
memory limit does not affect the rest of the disturbance recordings report (Event list (EL),
Event recordings (ER), Indications (IND) and Trip value recordings (TVR)).
Number of recordings
100
3,4 s
80 3,4 s 20 analog
96 binary
40 analog
96 binary
60 6,3 s
6,3 s
6,3 s 50 Hz
40
60 Hz
Total recording time
250 300 350 400 s
en05000488.vsd
Figure 225: Example of number of recordings versus the total recording time
The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total

recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of recordings to
less than 100.
The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This might cause
disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Disturbance information M12155-175 v4

Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip values are
available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the user must use a PC
and - either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP or MMS (over 61850) client. The
PC can be connected to the IED front, rear or remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports).
Indications (IND) M12155-87 v5

Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the
disturbance (not time-tagged).
Event recorder (ER) M12155-89 v6

The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have occurred
during the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or PCM600.
Event list (EL) M12155-177 v7

The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list information is
continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The oldest data is
overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via the local HMI or PCM600.
Trip value recorder (TVR) M12155-91 v5

The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault and during
the fault.
Disturbance recorder (DR) M12155-97 v5

Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the fault.
Settings information GUID-892F72ED-CC6C-469B-90CA-73E9E1181187 v2

For each disturbance recording, the setting values of the configured components are read
twice; once during the trigger of disturbance record and again during post processing of the
disturbance record.
During post processing of the disturbance record, the header file is updated with a section
called Settings . Settings has complete setting values of the configured components that are
read during the trigger time. The setting values, runtime status and the behavior of each
component are compared between the trigger and the post processing time. If there are any
differences, then it will be added in the header file under section Changed_settings.
In the HDR file, section tag Settings has an attribute tag called function which includes
parameters that are grouped based on the function instance. The function tag has content
called name which is the function name provided together with the user-defined name in
brackets similar to the HMI. Status content will indicate the runtime status of the function and
beh content will indicate the IEC61850 behavior of the components, if supported. Non runtime
components will not have status and beh tag contents.
Parameters of the function are listed as a child tag Set with contents name, value and unit:
• name — parameter name same as HMI

• value — actual parameter value
• unit — parameter unit
The changed_settings attribute tag is similar to the settings section. It contains functions
which have changes in parameter value or runtime status or IEC61850 behavior when
compared with trigger and post-processing settings values.
Time tagging M12155-194 v1

The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time tagging
within the disturbance report

Technical manual
Monitoring
Recording times M12155-99 v5

Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a settable time
frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report. Disturbance recorder
(DR), event recorder (ER) and indication function register disturbance data and events during
tRecording, the total recording time.
The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
tRecording = PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on

which criterion stops the current disturbance recording
Trig point
TimeLimit
PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT
1 2 3
en05000487.vsd
Figure 226: The recording times definition
PreFaultRecT, 1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate time
of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any valid
trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all activated
triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was
triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not
reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a recording
and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances. Use the setting
TimeLimit to set this time.
Analog signals M12155-160 v9

Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and
triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for external
analog signals from analog input modules (TRM) and line data communication module (LDCM)
via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI) and summation block (3PHSUM). The last 10 channels
may be connected to internally calculated analog signals available as function block output
signals (mA input signals, phase differential currents, bias currents and so on).

Technical manual
Monitoring
SMAI A1RADR
Block AI3P A2RADR
^GRP2L1 AI1 INPUT1 A3RADR
External
analogue ^GRP2L2 AI2 INPUT2
signals ^GRP2L3 AI3 INPUT3
^GRP2N AI4 INPUT4
Type AIN INPUT5
INPUT6
...
A4RADR
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
Internal analogue signals INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
...
INPUT40
Figure 227: Analog input function blocks

The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after configuration)
available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the SMAI function block. The
information is saved at the Disturbance report base sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally
calculated signals are updated according to the cycle time of the specific function. If a function
is running at lower speed than the base sampling rate, Disturbance recorder will use the latest
updated sample until a new updated sample is available.
If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the Disturbance
report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration). In case of modification of
a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the Application Configuration tool within
PCM600 is used.
The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases where only
the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the information available as
a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual output (AIN-output). In situations
where AI4-input is used as an input signal the corresponding information is available on the
non-calculated output (AI4) on the SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR
accordingly.
For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the disturbance
recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and triggers even if operation
is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as trigger conditions. The same
applies for the current signals.
If Operation = Off, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph. However,
Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The input channel can still be
used to trig the disturbance recorder.
If Operation = On, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.
The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the entire
disturbance report when being used as triggers.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Binary signals M12155-162 v10

Up to 352 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The signals can
be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal is selected to be
recorded when:
• the corresponding function block is included in the configuration

• the signal is connected to the input of the function block
Each of the 352 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (Operation = On).
A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the local HMI (SetLED = On).
The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the disturbance
recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers. The
indications are also selected from these 352 signals with local HMI IndicationMask = Show/
Hide.
Trigger signals M12155-164 v3

The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list, which runs
continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete disturbance
report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled, there is no
disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importance of choosing the
right signals as trigger conditions.
A trigger can be of type:
• Manual trigger
• Binary-signal trigger
• Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)
Manual trigger M12155-167 v5

A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or via station bus
(IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is generated. This feature
is especially useful for testing. Refer to the operator's manual for procedure.
Binary-signal trigger M12155-169 v4

Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger
(Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger from a
logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the disturbance report.
Analog-signal trigger M12155-171 v6

All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in the
disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp, OverTrigLe and
UnderTrigLe.
The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found, the
absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value is above the
threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a greater
than (>) sign with the user-defined name.
If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent
trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure is
separately performed for each channel.
This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is insensitive to DC
offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in the range of one cycle, 20 ms
for a 50 Hz network.
All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.

Technical manual
Monitoring

M12760-1 v11
Table 351: DRPRDRE technical data

Pre-fault time (0.05–9.90) s -
Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s -
Limit time (0.5–10.0) s -
Maximum number of recordings 100, first in - first out -
Time tagging resolution 1 ms See table 509
Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internally -
derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs 352 -
Maximum number of phasors in the Trip Value 30 -
recorder per recording
Maximum number of indications in a disturbance 352 -
report
Maximum number of events in the Event recording 150 -
per recording
Maximum number of events in the Event list 1000, first in - first out -
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording 340 seconds (100 recordings) -
time and maximum number of channels, typical at 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
value) recordings) at 60 Hz
Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz -
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -
11.7 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP GUID-E7A2DB38-DD96-4296-B3D5-EB7FBE77CE07 v2
11.7.1 Identification GUID-E0247779-27A2-4E6C-A6DD-D4C31516CA5C v3

Logical signal status report BINSTATREP - -
11.7.2 Functionality GUID-A72E490D-01F7-4874-B010-8BDE38391D88 v3
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible for a SPA master to
poll signals from various other functions.

Technical manual
Monitoring
11.7.3 Function block GUID-BA0A5BC3-493B-4FE3-B4A9-14F60A88A22F v2
BINSTATREP
BLOCK OUTPUT1
ÎNPUT1 OUTPUT2
ÎNPUT2 OUTPUT3
ÎNPUT3 OUTPUT4
ÎNPUT4 OUTPUT5
ÎNPUT5 OUTPUT6
ÎNPUT6 OUTPUT7
ÎNPUT7 OUTPUT8
ÎNPUT8 OUTPUT9
ÎNPUT9 OUTPUT10
ÎNPUT10 OUTPUT11
ÎNPUT11 OUTPUT12
ÎNPUT12 OUTPUT13
ÎNPUT13 OUTPUT14
ÎNPUT14 OUTPUT15
ÎNPUT15 OUTPUT16
ÎNPUT16
Figure 228: BINSTATREP function block
11.7.4 Signals
Table 352: BINSTATREP Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 1

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 353: BINSTATREP Output signals

OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 1
11.7.5 Settings
Table 354: BINSTATREP Non group settings (basic)

t 0.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 10.0 Time delay of function
11.7.6 Operation principle GUID-537921CA-82B9-4A02-BAD1-67E3AC61AE96 v3
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function has 16 inputs and 16 outputs. The
output status follows the inputs and can be read from the local HMI or via SPA communication.
When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the input signal
remains set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the input signal resets.
INPUTn
OUTPUTn
t t
Figure 229: BINSTATREP logical diagram

Technical manual
Monitoring
11.8 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP SEMOD52451-1 v2
SEMOD113212-2 v3

Measured value expander block RANGE_XP - -
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU),
current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and VMSQI) and IEC 61850
generic communication I/O functions (MVGAPC) are provided with measurement supervision
functionality. All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit,
low limit, high limit and high-high limit. The measure value expander block (RANGE_XP) has
been introduced to enable translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions
to 5 binary signals: below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high limit or above
high-high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable logic or for
alarming purpose.
RANGE_XP
RANGE* HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW
Figure 230: RANGE_XP function block
Table 355: RANGE_XP Input signals

RANGE INTEGER 0 Measured value range
Table 356: RANGE_XP Output signals

HIGHHIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and high-high limit
NORMAL BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW BOOLEAN Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW BOOLEAN Measured value is below low-low limit

Technical manual
Monitoring
The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block
(CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGAPC). The function block converts
the input integer value to five binary output signals according to table 357.
Table 357: Input integer value converted to binary output signals

Measured supervised below low- between low‐ between low between above high-high limit
value is: low limit low and low and high limit high-high
Output: limit and high limit
LOWLOW High
LOW High
NORMAL High
HIGH High
HIGHHIGH High
11.9 Limit counter L4UFCNT GUID-22E141DB-38B3-462C-B031-73F7466DD135 v1
GUID-F3FB7B33-B189-4819-A1F0-8AC7762E9B7E v3

Limit counter L4UFCNT -
11.9.2 Functionality GUID-13157EAB-1686-4D2E-85DF-EC89768F3572 v6
The Limit counter (L4UFCNT) provides a settable counter with four independent limits where
the number of positive and/or negative flanks on the input signal are counted against the
setting values for limits. The output for each limit is activated when the counted value reaches
that limit.
Overflow indication is included for each up-counter.

GUID-4D58423F-329C-4553-9FAF-E55A368849A5 v2
Limit counter (L4UFCNT) counts the number of positive and/or negative flanks on the binary
input signal depending on the function settings. L4UFCNT also checks if the accumulated
value is equal or greater than any of its four settable limits. The four limit outputs will be
activated relatively on reach of each limit and remain activated until the reset of the function.
Moreover, the content of L4UFCNT is stored in flash memory and will not be lost at an auxiliary
power interruption.
11.9.3.1 Design GUID-B643C994-D0BA-4BE9-BACB-ADEA0197CAE4 v1
Figure 231 illustrates the general logic diagram of the function.

Technical manual
Monitoring
BLOCK
INPUT
Operation
Counter
RESET
VALUE
Overflow
CountType Detection OVERFLOW
OnMaxValue
Limit LIMIT1 … 4
MaxValue Check
CounterLimit1...4
Error ERROR
Detection
InitialValue
Figure 231: Logic diagram

The counter can be initialized to count from a settable non-zero value after reset of the
function. The function has also a maximum counted value check. The three possibilities after
reaching the maximum counted value are:
• Stops counting and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
• Rolls over to zero and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
• Rolls over to zero and activates a pulsed overflow indication for the next count
The pulsed overflow output lasts up to the first count after rolling over to zero, as illustrated in
figure 232.
Overflow indication
Actual value ... Max value -1® Max value ® Max value +1 ® Max value +2 ® Max value +3 ...
Counted value ... Max value -1 ® Max value ® 0 ® 1 ® 2 ...
Figure 232: Overflow indication when OnMaxValue is set to rollover pulsed

The Error output is activated as an indicator of setting the counter limits and/or initial value
setting(s) greater than the maximum value. The counter stops counting the input and all the
outputs except the error output remains at zero state. The error condition remains until the
correct settings for counter limits and/or initial value setting(s) are applied.
The function can be blocked through a block input. During the block time, input is not counted
and outputs remain in their previous states. However, the counter can be initialized after reset
of the function. In this case the outputs remain in their initial states until the release of the
block input.

Technical manual
Monitoring
11.9.3.2 Reporting GUID-7DF874A7-F7DA-48DD-8760-5E4CF05FD870 v2
The content of the counter can be read on the local HMI.
Reset of the counter can be performed from the local HMI or via a binary input.
Reading of content and resetting of the function can also be performed remotely, for example
from a IEC 61850 client. The value can also be presented as a measurement on the local HMI
graphical display.
11.9.4 Function block GUID-C90E7375-F3CC-414A-93FC-9AC4A9156FFC v1
L4UFCNT
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT OVERFLOW
RESET LIMIT1
LIMIT2
LIMIT3
LIMIT4
VALUE
Figure 233: L4UFCNT function block
11.9.5 Signals
Table 358: L4UFCNT Input signals

INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function
Table 359: L4UFCNT Output signals

ERROR BOOLEAN Error indication on counter limit and/or initial value settings
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Overflow indication on count of greater than MaxValue
LIMIT1 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to CounterLimit1
VALUE INTEGER Counted value

Technical manual
Monitoring
11.9.6 Settings
Table 360: L4UFCNT Group settings (basic)

On
CountType Positive edge - - Positive edge Select counting on positive and/or
Negative edge negative flanks
Both edges
CounterLimit1 1 - 65535 - 1 100 Value of the first limit
CounterLimit2 1 - 65535 - 1 200 Value of the second limit
CounterLimit3 1 - 65535 - 1 300 Value of the third limit
CounterLimit4 1 - 65535 - 1 400 Value of the fourth limit
MaxValue 1 - 65535 - 1 500 Maximum count value
OnMaxValue Stop - - Stop Select if counter stops or rolls over
Rollover Steady after reaching maxValue with steady
Rollover Pulsed or pulsed overflow flag
InitialValue 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Initial count value after reset of the
function

Table 361: L4UFCNT Monitored data

VALUE INTEGER - - Counted value

GUID-C43B8654-60FE-4E20-8328-754C238F4AD0 v3
Table 362: L4UFCNT technical data

Counter value 0-65535 -
Max. count up speed 30 pulses/s (50% duty cycle) -
11.10 Running hour-meter TEILGAPC
11.10.1 Identification GUID-3F9EF4FA-74FA-4D1D-88A0-E948B722B64F v1
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device

identification identification number
Running hour-meter TEILGAPC - -

Technical manual
Monitoring
11.10.2 Functionality GUID-464FB24F-B367-446C-963A-A14841943B87 v2
The Running hour-meter (TEILGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the elapsed time
when a given binary signal has been high, see also figure 234.
BLOCK
RESET
IN Time Accumulation ACC_HOUR
ADDTIME with Retain
ACC_DAY
tAddToTime
q-1
OVERFLOW
a
&
a>b
99 999.9 h b
WARNING
a
&
a>b
tWarning b
ALARM
a
&
a>b
tAlarm b
Figure 234: TEILGAPC logics

The main features of TEILGAPC are:
• Applicable to very long time accumulation (≤ 99999.9 hours)

• Supervision of limit transgression conditions and rollover/overflow
• Possibility to define a warning and alarm with the resolution of 0.1 hours
• Retain any saved accumulation value at a restart
• Possibilities for blocking and reset
• Possibility for manual addition of accumulated time
• Reporting of the accumulated time
11.10.3 Function block GUID-D0E9688B-C9D9-44B7-BD95-81132CCA5E4F v1
TEILGAPC
BLOCK ALARM
IN WARNING
ADDTIME OVERFLOW
RESET ACC_HOUR
ACC_DAY
IEC15000323.vsdx
Figure 235: TEILGAPC function block

Technical manual
Monitoring
11.10.4 Signals
Table 363: TEILGAPC Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the accumulation and block the outputs
IN BOOLEAN 0 The input signal that is used to measure the elapsed time,
when its value is high
ADDTIME BOOLEAN 0 Add time to the accumulation
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset accumulated time
Table 364: TEILGAPC Output signals

ALARM BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated time has reached alarm limit
WARNING BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated time has reached warning limit
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated time has reached overflow limit
ACC_HOUR REAL Accumulated time in hours
ACC_DAY REAL Accumulated time in days
11.10.5 Settings
Table 365: TEILGAPC Group settings (basic)

On
tAlarm 1.0 - 99999.9 Hour 0.1 90000.0 Time limit for alarm supervision
tWarning 1.0 - 99999.9 Hour 0.1 50000.0 Time limit for warning supervision
tAddToTime 0.0 - 99999.9 Hour 0.1 0.0 Time to add to the accumulation
11.10.6 Operation principle GUID-C7F91D4E-5942-4006-B7C8-4F499E7DC49D v3
Figure 236 describes the simplified logic of the function.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Loop Delay
tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision WARNING
Plus Retain
ALARM
BLOCK
RESET ACC_HOUR
Time Accumulation
IN
ADDTIME ACC_DAY
tAddToTime
Loop Delay
IEC15000322.vsd
Figure 236: TEILGAPC Simplified logic

TEILGAPC main functionalities
• IN: Accumulation of the elapsed time when input IN is high

• applicable to very long time accumulation (≤99999.9 hours)
• output ACC_HOUR presents accumulated value in hours and ACC_DAY presents
accumulated value in days
• accumulated value is retained in a non-volatile memory
• any retained value is used as initiation value for the integration following by a restart
• RESET: Reset of the accumulated value. Consequently all other outputs are also reset
• independent of the input IN value
• reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero.
Note that the nonvolatile memory will not reset to zero if the input IN is high during
the reset.
• reset can be made by activation of input RESET or from LHMI or with IEC 61850
command
• ADDTIME: Manually add time to the currently accumulated time
• the amount of time to be added is defined by a setting tAddToTime
• time is added through activation of input ADDTIME or from LHMI or with IEC 61850
command
• BLOCK: Freeze the accumulation and block/reset the other outputs
• independent of the input IN value
• BLOCK request overrides RESETrequest
• Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression
• overflow if output ACC_HOUR > 99 999.9 hours
• alarm if output ACC_HOUR > tAlarm
• warning if output ACC_HOUR > tWarning
The ACC_HOURoutput represents the accumulated time in hours and the ACC_DAY output
represents the accumulated time in days.
tAlarm and tWarning are user settable time limit parameters in hours. They are also
independent of each other, that is, there is no check if tAlarm > tWarning.

Technical manual
Monitoring
tAddToTime is a user settable time parameter in hours.
tAlarm, tWarning and tAddToTime are possible to be defined with a resolution of 0.1 hours (6
minutes).
The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 99999.9 hours. The outputs will reset and the
accumulated time will reset and start from zero if an overflow occurs.
11.10.6.1 Operation accuracy GUID-B6FBEFD7-17C8-41C6-B5D5-32E1205E6752 v1
The accuracy of TEILGAPC depends on essentially two factors
• the pulse length

• the number of pulses, that is, the number of rising and falling flank pairs
In principle, more pulses may lead to reduced accuracy.
11.10.6.2 Memory storage GUID-B49698FF-0AB2-4792-A7CB-5534313B6CA0 v2
The value of the accumulated time is retained in a non-volatile memory,
• at every falling edge of the input IN

• at every even 6 minutes, after a rising edge of the input IN
• after a manual addition of time
Consequently in case of a power failure, there is a risk of losing the difference in time between
actual time and last time stored in the non-volatile memory.

GUID-F5E124E3-0B85-41AC-9830-A2362FD289F2 v1
Table 366: TEILGAPC Technical data

Time limit for alarm supervision, (0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value
tAlarm
Time limit for warning supervision, (0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value
tWarning
Time limit for overflow supervision Fixed to 99999.9 hours ±0.1%

Technical manual
Metering
Section 12 Metering
12.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT IP14600-1 v3
M14879-1 v4

Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT -
S00947 V1 EN-US
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for instance
pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy consumption values.
The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then read by the PCFCNT function. A
scaled service value is available over the station bus. The special Binary input module with
enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be ordered to achieve this functionality.
PCFCNT
BLOCK INVALID
READ_VAL RESTART
BI_PULSE* BLOCKED
RS_CNT NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL
Figure 237: PCFCNT function block
12.1.4 Signals
Table 367: PCFCNT Input signals

BI_PULSE BOOLEAN 0 Connect binary input channel for metering
READ_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Initiates an additional pulse counter reading
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets pulse counter value

Technical manual
Metering
Table 368: PCFCNT Output signals

INVALID BOOLEAN The pulse counter value is invalid
RESTART BOOLEAN The reported value does not comprise a complete integration
cycle
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The pulse counter function is blocked
NEW_VAL BOOLEAN A new pulse counter value is generated
SCAL_VAL REAL Scaled value with time and status information
12.1.5 Settings
Table 369: PCFCNT Non group settings (basic)

On
EventMask NoEvents - - NoEvents Report mask for analog events from
ReportEvents pulse counter
CountCriteria Off - - RisingEdge Pulse counter criteria
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
Scale 1.000 - - 0.001 1.000 Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to
90000.000 unit per counted value
Quantity Count - - Count Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL
ActivePower output
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
tReporting 0 - 3600 s 1 60 Cycle time for reporting of counter
value

Table 370: PCFCNT Monitored data

SCAL_VAL REAL - - Scaled value with time and status
information
M13397-3 v5
The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16 binary input
channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter values are sent to the station
HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset.
The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and is
synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter values can

Technical manual
Metering
be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All active counters can
also be read by the LON General Interrogation command (GI) or IEC 61850.
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function in the IED supports unidirectional incremental counters.
That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit format, that is, the
reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range 0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at
initialization of the IED.
The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled Value (pulse
count x scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality consists of:
• Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)

• Wrapped around
• Blocked
• Adjusted
The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that is, the value
frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the database. PCFCNT
updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is finished and activates the
NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be connected to an Event function block,
be time tagged, and transmitted to the station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when
the value was frozen by the function.
The pulse-counter logic function requires a binary input card, BIMp, that is
specially adapted to the pulse-counter logic function.
M13399-3 v9
Figure 238 shows the pulse-counter logic function block with connections of the inputs and
outputs.
SingleCmdFunc PulseCounter EVENT

OUTx BLOCK
INVALID INPUT1
SingleCmdFunc Pulse RESTART INPUT2
OUTx INPUT OUT READ_VAL
Pulse length >1s BLOCKED INPUT3
I/O-module NEW_VAL INPUT4
BI_PULSE
”Reset counter” RS_CNT
NAME
SCAL_VAL IEC EVENT
SMS settings Database

1.Operation = Off/On Pulse counter value:
2.tReporting = 0s...60min 0...2147483647
3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events
4.Scale = 1-90000
en05000744.vsd
Figure 238: Overview of the pulse-counter logic function

The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command logics, which are
intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI. As long as the
BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected to READ_VAL performs
one additional reading per positive flank. The signal must be a pulse with a length >1 second.
The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the Binary Input
Module (BIM).
The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.

Technical manual
Metering
Each pulse-counter logic function block has four binary output signals that can be connected
to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART, BLOCKED and NEW_VAL.
The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC Event function block.
The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where the pulse
counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.
The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not comprise a
complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED start-up, in the first message
after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during last integration cycle.
The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There are two
reasons why the counter is blocked:
• The BLOCK input is set, or

• The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.
The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was updated since
last report.
Note, the pulse is short, one cycle.
The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale), time and status
information.
M13404-2 v5
Table 371: PCFCNT technical data

Function Setting range Accuracy
Input frequency See Binary Input Module (BIM) -
Cycle time for report of (1–3600) s -
counter value
12.2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling

ETPMMTR SEMOD153638-1 v2
SEMOD175537-2 v4

Function for energy calculation and ETPMMTR W_Varh -
demand handling

Technical manual
Metering
12.2.2 Functionality GUID-6898E29B-DA70-421C-837C-1BBED8C63A7A v3
Power system measurement (CVMMXN) can be used to measure active as well as reactive
power values. Function for energy calculation and demand handling (ETPMMTR) uses
measured active and reactive power as input and calculates the accumulated active and
reactive energy pulses, in forward and reverse direction. Energy values can be read or
generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values are also calculated by the function. This
function includes zero point clamping to remove noise from the input signal. As output of this
function: periodic energy calculations, integration of energy values, calculation of energy
pulses, alarm signals for limit violation of energy values and maximum power demand, can be
found.
The values of active and reactive energies are calculated from the input power values by
integrating them over a selected time tEnergy. The integration of active and reactive energy
values will happen in both forward and reverse directions. These energy values are available as
output signals and also as pulse outputs. Integration of energy values can be controlled by
inputs (STARTACC and STOPACC) and EnaAcc setting and it can be reset to initial values with
RSTACC input.
The maximum demand for active and reactive powers are calculated for the set time interval
tEnergy and these values are updated every minute through output channels. The active and
reactive maximum power demand values are calculated for both forward and reverse direction
and these values can be reset with RSTDMD input.
ETPMMTR
P* ACCINPRG
Q* EAFPULSE
STARTACC EARPULSE
STOPACC ERFPULSE
RSTACC ERRPULSE
RSTDMD EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD
Figure 239: ETPMMTR function block
12.2.4 Signals
Table 372: ETPMMTR Input signals

P REAL 0 Measured active power
Q REAL 0 Measured reactive power
STARTACC BOOLEAN 0 Start to accumulate energy values
STOPACC BOOLEAN 0 Stop to accumulate energy values.
RSTACC BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated enery reading
RSTDMD BOOLEAN 0 Reset of maximum demand reading

Technical manual
Metering
Table 373: ETPMMTR Output signals

ACCINPRG BOOLEAN Accumulation of energy values in progress
EAFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward active energy pulse
EARPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse active energy pulse
ERFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse
ERRPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse
EAFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in set interval
EARALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set interval
ERFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in set interval
ERRALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in set interval
EAFACC REAL Accumulated forward active energy value
EARACC REAL Accumulated reverse active energy value
ERFACC REAL Accumulated forward reactive energy value
ERRACC REAL Accumulated reverse reactive energy value
MAXPAFD REAL Maximum forward active power demand value for set interval
MAXPARD REAL Maximum reverse active power demand value for set interval
MAXPRFD REAL Maximum forward reactive power demand value for set
interval
MAXPRRD REAL Maximum reverse reactive power demand value for set
interval
12.2.5 Settings
Table 374: ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)

On
EnaAcc Off - - Off Activate the accumulation of energy
On values
tEnergy 1 Minute - - 1 Minute Time interval for energy calculation
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
tEnergyOnPls 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Energy accumulated pulse ON time in
secs
tEnergyOffPls 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Energy accumulated pulse OFF time in
secs
EAFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active forward
accumulated energy value
EARAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active reverse
ERFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive forward
ERRAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive reverse

Technical manual
Metering
Table 375: ETPMMTR Non group settings (advanced)

EALim 0.001 - MWh 0.001 1000000.000 Active energy limit
10000000000.00
0
ERLim 0.001 - MVArh 0.001 1000.000 Reactive energy limit
10000000000.00
0
EnZeroClamp Off - - On Enable of zero point clamping
On detection function
LevZeroClampP 0.001 - 10000.000 MW 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at active
Power
LevZeroClampQ 0.001 - 10000.000 MVAr 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at reactive
Power
DirEnergyAct Forward - - Forward Direction of active energy flow
Reverse Forward/Reverse
DirEnergyReac Forward - - Forward Direction of reactive energy flow
Reverse Forward/Reverse
EAFPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward active
100000000.000 energy
EARPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse active
100000000.000 energy
ERFPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward
100000000.000 reactive energy
ERRPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse reactive
100000000.000 energy

Table 376: ETPMMTR Monitored data

EAFACC REAL - MWh Accumulated forward active energy
value
EARACC REAL - MWh Accumulated reverse active energy
value
ERFACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated forward reactive energy
value
ERRACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated reverse reactive energy
value
MAXPAFD REAL - MW Maximum forward active power
demand value for set interval
MAXPARD REAL - MW Maximum reverse active power
MAXPRFD REAL - MVAr Maximum forward reactive power
MAXPRRD REAL - MVAr Maximum reverse reactive power

Technical manual
Metering
12.2.7 Operation principle GUID-4A46757C-EC5D-4BCE-9D09-C8152B062CE1 v3
The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the Measurements
function CVMMXN are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to measure the
integrated energy. Figure 240 shows the overall functionality of the energy calculation and
demand handling function ETPMMTR.
MAXPAFD
RSTDMD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
P
MAXPRRD
Zero Clamping Maximum Power
EAFALM
Detection Demand Calculation
Q EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
ACCINPRG
EAFPULSE
EARPULSE
ERFPULSE
Energy Accumulation ERRPULSE
STARTACC
Calculation EAFACC
EARACC
STOPACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
RSTACC
Figure 240: ETPMMTR Functional overview logical diagram

The integration of energy values is enabled by the setting EnaAcc and controlled by the
STARTACC and STOPACC inputs. If the integration is in progress, the output ACCINPRG is high.
Otherwise, it is low. Figure 241 shows the logic of the ACCINPRG output. ACCINPRG is active
when the STARTACC input is active and the EnaAcc setting is enabled. When the RSTACC input
is in the active state, the output ACCINPRG is low even if the integration of energy is enabled.
ACCINPRG is deactivated by activating the STOPACC input.
STOPACC
FALSE
STARTACC T
³1
& F ACCINPRG
EnaAcc &
q-1
RSTACC

Figure 241: ACCINPRG Logic diagram

The accumulated energy values (in MWh and MVArh) are available as service values and also as
pulsed output depending on the ExxAccPlsQty setting, which can be connected to a pulse
counter. Accumulated energy outputs are available for forward as well as reverse direction.
The accumulated energy values can be reset to initial accumulated energy values (ExxPrestVal)
from the local HMI reset menu or with the input signal RSTACC. Figure 242 shows the logic for
integration of energy in active forward direction. Similarly, the integration of energy in active
reverse, reactive forward and reactive reverse is done.

Technical manual
Metering
RSTACC
EAFPrestVal
ACCINPRG
P* (ACTIVE FORWARD)
X
 T
T EAFACC
60.0
F
F
&
q-1
1000 GWh T
-1 F
q 0.0
a
a>b
b
-1
q = unit delay
Figure 242: Logic for integration of active forward energy

The energy pulses generated by using internally calculated accumulated energy values and
energy per pulse (ExxAccPlsQty) setting. The accumulated energy values are divided by the
energy-per-pulse value to get the number of pulses. The number of pulses can be reset to zero
by activating RSTACC input or by using the local HMI reset menu. The pulse on and off time
duration is set by the settings tEnergyOnPls and tEnergyOffPls. Figure 243 shows the logic for
pulse output generation for the integrated energy in the active forward direction. Similarly, the
pulse generation for integrated energy in the active reverse, reactive forward and reactive
reverse is done.
tEnergyOffPls
EAFACC
a Counter q-1
a>b CU
1000 GWh b CV
Rst
tOff
t
R I q-1
0
÷ X
 R I T
EAFPULSE
a TP
a>b F
b
EAFAccPlsQty ÷ 0
Counter
CU
CV
RSTACC
Rst
q-1
tEnergyOnPls
q-1 = unit delay

Figure 243: Logic for pulse generation of integrated active forward energy
The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set time
interval tEnergy. The maximum values are updated every minute and stored in a register

Technical manual
Metering
available over communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD, MAXPRFD and MAXPRRD for
the active and reactive power forward and reverse direction. When the RSTDMD input is active
from the local HMI reset menu, these outputs are reset to zero. The energy alarm is activated
once the periodic energy value crosses the energy limit ExLim. Figure 244 shows the logic of
alarm for active forward energy exceeds limit and Maximum forward active power demand
value. Similarly, the maximum power calculation and energy alarm outputs in the active
reverse, reactive forward and reactive reverse is implemented.
P (ACTIVE FORWARD)
Average Power
X a EAFALM
tEnergy Calculation a>b
b
EALim
RSTMAXD
0.0 T MAXPAFD
MAX F
q-1
q-1 = unit delay
Figure 244: Logic for maximum power demand calculation and energy alarm

SEMOD153707-2 v5
Table 377: ETPMMTR technical data

Energy metering kWh Export/Import, kvarh Input from MMXU. No extra error at steady
Export/Import load

Technical manual
Ethernet
Section 13 Ethernet
13.1 Access point
13.1.1 Introduction GUID-6E5D2696-A8EE-43E7-A94B-69C3D0612127 v2
An access point is an Ethernet communication interface for single or redundant station

communication. Each access point is allocated with one physical Ethernet port, two physical
Ethernet ports are allocated if redundant communication is activated for the access point.
Device 1 Device 1
AP1 AP2 AP3 AP1 AP2 AP3

SFP_301 SFP_302 SFP_303 SFP_301 SFP_302 SFP_303
Figure 245: Access points, non redundant (left) and redundant communication (right)
13.1.2 Settings
MANUALPID-17001 v1
Table 378: AP_1 Non group settings (basic)

Redundancy None - - None Ethernet redundancy mode
PRP-0
PRP-1
HSR
IPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 192.168.1.10 IP address of the access point
Address
SubnetMask 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.0 Subnet mask of the access point
Address
Description 1 - 18 - 1 Station bus User editable access point description
[1-18 char]
PTP Off - - Off Precision time protocol
On
Slave only
PCM600Access Off - - On PCM600 access
On
FTP Off - - On FTP and FTPS access
On
MMS Off - - On IEC61850-8-1 MMS
On
GOOSE Off - - On IEC61850-8-1 GOOSE
On
SNTPServer Off - - On SNTP server
On
FSTAccess Off - - On Field Service Tool access
On
DefaultGateway 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Default gateway IP address
Address

Technical manual
Ethernet
MANUALPID-17002 v1
Table 379: AP_FRONT Non group settings (basic)

IPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 10.1.150.3 IP address of the access point
Address
SubnetMask 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.0 Subnet mask of the access point
Address
Description 1 - 18 - 1 FrontPort User editable access point description
[1-18 char]
PCM600Access Off - - On PCM600 access
On
FTP Off - - On FTP and FTPS access
On
MMS Off - - On IEC61850-8-1 MMS
On
GOOSE Off - - On IEC61850-8-1 GOOSE
On
SNTPServer Off - - On SNTP Server
On
FSTAccess Off - - On Field Service Tool access
On
DefaultGateway 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Default gateway IP address
Address
13.2 Access point diagnostics
13.2.1 Functionality GUID-20F64A6D-AA8C-47D7-AA7D-4810996B2FF2 v2
The access point diagnostics function blocks (RCHLCCH, SCHLCCH and FRONTSTATUS)
supervise communication. SCHLCCH is used for communication over the rear Ethernet ports,
RCHLCCH is used for redundant communications over the rear Ethernet ports and
FRONTSTATUS is used for communication over the front port. All access point function blocks
include output signal for denial of service.
13.2.2 Function block GUID-727BF536-1D60-4060-A674-5D73F252CCB7 v2
SCHLCCH
LINKUP
DOSALARM
Figure 246: SCHLCCH Function block
RCHLCCH
REDLINKA
REDLINKB
DOSALARM
Figure 247: RCHLCCH Function block

Technical manual
Ethernet
13.2.3 Signals
Table 380: SCHLCCH Output signals

LINKUP BOOLEAN Access point link status
DOSALARM BOOLEAN Denial of service alarm
Table 381: RCHLCCH Output signals

REDLINKA BOOLEAN Channel A redundancy status
REDLINKB BOOLEAN Channel B redundancy status
DOSALARM BOOLEAN Denial of service alarm (A + B)

Table 382: SCHLCCH Monitored data

GatewayConfig INTEGER 0=Ok - Gateway configuration status
1=Error
-1=Off
2=Invalid
Table 383: RCHLCCH Monitored data

GatewayConfig INTEGER 0=Ok - Gateway configuration status
1=Error
-1=Off
2=Invalid
13.3 Redundant communication
GUID-B7AE0374-0336-42B8-90AF-3AE1C79A4116 v1

IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy PRP - -
protocol
IEC 62439-3 High-availability HSR - -
seamless redundancy
Access point diagnostic for RCHLCCH - -
redundant Ethernet ports

Technical manual
Ethernet
13.3.2 Functionality GUID-494FACF7-4BE0-4B9F-A18F-47CD1E92C0F9 v1
PRP IEC 62439-3 redundant communication

Redundant communication according to IEC 62439-3 PRP-0 and IEC 62439-3 PRP-1 parallel
redundancy protocol (PRP) is available as an option when ordering IEDs. PRP according to IEC
62439-3 uses two optical Ethernet ports.
IEC 62439-3 High-availabillity Seamless Redundancy (HSR)

Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 1 and IEC 62439-3
Edition 2 High-availability seamless redundancy (HSR) is available as an option when ordering
IEDs. Redundant station bus communication according to 62439-3 uses two optical Ethernet
ports.
13.3.3 Operation principle GUID-73DB23CD-A924-4B89-8AAB-1E79D44DE429 v1
PRP IEC 62439-3 redundant communication

The communication is performed in parallel, that is the same data package is transmitted on
both channels simultaneously. The received package identity from one channel is compared
with data package identity from the other channel, if they are the same, the last package is
discarded.
The RCHLCCH function block supervise the redundant communication on the two channels. If
no data package has been received on one (or both) channels within the last 10 s, the output
LinkAUp and/or LinkBUp is set to 0 which indicates an error.
Device 1 Device 2
AP1 AP1
PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB
Switch A Switch B

AP1 AP1
Device 3 Device 4
Figure 248: Redundant station bus

Technical manual
Ethernet
IEC 62439-3 High-availabillity Seamless Redundancy (HSR)

HSR applies the principle of parallel operation to a single ring.
For each message sent, the node sends two frames, one through each port. Both the frames
circulate in opposite directions over the ring. Every node forwards the frames it receives from
one port to another to reach the next node. When the originating sender node receives the
frame it sent, the sender node discards the frame to avoid loops
The RCHLCCH function block supervise the redundant communication on the two channels. If
no data package has been received on one (or both) channels within the last 10 s, the output
LinkAUp and/or LinkBUp is set to 0 which indicates an error.
If IEEE1588 (PTP) is used an accuracy of 1 µs can be guaranteed for up to 15 devices in one

HSR-ring.
Device 1 Device 2
AP1 AP1
PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA

AP1 AP1
Device 3 Device 4
Figure 249: HSR ring
13.4 Merging unit
13.4.1 Introduction GUID-E630C16F-EDB8-40AE-A8A2-94189982D15F v1
The IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE process bus communication protocol enables an IED to

communicate with devices providing measured values in digital format, commonly known as
Merging Units (MU). The rear access points are used for the communication.
The merging units (MU) are called so because they can gather analog values from one or more
measuring transformers, sample the data and send the data over process bus to other clients
(or subscribers) in the system. Some merging units are able to get data from classical
measuring transformers, others from non-conventional measuring transducers and yet others
can pick up data from both types.

Technical manual
Ethernet
13.4.2 Settings
Table 384: MU1 Non group settings (basic)

SampleValueID 0 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0101 Sample Value ID (SVID) for the
merging unit [0-34 char]
APConnection None - - None Access point connection for the
AP1 merging unit
AP2
AP3
AP4
Table 385: MU1_HW Non group settings (basic)


Table 386: MU1_HW Monitored data

MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, data not received,
1=Error transmission errors, time-sync issues
or inconsistent sample rate
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - High when IED clock is not within
1=Error configured accuracy or time domain
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Fatal error or recovery state after fatal
0=No error. High if any subscribed channel
has bad quality or TEST while IED not
in test mode.
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU not synced or MU clock not synced
1=Error to same clock as IED
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Quality of one or more subscribed
0=No analogue channels is TEST
SIMMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU delivers simulated data accepted
0=No by IED
BadReference BOOLEAN 1=Yes - BadReference indication output for I1
0=No
Derived BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Derived indication output for I1
0=No
Failure BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Failure indication output for I1
0=No

Technical manual
Ethernet

Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inaccurate indication output for I1
0=No
Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inconsistent indication output for I1
0=No
OldData BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OldData indication output for I1
0=No
OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OperatorBlocked indication output for
0=No I1
Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Oscillatory indication output for I1
0=No
OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OutOfRange indication output for I1
0=No
Overflow BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Overflow indication output for I1
0=No
Source BOOLEAN 0=Process - Source indication output for I1
1=Substituted
Test BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Test indication output for I1
0=No
Validity INTEGER 0=Good - Validity indication output I1
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No I2
0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No

Technical manual
Ethernet

0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No I3
0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No I4
0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No

Technical manual
Ethernet

2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
BadReference BOOLEAN 1=Yes - BadReference indication output for U1
0=No
Derived BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Derived indication output for U1
0=No
Failure BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Failure indication output for U1
0=No
Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inaccurate indication output for U1
0=No
Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inconsistent indication output for U1
0=No
OldData BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OldData indication output for U1
0=No
0=No U1
Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Oscillatory indication output for U1
0=No
OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OutOfRange indication output for U1
0=No
Overflow BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Overflow indication output for U1
0=No
Source BOOLEAN 0=Process - Source indication output for U1
1=Substituted
Test BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Test indication output for U1
0=No
Validity INTEGER 0=Good - Validity indication output U1
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No U2
0=No
0=No
0=No

Technical manual
Ethernet

1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No U3
0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
BadReference BOOLEAN 1=Yes - BadReference indication output for
0=No U4
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No U4
0=No

Technical manual
Ethernet

0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
13.5 Routes
13.5.1 Introduction GUID-95F9C7BA-92F8-489F-AD0A-047410B5E66F v1
A route is a specified path for data to travel between the source device in a subnetwork to the
destination device in a different subnetwork. A route consists of a destination address and the
address of the gateway to be used when sending data to the destination device, see Figure
250.
Default gateway
Gateway
Source Destination
Figure 250: Route from source to destination through gateway

Technical manual
Ethernet
13.5.2 Settings
Table 387: ROUTE_1 Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation on/off of the route
On
IPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 IP address of the gateway
Address
DestIPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Destination IP address
Address
DestSubnetMask 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.255 Destination IP subnet mask
Address
Name 1 - 18 - 1 Route1 User configurable name of the route
[1-18 char]

Table 388: ROUTE_1 Monitored data

RouteConfig INTEGER 0=Ok - Route configuration status
1=Error
-1=Off

Technical manual
Section 14 Station communication

14.1 Communication protocols M14815-3 v14
Each IED is provided with several communication interfaces enabling it to connect to one or
many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation (SA) bus or
Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.
Available communication protocols are:
• IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

• IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
• LON communication protocol
• SPA communication protocol
• IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
Several protocols can be combined in the same IED.
14.2 Communication protocol diagnostics GUID-6BC4671F-6D06-4BBD-B1FF-2F03FF16A856 v1
Status of the protocols can be viewed in the LHMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
Protocol diagnostics. The diagnostic values are:
Diagnostic value Description

Off Protocol is turned off
Error An error has occured, refer to event list for more
information
Warning Configuration inconsistency. Unable to locate data
point.
Ready Protocol is ready

Technical manual
Figure 251: Protocol diagnostic screen in LHMI
14.3 DNP3 protocol GUID-54A54716-23BD-4E7C-8245-DE2B4C75E8DC v1
DNP3 (Distributed Network Protocol) is a set of communications protocols used to

communicate data between components in process automation systems. For a detailed
description of the DNP3 protocol, see the DNP3 Communication protocol manual.
14.4 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol IP14616-1 v2
IEC 61850 Ed.1 or Ed.2 can be chosen by a setting in PCM600. The IED is equipped with four
optical Ethernet rear ports for IEC 61850-8-1 station bus communication.The IEC 61850-8-1
communication is also possible from the electrical Ethernet front port. IEC 61850-8-1 protocol
allows intelligent electrical devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange information and
simplifies system engineering. IED-to-IED communication using GOOSE and client-server
communication over MMS are supported. Disturbance recording file (COMTRADE) uploading
can be done over MMS or FTP.
The front port is only intended for PCM600 communication, maintenance,

training and test purposes due to risk of interference during normal operation.

Technical manual
14.4.2 Communication interfaces and protocols GUID-35C845D3-574A-40D1-AEF1-9E0D330E31DE v9
Table 389: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols

Protocol Ethernet Serial
100BASE-FX (ST connector) Glass fiber (ST connector) EIA-485
IEC 61850–8–1 ● - -
DNP3 ● ● ●
IEC 60870-5-103 - ● ●
● = Supported
14.4.3 Settings
Table 390: IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)

On
GOOSEPortEd1 AP_FRONT - - AP_1 Selection of GOOSE port (only for
AP_1 IEC61850 Ed1)
AP_2
AP_3
AP_4
AP_5
AP_6
ProtocolEdition Ed 1 - - Ed 1 Protocol Edition
Ed 2
RemModControl Off - - Off Remote Mode Control
Maintenance
All levels
AllowSimulation No - - No Allow simulated GOOSE values or
Yes simulated sampled measurand values
RemSetControlEd2 Disabled - - Disabled Changing settings over 61850 enabled
Enabled (only for IEC61850 Ed2)
ResvTmsEd2 1 - 3600 s 1 60 Reservation time (only for IEC61850
Ed2)
M15031-1 v9
Table 391: Communication protocols

Function Value
Protocol IEC 61850-8-1
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
Protocol IEC 60870–5–103
Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd
Protocol DNP3.0
Communication speed for the IEDs 300–115200 Bd
Protocol TCP/IP, Ethernet

Technical manual
Function Value
Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s
Protocol LON
Communication speed for the IEDs 1.25 Mbit/s
Protocol SPA
Communication speed for the IEDs 300–38400 Bd
14.4.5 Generic communication function for Single Point indication

SPGAPC, SP16GAPC SEMOD55999-1 v4
14.4.5.1 Functionality SEMOD55713-5 v8
Generic communication function for Single Point indication (SPGAPC) is used to send one
single logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.
14.4.5.2 Function block SEMOD54714-4 v4
SPGAPC
BLOCK
ÎN
Figure 252: SPGAPC function block
SP16GAPC
BLOCK
ÎN1
ÎN2
ÎN3
ÎN4
ÎN5
ÎN6
ÎN7
ÎN8
ÎN9
ÎN10
ÎN11
ÎN12
ÎN13
ÎN14
ÎN15
ÎN16
Figure 253: SP16GAPC function block
14.4.5.3 Signals SEMOD55830-1 v2
Table 392: SPGAPC Input signals

IN BOOLEAN 0 Input status

Technical manual
Table 393: SP16GAPC Input signals

IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 status
14.4.5.4 Settings ABBD8E283673 v4
14.4.5.5 Monitored data

Table 394: SPGAPC Monitored data

OUT GROUP - - Output status
SIGNAL
Table 395: SP16GAPC Monitored data

OUT1 GROUP - - Output 1 status
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL

Technical manual

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
OUTOR GROUP - - Output status logic OR gate for input
SIGNAL 1 to 16
14.4.5.6 Operation principle SEMOD55725-5 v8
Upon receiving a signal at its input, Generic communication function for Single Point
indication (SPGAPC) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system
that requests this signal. Additional configuration is needed with PCM600 or IET600 to get the
IEC 61850-8-1 communication established. For more information, refer to the Engineering
manual.
14.4.6 Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC SEMOD55402-1 v3
14.4.6.1 Functionality SEMOD55872-5 v10
Generic communication function for measured values (MVGAPC) function is used to send the
instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the substation. It
can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to
permit measurement supervision on that value.
MVGAPC
BLOCK ^VALUE
ÎN RANGE
Figure 254: MVGAPC function block

Technical manual
14.4.6.3 Signals SEMOD55948-1 v2
Table 396: MVGAPC Input signals

IN REAL 0 Analog input value
Table 397: MVGAPC Output signals

VALUE REAL Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER Range
14.4.6.4 Settings SEMOD55954-1 v2
Table 398: MVGAPC Non group settings (basic)

BasePrefix micro - - unit Base prefix (multiplication factor)
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
Tera
MV db 1 - 100000 Type 1 10000 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
MV zeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of
range
MV hhLim -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 900.00 High High limit multiplied with the
5000.00 base prefix (multiplication factor)
MV hLim -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 800.00 High limit multiplied with the base
5000.00 prefix (multiplication factor)
MV lLim -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 -800.00 Low limit multiplied with the base
5000.00 prefix (multiplication factor)
MV llLim -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 -900.00 Low Low limit multiplied with the
MV min -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 -1000.00 Minimum value multiplied with the
MV max -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 1000.00 Maximum value multiplied with the
MV dbType Cyclic - - Deadband Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
MV limHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range
(common for all limits)

Technical manual

Table 399: MVGAPC Monitored data

VALUE REAL - - Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER 1=High - Range
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
0=Normal
14.4.6.6 Operation principle SEMOD55936-5 v7
Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, Generic communication function for Measured
Value (MVGAPC) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as output values.
Additional configuration is needed with PCM600 or IET600 to get the IEC 61850-8-1
communication established. For more information see the Engineering manual.
14.4.7 GOOSE function block to receive a double point value

GOOSEDPRCV
GUID-8C11DB9A-7844-4E1F-A6BB-D97ECE350FC1 v1

GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEDPRCV - -
double point value
14.4.7.2 Functionality GUID-1D2DBC22-4F04-4809-B34E-8939D442C185 v3
GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.
14.4.7.3 Function block GUID-ED277880-FB5D-4630-872F-9F343D449FFE v1
GOOSEDPRCV
BLOCK ^DPOUT
^SRCDPOUT DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 255: GOOSEDPRCV function block

Technical manual
14.4.7.4 Signals
GUID-2DC54788-86AF-4B4B-8E57-A89E30F0C433 v1
Except for the BLOCK input, the rest of the inputs of this GOOSE function block
are used for GOOSE connections. These connections are visible and possible to
make only if Easy GOOSE engineering is enabled. For instructions on how to
enable Easy GOOSE engineering in PCM600, refer to the Engineering Manual.
Table 400: GOOSEDPRCV Input signals

SRCDPOUT INTEGER 0 Source to double point output
Table 401: GOOSEDPRCV Output signals

DPOUT INTEGER Double point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for double point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for double point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output
14.4.7.5 Settings
Table 402: GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
14.4.7.6 Operation principle GUID-82A1C8A2-827A-40EF-8E58-F573E29E468E v4
The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure
condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
Data Value Data Valid Comm Valid Test

Incoming data with q=Normal Updated 1 1 0
Incoming data with q=oldData 0 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=Invalid 0 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=test 0 0 1 1
Incoming data with q=test+oldData 0 0 1 1
Receiver in block 0 0 1 0

Technical manual

Receiver in block and communication 0 0 0 0
error
Receiver in test mode and incoming Updated 1 1 0
data with q= Normal
data with q= Test
Communication Error 0 0 0 0
The input of this GOOSE block must be linked either in SMT by means of a cross
or in ACT by means of a GOOSE connection (if easy GOOSE engineering is
enabled) to receive the double point values.
The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to a

simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will be
HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE
or OLD DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.
14.4.8 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value

GOOSEINTRCV
GUID-93A1E81B-1DE8-483A-BB3B-DB771EE66DC1 v1

GOOSE function block to receive an GOOSEINTRCV - -
integer value
14.4.8.2 Functionality GUID-27B1ED7A-C8E8-499E-89C1-C656FB0337F8 v3
GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.
14.4.8.3 Function block GUID-56F0C9F7-98F3-4091-B071-53CA5074DC8F v1
GOOSEINTRCV
BLOCK ÎNTOUT
^SRCINTOUT DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 256: GOOSEINTRCV function block

Technical manual
14.4.8.4 Signals
Table 403: GOOSEINTRCV Input signals

SRCINTOUT INTEGER 0 Source to integer output
Table 404: GOOSEINTRCV Output signals

INTOUT INTEGER Integer output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for integer output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for integer output
14.4.8.5 Settings
Table 405: GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
14.4.8.6 Operation principle GUID-5BBDF772-3B3E-4F7C-ABE9-18CE3C1A2E2D v4

Incoming data with q=oldData Freeze 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=Invalid Freeze 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=test Freeze 0 1 1
Incoming data with q=test+oldData Freeze 0 1 1
Receiver in block Freeze 0 1 0


Technical manual

Receiver in block and communication error Freeze 0 0 0
Receiver in test mode and incoming data Updated 1 1 0
with q= Normal
with q= Test
Communication Error Freeze 0 0 0
enabled) to receive the integer values.

14.4.9 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value

GOOSEMVRCV
GUID-B1FFBE08-C823-4A58-9FE0-A9A20DA6BB44 v1

GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEMVRCV - -
measurand value
14.4.9.2 Functionality GUID-759CB016-2B4D-4D98-82E1-592044983D53 v3
GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.
14.4.9.3 Function block GUID-A0B333CC-AEF4-40EA-B152-364648AB78D3 v1
GOOSEMVRCV
BLOCK ^MVOUT
^SRCMVOUT DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 257: GOOSEMVRCV function block

Technical manual
14.4.9.4 Signals
Table 406: GOOSEMVRCV Input signals

SRCMVOUT REAL 0 Source to measurand value output
Table 407: GOOSEMVRCV Output signals

MVOUT REAL Measurand value output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for measurand value output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for measurand value output
14.4.9.5 Settings
Table 408: GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
14.4.9.6 Operation principle GUID-7B24A6D3-2E5F-4961-A0A6-86436373809E v5

Incoming data with q=oldData Freeze 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=Invalid Freeze 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=test Freeze 0 1 1
Incoming data with q=test+oldData Freeze 0 1 1
Receiver in block Freeze 0 1 0


Technical manual

Receiver in block and communication error Freeze 0 0 0
with q= Normal
with q= Test
Communication Error Freeze 0 0 0
or in ACT by means of a GOOSE connection (in case easy GOOSE engineering is
enabled) to receive the measured value.

14.4.10 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value

GOOSESPRCV
GUID-F2B30A70-842E-435E-8FAB-B1E58B9C0164 v1

GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSESPRCV - -
single point value
14.4.10.2 Functionality GUID-0C99A106-C131-45D3-9B81-6B188E35EB34 v3
GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.
14.4.10.3 Function block GUID-A414F31A-323F-4684-BADA-46F9C5E2B0E8 v1
GOOSESPRCV
BLOCK ^SPOUT
^SRCSPOUT DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 258: GOOSESPRCV function block

Technical manual
14.4.10.4 Signals
Table 409: GOOSESPRCV Input signals

SRCSPOUT BOOLEAN 0 Source to single point output
Table 410: GOOSESPRCV Output signals

SPOUT BOOLEAN Single point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for single point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for single point output
14.4.10.5 Settings
Table 411: GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
14.4.10.6 Operation principle GUID-0E25A3FB-41BD-4EFE-9CA0-1262B9CD14CD v4


Technical manual

error
data with q= Normal
data with q= Test
enabled) to receive the binary single point values.

14.4.11 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking

GOOSEINTLKRCV SEMOD173197-1 v2
14.4.11.1 Functionality GUID-92ECE152-892C-4214-95DE-B92718689434 v2
GOOSE communication can be used for exchanging information between IEDs via the IEC
61850-8-1 station communication bus. This is typically used for sending apparatus position
indications for interlocking or reservation signals for 1-of-n control. GOOSE can also be used to
exchange any boolean, integer, double point and analog measured values between IEDs.

Technical manual
GOOSEINTLKRCV
BLOCK ^RESREQ
^SRCRESREQ ^RESGRANT
^SRCRESGR ÂPP1_OP
^SRCAPP1 ÂPP1_CL
^SRCAPP2 APP1VAL
^SRCAPP3 ÂPP2_OP
^SRCAPP4 ÂPP2_CL
^SRCAPP5 APP2VAL
^SRCAPP6 ÂPP3_OP
^SRCAPP7 ÂPP3_CL
^SRCAPP8 APP3VAL
^SRCAPP9 ÂPP4_OP
^SRCAPP10 ÂPP4_CL
^SRCAPP11 APP4VAL
^SRCAPP12 ÂPP5_OP
^SRCAPP13 ÂPP5_CL
^SRCAPP14 APP5VAL
^SRCAPP15 ÂPP6_OP
ÂPP6_CL
APP6VAL
ÂPP7_OP
ÂPP7_CL
APP7VAL
ÂPP8_OP
ÂPP8_CL
APP8VAL
ÂPP9_OP
ÂPP9_CL
APP9VAL
ÂPP10_OP
ÂPP10_CL
APP10VAL
ÂPP11_OP
ÂPP11_CL
APP11VAL
ÂPP12_OP
ÂPP12_CL
APP12VAL
ÂPP13_OP
ÂPP13_CL
APP13VAL
ÂPP14_OP
ÂPP14_CL
APP14VAL
ÂPP15_OP
ÂPP15_CL
APP15VAL
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 259: GOOSEINTLKRCV function block
14.4.11.3 Signals SEMOD173205-1 v2
Table 412: GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals
SRCRESREQ BOOLEAN 0 Source to reservation request
SRCRESGR BOOLEAN 0 Source to reservation granted

Technical manual

SRCAPP1 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 1 position
Table 413: GOOSEINTLKRCV Output signals

RESREQ BOOLEAN Reservation request
RESGRANT BOOLEAN Reservation granted
APP1_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is open
APP1_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is closed
APP1VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is valid

Technical manual

COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication Valid
TEST BOOLEAN Test Output
Table 414: GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
14.4.11.5 Operation principle GUID-7275CFBA-F1FE-496A-A9A1-724139DB2081 v1
The APPxVAL output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

Technical manual

error
data with q= Normal
data with q= Test
At least one of the inputs of this GOOSE block must be linked either in SMT by
means of a cross or in ACT by means of a GOOSE connection (if easy GOOSE
engineering is enabled) to receive any data. Only those outputs whose source
input is linked/connected will be updated.

simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the APPxVAL output will be
or OLD DATA then the APPxVAL output will be LOW.

Technical manual
14.4.12 GOOSE binary receive GOOSEBINRCV SEMOD173158-1 v3
GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK ÔUT1
^SRCOUT1 DVALID1
^SRCOUT2 ÔUT2
^SRCOUT3 DVALID2
^SRCOUT4 ÔUT3
^SRCOUT5 DVALID3
^SRCOUT6 ÔUT4
^SRCOUT7 DVALID4
^SRCOUT8 ÔUT5
^SRCOUT9 DVALID5
^SRCOUT10 ÔUT6
^SRCOUT11 DVALID6
^SRCOUT12 ÔUT7
^SRCOUT13 DVALID7
^SRCOUT14 ÔUT8
^SRCOUT15 DVALID8
^SRCOUT16 ÔUT9
DVALID9
ÔUT10
DVALID10
ÔUT11
DVALID11
ÔUT12
DVALID12
ÔUT13
DVALID13
ÔUT14
DVALID14
ÔUT15
DVALID15
ÔUT16
DVALID16
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 260: GOOSEBINRCV function block
14.4.12.2 Signals SEMOD173166-1 v2
Table 415: GOOSEBINRCV Input signals

SRCOUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 1

Technical manual

Table 416: GOOSEBINRCV Output signals

OUT1 BOOLEAN Binary output 1
DVALID1 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 1

Technical manual

COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication Valid
TEST BOOLEAN Test Output
Table 417: GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
14.4.12.4 Operation principle GUID-950F2501-9183-43C0-A193-7D15124F6CCE v2
The DVALIDx output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

error
data with q= Normal
data with q= Test

Technical manual

simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DVALIDx output will be
or OLD DATA then the DVALIDx output will be LOW.
14.4.13 GOOSE function block to receive a switching device

GOOSEXLNRCV
GUID-4B23D0CF-F298-4BBC-B833-1B8CC98D1604 v1

GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEXLNRCV - -
switching device
14.4.13.2 Functionality GUID-5AC7DE11-CB95-4565-A8AE-FB23D59FD717 v1
The GOOSE XLN Receive component is used to collect information from another device’s
XCBR/XSWI logical node sent over process bus via GOOSE. The GOOSE XLN Receive
component includes 12 different outputs (and their respective channel valid bits) with defined
names to ease the 61850 mapping of the GOOSE signals in the configuration process.
14.4.13.3 Function block GUID-690FD935-5344-4D6F-AB94-F9FD5FD35B23 v1
GOOSEXLNRCV
BLOCK ^BEH
^SRCBEH BEH_VALID
^SRCLOC ^LOC
^SRCBLKOPN LOC_VALID
^SRCBLKCLS ^BLKOPN
^SRCPOS BLKOPN_VALID
^SRCOPCNT ^BLKCLS
^SRCBLK BLKCLS_VALID
^SRCSTSELD ^POSVAL
^SRCOPRCVD POSVAL_VALID
^SRCOPOK ÔPCNT
^SRCEEHLT OPCNT_VALID
^SRCOPCAP ^BLK
BLK_VALID
^STSELD
STSELD_VALID
ÔPRCVD
OPRCVD_VALID
ÔPOK
OPOK_VALID
ÊEHEALTH
EEHEALTH_VALID
ÔPCAP
OPCAP_VALID
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 261: GOOSEXLNRCV function block

Technical manual
14.4.13.4 Signals
Table 418: GOOSEXLNRCV Input signals

SRCBEH INTEGER 0 Source to behaviour output
SRCLOC BOOLEAN 0 Source to local control behaviour output
SRCBLKOPN BOOLEAN 0 Source to block opening
SRCBLKCLS BOOLEAN 0 Source to block closing
SRCPOS INTEGER 0 Source to switch position
SRCOPCNT INTEGER 0 Source to operation counter
SRCBLK BOOLEAN 0 Source to dynamic blocking of function described by the LN
SRCSTSELD BOOLEAN 0 Source to the controllable data is in the status "selected”
SRCOPRCVD BOOLEAN 0 Source to operate command for a controllable data object
received
SRCOPOK BOOLEAN 0 Source to operate command for a controllable data object
accepted
SRCEEHLT INTEGER 0 Source to external equipment health
SRCOPCAP INTEGER 0 Source to operating capability
Table 419: GOOSEXLNRCV Output signals

BEH INTEGER Behaviour
BEH_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on Beh output
LOC BOOLEAN Local control behaviour
LOC_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on Loc output
BLKOPN BOOLEAN Block opening
BLKOPN_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on BlkOpn output
BLKCLS BOOLEAN Block closing
BLKCLS_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on BlkCls output
POSVAL INTEGER Switch position
POSVAL_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on PosVal output
OPCNT INTEGER Operation counter
OPCNT_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on OpCnt output
BLK BOOLEAN Dynamic blocking of function described by the LN
BLK_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on Blk output
STSELD BOOLEAN The controllable data is in the status "selected”

Technical manual

STSELD_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on stSeld output
OPRCVD BOOLEAN Operate command for a controllable data object received
OPRCVD_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on opRcvd output
OPOK BOOLEAN Operate command for a controllable data object accepted
OPOK_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on opOk output
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health
EEHEALTH_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on EEHealth output
OPCAP INTEGER Operating capability
OPCAP_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on OpCap output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid
14.4.13.5 Settings
Table 420: GOOSEXLNRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
14.4.13.6 Operation principle GUID-903B5E3F-DC92-4D0A-B4D5-59DD01F36458 v1
The xxx_VALID outputs will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the xxx_VALID output will be
or OLD DATA then the xxx_VALID output will be LOW.

Technical manual
14.5 IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol GUID-6814F62B-8D99-4679-A11E-68048D1AC424 v2
14.5.1 Introduction GUID-FE2AC08A-2E04-4E73-8CA4-905522B1026A v2
The IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE process bus communication protocol enables an IED to

communicate with devices providing measured values in digital format, commonly known as
Merging Units (MU). The rear access points are used for the communication.
14.5.2 Function block GUID-2581F3AD-7487-4C80-BDF3-9C6EC9F2E43C v3
The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool. The signals
appear only in the SMT tool when merging units (MU) are included in the
configuration with the Ethernet configuration tool. In the SMT tool they can be
mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED and used internally in the
configuration.
14.5.3 Signals
14.5.3.1 Output signals SEMOD166622-1 v1
GUID-942C81AD-22D9-438F-95FA-1972BA2BE2E5 v1
The output signals are the same for all MUs so only the table for MU1_HW is included in this
manual.
Table 421: MU1_HW Output signals

I1 STRING Analogue input I1
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, data not received, transmission errors, time-sync
issues or inconsistent sample rate
SYNCH BOOLEAN High when IED clock is not within configured accuracy or time
domain
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Fatal error or recovery state after fatal error. High if any
subscribed channel has bad quality or TEST while IED not in
test mode.
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN MU not synced or MU clock not synced to same clock as IED
TESTMODE BOOLEAN Quality of one or more subscribed analogue channels is TEST
SIMMODE BOOLEAN MU delivers simulated data accepted by IED
I1QUALITY INTEGER Binary coded quality information for I1

Technical manual

U1QUALITY INTEGER Binary coded quality information for U1
Table 422: MU1_HW Non group settings (basic)


Table 423: MU1_HW Monitored data

MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, data not received,
1=Error transmission errors, time-sync issues
or inconsistent sample rate
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - High when IED clock is not within
1=Error configured accuracy or time domain
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Fatal error or recovery state after fatal
0=No error. High if any subscribed channel
has bad quality or TEST while IED not
in test mode.
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU not synced or MU clock not synced
1=Error to same clock as IED
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Quality of one or more subscribed
0=No analogue channels is TEST
SIMMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU delivers simulated data accepted
0=No by IED
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No

Technical manual

0=No
0=No
0=No I1
0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No I2
0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No
0=No

Technical manual

0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No I3
0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No I4
0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable

Technical manual

0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No U1
0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No U2
0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No

Technical manual

2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No U3
0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
BadReference BOOLEAN 1=Yes - BadReference indication output for
0=No U4
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No U4
0=No
0=No
0=No

Technical manual

1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
14.5.6 Operation principle GUID-A1D31CDA-1FE2-4BC0-A472-1B35E73CA1F2 v6
The merging units (MUs) are situated close to the primary equipment, like circuit breakers,
isolators, etc. The MUs have the capability to gather measured values from measuring
transformers, non-conventional transducers or both. The gathered data are then transmitted
to subscribers over the process bus, utilizing the IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE protocol.
The IED communicates with the MUs over the process bus via the rear access points. For the
user, the MU appears in the IED as a normal analogue input module and is engineered in the
very same way.

Technical manual
IED
Application
Station Wide
Preprocessing blocks Preprocessing blocks GPS Clock
SMAI SMAI
MU1 MU2
Splitter
Electrical-to-
Optical Converter
1PPS
TRM module
Access Point
110 V 1A 1A
IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE
Ethernet Switch
IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE
IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE
Merging 1PPS Merging 1PPS

Unit Unit
Combi Combi
CT CT
Sensor Sensor
Conventional VT
IEC080000723enOriginal.vsd
Figure 262: Example of signal path for sampled analogue values from MU and
conventional CT/VT
The function has the following alarm signals:
• MUDATA:
• Ok[0] indicates that the merging unit samples are received from the merging unit
and are accepted.
• ERROR[1] indicates that the merging unit samples are generated by internal
substitution.
• SYNCH:
• OK[0] indicates
• when SyncLostMode = Block, and the time quality of the hardware is within
the set value [SyncAccLevel=1us, 4us or Unspecified]
• when SyncLostMode = BlockOnLostUTC, the time quality of the hardware is
within the set value [SyncAccLevel=1us, 4us or Unspecified] [AND] IED

Technical manual
receives global common time[UTC] from any of the FineSyncSource like IRIG-
B, PTP or GPS.
• when SyncLostMode = NoBlock
• ERROR[1] indicates
• when SyncLostMode = Block, and the time quality of the hardware is not
within the set value [SyncAccLevel=1us, 4us or Unspecified]
• when SyncLostMode = BlockonLostUTC, the time quality of the hardware is
not within the set value [SyncAccLevel=1us, 4us or Unspecified] [OR] IED
doesn't receive global common time[UTC] from any of the FineSyncSource
like IRIG-B, PTP or GPS.
• SMPLLOST:
• NO[0] indicates that the merging unit samples are received from the merging unit
and are accepted
• YES[1] indicates
• when merging unit data are generated by internal substitution
• when one/more channel's Quality is not good
• when merging unit is in Testmode/detailed quality=Test, IED is not in test
mode
• MUSYNCH:
• OK[0] indicates
• when SyncLostMode = Block/BlockOnLostUTC, the time quality of the
hardware is within the set value [SyncAccLevel=1us, 4us or Unspecified] [AND]
merging unit is time synchronized [smpSynch flag in datastream is not equal
to 0] [AND] the hardware time matches the time in the datastream within 10
ms.
• when SyncLostMode = NoBlock, the merging unit samples are received
• ERROR[1] indicates
• when SyncLostMode = Block/BlockOnLostUTC, the time quality of the
hardware is not within the set value [SyncAccLevel=1us, 4us or Unspecified]
[OR] merging unit is not time synchronized [smpSynch flag in datastream is
equal to 0] [OR] the hardware time is out of 10 ms from the time in the
datastream.
• when SyncLostMode = NoBlock, the merging unit samples are not received
• TESTMODE:
• NO[0] indicates that No merging unit analog channels are in testmode
• YES[1] indicates that one/more subscribed channels are in testmode
• SIMMODE:
• NO[0] indicates that normal data is received and are accepted
• YES[1] indicates that the received datastream is tagged as simulated and are
accepted
Internal substitution can happen during the following conditions:
1. Transient block after receive error (sample loss)

2. Transient block after Simulated/Real Sample value stream transition
3. Transient block after recovery from substitution
4. No data from merging unit
5. Bad data from merging unit
6. Merging unit report lost sync[smpSynch=0] and SyncLostMode = Block/BlockOnLostUTC

Technical manual
7. IED time quality of hardware is not good [not within set value SyncAccLevel] and
SyncLostMode = Block/BlockOnLostUTC
8. Merging unit channel reported with quality other than good
9. Merging unit channel/channels is/are in testmode and the IED is not in testmode
During Internal substitution, the functions connected to that particular merging unit will be
blocked and the merging unit channel's analog values will be forced to 0 with quality as Invalid,
Substituted, Failure.
Timeout
TSYNCERR Indicates that there is some timeout on any configured time source or the time
quality is worse than specified in SynchAccLevel. The timeout is individually specified per time
source (PPS, IRIG-B, SNTP etc.) See section "Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN"
14.5.6.1 Conditional blocking GUID-D129543D-82BE-4F8A-9333-4C3470693F98 v1
Introduction GUID-9D9A73FA-505E-4936-BB55-E7D86AB8023B v1
Conditional blocking is a concept in the 670 series which improves resilience against errors in
network communication, time synchronization, and hardware. This is important for digital
substations where analogue data (some or even all) is sourced from the IEC61850 9-2 MUs
(merging units).
Conditional blocking functionality GUID-C12A5162-7F49-4FF0-98AA-BA362BC48070 v1

The overall idea with conditional blocking is to avoid blocking of the parts of an IED which can
safely continue the operation in presence of certain error conditions (listed below).
To make conditional blocking work as intended, there are configuration rules that need to be
followed. If an incorrect configuration is deployed, the IED functionality may be blocked
inadvertently, thereby reducing the availability of protection functions. An incorrect
configuration also increases the sensitivity to single point failures.
With a proper configuration, on the other hand, only functions directly affected by an error will
be blocked, while other functions will continue to operate.
Implementation GUID-D9880430-E6D6-42EE-B315-7E9279BEC913 v1
In Figure 263, two functions are shown, F1 and F2, where F1 takes data only from MU1, while F2
takes data from both MU1 and MU2.
3Ph Group
MU1 SMAI F1
3Ph Group
MU2 SMAI F2
Figure 263: Implementation schematic

When F1 and F2 start-up, each function analyzes the analogue data which is driving it. This
information is used to determine how the function should be blocked during error conditions
separately.

Technical manual
Function F1 is independent of MU2, if MU2 is lost, this will not affect F1. It will execute its
algorithms as long as data from MU1 is available. Note that F1 will operate even with poor time
synchronization. This is possible because F1 only depends on data from a single MU.
Function F2 on the other hand, depends on the correct information and time synchronized
data being available from both MU1 and MU2. If any of the MUs fail, or if any of them indicates
the loss of time synchronization, F2 will be blocked.
Examples of error conditions GUID-AFB2C078-59A8-4DFD-AD6C-B458695E4FA5 v1

This section contains examples of error conditions that can trigger function blocking.
• Time synchronization is not available/correctly configured in the IED
• Time synchronization quality is poor
• Analogue MU data indicates bad time quality in the MU
• Analogue MU data indicates data error in the MU
• Analogue MU data is unavailable (for example, if a connection to an IEC 9-2 MU is lost)
• Hardware errors (for example, network switches and fibers, station clock failures etc.)
Depending on how the IED is configured, these kinds of errors will have a bigger or smaller
impact on how much of the IED functionality that is blocked.
Incorrect configuration GUID-7857CC4E-A7DF-4B85-BF4E-9470A02903E5 v1

As an example, consider an instance of OC4PTOC, which has four steps of functionality. In
Figure 264, it is configured with two 3-phase groups, one for current and one for voltage. The
analogue data comes from two different MUs.
Figure 264: Incorrect configuration

Technical manual
Assume, that the user has configured one step in the OC4PTOC as non-directional, and
another step as directional. Because the analogue data comes from two different MUs, the
user should understand that the data from both MUs must be available and both must indicate
that they are time synchronized, for the directional step to operate.
Due to the way conditional blocking works, if one or both of the MUs indicate poor time
synchronization, then the entire function will be blocked. Unfortunately, in this example, this
will also block the non-directional over-current step, although it would be perfectly capable of
operating without time synchronization.
This shows the incorrect configuration from a conditional blocking perspective.
Correct configuration GUID-AA803422-5774-4BDE-B84E-2FCF465EE4D0 v1

In Figure 265, the configuration is changed so the user have two instances of the function,
where the non-directional over-current instance uses only currents from one MU, while the
directional over-current instance uses current and voltage from both the MUs.
Figure 265: Correct configuration

If the time synchronization is lost, or if there is an error in the voltage modules of the MU, or if
the voltage MU is lost altogether, the non-directional instance will still be operative.
This is an example of how the user needs to configure the IED to ensure conditional blocking
works as intended.
Another way to avoid conditional blocking is to take currents as well as voltages from the
same MU. Thus, the usage of multiple SMAIs in itself is not a trigger of conditional blocking,
but the usage of multiple MUs can be. This also implies that hardware-wise, one should try to
not divide a 3-phase group of currents and voltages over multiple MUs, when this is possible
(this is really a consideration for the substation hardware setup).
Functions with multiple internal steps GUID-D067CD74-43CD-480E-9A50-4F978A8DF5D8 v1

The following functions have internal steps/functions, which also can be configured
incorrectly similar to the above description.
NS4PTOC, OC4PTOC, EF4PTOC
• Each step can be set differently with respect to directionality

Technical manual
SDEPSDE
• Directional overcurrent, non-directional residual overcurrent, and residual overvoltage
VRPVOC
• Voltage restrained overcurrent, undervoltage
LDRGFC
• Current variation, undercurrent, residual overcurrent, and undervoltage
CVGAPC
• Each step can be set differently with respect to directionality: Overcurrent1, Overcurrent2,
Undercurrent1, Undercurrent2, Overvoltage1, Overvoltage2, Undervoltage1, Undervoltage2
Time synchronization GUID-5DD58144-76EA-4019-A8EA-354E263810FB v1

A correct configuration also has to consider how the time synchronization is set up.
To begin with, a suitable station clock must be available. ABB recommends that PTP is used as
a time synchronization protocol.
Further, it is recommended that at least two station clocks are connected to the substation
network. This is to avoid the single point of failure. If one clock encounters an error, or loses its
connection to the network, the other clock will seamlessly take over the time synchronization
task, and thus avoid blocking due to lost time synchronization.
It is also required that PTP is active on all ports that send or receive sampled data on all
devices, to secure that the system time is common for all devices.
Synchronization via PTP GUID-F7D9C58F-CB87-4D2A-BC64-2B34D41557A4 v1

While synchronizing a station via PTP (IEC61850-9-3), the time propagates from the clock
through the system to each IED.
This means that during a transition, for example, when a clock regains time from the GPS
system after drifting for some time, there can be different times in different parts of a
substation.
Refer the following figure for a simple system:

Technical manual
GMC
MU2
REX 670
MU1 MU3
SAM600 - TS CT VT
Figure 266: Synchronization via PTP
If the station clock is out of order for some time and then regains good synch from, for
example, the satellite system, the correct time will reach MU2 and the 670 first. Then, it will
propagate to MU1 and MU3 through the boundary clock in the 670. This means, that for a short
duration, MU1 and MU2 will both appear to be synchronized, but they will in practice have
different times. If the protection is not blocked during this condition, user will get a false trip.
To fix this problem, the synch-lost signal from the merging units is prolonged for 16 seconds in
the 670. The synch-lost signal is used for conditional blocking of protections which use data
from the TRM of the IED in combination with a merging unit. The maximum time frame
specified by IEC61850-9-3 to propagate the time and resynchronize is 16 seconds.
The same time frame applies for the internal synchronization of the 670. In the scenario where
PTP is used in combination with 9-2, the synch-lost signal is also prolonged with 16 seconds.
Again, this delay is needed to ensure that the correct time has propagated to all units before
blocked functions are released for operation.
14.5.6.2 IEC 61850 quality expander QUALEXP GUID-9C5DC78E-041B-422B-9668-320E62B847A2 v1
The quality expander component is used to display the detailed quality of an IEC/UCA
61850-9-2LE analog channel. The component expands the channel quality output of a Merging
Unit analog channel received in the IED as per the IEC 61850-7-3 standard. This component can
be used during the ACT monitoring to get the particular channel quality of the Merging Unit.
The expanded quality bits are visible on the outputs as per IEC 61850-7-3 standard. When
written to IED, the configuration will show the expanded form of the respective MU channel
quality information during the online monitoring in the ACT.

Technical manual
The validity status of the quality as described in IEC 61850-7-3 is expanded to Good, Invalid,
Reserved and Questionable (QUEST) outputs.
The detailed quality as described in IEC 61850-7-3 is expanded to Overflow, Out of Range
(OUTRANGE), Bad reference (BADREF), Oscillatory (OSC), Failure, old data, inconsistent
(INCONS) and inaccurate (INACC) outputs.
The source status of the quality as described in IEC 61850-7-3 is expanded to Process and
Substituted (SUBST) outputs.
The other quality statuses (Test, Operator Blocked (OPBLKD) and Derived) are shown as they
are.
The derived quality is the extension to IEC 61850-7-3. If the derived bit is set to 1, it indicates
that there is no physical sensor within the system to determine the value, but the value is
derived from a combination of values from other physical sensors. Typically, I4 or U4 are
derived if they are calculated as the sum of the three phase quantities.
The configured MU channel quality as described in IEC 61850-7-3 is available on LHMI. This can
be viewed under Main Menu/Diagnostics/Merging units/MUX:XXXX/XX Quality.
Figure 267: Configured MU channel quality in LHMI
14.5.7 Technical data SEMOD172233-1 v1
SEMOD172236-2 v3
Table 424: IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol

Functions Value
Protocol IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
14.6 LON communication protocol IP14420-1 v1
An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This enables
communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operator’s workplace, from the
control center and also from other terminals.
LON communication protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 from

Echelon Corporation and is designed for communication in control networks. These networks
are characterized by high speed for data transfer, short messages (few bytes), peer-to-peer

Technical manual
communication, multiple communication media, low maintenance, multivendor equipment,

and low support costs. LonTalk supports the needs of applications that cover a range of
requirements. The protocol follows the reference model for open system interconnection (OSI)
designed by the International Standardization Organization (ISO).
In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available. For
other addresses, refer to section Related documents.
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with LON communication protocol in general.
14.6.2 Settings IP14441-1 v2
Table 425: HORZCOMM Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation
On
Table 426: ADE Non group settings (basic)

On
TimerClass Slow - - Slow Timer class
Normal
Fast
TimeDomain Local without DST - - Local with DST Time domain
Local with DST
M15083-3 v3
The speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. With protection and
control devices, fiber optic media is used, which enables the use of the maximum speed of 1.25
Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the devices connected to the
network can communicate with each other. The own subnet and node number are identifying
the nodes (max. 255 subnets, 127 nodes per one subnet).
The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The measured
values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sent to the higher-level
devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorized values, setting values, and
other parameter data when required. The LON bus also enables the bay level devices to
communicate with each other to deliver, for example, interlocking information among the
terminals without the need of a bus master.
The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network variables and
explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short messages, such as measuring
values, status information, and interlocking/blocking signals. Explicit messages are used to
transfer longer pieces of information, such as events and explicit read and write messages to
access device data.
The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems include direct
communication among all terminals in the system and support for multi-master
implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that the terminals can
communicate with external devices using the same standard of network variables.

Technical manual
Introduction of LON protocol M15083-8 v2

For more information, refer to LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and Control, User’s
manual and Technical description.
LON protocol M15083-11 v1
Configuration of LON M15083-13 v3

LON network tool (LNT) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network configuration. All the
functions required for setting up and configuring a LonWorks network, is easily accessible on a
single tool program.
Activate LON Communication M15083-16 v3

Activate LON communication in the Parameter Setting tool under Main Menu/Configuration/
Communication/Station communication/ LON/HORZCOMM:1, where Operation must be set
to ON.
Add LON Device Types LNT M15083-19 v3

A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by installing the device
from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505 using SLDT package version 1p2 r04.
LON net address M15083-22 v3

To establish a LON connection, the IED has to be given a unique net address. The net address
consists of a subnet and node number. This is accomplished with the LON Network Tool by
creating one device for each IED.
Vertical communication M15083-25 v1

Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices and
protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed process data to
monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameter data and disturbance
recorder files. This communication is implemented using explicit messages.
Events and indications M15083-28 v3

Events are sent to the monitoring devices using explicit messages (message code 44H) with
unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a signal is changed in the
IED, one message with the value, quality and time is transmitted from terminal.
Binary events M15083-31 v6

Binary events are generated in Event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:20 in the IEDs. The
EVENT function blocks have predefined LON addresses. Table 427 shows the LON addresses to
the first input on the EVENT function blocks. Addresses to the other inputs on the EVENT
function block are consecutive after the first input. For example, input 15 on EVENT:17 function
block has the address 1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294.
For double indications, only the first eight inputs 1–8 must be used. Inputs 9–16 can be used
for other types of events at the same EVENT block.
Three EVENT function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:3 running with a fast loop time (3 ms) are
available as basic in the IEDs.. The remaining EVENT function blocks EVENT:4 to EVENT:9 run
with a loop time of 8 ms and EVENT:10 to EVENT:20 run with a loop time of 100 ms. The EVENT
blocks are used to send binary signals, integers, real time values like analogue data from
measuring functions and mA input modules as well as pulse counter signals.
16 pulse counter value function blocks PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16 are available in the IEDs.
The first LON address in every EVENT function block is found in table 427. The formula for
calculating the LON address is:
LON Address = (EVBlkNr-1)×16 + signalNr +1023
For instance, the first pin at Event block number 2 has the address: (2-1)×16 +1 +1023 = 1040

Technical manual
Table 427: LON adresses for EVENT functions

Function block First LON address in
function block
EVENT:1 1024
EVENT:2 1040
EVENT:3 1056
EVENT:4 1072
EVENT:5 1088
EVENT:6 1104
EVENT:7 1120
EVENT:8 1136
EVENT:9 1152
EVENT:10 1168
EVENT:11 1184
EVENT:12 1200
EVENT:13 1216
EVENT:14 1232
EVENT:15 1248
EVENT:16 1264
EVENT:17 1280
EVENT:18 1296
EVENT:19 1312
EVENT:20 1328
Event masks M15083-78 v4

Event mask for each input can be set individually from Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under:
Settings/IED settings/ Monitoring / Event Function or via parameter setting tool (PST) as
follows:
• No events
• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
• AutoDetect, the EVENT function makes the reporting decision (reporting criteria for
integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
Single indication M15083-123 v3

Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is always reported on
change, no changed detection is done in the EVENT function block. Other Boolean signals, for
example a start or a trip signal from a protection function is event masked in the EVENT
function block.
Double indications M15083-126 v3

Double indications can only be reported for the first 8 inputs on an EVENT function block.
• 00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0

• 01 generates an open event with the read status 1
• 10 generates a close event with the read status 2
• 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3
Analog value M15083-135 v4

Technical manual
All analog values are reported cyclic. The reporting interval is taken from the connected
function if there is a limit supervised signal. Otherwise it is taken from the EVENT function
block.
Command handling M15083-80 v4

Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent SPA-bus
message is an explicit LON message which contains an ASCII character message following the
coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent using explicit messages with
message code 41H and using acknowledged transport service.
Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or N) are sent
using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out only one SPA-bus
message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before sending the next message.
For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, that is the
function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 30, SXCBR 1 to 18 and SXSWI 1 to 24, the SPA addresses are
according to table 428.
SEMOD116913-2 v2
Table 428: SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control
Name Function SPA Description
block address
BL_CMD SCSWI01 1 I 5115 SPA parameters for block
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command

Technical manual

block address
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
CANCEL SCSWI01 1 I 5107 SPA parameters for cancel
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command

Technical manual

block address
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI01 1 I 5105 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, (Open/Close) command
SELOpen+ILO=10, Note: Send select command
SELClose+ILO=11, before operate command
SELOpen+SCO=20,
SELClose+SCO=21,
SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
SELClose+ILO+SCO=31
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command

Technical manual

block address

Technical manual

block address
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI01 1 I 5106 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen+ILO=10, Note: Send select command
ExcClose+ILO=11, before operate command
ExcOpen+SCO=20,
ExcClose+SCO=21,
ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command

Technical manual

block address
Sub Value SXCBR01 2 I 7854 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Note: Send the value before
Enable
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR09 3I7 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted

Technical manual

block address
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI01 3 I 196 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted

Technical manual

block address
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
be substituted
Sub Enable SXCBR01 2 I 7855 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Note: Send the Value before
Enable
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR09 3I8 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command

Technical manual

block address
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI01 3 I 197 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI11 3I 379 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command

Technical manual

block address
enable command
enable command
enable command
Update Block SXCBR01 2 I 7853 SPA parameter for update block
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
Update Block SXCBR09 3I6 SPA parameter for update block
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
Update Block SXSWI01 3 I 198 SPA parameter for update block
command
command
command
command
command

Technical manual

block address
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
Horizontal communication M15083-86 v4

Network variables are used for communication between 500 and 650 series IEDs The
supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83). SNVT_state is used to
communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values.

Technical manual
Multiple command send function block (MULTICMDSND) is used to pack the information to
one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented for the application by
a multiple command receive function block (MULTICMDRCV). With horizontal communication,
the input BOUND on MULTICMDSND must be set to 1. There are 10 MULTICMDSND and 60
MULTICMDRCV function blocks available. These function blocks are connected using the LON
network tool (LNT). The tool also defines the service and addressing on LON.
This is an overview for configuring the network variables for the IEDs.
Configuration of LON network variables M15083-92 v3

Configure the Network variables according to the specific application using the LON network
tool (LNT). The following is an example of how to configure network variables concerning, for
example, interlocking between two IEDs.
LON
BAY E1 BAY E3 BAY E4

MULTICMDSND: 7 MULTICMDSND: 9 MULTICMDSND: 9
en05000718.vsd
Figure 268: Examples connections between MULTICMDSND and MULTICMDRCV function

blocks in three IEDs
The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window. From LNT
window select Connections/ NVConnections/ New.

Technical manual
en05000719.vsd
Figure 269: The network variables window in LNT

There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either the users can use the drag-and-
drop method where they can select all nodes in the device window, drag them to the Download
area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there; or, they can perform it by
selecting the traditional menu, Configuration/ Download.
en05000720.vsd
Figure 270: The download configuration window in LNT

Technical manual
Communication ports M15083-97 v6

The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the first analog
digital conversion module (ADM), and it is used for LON, SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP
communication.
In the following figure, X311 ports A/B are for SPA, IEC103 or DNP3 and X311 ports C/D are for
LON protocol.
Figure 271: Rear view of 1/2 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot
There are two types of IO connectors: snap-in connectors for plastic fiber cables and ST/
bayonet connectors for glass fiber cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type of
connector or a combination of both connectors. This is identified by a tag.
Connect the incoming optical fiber to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to
the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions concerning handling and
connection of fiber cables.
M11927-1 v2
Table 429: LON communication protocol

Function Value
Protocol LON
Communication speed 1.25 Mbit/s

Technical manual
14.7 SPA communication protocol IP14614-1 v1
In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available. For other
addresses, refer to section Related documents.
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in general.
14.7.2 Design M11877-3 v7
Using the rear SPA port for either local or remote communication with a PC requires the
following equipment:
• Optical fibers
• Opto/electrical converter for the PC
• PC
SPA cannot be accessed via PCM600.
When communicating between the local HMI and a PC, the only hardware required is a front-
connection cable.
SPA can be accessed via LHMI front only when using the Field Service Tool
Access (FSTACCS).
14.7.3 Settings IP14403-1 v2
Table 430: SPA Non group settings (basic)

SlaveAddress 1 - 899 - 1 30 Slave address
BaudRate 300 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baudrate on serial line
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
Table 431: LONSPA Non group settings (basic)

On
SlaveAddress 1 - 899 - 1 30 Slave address

Technical manual
M11880-3 v2
The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7 data bits +
even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. For more information on
recommended baud rate for each type of IED, refer to Technical reference manual. Messages
on the bus consist of ASCII characters.
Introduction of SPA protocol M11880-7 v2

The basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiated need to talk
to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves and, consequently,
can request required data. In addition, the master can send data to the slave. Requesting by
the master can be performed either by sequenced polling (for example, for event information)
or only on demand.
The master requests slave information using request messages and sends information to the
slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all slaves in common a broadcast
message containing time or other data. The inactive state of bus transmit and receive lines is a
logical "1".
SPA protocol M11880-10 v5

The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data to an IED
with the SPA communication protocol implemented.
The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16 are found in table 432.
Table 432: SPA addresses for the PCFCNT function

Function block SPA address CNT_VAL SPA address NEW_VAL
PCFCNT:1 6-O-2788 6-O-2787
PCFCNT:2 6-O-2794 6-O-2793
PCFCNT:3 6-O-2800 6-O-2799
PCFCNT:4 6-O-2806 6-O-2805
PCFCNT:5 6-O-2812 6-O-2811
PCFCNT:6 6-O-2818 6-O-2817
PCFCNT:7 6-O-2824 6-O-2823
PCFCNT:8 6-O-2830 6-O-2829
PCFCNT:9 6-O-2836 6-O-2835
PCFCNT:10 6-O-2842 6-O-2841
PCFCNT:11 6-O-2848 6-O-2847
PCFCNT:12 6-O-2854 6-O-2853
PCFCNT:13 6-O-2860 6-O-2859
PCFCNT:14 6-O-2866 6-O-2865
PCFCNT:15 6-O-2872 6-O-2871
PCFCNT:16 6-O-2878 6-O-2877
I/O modules M11880-16 v4

To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module function block are
used, that is, the addresses for BI1 – BI16. For SPA addresses, refer to section Related
documents in Product Guide.
M11880-35 v1

Technical manual
Single command, 16 signals M11880-51 v5

The IEDs can be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation
automation system or from the local HMI. That receiving function block has 16 outputs that
can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in switchyards. For local control
functions, the local HMI can also be used.
The single command, 16 signals function consists of four function blocks: SINGLECMD:1 to
SINGLECMD:4 for 16 binary output signals each.
The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control gateway,
or from the local HMI on the IED. For Single command, 3 signals function block, SINGLECMD:1
to SINGLECMD:3, the address is for the first output. The other outputs follow consecutively
after the first one. For example, output 7 on the SINGLECMD:2 function block has the 5O533
address.
The SPA addresses for Single command, 16 signals functions SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:4
are found in table 433.
Table 433: SPA addresses for SINGLECMD function

Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output
SINGLECMD1-Cmd1 4-S-4639 5-O-511
SINGLECMD1-Cmdt13 4-S-4651 5-O-523
SINGLECMD2-Cmdt3 4-S-4674 5-O-529

Technical manual
Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output
Figure 272 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way, connect the
command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection IED for control of a circuit
breaker.
A pulse via the binary outputs of the IED normally performs this type of command control. The
SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 – OUT16 in SINGLECMD:1 are shown in table 433.

Technical manual
SINGLECMD PULSETIMER
BLOCK ÔUT1 INPUT OUT To output board, CLOSE
#CD01-CMDOUT1 ÔUT2
#CD01-CMDOUT2 ÔUT3
#CD01-CMDOUT3 ÔUT4
#CD01-CMDOUT4 ÔUT5 AND PULSETIMER
ÔUT6 INPUT1 OUT INPUT OUT To output board, OPEN
#CD01-CMDOUT5
ÔUT7 INPUT2 NOUT
#CD01-CMDOUT6
#CD01-CMDOUT7 ÔUT8 INPUT3
#CD01-CMDOUT8 ÔUT9 INPUT4
#CD01-CMDOUT9 ÔUT10
#CD01-CMDOUT16
SYNCH OK
Figure 272: Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control of a
circuit breaker
The MODE input defines if the output signals from SINGLECMD:1 is off, steady or setable pulse
length signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Main Menu/Settings / IED
Settings / Control / Commands / Single Command or via Parameter Setting Tool (PST).
Event function EVENT M11880-82 v6

The Event function (EVENT) sends time-tagged events to the station level (for example,
operator workplace) over the station bus. On the station level, events are presented in an
event list. Events can be created from both internal logical signals and binary input channels.
All the internal signals are time tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input
channels are time tagged directly on each I/O module. Events are produced according to a set
of event masks. These masks are treated commonly for both LON and SPA channels.
Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the IED: Terminal Restarted
(0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51).
The status and event codes for the EVENT function are found in Table 434.
Table 434: Status and event codes
Single indication1) Double indication

Event block Status Set event Reset Intermed Closed Open Undefined
event iate 00 10 01 11
EVENT:1
Input 1 22O1 22E33 22E32 22E0 22E1 22E2 22E3
Input 2 22O2 22E35 22E34 22E4 22E5 22E6 22E7
Input 3 22O3 22E37 22E36 22E8 22E9 22E10 22E11
Input 4 22O4 22E39 22E38 22E12 22E13 22E14 22E15
Input 5 22O5 22E41 22E40 22E16 22E17 22E18 22E19
Input 6 22O6 22E43 22E42 22E20 22E21 22E22 22E23
Input 7 22O7 22E45 22E44 22E24 22E25 22E26 22E27
Input 8 22O8 22E47 22E46 22E28 22E29 22E30 22E31
Input 9 22O9 22E49 22E48 - - - -
Input 10 22O10 22E51 22E50 - - - -
Input 11 22O11 22E53 22E52 - - - -
Input 12 22O12 22E55 22E54 - - - -
Input 13 22O13 22E57 22E56 - - - -
Input 14 22O14 22E59 22E58 - - - -
Input 15 22O15 22E61 22E60 - - - -
Input 16 22O16 22E63 22E62 - - - -
EVENT:2 230.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E..

EVENT:3 240.. 24E.. 24E.. 24E.. 23E.. 24E.. 24E..
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
EVENT:20 410.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E..

Technical manual
These values are only applicable if the event mask is masked ≠ OFF.
Connection of signals as events M11880-311 v5

Signals coming from different protection and control functions and sent as events to the
station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus), are connected to the EVENT function block as
specified in Figure 273.
EVENT
Block BLOCK
ILRANG ÎNPUT1
PSTO ÎNPUT2
UL12RANG ÎNPUT3
UL23RANG ÎNPUT4
UL31RANG ÎNPUT5
3I0RANG ÎNPUT6
3U0RANG ÎNPUT7
FALSE ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
ÎNPUT10
ÎNPUT11
ÎNPUT12
ÎNPUT13
ÎNPUT14
ÎNPUT15
ÎNPUT16
Figure 273: Connection of protection signals for event handling
14.7.4.1 Communication ports M11880-315 v7
The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the first analog
digital conversion module (ADM). It is used for LON, SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP
communication.
In the following figure, X311 ports A/B are for SPA, IEC103 or DNP3 and X311 ports C/D are for
LON protocol.

Technical manual
Figure 274: Rear view of 1/2 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot
There are two types of IO connectors: snap-in connector for plastic fiber cables and ST/
bayonet connector for glass fiber cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type or
connector or with a combination of both types of connectors. This is identified with a tag.
Connect the incoming optical fiber to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to
the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions concerning handling and
connection of fiber cables.
For setting the transfer rate (baud rate) and slave number, please refer to the Application
manual and Commissioning manual respectively.
M11901-1 v2
Table 435: SPA communication protocol

Function Value
Protocol SPA
Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 Bd
Slave number 1 to 899
14.8 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol IP14615-1 v2
14.8.1 Introduction M11910-3 v3
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED communicates
with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have software that can
interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

Technical manual
14.8.2 Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS
14.8.2.1 Functionality GUID-557FB587-9127-4D99-B2C6-16445E06F220 v3
103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on connected
signals.
The set of connected input will control which ASDUs (Application Service Data Units) are
generated.
• 9 Will be generated if at least IL1 is connected. IL2, IL3, UL1, UL2, UL3, P, Q, F are optional
but there can be no holes.
• 3.4 Will be generated if IN and UN are present.
• 3.3 Will be generated if IL2, Ul1L2, P and Q present.
• 3.2 Will be generated if IL2, UL1L2 and P or Q missing.
• 3.1 Will be generated if IL2 present and IL1 missing (otherwise IL2 in 9).
Description for I103MEAS function block:

9 = IL1
3.4 = IN AND UN
3.3 = IL2 AND UL1L2 AND P AND Q
3.2 = IL2 AND UL1L2 AND NOT 3.3
3.1 = IL2 AND NOT (3.2 OR 3.3 OR 9)
GUID-3E1AB624-1B68-4018-B1BA-BC2C811F8F74 v1
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

name identification device number
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS - -
14.8.2.3 Function block GUID-EC5F1C83-0F47-4548-86E3-FFE056571241 v2
I103MEAS
BLOCK
IL1
IL2
IL3
IN
UL1
UL2
UL3
UL1L2
UN
P
Q
F
Figure 275: I103MEAS function block

Technical manual
14.8.2.4 Signals
Table 436: I103MEAS Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
IL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L1
IN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual current IN
UL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L1
UL1L2 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase-phase L1-L2
UN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual voltage UN
P REAL 0.0 Service value for active power
Q REAL 0.0 Service value for reactive power
F REAL 0.0 Service value for system frequency
14.8.2.5 Settings
Table 437: I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)

FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
MaxIL1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L1
MaxIN 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum residual current IN
MaxUL1 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L1
MaxUL1-UL2 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Maximum voltage for phase-phase L1-
L2
MaxUN 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum residual voltage UN
MaxP 0.00 - 2000.00 MW 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for active power
MaxQ 0.00 - 2000.00 MVAr 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for reactive power
MaxF 15.0 - 66.0 Hz 1.0 51.0 Maximum system frequency

Technical manual
14.8.3 Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103MEASUSR
14.8.3.1 Functionality GUID-FC9ED4BD-F11C-4BDA-8CDB-3ACF00931D3A v1
I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor direction.
These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private range,
and the Information number parameter for each block.
GUID-A9E21066-354B-453D-8D9B-E86EE31CF5F9 v1

Measurands user defined signals for I103MEASUSR - -
IEC 60870-5-103
14.8.3.3 Function block GUID-C234101E-F9B9-4DB0-874C-C51BB50588CB v1
I103MEASUSR
BLOCK
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
Figure 276: I103MEASUSR function block
14.8.3.4 Signals
Table 438: I103MEASUSR Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
INPUT1 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 1

Technical manual
14.8.3.5 Settings
Table 439: I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)

InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for measurands
(1-255)
MaxMeasur1 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 1
10000000000.00 input 2
10000000000.00 input 3
10000000000.00 input 4
10000000000.00 input 5
10000000000.00 input 6
10000000000.00 input 7
10000000000.00 input 8
10000000000.00 input 9
14.8.4 Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR
14.8.4.1 Functionality GUID-7A132276-35A2-402C-9722-6259D65998F5 v1
I103AR is a function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in monitor
direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information number
parameter is defined for each output signal.
GUID-7B066282-79D7-480B-BEDE-3C04F0FCBF05 v1

Function status auto-recloser for IEC I103AR - -
60870-5-103
14.8.4.3 Function block GUID-FAC5A3DF-73CB-4A39-A213-5C21ACA05756 v1
I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_BLKD
Figure 277: I103AR function block

Technical manual
14.8.4.4 Signals
Table 440: I103AR Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
16_ARACT BOOLEAN 0 Information number 16, auto-recloser active
128_CBON BOOLEAN 0 Information number 128, circuit breaker on by auto-recloser
130_BLKD BOOLEAN 0 Information number 130, auto-recloser blocked
14.8.4.5 Settings
Table 441: I103AR Non group settings (basic)

14.8.5 Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF GUID-F23B392E-B55D-4BC3-A0A6-B7992D551092 v1
14.8.5.1 Functionality GUID-13F90E95-7C8C-4DCB-A9D8-2489B66DB81A v2
I103EF is a function block with defined functions for earth fault indications in monitor
GUID-033731B7-1B71-4CCC-8356-1C03CBCB23FA v1

Function status earth-fault for IEC I103EF - -
60870-5-103
14.8.5.3 Function block GUID-25B47484-2976-4063-BD81-AE02D03B08B0 v1
I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV
Figure 278: I103EF function block

Technical manual
14.8.5.4 Signals
Table 442: I103EF Input signals

51_EFFW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 51, earth-fault forward
52_EFREV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 52, earth-fault reverse
14.8.5.5 Settings
Table 443: I103EF Non group settings (basic)

14.8.6 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103

I103FLTPROT
14.8.6.1 Functionality GUID-6D52F442-1592-4BA7-919C-0CD79046CAE5 v1
I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction. Each input on the function
block is specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to a correspondent
signal present in the configuration. For example: 68_TRGEN represents the General Trip of the
device, and therefore must be connected to the general trip signal SMPPTRC_TRIP or
equivalent.
The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that is
triggering the Disturbance Recorder and the respective configured signal to the IEC
60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT.
GUID-55593EC4-7AED-47A0-8311-DB22D013A193 v1

Function status fault protection for I103FLTPROT - -
IEC 60870-5-103

Technical manual
14.8.6.3 Function block GUID-F0ED13B8-6B82-4CA7-8F22-C200C33EBB7E v2
I103FLTPROT
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
68_TRGEN
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
72_TRBKUP
73_SCL
74_FW
75_REV
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
83_ZONE6
84_STGEN
85_BFP
86_MTRL1
87_MTRL2
88_MTRL3
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
FLTLOC
Figure 279: I103FLTPROT function block
14.8.6.4 Signals
Table 444: I103FLTPROT Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting.
64_STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64, start phase L1
67_STIN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 67, start residual current IN
68_TRGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 68, trip general
69_TRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 69, trip phase L1
72_TRBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 72, back up trip I>>
73_SCL REAL 0 Information number 73, fault location in ohm
74_FW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 75, reverse/busbar
76_TRANS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 76, signal transmitted

Technical manual

77_RECEV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 77, signal received
78_ZONE1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 78, zone 1
84_STGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 84, start general
85_BFP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 85, breaker failure
86_MTRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 86, trip measuring system phase L1
89_MTRN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 89, trip measuring system neutral N
90_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 90, over current trip, stage low
91_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 91, over current trip, stage high
92_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 92, earth-fault trip, stage low
93_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 93, earth-fault trip, stage high
ARINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
FLTLOC BOOLEAN 0 Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-CALCMADE)
14.8.6.5 Settings
Table 445: I103FLTPROT Non group settings (basic)

14.8.7 IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED
14.8.7.1 Functionality GUID-52AC7D0F-33C5-46FC-983E-5CB4B3517D88 v1
I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction. This block uses
parameter as FunctionType, and information number parameter is defined for each input
signal.
GUID-5EEBE11C-C8E3-4A8A-814F-840E137DB5B5 v1

IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED - -

Technical manual
14.8.7.3 Function block GUID-421D5C37-27A5-476A-A7D9-40E70AFDFDC8 v1
I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
21_TESTM
22_SETCH
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4
Figure 280: I103IED function block
14.8.7.4 Signals
Table 446: I103IED Input signals

19_LEDRS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 19, reset LEDs
21_TESTM BOOLEAN 0 Information number 21, test mode is active
22_SETCH BOOLEAN 0 Information number 22, setting changed
23_GRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 23, setting group 1 is active
14.8.7.5 Settings
Table 447: I103IED Non group settings (basic)

14.8.8 Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV
14.8.8.1 Functionality GUID-E7A28D8D-398E-437C-9B58-AE125BC38058 v1
I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions for supervision indications in monitor
GUID-C8113B08-3586-412C-A750-606159B1E97E v1

Supervison status for IEC I103SUPERV - -
60870-5-103

Technical manual
14.8.8.3 Function block GUID-69C2C974-2D64-4174-9F9A-15383C09050D v1
I103SUPERV
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL
Figure 281: I103SUPERV function block
14.8.8.4 Signals
Table 448: I103SUPERV Input signals

32_MEASI BOOLEAN 0 Information number 32, measurand supervision of I
33_MEASU BOOLEAN 0 Information number 33, measurand supervision of U
37_IBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 37, I high-high back-up protection
38_VTFF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 38, fuse failure VT
46_GRWA BOOLEAN 0 Information number 46, group warning
47_GRAL BOOLEAN 0 Information number 47, group alarm
14.8.8.5 Settings
Table 449: I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)

14.8.9 Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRDEF
14.8.9.1 Functionality GUID-DADC9CE4-2E80-426C-A3B6-A8E8C7AC3CD4 v3
I103USRDEF is a function block with user defined input signals in monitor direction. Each
instance is associated with a Function Type (FUN) and each input signal with an Information
Number (INF). Additionally, all input signals may be defined to use relative time and how to
respond to a GI request.
The user is responsible for assigning a proper FUN value and proper INF values to all
connected inputs. See Settings for details.

Technical manual
GUID-474FDF39-CEFC-4370-9393-13BE62159969 v2

Status for user defined signals for I103USRDEF - -
IEC 60870-5-103
14.8.9.3 Function block GUID-B8312E77-514D-4117-BB31-B9907755580C v1
I103USRDEF
BLOCK
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
RT_START
Figure 282: I103USRDEF function block
14.8.9.4 Signals
Table 450: I103USRDEF Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 2
RT_START BOOLEAN 0 Trig to set base of relative time
GUID-9E29DE39-EA74-4D62-A2BA-F8E31A3D8757 v2
RT_START registers the positive transition (0->1) of a pulse and sets the time from which
relative time is derived. Relative time is assigned only to inputs where the corresponding
TypNo parameter is set to Relative. The maximum relative time and unit conform to the IEC
60870-5-103 standard.

Technical manual
14.8.9.5 Settings
Table 451: I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)

InfNo1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for binary input 1
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
TypNo1 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
GiNo1 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
Included
Included
Included
Included

Technical manual

Included
Included
Included
GUID-86DE9DBA-BE2F-4CC9-B447-1D2D86849EFF v2
The FunctionType parameter associates a particular instance of the function block with a FUN.
Refer to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard for details.
The InfNon parameters are used to associate each individual input signal with a userdefined
INF. Refer to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard for details.
The TypNon parameters determine if messages use absolute or relative time. This adheres to
the TYPE IDENTIFICATION (TYP) message types 1 (time-tagged message) and 2 (time-tagged
message with relative time) of the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
The GiNon parameters determine whether a message is sent as a part of a GI reply or not.
Refer to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard for details.
14.8.10 Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD
14.8.10.1 Functionality GUID-973929FE-292B-42A5-ACF9-BC95E2B16AE1 v2
I103CMD is a command function block in control direction with pre-defined output signals. The
signals are in steady state, not pulsed, and stored in the IED in case of restart.
GUID-CFD43980-0791-40D1-9136-CF4CCC35549A v1

Function commands for IEC I103CMD - -
60870-5-103
14.8.10.3 Function block GUID-C0680812-C488-4546-AA65-F590955DBF0C v1
I103CMD
BLOCK 16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT
Figure 283: I103CMD function block
14.8.10.4 Signals
Table 452: I103CMD Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

Technical manual
Table 453: I103CMD Output signals

16-AR BOOLEAN Information number 16, off/on of autorecloser
17-DIFF BOOLEAN Information number 17, block of differential protection
18-PROT BOOLEAN Information number 18, block of protection
14.8.10.5 Settings
Table 454: I103CMD Non group settings (basic)

14.8.11 IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD
14.8.11.1 Functionality GUID-19AD44B2-21D6-4DB0-AD74-1578DA30C100 v5
I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with defined IED functions. All outputs
are pulsed and they are NOT stored. Pulse length is fixed to 400ms.
GUID-0D0B2477-1B0C-48F3-B047-CCF9C7A71856 v1

IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD - -
14.8.11.3 Function block GUID-52D27CDA-8805-48FA-99BE-2E05A438B0C7 v1
I103IEDCMD
BLOCK 19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4
Figure 284: I103IEDCMD function block
14.8.11.4 Signals
Table 455: I103IEDCMD Input signals


Technical manual
Table 456: I103IEDCMD Output signals

19-LEDRS BOOLEAN Information number 19, reset LEDs
23-GRP1 BOOLEAN Information number 23, activate setting group 1
14.8.11.5 Settings
Table 457: I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)

14.8.12 Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRCMD
14.8.12.1 Functionality GUID-2989EAC8-20BE-46EE-93FE-C70188D0BC89 v1
I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction with user defined output signals. These
function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private range, and
the Information number parameter for each output signal.
GUID-9D6D1636-36C6-4C4E-B157-2D827820DDC7 v1

Function commands user defined for I103USRCMD - -
IEC 60870-5-103
14.8.12.3 Function block GUID-5EBEAED5-ABD9-4257-B879-DF7FD9F7805A v1
I103USRCMD
BLOCK ÔUTPUT1
ÔUTPUT2
ÔUTPUT3
ÔUTPUT4
ÔUTPUT5
ÔUTPUT6
ÔUTPUT7
ÔUTPUT8
Figure 285: I103USRCMD function block

Technical manual
14.8.12.4 Signals
Table 458: I103USRCMD Input signals

Table 459: I103USRCMD Output signals

OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
14.8.12.5 Settings
Table 460: I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)

PulseMode Steady - - Pulsed Pulse mode
Pulsed
PulseLength 0.200 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo_1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for output 1
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)

Technical manual
14.8.13 Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 I103GENCMD
14.8.13.1 Functionality GUID-729E9AFD-0468-4BBD-B54A-A6CDCC68A9B2 v3
I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands over IEC 60870-5-103. The function
has two outputs signals CMD_OFF and CMD_ON that can be used to implement double-point
command schemes.
The I103GENCMD component can be configured as either 2 pulsed ON/OFF or 2 steady

ON/OFF outputs. The ON output is pulsed with a command with value 2, while the OFF output
is pulsed with a command value 1. If in steady mode is ON asserted and OFF deasserted with
command 2 and vice versa with command 1. Steady mode is selected by setting
PulseLength=0. The I103GENCMD is retained, and a command in steady mode will be reissued
on restart.
GUID-1933A30C-5214-4116-8CD3-91BD975FACED v1

Function commands generic for IEC I103GENCMD - -
60870-5-103
14.8.13.3 Function block GUID-6EC8453E-0D00-4720-95A6-156C41CA46BB v1
I103GENCMD
BLOCK ^CMD_OFF
^CMD_ON
Figure 286: I103GENCMD function block
14.8.13.4 Signals
Table 461: I103GENCMD Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command
Table 462: I103GENCMD Output signals

CMD_OFF BOOLEAN Command output OFF
CMD_ON BOOLEAN Command output ON

Technical manual
14.8.13.5 Settings
Table 463: I103GENCMD Non group settings (basic)

PulseLength 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for command
output (1-255)
14.8.14 IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD
14.8.14.1 Functionality GUID-1E40B94D-B6A6-42F0-8757-A47B8A3FA3CD v8
I103POSCMD is a transceiver function that monitors activity on its input signals and interprets
any state transition into commands then sent over an established IEC 60870-5-103 link.
Additionally, it listens for general interrogation (GI) requests and replies to those with a GI
response message with the current state of each connected input.
Input POSITION is a double-indication signal, and it is GI enabled. This means that any state
transition, that is to ON, OFF, intermediate and faulty, is reported spontaneously. However,
the intermediate and faulty states may be suppressed by setting the Report Intermediate
Position = Off. See the settings for RS485 and optical serial communication for more
information.
Input SELECT is a single-indication signal, and it is also GI enabled. State transitions to ON and
OFF are reported spontaneously.
When input BLOCK is ON, the function will ignore GI requests and cease all monitoring activity.
Consequently, no transitions will be detected.
The I103POSCMD function is also equipped with three additional commands: Select, Operate
and Cancel. These are hidden in ACT and respond only to the base INF+1, INF+2 and INF+3
respectively. The base INF (Information Number) parameter is an IEC 60870-5-103 identifier
that associates a function in a 103 Master (such as Scada) with its equivalent in the IED.
GUID-ABF81C27-4605-4A15-9CF5-77FF82DE8747 v1

IED commands with position and I103POSCMD - -
select for IEC 60870-5-103
14.8.14.3 Function block GUID-3A31C1F2-1FB5-4DB0-A698-AD3F55738DB1 v1
I103POSCMD
BLOCK
POSITION
SELECT
Figure 287: I103POSCMD function block

Technical manual
14.8.14.4 Signals
Table 464: I103POSCMD Input signals

POSITION INTEGER 0 Position of controllable object
SELECT BOOLEAN 0 Select of controllable object
14.8.14.5 Settings
Table 465: I103POSCMD Non group settings (basic)

FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type
output
14.8.15 IED commands with position for IEC 60870-5-103

I103POSCMDV
14.8.15.1 Functionality GUID-CF04D9AC-40BE-46A3-A418-77204D2B0F27 v3
I103POSCMDV is a transceiver function that monitors activity on its input signals and
interprets any state transition into commands sent over an established IEC 60870-5-103 link.
Additionally, it listens for general interrogation (GI) requests, and replies to those with a GI
response message with the current state of each connected input.
Input POSITION is a double-indication signal, and it is GI enabled. This means that any state
transition, that is to ON, OFF, intermediate and faulty, is reported spontaneously. However,
the intermediate and faulty states may be suppressed by setting the Report Intermediate
Position = Off. See the settings for RS485 and optical serial communication for more
information.
When input BLOCK is ON, the function ignores GI requests and ceases all monitoring activity.
Consequently, no transitions will be detected.
GUID-2249B679-03E4-43CC-B690-916246FE6A31 v1

IED direct commands with position I103POSCMDV - -
for IEC 60870-5-103

Technical manual
14.8.15.3 Function block GUID-031C0F49-BEBD-40FE-A33F-18F1D94BB4B0 v1
I103POSCMDV
BLOCK
POSITION
Figure 288: I103POSCMDV function block
14.8.15.4 Signals
Table 466: I103POSCMDV Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position of controllable object
14.8.15.5 Settings
Table 467: I103POSCMDV Non group settings (basic)

FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type
output
14.8.16.1 General M11874-3 v5
IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial communication

exchanging information with a control system, and with a data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s.
In IEC terminology, a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The
communication is based on a point-to-point principle. The master must have software that
can interpret IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
Introduction to IEC 60870–5–103 protocol M11874-6 v3

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol functionality consists of the following functions:
• Event handling
• Report of analog service values (measurements)
• Fault location
• Command handling

Technical manual
• Autorecloser ON/OFF
• Teleprotection ON/OFF
• Protection ON/OFF
• LED reset
• Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
• File transfer (disturbance files)
• Time synchronization
For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC 60870 standard part 5:
Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the informative
interface of protection equipment.
IEC 60870-5-103 vendor specific implementation M11874-23 v4

The signal and setting tables specify the information types supported by the IEDs with the
communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented.
The information types are supported when corresponding functions are included in the
protection and control IED.
Be aware of that different cycle times for function blocks must be considered
to ensure correct time stamping.
Commands in control direction M11874-27 v1

Commands in control direction, I103IEDCMD M11874-29 v6
Command block in control direction with defined output signals.
Number of instances: 1
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
Information number is defined for each output signals.
Table 468: I103IEDCMD supported indications

INF Description
19 LED Reset
23 Activate setting group 1
Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD M11874-53 v6

Function command block in control direction with defined output signals.
Information number is defined for each output signals.

Technical manual
Table 469: Pre-defined I103CMD supported indications

INF Description
16 Auto-recloser on/off
17 Teleprotection on/off
18 Protection on/off
Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103USRCMD M11874-72 v6

Function command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals.
Function type for each function block instance in private range is selected with parameter
FunctionType.
Information number must be selected for each output signal. Default values are 1 - 8.
Table 470: I103USRCMD supported indications
INF 1) Description
1 Output signal 01
2 Output signal 02
3 Output signal 03
4 Output signal 04
5 Output signal 05
6 Output signal 06
7 Output signal 07
8 Output signal 08
1) User defined information number
Status M11874-107 v1
Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED M11874-109 v7
Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined IED functions.
Information number is defined for each input signals.
Table 471: I103IED supported functions

INF Description
19 LED reset
21 TestMode
22 Local Parameter setting
23 Setting group 1 active
Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103USRDEF M11874-137 v7

Technical manual
Function indication block in monitor direction with user-defined input signals.
Information number is required for each input signal.
Table 472: I103USRDEF Information number default values

INF Description GI TYP COT
11) Input signal 01 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
2* Input signal 02 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)

3* Input signal 03 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
4* Input signal 04 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
5* Input signal 05 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
6* Input signal 06 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
7* Input signal 07 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
8* Input signal 08 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
1) * User defined information number
Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103SUPERV M11874-171 v7

Indication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions.
Information number is defined for output signals.
Table 473: I103SUPERV supported functions

INF Description TYP GI COT
32 Measurand supervision I 1 Y 1,7,9
33 Measurand supervision U 1 Y 1,7,9
37 I>>back-up operation 1 Y 1,7,9
38 VT fuse failure 1 Y 1,7,9
46 Group warning 1 Y 1,7,9
47 Group alarm 1 Y 1,7,9
Earth fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF M11874-199 v8

Indication block for earth fault in monitor direction with defined functions.
Information number is defined for each output signal.
Table 474: I103EF supported indications

INF Description
51 Earth fault forward
52 Earth fault reverse

Technical manual
Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR M11874-363 v6

Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions.
Information number is defined for each output signal.
Table 475: I103AR supported indications

INF Description
16 Autorecloser active
128 CB on by Autorecloser
130 Autorecloser blocked
Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103, I103FLTPROT GUID-E9DF9410-F570-4F85-9063-C76D1D4A0668 v6

Information number is defined for each input signal.
Table 476: I103FLTPROT supported functions

64 Start phase L1 2 Y 1,7,9
67 Start residual current IN 2 Y 1,7,9
68 Trip general 2 N 1,7
69 Trip phase L1 2 N 1,7
72 Back up trip I>> 2 N 1,7
73 Fault location in ohm 4 N 1,7
74 Forward/line 2 N 1,7
75 Reverse/busbar 2 N 1,7
76 Signal transmitted 2 N 1,7
77 Signal received 2 N 1,7
78 Zone 1 2 N 1,7
79 Zone 2 2 N 1,7
80 Zone 3 2 N 1,7
81 Zone 4 2 N 1,7
82 Zone 5 2 N 1,7
83 Zone 6 2 N 1,7
84 Start general 2 Y 1,7,9
85 Breaker failure 2 N 1,7
86 Trip measuring system phase 2 N 1,7
L1

Technical manual

L2
L3
89 Trip measuring system neutral 2 N 1,7
N
90 Over current trip, stage low 2 N 1,7
91 Over current trip, stage high 2 N 1,7
92 Earth-fault trip, stage low 2 N 1,7
93 Earth-fault trip, stage high 2 N 1,7
Measurands M11874-382 v2
Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to monitoring
function, for example to power measurement CVMMXN.
Measurands in public range, I103MEAS M11874-385 v8

The IED reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.
Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value.
Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.
The upper limit is the maximum value that can be encoded into the ASDU (Application Service
Data Unit). Any value higher than this value will be tagged as OVERFLOW. The factors 1.2 and
2.4 are taken from the 103 standard and require that a rated value to use as base exists, and
then use 1.2 or 2.4 times <rated> as maxVal. You can use 2.4 times rated as maxVal, but as
there is no way to propagate value to client, the use of a scale factor on <rated> does not
make much difference.
You can configure client:client-scaled-max ::= 1.2 * <rated> or client-scaled-

max ::= 1.0 * <maxVal>
If the client has a hard-coded gain of 1.2 * <rated> then client-scaled-max ::= 1.2 times
<maxVal>/1.2
Resolution is <maxVal> / 4095 and hence the lowest possible maxVal yields the best accuracy.
Table 477: I103MEAS supported indications

INF Description
148 IL1
144, 145, IL2
146, 148
148 IL3
147 IN, Neutral current
148 UL1
148 UL2
148 UL3
145, 146 UL1-UL2
147 UN, Neutral voltage

Technical manual
INF Description
146, 148 P, active power
146, 148 Q, reactive power
148 f, frequency
Measurands in private range, I103MEASUSR M11874-431 v5

Function type parameter for each block in private range.
Information number must be selected for measurands.
Table 478: I103MEASUSR supported indications

INF FUN GI TYP COT Description
*1) *2) No, polled *3) 2,7 Meas1
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
1) * User defined information value (PARAM.3)

2) * User defined information value (PARAM.2)
3) 9 = Measurands II, Format = Measurand II (7.3.1.8 in IEC 60870-5-103:1997), semantics per IE is defined by
semantics of connected source.
<Number of information elements> is defined by index of first input not connected.
Example: Input1, Input2, and Input4 are connected, Input3 is not connected.
<Number of information elements> will be 3 (Input3 NOT connected) -1 = 2, that is, only Input1
and Input2 will be transmitted.
Disturbance recordings M11874-467 v7

The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units) defined in the
standard.
Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be specified.
Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with:
• IL1 connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block A1RADR

• IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block A1RADR

Technical manual
• UL1E connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block A1RADR

• UEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block A1RADR
Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the private range 64
to 95.
Binary signals, 128-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION TYPE and an
INFORMATION NUMBER.
M11874-629 v7
Disturbance upload
All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder can be reported to
the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available for transfer to the
master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by the master) will not be
reported to the master again.
When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded disturbances will be
sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances can be sent whenever something
has happened to disturbances in this list. For example, when a disturbance is deleted (by other
client, for example, SPA) or when a new disturbance has been recorded or when the master has
uploaded a disturbance.
Deviations from the standard
Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however, some of the
information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorder in the IED series.
This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard.
ASDU23
In ‘list of recorded disturbances’ (ASDU23) an information element named SOF (status of fault)
exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates whether:
• Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault
• Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted
• Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or test mode.
• Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event than start
The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other information is
always set (hard coded) to:
TP Recorded fault with trip. [1]

TM Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0]
OTEV Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]
Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to the standard
this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takes action. FAN is equal to
disturbance number, which is incremented for each disturbance.
ASDU26 / ASDU31
When a disturbance has been selected by the master by sending ASDU24, the protection
equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information element named NOF
(number of grid faults). This number must indicate fault number in the power system,that is, a

Technical manual
fault in the power system with several trip and auto-reclosing has the same NOF (while the
FAN must be incremented). NOF is just as FAN, equal to disturbance number.
Interoperability, physical layer M11874-482 v4
Supported
Electrical Interface
EIA RS-485 Yes
number of loads 32
Optical interface
glass fiber Yes
plastic fiber
Transmission speed
9600 bit/s Yes
19200 bit/s Yes
Link Layer
DFC-bit used Yes
Connectors
connector F-SMA No
connector BFOC/2.5 Yes
Interoperability, application layer M11874-524 v3
Supported
Selection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction
ASDU Yes
1 Time-tagged message Yes
2 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
3 Measurands I Yes
4 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
5 Identification Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
8 End of general interrogation Yes
9 Measurands II Yes
10 Generic data No
11 Generic identification No
23 List of recorded disturbances Yes
26 Ready for transm. of disturbance data Yes
27 Ready for transm. of a channel Yes
28 Ready for transm of tags Yes
29 Transmission of tags Yes
30 Transmission fo disturbance data Yes
31 End of transmission Yes
Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction
ASDU Yes

Technical manual
Supported
6 Time synchronization Yes
7 General interrogation Yes
10 Generic data No
20 General command Yes
21 Generic command Yes
24 Order for disturbance data transmission Yes
25 Acknowledgement for distance data Yes
transmission
Selection of basic application functions
Test mode No
Blocking of monitoring direction Yes
Disturbance data Yes
Private data Yes
Generic services No
14.8.16.2 Communication ports M11874-626 v4
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP and LON
communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and is placed assembled on the
Numerical module (NUM). The serial communication module can have connectors for two
plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic
and glass fiber. Three different types are available depending on type of fiber.
The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber
to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out, pay special attention to
the instructions concerning the handling and connection of the optical fibers. The module is
identified with a number on the label on the module.
M11921-1 v4
Table 479: IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Function Value
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103
Communication speed 9600, 19200 Bd
14.9 MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND SEMOD119881-1 v3
GUID-1A6E066C-6399-4D37-8CA5-3074537E48B2 v3

Multiple command and receive MULTICMDRCV - -
Multiple command and send MULTICMDSND - -

Technical manual
The IED provides two function blocks enabling several IEDs to send and receive signals via the
interbay bus. The sending function block, MULTICMDSND, takes 16 binary inputs. LON enables
these to be transmitted to the equivalent receiving function block, MULTICMDRCV, which has
16 binary outputs.
14.9.2 Design SEMOD119958-1 v1
14.9.2.1 General M14792-3 v3
The common behavior for all 16 outputs of the MULTICMDRCV is set to either of two modes:
Steady or Pulse.
• 1 = Steady: This mode simply forwards the received signals to the binary outputs.
• 2 = Pulse: When a received signal transitions from 0 (zero) to 1 (one), a pulse with a
duration of exactly one execution cycle is triggered on the corresponding binary output.
This means that no connected function block may have a cycle time that is higher than the
execution cycle time of the particular MULTICMDRCV instance.
SEMOD119976-5 v2
MULTICMDRCV
BLOCK ERROR
NEWDATA
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
VALID
Figure 289: MULTICMDRCV function block

Technical manual
SEMOD120009-4 v2
MULTICMDSND
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
Figure 290: MULTICMDSND function block
Table 480: MULTICMDRCV Input signals

Table 481: MULTICMDSND Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1

Technical manual
Table 482: MULTICMDRCV Output signals

ERROR BOOLEAN MultiReceive error
NEWDATA BOOLEAN New data is received
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
VALID BOOLEAN Output data is valid
Table 483: MULTICMDSND Output signals

ERROR BOOLEAN MultiSend error
Table 484: MULTICMDRCV Non group settings (basic)

tMaxCycleTime 0.050 - 200.000 s 0.001 11.000 Maximum cycle time between
receptions of input data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum cycle time between
receptions of input data
Mode Steady - - Steady Mode for output signals
Pulsed
tPulseTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse length for multi command
outputs

Technical manual
Table 485: MULTICMDSND Non group settings (basic)

tMaxCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 5.000 Maximum time interval between
transmission of output data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum time interval between
transmission of output data
There are 10 instances of the MULTICMDSND function block. The first two are fast (8 ms cycle
time) while the others are slow (100 ms cycle time). Each instance has 16 binary inputs, to
which 16 independent signals can be connected. Connected signals are sent through
MULTICMDSND to the receiving equivalent, MULTICMDRCV, located on a different IED.
The MULTICMDRCV function block has 16 binary outputs, all controlled through the command
block of one or many MULTICMDSND function blocks. There are 60 instances of the
MULTICMDRCV where the first 12 are fast (8 ms), and the others are slow (100 ms).
Additionally, the MULTICMDRCV has a supervision function, which sets the output connector
"VALID" to 0 (zero) if its block does not receive any data within the time defined by
tMaxCycleTime.
LON connections are established using LON network tool (LNT).
14.10 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG
14.10.1 Activity logging ACTIVLOG GUID-BED7C3D6-6BE3-4DAC-84B3-92239E819CC0 v1
ACTIVLOG contains all settings for activity logging.
There can be 6 external log servers to send syslog events to. Each server can be configured
with IP address; IP port number and protocol format. The format can be either syslog (RFC
5424) or Common Event Format (CEF) from ArcSight.
14.10.2 Settings
Table 486: ACTIVLOG Non group settings (basic)

ExtLogSrv1Type Off - - Off External log server 1 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv1Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 1 port number
ExtLogSrv1IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 1 IP-address
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP

Technical manual

Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address

Technical manual
550
Security
Section 15 Security
15.1 Authority check ATHCHCK
GUID-FBEF319B-94E6-41FB-BB9F-D870E0425128 v2

Authority check ATHCHCK - -
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are accessing the
IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The authorization handling of the IED
and the PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED:
• local, through the local HMI

• remote, through the communication ports
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited with PCM600 IED user management tool.
Figure 291: PCM600 user management tool

Technical manual
Security
15.1.3 Operation principle GUID-B555EDD0-BAF1-4F0E-9162-BDB3A3468CF2 v9
There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas of the
IED and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in Table 487.
Ensure that the user logged on to the IED has the access required when writing
particular data to the IED from PCM600.
The meaning of the legends used in the table:
• R= Read
• W= Write
• - = No access rights
Table 487: Pre-defined user types

Access rights System Protection Design User
Guest Super User SPA Guest Operator Engineer Engineer Administrato
r
Basic setting possibilities R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R
(change setting group, control
settings, limit supervision)
Advanced setting possibilities R R/W R R R/W R/W R
(for example protection
settings)
Basic control possibilities R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
(process control, no bypass)
Advanced control possibilities R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
(process control including
interlock trigg)
Basic command handling (for R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R
example clear LEDs, manual
trigg)
Advanced command handling R R/W R R R/W R/W R/W
(for example clear disturbance
record)
Basic configuration possibilities R R/W R R R R/W R/W
(I/O-configuration in SMT)
Advanced configuration R R/W R R R R/W R/W
possibilities (application
configuration including SMT,
GDE and CMT)
File loading (database loading - R/W - - - R/W R/W
from XML-file)
File dumping (database - R/W - - - R/W R/W
dumping to XML-file)
File transfer (FTP file transfer) - R/W - R/W R/W R/W R/W
File transfer (limited) (FTP file R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
transfer)
File Transfer (SPA File Transfer) - R/W - - - R/W -

Technical manual
Security
Access rights System Protection Design User

Guest Super User SPA Guest Operator Engineer Engineer Administrato
r
Database access for normal R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
user
User administration (user R R/W R R R R R/W
management – FTP File
Transfer)
User administration (user - R/W - - - - -
management – SPA File
Transfer)
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User Management within
PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local HMI on the IED, there are no users,
groups or functions that can be defined on local HMI.
If the IED is Central Account Management enabled, users can only be created,
deleted or edited in the Central Account Management server. In that case, only
the user rights can be edited using the PCM600 tool. See Cyber Security
Deployment Guidelines manual.
Only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 should be used in user names and

passwords.
The maximum of characters in a password is 18.
At least one user must be included in the UserAdministrator group to be able to

write users, created in PCM600, to IED.
SEMOD176296-5 v10
At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the IED until a
user has been created with the IED User Management..
Once a user is created and downloaded to the IED, that user can perform a Log on, introducing
the password assigned in the tool.
If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will display a message box: “No user defined!”
If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Main menu/
Settings/General Settings/HMI/Screen/Display Timeout) elapses, the IED returns to Guest
state, when only reading is possible. The display time out is set to 10 minutes at delivery.
If there are one or more users created with the IED User Management and downloaded into the
IED, then, when a user intentionally attempts a Log on or when the user attempts to perform
an operation that is password protected, the Log on window will appear.
The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the key, the user can
change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the “up” and “down” arrows. After
choosing the right user name, the user must press the “E” key again. When it comes to
password, upon pressing the key, the following character will show up: “$”. After all the
letters are introduced (passwords are case sensitive) choose OK and press the key again.
If everything is alright at a voluntary Log on, the local HMI returns to the Authorization screen.
If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a password protected setting, the

Technical manual
Security
local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the Log on has failed, then the Log on window
opens again, until either the user makes it right or presses “Cancel”.
15.1.3.1 Authorization with Central Account Management enabled IED GUID-1A836989-5D89-4F3D-B3A2-3BABCDFFB440 v2
The users, their roles and rights are created, deleted and edited only in the Central Account
Management server (SDM600). However, the user rights can be edited in the IED by using the
PCM600 user tool.
One user can have one or several user roles. By default, the users in Table 488 are created in
the IED, and when creating new users in the SDM600 server, the predefined roles from Table
489 can be used.
At delivery, the IED user has full access as SuperUser when using the LHMI and
as Administrator when using FTP or PCM600 until Central Account
Management is activated.
Table 488: Default users

User name User rights
SuperUser Full rights, only presented in LHMI. LHMI is logged on by default until other users are
defined
Guest Only read rights, only presented in LHMI. LHMI is logged on by default when other users are
defined (same as VIEWER)
Administrator Full rights. Password: Administrator. This user has to be used when reading out
disturbances with third party FTP-client.
Table 489: Predefined user roles according to IEC 62351-8

User roles Role explanation User rights
VIEWER Viewer Can read parameters and browse the menus from LHMI
OPERATOR Operator Can read parameters and browse the menus as well as perform
control actions
ENGINEER Engineer Can create and load configurations and change settings for the IED
and also run commands and manage disturbances
INSTALLER Installer Can load configurations and change settings for the IED
SECADM Security Can change role assignments and security settings. Can deploy
administrator certificates.
SECAUD Security auditor Can view audit logs
RBACMNT RBAC Can change role assignment
management
ADMINISTRATOR Administrator Sum of all rights for SECADM, SECAUD and RBACMNT
rights
This User role is vendor specific and not defined in

IEC 62351–8
Changes in user management settings do not cause an IED reboot.

Technical manual
Security
The PCM600 tool caches the login credentials after successful login for 15
minutes. During that time no more login will be necessary.
The successfully activation of Central Account Management will disable built-in users or
remove all local created users from PCM600.
Management of user credentials and roles is handled on the central Account Management
server e.g. SDM600 The IED employs two strategies to ensure availability of the authentication
system even if there is a problem with the network or authentication server:
• A substation can be equipped with two redundant authentication servers operating in a

hot standby mode.
• If configured by the security administrator, the IED itself maintains a local replica in the
database with selected users. This database is periodically updated with data from the
server and used as fallback if none of the servers are reachable.
Note that not all users in the SDM600 server are part of the replica. There might be users that
are not assigned to any replication group. IED only replicates those users which are part of
replication group configured in the IED.
This replication can be disabled using PCM600 by the security administrator, which means
that the IED will forward login requests to the SDM600 for authorization and in case of
problems with the network users will not be able to log in to the IED.
If user replication has been disabled in a CAM-enabled IED and if

communication with SDM600 is lost, access to that IED will be denied until
communication is re-established.
All communication between the central management and the IEDs is protected using secure
communication. Customers using SDM600 are required to generate and distribute certificates
during the engineering process of the substation. These certificates ensure mutual trust
between IED and for example SDM600, FTP, PCM600 and other system.
Table 490: Authority-related IED functions

Function Description
Authority status This function is an indication function block for user logon activity.
ATHSTAT User denied attempt to logon and user successful logon are reported.
Authority check To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are
ATHCHCK accessing the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The
authorization handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access
points to the IED:
• local, through the local HMI

• remote, through the communication ports
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only in the CAM server.
Authority This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the
management maintenance menu logon time out.
AUTHMAN
For more information on the functions Authority Management (AUTHMAN), Authority Status
(ATHSTAT), and Authority Check (ATHCHCK) functions, refer to chapter “Basic IED functions”
in the Technical Manual.

Technical manual
Security
15.2 Authority management AUTHMAN
GUID-7925E6A3-301D-44A5-982F-167805EEA473 v1

Authority management AUTHMAN - -
15.2.2 AUTHMAN GUID-AF7EDB44-42AA-4D49-BFA0-DA6A9B43973E v1
This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the maintenance menu
log on time out.
15.2.3 Settings
Table 491: AUTHMAN Non group settings (basic)

MaintMenuEnable Disable - - Enable Maintenance menu enable
Enable
AuthTimeout 600 - 3600 s 600 600 Authority blocking timeout
15.3 FTP access with password FTPACCS
GUID-C037D0B0-1AA0-4592-9293-92C7EDED3261 v1

FTP access with SSL FTPACCS - -
15.3.2 FTP access with TLS, FTPACCS GUID-9E64EA68-6FA9-4576-B5E9-92E3CC6AA7FD v4
The FTP Client defaults to the best possible security mode when trying to negotiate with TLS.
The automatic negotiation mode acts on configured port number 21 and server features, it
tries to negotiate with explicit TLS via AUTH TLS. If the specified port is any other, it tries to
negotiate in a similar way.
Using FTP without TLS encryption gives the FTP client reduced capabilities. This mode is only
for accessing disturbance recorder data from the IED.
If normal FTP is required to read out disturbance recordings, create a specific

account for this purpose with rights only to do File transfer. The password of
this user will be exposed in clear text on the wire.

Technical manual
Security
The setting of FTP to OFF on an access point does not switch-off FTP as the service is still
used by PCM600 and FST. So to completely switch off the port number 21 access the following
parameters must be set to OFF.
• FTP = OFF
• PCMAccess = OFF
• FSTAccess = OFF
15.3.3 Settings
Table 492: FTPACCS Non group settings (basic)

SSLMode FTP+FTPS - - FTPS Support for AUTH TLS/SSL
FTPS
TCPPortFTP 1 - 65535 - 1 21 TCP port for FTP and FTP with Explicit
SSL
PasvPortStart 0 - 65515 - 1 49200 First TCP data port for PASV
PasvPortEnd 0 - 65535 - 1 49232 Last TCP data port for PASV
15.4 Authority status ATHSTAT
GUID-79C63688-4D7D-4954-AC3C-B9484D084F6F v1

Authority status ATHSTAT - -
Authority status ATHSTAT function is an indication function block for user log-on activity.
User denied attempt to log-on and user successful log-on are reported.
ATHSTAT
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON
Figure 292: ATHSTAT function block

Technical manual
Security
15.4.4 Signals
Table 493: ATHSTAT Output signals

USRBLKED BOOLEAN At least one user is blocked by invalid password
LOGGEDON BOOLEAN At least one user is logged on
GUID-87CF079A-64C8-46AE-B7E4-A0B2EEAC92E9 v1
The output signal USRBLKED is not valid if the IED is Centralized Account
Management enabled.
15.4.5 Settings GUID-ECE18AA9-15CC-4522-AA31-78C4F0F052E4 v4
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or in Protection and Control
IED Manager (PCM600)
Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED and the user
authorization:
• the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was blocked
(the output USRBLKED)
• the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)
Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or LOGGEDON)
is activated. The output can for example, be connected on Event (EVENT) function block for
LON/SPA.The signals are also available on IEC 61850 station bus.
15.5 Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG IP1721-1 v2
Self supervision with internal event list function listens and reacts to internal system events,
generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal events are saved in
an internal event list presented on the LHMI and in PCM600 event viewer tool.

Technical manual
Security
INTERRSIG
FAIL
WARNING
TSYN CERR
RTCERR
STUPBLK
Figure 293: INTERRSIG function block
15.5.3 Signals IP9674-1 v2
Table 494: INTERRSIG Output signals

FAIL BOOLEAN Internal fail
WARNING BOOLEAN Internal warning
TSYNCERR BOOLEAN Time synchronization error
RTCERR BOOLEAN Real time clock error
STUPBLK BOOLEAN Application startup block
M11401-3 v13
The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:
• Normal micro-processor watchdog function.

• Checking of digitized measuring signals.
• Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.
The self-supervision function status can be monitored from the local HMI or from the Event
Viewer in PCM600.
Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI, the actual information from the self-supervision
function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main menu/Diagnostics/
Internal events or Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/General. The information from the
self-supervision function is also available in the Event Viewer in PCM600.

Technical manual
Security
Figure 294: IED general status in local HM

The self supervision records internal signal changes in an internal event list. A maximum of 40
internal events are stored in a first-in, first-out manner.
GUID-B481701F-05B4-4B29-83D4-18F13886FEBE V1 EN-US
Figure 295: Self-supervision event list in local HMI

A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of an output relay with potential free
alarm contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. This contact is closed
when the IED either does not have auxiliary power, or when one or more error conditions are
present in the IED (for example harware error).
Some output signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from this
function block are sent as events via IEC 61850 to the station level of the control system. These
signals can also be connected to binary outputs for signalization via output relays or they can
be used as conditions for other functions if required/desired.
Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in the
Signal Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from the
INTERRSIG function block via two outputs TSYNCERR and RTCERR .
15.5.5.1 Internal signals M11401-173 v11
Self supervision provides several status signals that give information about the internal status
of the IED. For this reason they are also called internal signals. These internal signals , available
on local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/General, can be divided into two
groups.

Technical manual
Security
• Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see table 495.
• Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware
configuration, see table 496.
Table 495: Self-supervision's standard internal signals

Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation
local HMI as
FAIL Internal Fail Internal fail This signal will be active if one or more of the
status following internal signals are active; LMDERROR,
WATCHDOG, APPERROR, RTEERROR, or any of the HW
dependent signals
WARNING Internal Internal This signal will be active if one or more of the
Warning warning following internal signals are active; RTCERROR,
status IEC61850ERROR
RTCERROR Real Time Real time This signal will be active when there is a hardware
Clock clock error with the real time clock.
status
TIMESYNCHERROR Time Time synch This signal will be active when the source of the time
Synchroniza synchronization is lost, or when the time system has
tion status to make a time reset.
RTEERROR Runtime Runtime This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to
Execution execution do some actions with the application threads. The
Error status actions can be loading of settings or parameters for
components, changing of setting groups, loading or
unloading of application threads.
IEC61850ERROR IEC 61850 IEC61850 This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack did not
Error status succeed in some actions like reading IEC 61850
configuration, startup, for example
DNP3 DNP3 error DNP3 This signal will be active when DNP3 detects any
status configuration error during startup.
LMDERROR LON/Mip SLM301 LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an
Device Error unrecoverable error state.
status
APPERROR Runtime Runtime App This signal will be active if one or more of the
Application Error application threads are not in the state that Runtime
Error status Engine expects. The states can be CREATED,
INITIALIZED, RUNNING, for example
SETCHGD Settings Settings This signal will generate an Internal Event to the
changed changed Internal Event list if any settings are changed.
SETGRPCHGD Setting Settings This signal will generate an Internal Event to the
groups changed Internal Event list if any setting groups are changed.
changed
Table 496: Self-supervision's hardware dependent internal signals

Card Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation
local HMI as
PSM PSM-Error Power PSM1 Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Supply
Module
Error status
BIM BIM-Error Binary In BIMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Module n = slot number
Error status
BOM BOM-Error Binary Out BOMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Error status

Technical manual
Security
Card Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation

local HMI as
IOM IOM-Error In/Out IOMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Error status
NUM NUM-Error Numerical/ NUM30 Activated if the module has a hardware or
CPU Module software error.
Error status
ADM ADM-Error A/D Module ADM32 Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Error status
LDCM LDCM-Error Line LDCM3nn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Differential n = slot number
Communica
tion Module
Error status
TRM TRM-Error Transformer TRM40
Module
Error status
TRM TRM-Error Transformer TRM41
Module
Error status
When settings are changed in the IED, the protection and control applications restart in order
to take effect of the changes. During restart, internal events get generated and Runtime App
error will be displayed. These events are only indications and will be for short duration during
the restart.
IED will not be operational during applications restart.
15.5.5.2 Supervision of analog inputs M11401-136 v7
The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different converters,
one with low amplification and one with high amplification.
When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of the two
A/D converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be informed and
an alarm will be given for A/D converter failure.
M11963-1 v5
Table 497: Self supervision with internal event list

Data Value
Recording manner Continuous, event controlled
List size 40 events, first in-first out
15.6 ChangeLock function CHNGLCK GUID-E8A1C33A-DD65-42B5-BA13-CFAE40C2C9AD v2

Technical manual
Security
15.6.1 Functionality GUID-00784FC0-B39D-462D-854B-AAF62626DD0A v3
Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED configuration and
settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to block inadvertent IED
configuration changes beyond a certain point in time.
The change lock function activation is normally connected to a binary input.
15.6.2 Function block GUID-15AA1D42-912E-4085-8166-33FDC327CEB5 v2
CHNGLCK
LOCK* ACTIVE
OVERRIDE
IEC09000946.vsd
Figure 296: CHNGLCK function block
15.6.3 Signals GUID-1B253577-C81B-40E3-B406-1F6586DCE545 v2
Table 498: CHNGLCK Input signals

LOCK BOOLEAN 0 Activate change lock
Table 499: CHNGLCK Output signals

ACTIVE BOOLEAN Change lock active
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN Change lock override
15.6.4 Operation principle GUID-74581AA2-6EB4-4CFA-92DA-90FB89F9A62C v4
The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.
The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED state that does
not involve reconfiguring of the IED:
• Monitoring
• Reading events
• Resetting events
• Reading disturbance data
• Clear disturbances
• Reset LEDs
• Reset counters and other runtime component states
• Control operations
• Set system time
• Enter and exit from test mode
• Change of active setting group

Technical manual
Security
The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:
Binary input Function

1 Activated
0 Deactivated
15.7 Denial of service DOS
15.7.1 Functionality GUID-407250CA-0076-41E1-AD2D-434077AC3F1D v5
The Denial of service functionality limits overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet
network traffic. The communication facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary
functionality of the device. All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so that too
heavy network loads can be controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be the result of
malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.
15.7.2 Operation principle GUID-94340D4F-4D32-409B-BA1A-BA49A0C3F297 v6
The denial of service protection is designed to protect the IED from overload when exposed to
high amount of Ethernet network traffic. The communication facilities must not be allowed to
compromise the primary functionality of the device. All inbound network traffic is quota
controlled, so that a too heavy network load can be controlled. Heavy network load might for
instance be the result of malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.
The denial of service functionality in SCHLCCH and RCHLCCH measures the IED load from
communication and, if necessary, limits it from jeopardizing the IED's control and protection
functionality. The function has the following outputs:
• RCHLCCH
• LinkAUp and LinkBUp indicates the Ethernet link status for the rear ports channel A
and B
• DOSLINKA and DOSLINKB indicates that DOS functionality is active on channel A and
channel B
• DOSALARM indicates that DOS functionality is active on the access point
• SCHLCCH
• LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status
• DOSALARM indicates that DOS functionality is active on the access point
The DOS functionality activates when the inbound traffic rate exceeds 3000
packets per second.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Section 16 Basic IED functions

16.1 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN IP1750-1 v2
The time synchronization function is used to select a common source of absolute time for the
synchronization of the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes it possible to
compare events and disturbance data between all IEDs within a station automation system
and in between sub-stations. A common source shall be used for IED and merging unit when
IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE process bus communication is used.
Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time synchronization source.
SEMOD55141-5 v7
There are two groups of parameter settings related to time:
• System time
• Synchronization
The System time group relates to setting the on/off and start/end of the Daylight Saving Time
(DST) for the local time zone in relation to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The
Synchronization group relates to selecting the coarse and fine synchronization sources.
All the settings and parameters related to time are available via Local HMI under Main menu/
Configuration/Time/System time and via PCM600 under IED Configuration/Time.
Table 500: TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)

FineSyncSource Off - - Off Fine time synchronization source
GPS
IRIG-B
GPS+IRIG-B
SyncMaster Off - - Off Activate IEDas synchronization master
SNTP-Server
AppSynch NoSynch - - NoSynch Time synchronization mode for
Synch application
SyncAccLevel Class T5 (1us) - - Unspecified Wanted time synchronization accuracy
Class T4 (4us)
Unspecified

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 501: TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)

CoarseSyncSrc Off - - Off Coarse time synchronization source
SPA
LON
DNP
IEC103
FineSyncSource Off - - Off Fine time synchronization source
SPA
LON
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
IRIG-B
GPS+IRIG-B
PPS
SyncMaster Off - - Off Activate IEDas synchronization master
SNTP-Server
TimeAdjustRate Slow - - Fast Adjust rate for time synchronization
Fast
HWSyncSrc Off - - Off Hardware time synchronization
GPS source
IRIG-B
PPS
SyncLostMode NoBlock - - NoBlock Behavior of dependent protection
Block functions when time synchronization
BlockOnLostUTC quality is inadequate
SyncAccLevel Class T5 (1us) - - Unspecified Wanted time synchronization accuracy
Class T4 (4us)
Unspecified
CurrentSyncSource 0 - 16 - 1 - Current synchronization source
PTPGMId 0 - 16 - 1 - PTP Grand Master Id
PTPGMClass 0 - 16 - 1 - PTP Grand Master Class
PTPGMPriority1 0 - 16 - 1 - PTP Grand Master Prio 1
PTPGMPriority2 0 - 16 - 1 - PTP Grand Master Prio 2
PTPGMAccuracy 0 - 16 - 1 - PTP Grand Master Accuracy
PTPParentId 0 - 16 - 1 - PTP Id of closest parent
PTPSteps 0 - 16 - 1 - PTP number of stepsto Grand master
SNTPSource 0 - 16 - 1 - The source of the SNTP time
SNTPMaster 0 - 16 - 1 - The IP-adress of the SNTP master
GPSNumberOfSats -1 - 12 - 1 0 GPS satellites used in calculation of
time
PTPOwnId 0 - 16 - 1 - PTP own clock identity
GUID-CD154442-0F80-4B69-8C43-22445FD7F865 v1
GPS settings are not supported by 650 due to hardware restrictions.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 502: BININPUT Non group settings (basic)

ModulePosition 3 - 16 - 1 3 Hardware position of IO module for
time synchronization
BinaryInput 1 - 16 - 1 1 Binary input number for time
synchronization
BinDetection PositiveEdge - - PositiveEdge Positive or negative edge detection
NegativeEdge
Table 503: SNTP Non group settings (basic)

ServerIP-Add 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Server IP-address
Address
RedServIP-Add 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Redundant server IP-address
Address
LocalPort 0 - 65535 - 1 49152 Port number in the IED to
communicate with the SNTP server
Table 504: DSTENABLE Non group settings (basic)

DST Enable Off - - On Enables or disables the use of
On Daylight Saving Time

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 505: DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)

MonthInYear January - - March Month in year when daylight time
February starts
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time starts
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time
First starts
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay -24:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when
-23:30 daylight time starts
...
-00:30
00:00
00:30
...
48:00

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 506: DSTEND Non group settings (basic)

MonthInYear January - - October Month in year when daylight time
February ends
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time ends
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time
First ends
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay -24:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when
-23:30 daylight time ends
...
-00:30
00:00
00:30
...
48:00

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 507: TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)

TimeZone -12:00 - - 1:00 Local time from UTC
-11:00
-10:00
-9:30
-9:00
-8:00
-7:00
-6:00
-5:00
-4:30
-4:00
-3:30
-3:00
-2:00
-1:00
0:00
1:00
2:00
3:00
3:30
4:00
4:30
5:00
5:30
5:45
6:00
6:30
7:00
8:00
8:45
9:00
9:30
10:00
10:30
11:00
11:30
12:00
12:45
13:00
14:00
Table 508: PTP Non group settings (advanced)

Domain 0 - 127 - 1 0 0 = Default domain, 1-3 = Alternative
domain, 4-127 = User defined
Priority1 0 - 255 - 1 128 The clock with the lowest priority 1
becomes the reference clock (Grand
Master)
Priority2 0 - 255 - 1 128 If all the relevant values for selecting
the reference clock are the same for
multiple devices, the clock with the
lowest priority 2 is selected as the
reference clock (Grand Master)

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
16.1.3 Description of SyncLostMode GUID-9BD77B8E-37F2-480F-89D6-9CE251403761 v1
If the time synchronization between the different sources of sampled values are lost, then the
protection function blocking behavior is different based on the parameter SyncLostMode.
The parameter can have three different values:
• NoBlock
• Block
• BlockOnLostUTC
NoBlock
The protection functions are not blocked due to the lost time synchronization. This is mainly
used when all sample values are produced in one source.
Block
The block can be used if there are several data sources that can be synchronized to each other.
However, the relation to UTC time is not required.
As soon as the protection detects a change or uncertainty in time from a data source, the
protections are blocked. This is detected by the jump in sample count or when the data
remains unsynchronized.
When a block occurs, the block stays for an extra blocking time after all the sources are
synchronized again, to secure that the time has propagated to the other sources.
Data stream 1
Time shift
Extra blocking time
on-going
Data stream 2
Time shift
Extra blocking time
on-going
Data stream 3
Time shift
Extra blocking time
on-going
Total protection blocking time
Figure 297: Principle blocking when SyncLostMode is set to block

For more information, refer to section Time synchronization
BlockOnLostUTC
When BlockOnLostUTC is selected, all the data must be synchronized to UTC, to avoid blocking
of the protection functions.
This cannot be used by the process bus sampled values, since IEC 61859-9-2 LE only contains
the information regarding the synchronized or unsynchronized data.
For example, the BlockOnLostUTC can be used for a phasor measurement unit where the data
is compared between different stations.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
16.1.4.1 General concepts M11346-77 v1
Time definitions M11346-80 v3

The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time the
clock is intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error, that is, the time
gained or lost by the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own faults and tries to compensate
for them.
Design of the time system (clock synchronization) GUID-E2B9E81C-5733-4521-B27F-BF33E05CCFB0 v10
PTP(IEEE 1588)
External
synchronization Off
sources On
Time tagging and general synchronization
Slave only
Off
Commu- Protection
LON Events
Time nication and control
SPA regulator functions
Min. pulse
(Setting:
SNTP SW time
see
DNP Technical
manual)
IRIG-B
PPS
Synchronization for differential protection

(Echo mode)
Off Time
IRIG-B regulator HW time
(fast or slow)
PPS
A/D Diff. Merging

converter commu- units*
nication
*IEC 61850-9-2
Figure 298: Design of the time system (clock synchronization)

All time tagging is performed by the software clock. When, for example, a status signal is
changed in the protection system of a function based on the free running hardware clock, the
event is time tagged by the software clock when it reaches the event recorder. The hardware
clock can thus run independently.
The echo mode of the line differential protection function is based on the hardware clock.
Thus, there is no need to synchronize the hardware clock and the software clock.
Synchronization of the hardware clock to the software clock is necessary only when IRIG B 00X
with optical fiber, IEEE 1344 is used for differential protection. The two clock systems are
synchronized by a special clock synchronization unit with two modes, fast and slow. A special
feature, an automatic fast clock time regulator is used. The automatic fast mode makes the
synchronization time as short as possible during start-up. The Fast and Slow settings are also
available on the local HMI.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
SyncLostMode is not required to set as Block/BlockonLostUTC when differential protection is

based on ECHO mode.
Fast clock synchronization mode

At start-up and after interruptions in the IRIG B time signals, the deviation between the
external time system and the internal differential time system can be substantial. A new start-
up is also required, for example, after maintenance of the auxiliary voltage system.
When the time difference is > 16 μs, the line differential protection function is blocked and the
time regulator for the hardware clock automatically uses a fast mode to synchronize the clock
systems. Time adjustment is made with an exponential function, that is, with big time
adjustment steps in the beginning, and then smaller steps until a time deviation of < 16 μs
between the external time system and the internal differential time system has been reached.
The protection function is then enabled and the synchronization remains in fast mode or
switches to slow mode depending on the setting.
Synchronization principle M11346-83 v4

From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure. A
function is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower levels.
Synchronization from
a higher level
Function
Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level
Figure 299: Synchronization principle

A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization messages
from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the synchronization decreases as
well. A function can have several potential sources of synchronization, with different maximum
errors. This gives the function the possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to
adjust its internal clock based on this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as:
• The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

• The time since the last used synchronization message
• The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function.
16.1.4.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operation M11346-57 v4
The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one millisecond. The clock has a
built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2100.
Real-time clock at power off M11346-60 v3

During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed real-time clock that
will provide 5 ppm accuracy for at least two days. This means that if the power is off, the time

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
in the IED may drift with maximum 0.5 second per day for two days, and after this the time will
be lost.
Real-time clock at startup M11346-63 v4
Time synchronization startup procedure M11346-66 v9

The first message that contains the full time (as for instance LON and SNTP) gives an accurate
time to the IED. After the initial setting of the clock, one of the three following conditions
happens with each of the coming synchronization messages configured as FineSynchSource:
• If the synchronization message, which is similar to the other messages, has an offset
compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used directly for synchronization,
which means, for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero offset at the next coming time
message.
• If the synchronization message has a large offset compared to the other messages, a
spike-filter in the IED removes this time-message.
Rate accuracy M11346-93 v7

The rate accuracy is the accuracy of the internal clock while the external time signal is lost. In
the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 2 ppm but if the IED is synchronized for a while, the
rate accuracy is approximately 0.2 ppm if the surrounding temperature is constant.
Time-out on synchronization sources M11346-96 v3

All synchronization interfaces have a time-out, and a configured interface must receive time
synchronization messages regularly in order not to give an error signal (TSYNCERR) that is
reported from the INTERRSIG function block. The time-out is such that one message can be
lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.
16.1.4.3 Synchronization alternatives M11346-3 v7
Three main alternatives of external synchronization sources are available. The synchronization
message is applied:
• via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message including date and
time
• as a minute pulse connected to a binary input
• via IRIG-B or PPS
16.1.4.4 Process bus IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE synchronization GUID-6E384BDB-5598-4108-99B4-0B4A4E1828B2 v5
When process bus communication (IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE protocol) is used, it is essential that
the merging units are synchronized with the hardware time of the IED (see Technical manual,
section Design of the time system (clock synchronization) ). To achieve this, PTP, PPS or IRIG-B
can be used depending of the facilities of the merging unit.
If the merging unit supports PTP, use PTP. If PTP is used in the IED and the merging unit
cannot be synchronized from the IED, then use GPS-based clocks to provide PTP synch as well
as sync to the merging unit.
If synchronization of the IED and the merging unit is based on GPS, set the parameter
SyncLostMode to BlockOnLostUTC in order to provide a block of protection functions
whenever the global common time is lost.
If PTP is not used, use the same synchronization method for the HwSyncSrc as the merging
unit provides. For instance, if the merging unit provides PPS as synchronization, use PPS as
HwSyncSrc. If LDCM in GPS-mode is used, that is, the hardware and software clocks are
connected to each other, HwSyncSrc is not used and other means to synchronize the merging

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
unit to the IED is required. For instance, FineSyncSource is set to the same source that the
merging unit uses.
If the IED is used together with a merging unit and no time synchronization is
available, for example, in the laboratory test, the IED will synchronize to the SV
data stream. During the re-synchronization, the protection functions will be
blocked once a second for about 45 ms, and this will continue for up to 10
minutes. To avoid this, configure PTP (IEEE 1588) to On for the access point
where the merging unit is configured.
16.1.4.5 Precision Time Protocol (PTP) GUID-4F2B68B8-CCC8-4173-A644-D1674D3146F8 v3
PTP according to IEEE 1588-2008 and specifically its profile IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3 for power
utility automation is a synchronization method that differs from SNTP, for instance, by
providing much better accuracy and by being not predefined. By not predefined is meant that
it is not mandatory to have a predefined synchronization tree, as the master (Grand Master)
may shift.
Consider instead PTP as a synchronization grouping, i.e. all devices connected to the PTP
group will be synchronized to the same source or, if there is no external source the group will
at least maintain a common time. The group is synchronized by connecting one or more
“Grand Master” clocks to it. The clocks can be part of the devices in the group or be specialized
synchronization devices, as for instance a GPS clock or similar. If several synchronization
devices are connected to the group, the “Best Master Algorithm” in the PTP protocol will
assure that only one is the “Grand Master”. The IED can act as a synchronization device and
supply any synchronization source (like SNTP, SPA) as clock input, that will synchronize the
whole PTP group if there is no better source available in the group. The IED can be connected
to several groups and thereby connect them to each other, by acting as a “Boundary Clock”. If
PTP is “On” on several Access Points, the IED connects the Access Points via a boundary clock.
If PTP is “On” on redundant Access Points, the IED acts as a “Transparent Clock”.
In a network there may be variety of possible masters that are connected together where the
masters by selection, using the priority of PTP (also called the Best Master Algorithm, or BMC)
to determine which of them that is the best master.
Priority order according to PTP
1. Priority 1
setting for each device, default 128, set to a lower number if this device shall be the Grand
Master.
2. GM class
given from the type of device, for instance “6” for a GPS clock, “7” for a GPS clock that has
lost synch during a hold-over time, “187” for a clock that can also be a slave.
3. GM Accuracy
how accurate the time is as a enumerated value
4. Offset Scaled Variance
calculated value that shows the oscillator quality
5. Priority 2
setting for each device, default 128, set to a lower number if this device is preferred to be
the Grand Master, if Priority 1, GM class, GM accuracy and OffsetScaledVariance are the
same for all devices.
6. Identity, that is the MAC-adress of the port.
MAC address of the access points can be seen in LHMI under the settings
of each access point.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
To setup a PTP network with no obvious Grand Master, you simply connect the IEDs to one
network and configure PTP to be “on” on all IEDs. On one IED, the one from which you want to
set the time in the station, you set the Priority2 to 127, instead of default 128. Now, this IED has
higher priority than the rest of the IEDs and will thereby act as “Grand Master”.
PTP is not set from TIMESYNCGEN:1General, as SNTP is. Instead PTP is set via a parameter of
each Access Point. For more information, refer to section Time synchronization.
M12331-1 v9
Table 509: Time synchronization, time tagging

Function Value
Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values 1 ms
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse ± 1.0 ms typically
synchronization), events and sampled measurement values
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled measurement values ± 1.0 ms typically
GUID-8AEB81D0-1731-46DF-A206-D2E758823575 v2
Table 510: Time synchronization PTP: IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3
Supported types of clock Boundary Clock (BC), Ordinary Clock (OC), Transparent
Clock (TC)
Accuracy According to standard IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3
Number of nodes According to standard IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3
Ports supported All rear Ethernet ports
16.2 Parameter setting groups IP1745-1 v1
Use the six different groups of settings to optimize the IED operation for different power
system conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets, either from the
local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can be applied to
a variety of power system scenarios.
16.2.2 Function block IP9661-1 v1
M12010-3 v3
ACTVGRP
ACTGRP1 GRP1
ACTGRP2 GRP2
ACTGRP3 GRP3
ACTGRP4 GRP4
ACTGRP5 GRP5
ACTGRP6 GRP6
SETCHGD
REMSETEN
Figure 300: ActiveGroup function block

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
16.2.3 Signals IP14073-1 v2
Table 511: ACTVGRP Input signals

ACTGRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 1 as active
Table 512: ACTVGRP Output signals

GRP1 BOOLEAN Setting group 1 is active
SETCHGD BOOLEAN Pulse when setting changed
REMSETEN BOOLEAN Settings over IEC 61850 enabled
16.2.4 Settings IP11026-1 v2
Table 513: SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)

ActiveSetGrp SettingGroup1 - - SettingGroup1 Active setting group
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
SettingGroup5
SettingGroup6
MaxNoSetGrp 1-6 - 1 1 Max number of setting groups 1-6
M12008-8 v11
Parameter setting groups ActiveGroup function has six functional inputs, each corresponding
to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these inputs changes the
active setting group. Eight functional output signals are available for configuration purposes,
so that information on the active setting group is always available.
A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal computer,
remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by activating the
corresponding input to the ActiveGroup function block.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary inputs in the
IED. To do this PCM600 must be used.
The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when adaptive
functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups must be either
permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.
More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order setting
group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group two are set to be
activated, group two will be the one activated.
Every time a setting is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a pulse. Activating or
deactivating test mode is made by changing a parameter, consequently this will also cause a
pulse on the SETCHGD output.
The parameter MaxNoSetGrp defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to switch
between.
The output REMSETEN indicates whether setting changes over IEC 61850 are enabled or not.
Per default, this is not enabled, which results in REMSETEN being at a logical low level. If setting
changes via IEC 61850 are enabled, then REMSETEN will be a logical high. The setting changes
over IEC 61850 is enabled with the setting EnableSettings in the IEC 61850-8-1 configuration
under Main menu/Configuration/Communication/Station communication/IEC
61850-8-1/IEC 61850-8-1. Please refer to documentation for IEC 61850 for further details.
Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of setting groups
selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will be shown on the
Parameter Setting Tool.
ACTIVATE GROUP 6
ACTIVATE GROUP 5
ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
+RL2 ACTIVATE GROUP 1
ACTVGRP
IOx-Bly1
Æ ACTGRP1 GRP1
IOx-Bly2
Æ ACTGRP2 GRP2
IOx-Bly3 ACTGRP3 GRP3

Æ
IOx-Bly4
Æ ACTGRP4 GRP4
IOx-Bly5
Æ ACTGRP5 GRP5
IOx-Bly6
Æ ACTGRP6 GRP6
SETCHGD
REMSETEN
Figure 301: Connection of the function to external circuits

The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which group that is
active.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
16.3 Test mode functionality TESTMODE IP1647-1 v3
When entering IED test mode there is an option to block all functions. Active test mode is
indicated by a flashing yellow Start LED on the LHMI. After that, it is possible to block/unblock
arbitrarily selected functions from the LHMI to perform required tests.
When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed (except for functions that have their block
input active), and the IED resumes normal operation. However, if during TESTMODE operation,
power is removed and later restored, the IED will remain in TESTMODE with the same
protection functions blocked or unblocked as before the power was removed. All testing will
be done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed,
thus mistakes are avoided.
Forcing of binary input and output signals is only possible when the IED is in IED test mode.
TESTMODE
IED_TEST TEST
IED_TEST
BLOCK
NOEVENT
INPUT
SETTING
IEC61850
Figure 302: TESTMODE function block
16.3.3 Signals IP9680-1 v2
Table 514: TESTMODE Input signals

IED_TEST BOOLEAN 0 Activate IED test mode
Table 515: TESTMODE Output signals

TEST BOOLEAN In test via IED TEST or via LD0 Mode
IED_TEST BOOLEAN IED test mode is active
BLOCK BOOLEAN Active when LD0 is blocked or test blocked
NOEVENT BOOLEAN Event disabled during test mode
INPUT BOOLEAN IED TEST input is active
SETTING BOOLEAN IED test mode setting is On
IEC61850 BOOLEAN Active when LD0 Mode is in Blocked, Test or Test blocked

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
16.3.4 Settings IP11343-1 v2
Table 516: TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)

IEDTestMode Off - - Off Activate IED Test mode
On
EventDisable Off - - Off Event disable during test mode
On
BlockAllFunc Off - - On Block all functions when entering IED
On test mode
CmdTestEd1 Off - - Off Require test bit in command at test
On mode (only for IEC61850 Ed1)
M12015-4 v11
Set the IED in test mode by
• configuration, activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE.

• setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under Main menu/TEST/IED test mode.
While the IED is in test mode, the output ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE is activated.
The outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows the cause of the “Test mode: being in On”
state. If the input from the configuration (OUTPUT signal is activated) or setting from local
HMI (SETTING signal is activated).
While the IED is in test mode, the yellow Start LED will flash and all functions can be blocked
depending on the configuration of the testmode component. Any function can be unblocked
individually regarding functionality and event signalling.
M11828-3 v9
The deblocking operation will reset when exiting the test mode.
The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no outputs
will be activated.
If the IED is restarted while set to IED TESTMODE by a binary input all functions
will be temporarily unblocked during startup, which might cause unwanted
operations.
The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions when a test
handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30) can
supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the TESTMODE function block.
Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block.
The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to prevent
filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example during a commissioning or
maintenance test.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
16.4 IED identifiers TERMINALID IP15060-1 v2
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED in the
system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.
Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.
16.4.2 Settings GUID-3C49A222-FFE4-492B-A96C-9E9965FA2CB4 v2
Table 517: TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)

StationName 0 - 18 - 1 Station name Station name
StationNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Station number
ObjectName 0 - 18 - 1 Object name Object name
ObjectNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Object number
UnitName 0 - 18 - 1 Unit name Unit name
UnitNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Unit number
IEDMainFunType 0 - 255 - 1 0 IED main function type for
IEC60870-5-103
TechnicalKey 0 - 16 - 1 AA0B0Q0A0 Technical key (part 1)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 2)
16.5 Product information PRODINF GUID-F67243CA-2429-4118-BBFF-3D62BF55E080 v2
16.5.1 Functionality GUID-D78786E6-C34A-4E63-9D1E-0582C8F1F7E1 v9
Product information contains unchangeable data that uniquely identifies the IED.
Product information data is visible on the local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
status/Product identifiers and under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED Status/Identifiers:
Product information data is visible on the local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
status/Product identifiers and under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED Status/Identifiers.
• ProductVer
• ProductDef
• FirmwareVer
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate
• IEDProdType

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Figure 303: IED summary

This information is very helpful when interacting with ABB product support (for example
during repair and maintenance).
16.5.2 Settings GUID-168CD792-8811-43B5-8760-74ED82DE17F7 v5
16.5.3 Factory defined settings M11789-39 v11
The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very helpful in
the case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between different Substation Automation
Systems and upgrading. The factory made settings can not be changed by the customer. They
can only be viewed. The settings are found in the local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
status/Product identifiers
The following identifiers are available:
• IEDProdType
• Describes the type of the IED. Example: REL650
• ProductDef
• Describes the release number from the production. Example: 2.1.0
• FirmwareVer
• Describes the firmware version.
• The firmware version can be checked from Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
Product identifiers
• Firmware version numbers run independently from the release production numbers.
For every release number there can be one or more firmware versions depending on
the small issues corrected in between releases.
• ProductVer
• Describes the product version. Example: 2.1.0
1 is the Major version of the manufactured product this means, new platform of the product
2 is the Minor version of the manufactured product this means, new functions or new hardware
added to the product
3 is the Major revision of the manufactured product this means, functions or hardware is either
changed or enhanced in the product
• IEDMainFunType
• Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128 (meaning line
protection).
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate
16.6 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI SEMOD55793-1 v2

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see the
application manual to get information about how binary inputs are brought in for one IED
configuration.
SMBI
^VIN1 ^BI1
^VIN2 ^BI2
^VIN3 ^BI3
^VIN4 ^BI4
^VIN5 ^BI5
^VIN6 ^BI6
^VIN7 ^BI7
^VIN8 ^BI8
^VIN9 ^BI9
^VIN10 ^BI10
Figure 304: SMBI function block
Table 518: SMBI Input signals

BI1 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
Table 519: SMBI Output signals

BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1

Technical manual
Basic IED functions

The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function , see figure 304, receives its inputs from the
real (hardware) binary inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT) or ACT, and makes them
available to the rest of the configuration via its outputs, BI1 to BI10. The inputs and outputs, as
well as the whole block, can be given a user defined name. These names will be represented in
SMT as information which signals shall be connected between physical IO and SMBI function.
The input/output user defined name will also appear on the respective output/input signal.
16.7 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO SEMOD55215-1 v2
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see the
application manual to get information about how binary inputs are sent from one IED
configuration.
SMBO
BO1 ^BO1
BO2 ^BO2
BO3 ^BO3
BO4 ^BO4
BO5 ^BO5
BO6 ^BO6
BO7 ^BO7
BO8 ^BO8
BO9 ^BO9
BO10 ^BO10
Figure 305: SMBO function block
Table 520: SMBO Input signals

BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool

Technical manual
Basic IED functions

The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function , see figure 305, receives logical signal
from the IED configuration, which is transferring to the real (hardware) outputs, via the Signal
Matrix Tool (SMT) or ACT. The inputs in SMBO are BO1 to BO10 and they, as well as the whole
function block, can be tag-named. The name tags will appear in SMT as information which
signals shall be connected between physical IO and the SMBO.
16.8 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI SEMOD55751-1 v2
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function block,
analyses the connected four analog signals (three phases and neutral) and calculates all
relevant information from them like the phasor magnitude, phase angle, frequency, true RMS
value, harmonics, sequence components and so on. This information is then used by the
respective functions connected to this SMAI block in ACT (for example protection,
measurement or monitoring functions).
SEMOD54868-4 v12
SMAI1
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC G1AI3P
REVROT G1AI1
^GRP1L1 G1AI2
^GRP1L2 G1AI3
^GRP1L3 G1AI4
^GRP1N G1N
Figure 306: SMAI1 function block

Figure 306 is an example of SMAI1:n in each of the four task time groups 1, 2, 3 or 4 where:
• n=1 in task group 1

The number of available task time groups depend on product and configuration. Up to four
task time groups are available in a product. The task time defines the execution repetition rate
for the task time groups. The task times valid for a product are found in PCM600, Application
configuration tool.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
SEMOD54997-4 v11
SMAI2
BLOCK G2AI3P
REVROT G2AI1
^GRP2L1 G2AI2
^GRP2L2 G2AI3
^GRP2L3 G2AI4
^GRP2N G2N
Figure 307: SMAI2 function block

Figure 307 is an example of SMAI2:n to SMAI12:m in each of the four task time groups 1, 2, 3 or
4 where:
• n=2 and m=12 in task group 1

The number of available task time groups depend on product and configuration. Up to four
task time groups are available in a product. The task time defines the execution repetition rate
for the task time groups. The task times valid for a product are found in PCM600, Application
configuration tool.
Table 521: SMAI1 Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 1
DFTSPFC REAL 20.0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT
calculation
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 1
GRP1L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2 quantity
GRP1L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3 quantity
GRP1L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1 quantity
GRP1N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity
Table 522: SMAI1 Output signals

SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFT
reference function
G1AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 3-phase group
G1AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 1
G1N GROUP SIGNAL Group parameter for residual sample

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 523: SMAI2 Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 2
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 2
GRP2L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2 quantity
GRP2L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3 quantity
GRP2L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1 quantity
GRP2N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity
Table 524: SMAI2 Output signals

G2AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3-phase group
G2N GROUP SIGNAL Group parameter for residual sample
SEMOD130357-4 v3
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value

InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Internal nominal frequency DFT
reference is then the reference.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 525: SMAI1 Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current
Table 526: SMAI1 Non group settings (advanced)

Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 527: SMAI2 Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current
Table 528: SMAI2 Non group settings (advanced)

Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase
Every Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI) can receive four analog signals (three
phases and one neutral or residual value), either voltage or current, see figure 306 and
figure 307. SMAI outputs give information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals
acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates etc. – 244 values in total).
The BLOCK input will force all outputs to value zero if BLOCK is TRUE (1). However, when the
disturbance recorder is connected to the single-phase outputs of SMAI, the sample data to the
disturbance recorder will not be blocked. The disturbance recorder bypasses SMAI to the
sample data channels.
System phase rotation and frequency are defined using the PhaseRotation and Frequency
settings in the primary system values PRIMVAL function. Logic 1 in the REVROT input to the
SMAI function means that the phase rotation is changed relative to the set PhaseRotation in
PRIMVAL.
The output signal AI1 to AI4 are single phase outputs which directly represent the four inputs
GRPxL1, GRPxL2, GRPxL3 and GRPxN, x=1-12. GxN (x = 1-12) is always calculated residual sum
from the first three inputs. A3P is grouped, three-phase information containing all relevant
information about four connected inputs. Note that all other functions, with a few exceptions,
use this output in configuration. Note that the SMAI function will always calculate the residual
sum of current/voltage if the input GRPxN is not connected in SMT. Applications with a few
exceptions shall always be connected to AI3P.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
16.8.5.1 Frequency values GUID-B494B93C-B5AA-4FD6-8080-8611C34C2AD8 v5
The SMAI function includes a functionality based on the level of positive sequence voltage,
MinValFreqMeas, to validate if the frequency measurement is valid or not. If the positive
sequence voltage is lower than MinValFreqMeas, the function freezes the frequency output
value for 500 ms and after that the frequency output is set to the nominal value. A signal is
available for the SMAI function to prevent operation due to non-valid frequency values.
MinValFreqMeas is set as % of UBase/√3
If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph, at least two of the inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and
GRPxL3, where 1≤x≤12, must be connected in order to calculate the positive sequence voltage.
Note that phase to phase inputs shall always be connected as follows: L1-L2 to GRPxL1, L2-L3
to GRPxL2, L3-L1 to GRPxL3. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N, all three inputs GRPxL1,
GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 must be connected in order to calculate the positive sequence voltage.
If only one phase-phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph, the
user is advised to connect two (not three) of the inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 to the
same voltage input as shown in figure 308 to make SMAI calculate a positive sequence voltage.
SMAI1
BLOCK SPFCOUT SAPTOF
DFTSPFC G1AI3P U3P* TRIP SAPTOF(1)_TRIP
UL1L2 BLOCK START
REVROT G1AI1
PHASEL1 G1AI2 BLKTRIP BLKDMAGN
^GRP1L1 G1AI4 FREQ
TRM_40.CH7(U) PHASEL2
G1N
^GRP1L2
PHASEL3
^GRP1L3
NEUTRAL
^GRP1N
EC10000060-3-en.vsdx
Figure 308: Connection example
The above described scenario does not work if SMAI setting ConnectionType is
Ph-N. If only one phase-earth voltage is available, the same type of connection
can be used but the SMAI ConnectionType setting must still be Ph-Ph and this
has to be accounted for when setting MinValFreqMeas. If SMAI setting
ConnectionType is Ph-N and the same voltage is connected to all three SMAI
inputs, the positive sequence voltage will be zero and the frequency functions
will not work properly.
The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be used for
Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF), Underfrequency protection (SAPTUF) and
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) due to that all other
information except frequency and positive sequence voltage might be wrongly
calculated.
16.9 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM SEMOD55968-1 v2
Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of three-phase
analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
3PHSUM
BLOCK SPFCOUT
BLKGR1 AI3P
BLKGR2 AI1
REVROT AI2
^G1AI3P* AI3
^G2AI3P* AI4
Figure 309: 3PHSUM function block
Table 529: 3PHSUM Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block
BLKGR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block input for group 1
BLKGR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block input for group 2
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation
G1AI3P GROUP - Group 1 three phase analog input from first SMAI
SIGNAL
G2AI3P GROUP - Group 2 three phase analog input from second SMAI
SIGNAL
Table 530: 3PHSUM Output signals

SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFT
reference function
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of two connected three phase inputs
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 1 signals from both SMAI blocks
SEMOD130361-4 v2
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value

InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 531: 3PHSUM Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
SummationType Group1+Group2 - - Group1+Group2 Summation type
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
-(Group1+Group2)
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref
Table 532: 3PHSUM Non group settings (advanced)

FreqMeasMinVal 5 - 200 % 1 10 Amplitude limit for frequency
calculation in % of UBase
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three-phase signals from Signal matrix for
analog inputs function (SMAI). The BLOCK input will reset all the outputs of the function to 0.

Technical manual
IED hardware
Section 17 IED hardware

17.1 Overview IP14270-1 v1
17.1.1 Variants of case size with local HMI display M15024-3 v6
IEC04000458-2-en.psd
Figure 310: 1/2 19” case with local HMI display.

Technical manual
IED hardware
17.1.2 Case from the front and rear sides IP16286-1 v2
M16105-3 v10
Table 533: Designations for 1/2 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot
1/2x19"
Front view Rear position Module
p40 p31 p30 p5 p4 p3 p1
P30:1
X11 PSM
P30:2
X31 and X32 etc. to X51 and X52 BIM, BOM or IOM
P30:3
X301, X302, X303, X304 SFP

P30:4
X305 LDCM
P31:1
6U
X306 LDCM
X311: A, B, C, D SLM
P31:2
P30:5
X312 LDCM or IRIG-B

P31:3
P30:6
X313 LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485

X401 TRM
Rear view
X11 X31 X41 X51 X401
X301
X302
X303
X311
A
X304
B
X32 X42 X52 D
X305 X312
X306 X313
17.2 Hardware modules IP14529-1 v1
17.2.1 Overview M11562-3 v11
Table 534: Basic modules

Module Description
Power supply module (PSM) Including a regulated DC/DC converter that supplies auxiliary
voltage to all static circuits.
• An internal fail alarm output is available.
Numerical module (NUM) Module for overall application control. All information is
processed or passed through this module, such as
configuration, settings and communication. The module
provides four SFPs for Ethernet traffic.
Local Human machine interface (LHMI) The module consists of LEDs, an LCD, a push button
keyboard and an ethernet connector used to connect a PC to
the IED.
Transformer input module (TRM) Transformer module that galvanically separates the internal
circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It has 12 analog inputs.

Technical manual
IED hardware
Module Description
Analog digital conversion module (ADM) The module converts the VT and CT analog signals from the
TRM to digital signals processed by the NUM. Carrier for
communication boards.
Note: TRM module is not included in SAM600-IO, so ADM
module is only used for internal communication carrier for IO
modules.
Combined backplane module (CBM) The module has two main purposes: to distribute supply
voltages from the PSM to the other modules and to act as a
communication carrier via its two buses, CompactPCI for fast
I/O and communication and CAN for slow I/O.
Universal backplane module (UBM) The module is used to interconnect the TRM and the ADM. It
also connects the NUM with the LHMI
Table 535: Application specific modules

Module Description
Binary input module (BIM) Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs
Binary output module (BOM) Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole command
outputs including supervision function
Binary I/O module (IOM) Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10 outputs and
2 fast signalling outputs.
Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103 Used for SPA/LON/IEC 60870–5–103 communication
communication modules (SLM)
Optical Ethernet SFP Small form factor pluggable for Ethernet communication
Galvanic RJ45 Ethernet SFP Small form factor pluggable for Ethernet communication
Galvanic RS485 communication module Module used for DNP3 and IEC 60870-5-103 communication
(RS485)
IRIG-B Time synchronization module (IRIG-B) Module with 2 inputs. One is used for handling both pulse-
width modulated signals and amplitude modulated signals
and one is used for optical input type ST for PPS time
synchronization.
17.2.2 Numeric module (NUM) IP14288-1 v2
17.2.2.1 Introduction M12643-3 v4
The numeric processing module (NUM) is a CPU module that handles all protection functions
and logic.
For communication with high speed modules, for example analog input modules and high
speed serial interfaces, NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. NUM is a compact PCI
system card, that is, it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and receives interrupts.
NUM provides up to 4 optical (type LC) or galvanic (type RJ45) Ethernet ports(one basic and
three optional).
The numeric module (NUM) is a high-performance CPU module based on a dual-core

processor. It is 6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with the backplane is achieved via a
compact PCI connector and an euro connector.

Technical manual
IED hardware
The NUM has two PC-MIP expansion slots where mezzanine cards, such as the LDCM, can be
mounted. It also has four SFP cages for Ethernet communication. Up to four SFP transceivers
for optical 100BASE-FX or galvanic RJ45 100BASE-TX communication can be mounted in the
SFP cages.
Only SPF transceivers approved by ABB (1MRK005500) are compatible with the
SFP cages.
Application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory, and non-volatile RAM is
used to store log data.
The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor to keep track of the time when
the IED is not energized.
The NUM is passively cooled, which is possible due to its low power dissipation.
17.2.2.3 Technical data SEMOD55319-1 v1
SEMOD55310-2 v13
Table 536: SFP - Optical ethernet port

Quantity Rated value
Number of channels 4 single or 2 redundant can be used for single or redundant
communication using any protocol
Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX
Type of fiber 62.5/125 mm multimode fiber
Wave length 1310 nm, Class 1 laser safety
Optical connector Type LC
Communication speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s
Table 537: SFP - Galvanic RJ45

Number of channels Up to 6 single or 3 redundant or a combination of single and
redundant links for communication using any protocol
Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX
Type of cable Cat5e FTP
Connector Type RJ45
Communication Speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s
GUID-96676D5D-0835-44DA-BC22-058FD18BDF34 v3
Table 538: NUM: Communication ports
NUM 4 Ethernet ports

1 Basic, 3 Optional
Ethernet connection type SFP Optical LC or Galvanic RJ45

Technical manual
IED hardware
17.2.3 Power supply module (PSM) IP15594-1 v1
The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full isolation
between the IED and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output is available.
Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be ordered.
17.2.3.2 Design IP14278-1 v1
M6377-3 v2
There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different DC input
voltage ranges see table 539. The power supply module contains a built-in, self-regulated
DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the terminal and the external battery
system.
The DC input is protected against inverse polarity within the rated DC voltage range.
Connection diagram M6377-8 v3
Figure 311: PSM Connection diagram.
M12286-1 v9
Table 539: PSM - Power supply module

Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Auxiliary DC voltage, EL (input) EL = (24-60) V EL ±20%
EL = (90-250) V EL ±20%
Power consumption 32 W typically -
Auxiliary DC power in-rush < 10 A during 0.1 s -
Supply interruption bridging time < 50 ms -
17.2.4 Local human-machine interface (Local HMI) SEMOD56218-5 v4
Refer to section Local HMI for information.
17.2.5 Transformer input module (TRM) IP15581-1 v1

Technical manual
IED hardware
The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and adapt the secondary
currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The module has twelve
inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs.
Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be ordered.
17.2.5.2 Design M14858-3 v8
TRM variants are available depending on the product. The rated values and channel type of the
current inputs are selected at order.
Transformer input module for measuring should not be used with current
transformers intended for protection purposes, due to limitations in overload
characteristics.
The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM.
For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for analog
inputs SMAI".
1MRK006501-AF-TRM-IEC-6502P1 V1 EN-US
Figure 312: TRM connection diagram

Technical manual
IED hardware
M16988-1 v11
Table 540: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer
Description Value
Frequency
Rated frequency fr 50/60 Hz
Operating range fr ± 10%
Current inputs
Rated current Ir 1 or 5 A
Operating range (0-100) x Ir
Thermal withstand 100 × Ir for 1 s *)

30 × Ir for 10 s
10 × Ir for 1 min
4 × Ir continuously
Dynamic withstand 250 × Ir one half wave
Burden < 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A

< 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A
*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

Voltage inputs **)
Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V
Operating range 0 - 340 V

Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s
420 V continuously
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
< 80 mVA at 220 V
**) all values for individual voltage inputs
Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency
17.2.6 Binary input module (BIM) IP14535-1 v1
The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two versions, one
standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputs to be used with the
pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely programmable and can be used for the
input of logical signals to any of the functions. They can also be included in the disturbance
recording and event-recording functions. This enables extensive monitoring and evaluation of
operation of the IED and for all associated electrical circuits.
17.2.6.2 Design M11586-3 v6
The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage level of the
binary input is selected at order.
For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI".

Technical manual
IED hardware
A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, a hysteresis
function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making it possible to use the
input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set.
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensure normal operation at battery supply earth
faults, see figure 313 The figure shows the typical operating characteristics of the binary
inputs of the four voltage levels.
The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstand disturbances
and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required. Inputs are debounced by
software.
I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and stored by
the event recorder if present.
[V]
300
176
144
88
72
38
32
19
17
24/30V 48/60V 110/125V 220/250V
xx06000391-2-en.vsd
Figure 313: Voltage dependence for the binary inputs
Operation
Operation uncertain
No operation
IEC99000517-ABC V1 EN-US
This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM).
The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact connected
to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is shown in figure "" and
314.

Technical manual
IED hardware
[mA]
50
5.5 [ms]
en07000105-1.vsd
Figure 314: Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with enhanced
pulse counting capabilities.
Figure 315: Connection diagram

Technical manual
IED hardware
17.2.6.3 Signals
Table 541: BIM Output signals

STATUS BOOLEAN Binary input module status
BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1 value
OSCWRN BOOLEAN Oscillation warning
17.2.6.4 Settings
Table 542: BIM Non group settings (basic)

On

Table 543: BIM Monitored data

STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary input module status
1=Error

Technical manual
IED hardware
M50609-2 v9
Table 544: BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
Binary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL ±20%
48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%
Power consumption
24/30 V max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V max. 0.4 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 Hz
Release settable 1–30 Hz
*Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms
Binary input operate time 3 ms -
(Debounce filter set to 0 ms)
* Note: For compliance with surge immunity a debounce filter time setting of 5 ms is required.
The stated operate time for functions include the operating time for the binary
inputs and outputs.
17.2.7 Binary output modules (BOM) IP14536-1 v1
The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip output or any
signaling purpose.
17.2.7.2 Design M1819-3 v4
The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each pair of relays
have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 316. This should be considered
when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal on the back of the IED.
The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breaker trip and
closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breaker auxiliary contacts
normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel reinforcement is required.
For configuration of the output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMBO".

Technical manual
IED hardware
Output module
xx00000299.vsd
Figure 316: Relay pair example
1 Output connection from relay 1

2 Output signal power source connection
3 Output connection from relay 2
Figure 317: Connection diagram

Technical manual
IED hardware
17.2.7.3 Signals
Table 545: BOM Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1
Table 546: BOM Output signals

STATUS BOOLEAN Binary output part of IOM module status
17.2.7.4 Settings
Table 547: BOM Non group settings (basic)

On

Technical manual
IED hardware

Table 548: BOM Monitored data

STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary output part of IOM module
1=Error status
BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 1 value
0=0
BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 force
1=Forced
BO1 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced

Technical manual
IED hardware

1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - nary output 11 value
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0

Technical manual
IED hardware

1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
B017FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 17 force
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
BO19FORCE BOOLEAN 1=Forced - Binary output 19 force
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Technical manual
IED hardware

0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
BO24FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - nary output 24 force
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
M12441-1 v10
Table 549: BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays
Binary outputs 24
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC
Min load voltage 24VDC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity
Per relay, continuous 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A
Max operations with load 1000
Max operations with no load 10000
Making capacity at inductive load with L/R > 10 ms
0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j > 0.4 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A

110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Operating time < 6 ms
Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with influencing factors

within nominal range. After 6 ms an additional 24 outputs may be activated.
The activation time for the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can
be activated during 1 s. Continued activation is possible with respect to current
consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely affect the
hardware life. Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM should be activated
continuously due to power dissipation.

Technical manual
IED hardware
inputs and outputs.
17.2.8 Binary input/output module (IOM) IP15582-1 v1
The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels are
needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any signaling purpose.
The two high speed signal output channels are used for applications where short operating
time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary inputs cater for required binary input
information.
17.2.8.2 Design IP10635-1 v2
M1718-3 v4
The binary input/output module is available in two basic versions, one with unprotected
contacts and one with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protected contacts.
Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase the
disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achieved with a high
peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure "". Inputs are
debounced by software.
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery supply
earth faults, see figure 313.
The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering. Alternative connectors of Ring lug or
Compression type can be ordered.
I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and stored by
the event recorder if present.
SEMOD175370-4 v1
The binary input/output module version with MOV protected contacts can for example be
used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause excessive wear of the
contacts.
The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the binary
input/output module.
xx04000069.vsd
Figure 318: IOM with MOV protection, relay example

Technical manual
IED hardware
17.2.8.3 Signals
Table 550: IOMIN Output signals

STATUS BOOLEAN Binary input part of IOM module status
OSCWRN BOOLEAN Oscillation warning
Table 551: IOMOUT Input signals

BLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
17.2.8.4 Settings
Table 552: IOMIN Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - On Binary input/output module in
On operation (On) or not (Off)

Technical manual
IED hardware

Table 553: IOMIN Monitored data

STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary input part of IOM module
1=Error status
Table 554: IOMOUT Monitored data

0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Technical manual
IED hardware

0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Technical manual
IED hardware
17.2.8.6 Technical data IP10636-1 v1
M12573-1 v11
Table 555: IOM - Binary input/output module

Binary inputs 8 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL ±20%
48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%
Power consumption -
24/30 V, 50 mA max. 0.05 W/input
48/60 V, 50 mA max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V, 50 mA max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V, 50 mA max. 0.4 W/input
220/250 V, 110 mA max. 0.5 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1-40 Hz
Release settable 1-30 Hz
*Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms
Binary input operate time 3 ms -
(Debounce filter set to 0 ms)
* Note: For compliance with surge immunity a debounce filter time setting of 5 ms is required.
inputs and outputs.
M12318-1 v10
Table 556: IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel
reed relay)
Binary outputs 10 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Min load voltage 24VDC —
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms 800 V DC
Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A 12 A
Making capacity at inductive load with L/R >
10 ms
0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive load
220–250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110–125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 48–60 V/0.2 A
24–30 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos φ > 0.4 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A

Technical manual
IED hardware
Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel
reed relay)
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A 125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF
Max operations with load 1000
Max operations with no load 10000
Operating time < 6 ms <= 1 ms
inputs and outputs.
M12584-1 v10
Table 557: IOM with MOV and IOM 220/250 V, 110mA - contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay)
Binary outputs IOM: 10 IOM: 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Min load voltage 24VDC -
Test voltage across open 250 V rms 250 V rms
contact, 1 min
Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, 12 A 12 A
continuous
Making capacity at inductive
loadwith L/R > 10 ms
0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive
load 220–250 V/0.4 A
30 A 110–125 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 10 A 48–60 V/0.2 A
1.0 s 24–30 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
j > 0.4
Breaking capacity for DC with 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
L/R < 40 ms 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF
Max operations with load 1000 -
Max operations with no load 10000 -
Operating time < 6 ms <= 1 ms
inputs and outputs.

Technical manual
IED hardware
17.2.9 Serial and LON communication module (SLM) IP15583-1 v2
The Serial and LON communication module (SLM) is used for SPA, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3 and
LON communication. SLM has two optical communication ports for plastic/plastic, plastic/
glass or glass/glass fiber cables. One port is used for serial communication (SPA, IEC
60870-5-103 or DNP3 port) and the other port is used for LON communication.
17.2.9.2 Design M17126-3 v6
SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the first Analog digital
conversion module (ADM). Three variants of SLM are available with different combinations of
optical fiber connectors, see figure 319. The plastic fiber connectors are of snap-in type and
the glass fiber connectors are of ST type.
I
EC0500760=1=en=Or
igi
nal
.psd
Figure 319: SLM variants, component side view
1 Receiver, LON
2 Transmitter, LON
3 Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
4 Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
A Snap-in connector for plastic fiber
B ST connector for glass fiber
When the SLM connectors are viewed from the rear side of the IED, contact 4 is
in the topmost position and contact 1 in the lowest position.

Technical manual
IED hardware
M12589-1 v4
Table 558: SLM – LON port

Quantity Range or value
Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST
Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000 ft typically *)
Plastic fiber: 7 dB (10m/35ft typically *)
Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm
Plastic fiber: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation
SEMOD117441-2 v5
Table 559: SLM – SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port

Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST
Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000ft m typically *)
Plastic fiber: 7 dB (25m/80ft m typically *)
Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm
Plastic fiber: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation
17.2.10 Galvanic RS485 communication module SEMOD174899-1 v1
17.2.10.1 Introduction SEMOD158664-5 v3
The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used for DNP3.0 and IEC 60870-5-103
communication. The module has one RS485 communication port. The RS485 is a balanced
serial communication that can be used either in 2-wire or 4-wire connections. A 2-wire
connection uses the same signal for RX and TX and is a multidrop communication with no
dedicated Master or slave. This variant requires however a control of the output. The 4-wire
connection has separated signals for RX and TX multidrop communication with a dedicated
Master and the rest are slaves. No special control signal is needed in this case.
17.2.10.2 Design SEMOD158668-1 v1
SEMOD158670-4 v3
RS485 is a PC-MIP card, and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the Analog digital
conversion module (ADM).
RS485 connector pinouts SEMOD158670-10 v1

The arrangement for the pins in the RS485 connector (figure 320) are presented in table 560:
Table 560: The arrangement for the pins
Pin Name 2-wire Name 4-wire Description

1 RS485+ TX+ Receive/transmit high or transmit high
2 RS485– TX– Receive/transmit

Technical manual
IED hardware
3 Term T-Term Termination resistor for transmitter (and receiver in 2–wir

case) (connect to TX+)
4 N.A. R-Term Termination resistor for receiver (connect to RX+)
5 N.A. RX– Receive low
6 N.A. RX+ Receive high
Angle
bracket
Screw
1
terminal
X3 2
1
2 RS485
3 PWB
Screw
4
terminal
5
X1
6
Backplane
Figure 320: RS485 connector
• 2-wire: Connect pin 1 to pin 6 and pin 2 to pin 5
• Termination (2-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3
• Termination (4-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3 and pin 4 to pin 6
Soft ground connector pinouts SEMOD158670-45 v1

A second 2-pole screw connector is used for the connection of IO-ground. It can be used in two
combinations like:
• Unconnected: No ground of the IO-part · .
• Soft grounded: The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a MOV
SEMOD158710-2 v2
Table 561: Galvanic RS485 communication module

Communication speed 2400–19200 bauds
External connectors RS-485 6-pole connector
Soft ground 2-pole connector

Technical manual
IED hardware
17.2.11 IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B SEMOD141102-1 v1
17.2.11.1 Introduction SEMOD141113-4 v9
The IRIG-B time synchronizing module is used for accurate time synchronizing of the IED from
a station clock.
The Pulse Per Second (PPS) input is supported.
Electrical (BNC) and optical connection (ST) for 0XX and 12X IRIG-B support.
17.2.11.2 Design SEMOD141098-4 v5
The IRIG-B module has two inputs. One input is for the IRIG-B that can handle both a pulse-
width modulated signal (also called unmodulated) and an amplitude modulated signal (also
called sine wave modulated). The other is an optical input type ST for optical pulse-width
modulated signal (IRIG-B 00X). The IRIG-B module is mounted as a mezzanine card on the
Analog digital conversion module (ADM).
ST
Y2
A1
IEC06000304=1=en=Original.ai
Figure 321: IRIG-B PC-MIP board with top left ST connector for optical IRIG-B 00X 820 nm
multimode fiber optic signal input and lower left BNC connector for IRIG-B
signal input
17.2.11.3 Encoding GUID-9F0D795F-80D6-46D2-A5CC-F34F701C8E85 v1
This type of encoding consists of the following options:
• IRIG-B. This encoding is based on the legacy of (pre-2004) IRIG-B standard which is
without any time zone information. IRIG-B uses the timecoding available in IRIG-B 00x and
IRIG-B 12x, where x = 0-7. When x is set in the range from 4-7, the year information is
provided along with year and time data.
• 1344. This encoding is based on the current (2004) IRIG-B standard. IED uses the time zone
information from TIMEZONE:1. The setting 1344 refers to the Annex F in IEEE1344, which
adds information regarding quality of the time using the control bits in the IRIG-B
message. This annex also contains the year information with the variable x that ranges
from 4-7 in the 2004 version of IRIG-B.
• 1344TZ. This encoding is based on the current (2004) IRIG-B standard. This time zone
information from IRIG-B overrides the TIMEZONE:1 settings. This setting” uses the
information as 1344, overriding the TIMEZONE setting.

Technical manual
IED hardware
17.2.11.4 TimeZoneAs1344 GUID-39AACFEA-2E3E-4B39-9D7A-E49DA5DE3506 v1
This type of encoding consists of the following options:
• MinusTZ. Encoded IRIG time minus time zone offset equals UTC at all times.
• PlusTZ. Encoded IRIG time plus time zone offset equals UTC at all times.
17.2.11.5 Settings
Table 562: IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)

SynchType BNC - - Opto Type of synchronization
Opto
TimeDomain LocalTime - - LocalTime Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - - IRIG-B Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - - PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard
PlusTZ
SEMOD141136-2 v10
Table 563: IRIG-B

Number of channels IRIG-B 1
Number of optical channels 1
Electrical connector:
Electrical connector IRIG-B BNC
Pulse-width modulated 5 Vpp
Amplitude modulated
– low level 1-3 Vpp
– high level 3 x low level, max 9 Vpp
Supported formats IRIG-B 00x, IRIG-B 12x
Accuracy +/-10μs for IRIG-B 00x and +/-100μs for IRIG-B 12x
Input impedance 100 k ohm
Optical connector:
Optical connector IRIG-B Type ST
Type of fiber 62.5/125 μm multimode fiber
Supported formats IRIG-B 00x
Accuracy +/- 1μs

Technical manual
IED hardware
17.3 Dimensions IP11490-1 v3
17.3.1 Case with protective cover SEMOD53199-1 v2
M11985-110 v7
Figure 322: Case with protective cover

Technical manual
IED hardware
Figure 323: Case with protective cover and 19” rack mounting kit

Technical manual
IED hardware
Figure 324: Protective cover case with details

M11985-120 v6
Case size A B C D E F G H I
(mm)
6U, 1/2 x 19” 265.9 223.7 247.5 255.0 205.8 190.5 466.5 232.5 482.6
The G and I dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit.

Technical manual
IED hardware
17.3.2 Case without protective cover SEMOD53195-1 v2
M2152-3 v8
Figure 325: Case without protective cover

Technical manual
IED hardware
Figure 326: Case without protective cover with 19” rack mounting kit
M2152-11 v5
Case size
A B C D E F G H I
(mm)
6U, 1/2 x 19” 265.9 223.7 204.1 249.9 205.8 190.5 466.5 189.1 482.6
The G and I dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit

Technical manual
IED hardware
17.3.3 Flush mounting dimensions M11571-3 v6
A C
E
D
Figure 327: Flush mounting
Cut-out dimensions (mm)

Case size
Tolerance A B C D
+/-1 +/-1
6U, 1/2 x 19" 210.1 254.3 4.0-10.0 13.5
E = 191.1 mm without rear protection cover, 231.8 mm with rear protection cover
17.3.4 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions M11984-3 v6
Figure 328: A 1/2 x 19” size IED side-by-side with RHGS6

Technical manual
IED hardware
D
B
E
F
C
xx05000505.vsd
Figure 329: Panel-cut out dimensions for side-by-side flush mounting
Case size A B C D E F G
(mm) ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1
Tolerance
6U, 1/2 x 19” 214.0 259.3 240.4 190.5 34.4 13.2 6.4 diam
17.3.5 Wall mounting dimensions M11569-3 v5
Figure 330: Wall mounting
Case size (mm) A B C D E

6U, 1/2 x 19” 292.0 267.1 272.8 390.0 243.0

Technical manual
IED hardware
17.4 Mounting alternatives IP11721-1 v1
17.4.1 Flush mounting IP10303-1 v1
17.4.1.1 Overview M11967-3 v5
The flush mounting kit can be used for the 1/2 x 19” case size.
Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, for class IP54
protection. The screws from the IED shall be used to fasten the fasteners to the IED.
Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs when IP54 class
must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained when mounting two cases
side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.
To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted sealing must be

ordered when ordering the IED.
17.4.1.2 Mounting procedure for flush mounting M11942-2 v5
6
3
IEC16000080=1=en.vsd
Figure 331: Flush mounting details.
PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Sealing strip, used to obtain IP54 - -
class. The sealing strip is factory
mounted between the case and
front plate.
2 Fastener 2 -

Technical manual
IED hardware
3 Groove - -
4 Screw 4 M3x8 mm
5 Joining point of sealing strip - -
6 Panel - -
17.4.2 Wall mounting IP10316-1 v1
17.4.2.1 Overview M11973-3 v7
The IED can be mounted on a wall, a panel or in a cubicle.
Use only the screws included in the mounting kit when mounting the plates and
the angles on the IED. Screws with wrong dimension may damage the PCBs
inside the IED.
If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall mounting is
therefore not recommended for any communication modules with fiber
connection.
17.4.2.2 Mounting procedure for wall mounting M11949-2 v3
Figure 332: Wall mounting details.
17.4.2.3 How to reach the rear side of the IED M11941-2 v5
The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover recommended to be used with this type
of mounting. See figure 333.
To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 80 mm is required on the unhinged side.

Technical manual
IED hardware
3
1
80 mm 2
Figure 333: How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.
PosNo Description Type

1 Screw M4x10
2 Screw M5x8
3 Rear protection cover (Ordered separately)
17.4.3 19” panel rack mounting IP10313-1 v1
17.4.3.1 Overview SEMOD127656-5 v4
The IED can be mounted in a standard 19” cubicle rack by using a mounting kit consisting of
two mounting angles and their fastening screws.
The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of the IED either to the left or the
right side of the cubicle.
A separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-by-side mounted IEDs or IEDs
together with RHGS cases should be selected so that the total size equals 19”.
inside the IED.

Technical manual
IED hardware
17.4.3.2 Mounting procedure for 19” panel rack mounting M11948-2 v7
1a
1b
Figure 334: 19” panel rack mounting details
The required torque for the screws is 3.5 Nm.

1a, 1b Mounting angles, can be mounted 2 -
either to the left or the right side of
the case
2 Screw 8 M4x6
3 Washer 8 M4x6
17.4.4 Side-by-side 19” rack mounting IP10323-1 v1
17.4.4.1 Overview M11974-3 v3
IED case size 1/2 x 19” and RHGS cases can be mounted side-by-side up to a maximum size of
19”. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side mounting kit together with the 19” rack
panel mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be ordered separately.
inside the IED.

Technical manual
IED hardware
17.4.4.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting M11955-2 v4
3 1
2
4
IEC040004563enOriginal.vsdx
Figure 335: Side-by-side rack mounting details.

1 Mounting plate 2 -
2, 3 Screw 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 -
5 Washer 16 M4x6
17.4.4.3 IED mounted with a RHGS6 case M11953-3 v4
A 1/2 x 19” size IED can be mounted with a RHGS case (6 or 12). The RHGS case can be used for
mounting a test switch of type RTXP 24. It also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2
type for mounting of, for example, a DC-switch or two auxiliary relays.

Technical manual
IED hardware
1 2 1 2
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
Figure 336: IED (1/2 x 19”) mounted with a RHGS6 case containing a test switch module
equipped with only a test switch and a RX2 terminal base
17.4.5 Side-by-side flush mounting IP10329-1 v1
17.4.5.1 Overview M11975-3 v3
If IP54 is required it is not allowed to flush mount side by side mounted cases. If your
application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side mounting details kit and
the 19” panel rack mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be ordered separately.
The maximum size of the panel cut out is 19”.
With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 is obtained. To

reach IP class 54, it is required to mount the IEDs separately. For cut out
dimensions of separately mounted IEDs, see section "Flush mounting".
inside the IED.
Please contact factory for special add on plates for mounting FT switches on
the side (for 1/2 19" case) or bottom of the relay.

Technical manual
IED hardware
17.4.5.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting M12730-6 v4
1 2
Figure 337: Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x 19” IED).

1 Mounting plate 2 -
2, 3 Screw, washer 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 -
17.5 Technical data IP16276-1 v1
17.5.1 Enclosure IP16278-1 v1
M11778-1 v7
Table 564: Case

Material Steel sheet
Front plate Stainless steel with cut-out for HMI
Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel
Finish Light grey (RAL 7035)
M12327-1 v5
Table 565: Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529
Front IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)

Sides, top and bottom IP40
Rear side IP20 with screw compression type
IP10 with ring lug terminals

Technical manual
IED hardware
M11777-1 v7
Table 566: Weight

Case size Weight
6U, 1/2 x 19” £ 7.5 kg/16 lb
17.5.2 Electrical safety GUID-2825B541-DD31-4DAF-B5B3-97555F81A1C2 v1
GUID-1CF5B10A-CF8B-407D-8D87-F4B48B43C2B2 v2
Table 567: Electrical safety according to IEC 60255-27
Equipment class I (protective earthed)

Overvoltage category III
Pollution degree 2 (normally only non-conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a
temporary conductivity caused by condensation is to be expected)
17.5.3 Connection system SEMOD53371-1 v1
SEMOD53376-2 v6
Table 568: CT and VT circuit connectors

Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
terminals
M12583-1 v8
Table 569: Auxiliary power supply connectors

Connector type Rated voltage Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC 2.5 mm2 (AWG14)
2 × 1 mm2 (2 x AWG18)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug 300 V AC 3 mm2 (AWG14)
terminals
Table 570: Binary I/O connectors

Connector type Rated voltage Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC 2.5 mm2 (AWG14)
2 × 1 mm2 (2 x AWG18)

Technical manual
IED hardware
17.5.4 Influencing factors SEMOD52785-1 v1
M16705-1 v16
Table 571: Temperature and humidity influence

Parameter Reference value Nominal range Influence
Ambient temperature, +20±5°C -25°C to +55°C 0.02%/°C
operate value
Relative humidity 45-75% 10-90% -
Operative range 0-95%
Storage temperature - -40°C to +70°C -
Table 572: Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation

Dependence on Reference value Within nominal Influence
range
Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage max. 2% 15% of EL 0.01%/%
Operative range Full wave
rectified
Auxiliary voltage dependence, ±20% of EL 0.01%/%
operate value
Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage 24-60 V DC ± 20%
100-250 V DC
Interruption
±20%
interval
0–50 ms No restart
0–∞ s Correct behaviour at power
down
Restart time < 300 s
Table 573: Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 60255–1)

Dependence on Within nominal range Influence
Frequency dependence, operate value fr ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ±1.0%/Hz
fr ±3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
Harmonic frequency dependence (20% 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±2.0%
content)
Table 574: Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 60255–1)

Dependence on Within nominal range Influence
Frequency dependence, operate value fr ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ±1.0%/Hz
fr ±3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
Frequency dependence for broken fr ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ±2.0%/Hz

conductor fr ±3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
Harmonic frequency dependence (20% 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±1.0%
content)
Harmonic frequency dependence for 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±2.0%
broken conductor (20% content)

Technical manual
IED hardware
17.5.5 Type tests according to standard IP16288-1 v1
M16706-1 v14
Table 575: Electromagnetic compatibility

Test Type test values Reference standards
1 MHz burst disturbance 2.5 kV IEC 60255-26
100 kHz slow damped oscillatory 2.5 kV IEC 61000-4-18, Level 3
wave immunity test
Ring wave immunity test, 100 kHz 2-4 kV IEC 61000-4-12, Level 4
Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge IEC 60255-26
Direct application 8 kV contact discharge
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge IEC 61000-4-2, Level 4
Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge IEEE/ANSI C37.90.3
Direct application 8 kV contact discharge
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge
Fast transient disturbance 4 kV IEC 60255-26, Zone A
2 kV, SFP galvanic RJ45
2 kV, MIM mA-inputs IEC 60255-26, Zone B
Surge immunity test 2-4 kV, 1.2/50ms high energy IEC 60255-26, Zone A
1-2 kV, BOM and IRF outputs IEC 60255-26, Zone B
Power frequency immunity test 150-300 V, 50 Hz IEC 60255-26, Zone A

Conducted common mode immunity 30-3 V, 15-150 Hz IEC 61000-4-16, Level 4
test
Power frequency magnetic field test 1000 A/m, 3 s IEC 61000-4-8, Level 5
100 A/m, cont.
Pulse magnetic field immunity test 1000 A/m IEC 61000–4–9, Level 5
Damped oscillatory magnetic field 100 A/m IEC 61000-4-10, Level 5
test
Radiated electromagnetic field 20 V/m IEC 60255-26
disturbance 80-1000 MHz IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
1.4-2.7 GHz EN 50121-5
10 V/m, 2.7-6.0 GHz
Radiated emission 30-6000 MHz IEC 60255-26
30-8500 MHz IEEE/ANSI C63.4, FCC
Conducted emission 0.15-30 MHz IEC 60255-26
Table 576: Insulation

Test Type test values Reference standard
Dielectric test 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. IEC 60255-27
1.0 kV AC, 1 min.: ANSI C37.90
-SFP galvanic RJ45 IEEE 802.3-2015,
- X.21-LDCM Environment A
Impulse voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50ms, 0.5 J
1 kV, 1.2/50 ms 0.5 J:
-SFP galvanic RJ45
- X.21-LDCM
Insulation resistance > 100 MW at 500 VDC

Technical manual
IED hardware
Table 577: Environmental tests

Test Type test value Reference standard
Cold operation test Test Ad for 16 h at -25°C IEC 60068-2-1
Cold storage test Test Ab for 16 h at -40°C IEC 60068-2-1
Dry heat operation test Test Bd for 16 h at +70°C IEC 60068-2-2
Dry heat storage test Test Bb for 16 h at +85°C IEC 60068-2-2
Change of temperature test Test Nb for 5 cycles at -25°C to +70°C IEC 60068-2-14
Damp heat test, steady state Test Ca for 10 days at +40°C and humidity IEC 60068-2-78
93%
Damp heat test, cyclic Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to +55°C and IEC 60068-2-30
humidity 93 to 95% (1 cycle = 24 hours)
Table 578: CE compliance

Test According to
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) EN 60255–26
Low voltage (LVD) EN 60255–27
Table 579: Mechanical tests

Test Type test values Reference standards
Vibration response test Class II: Rack mount IEC 60255-21-1
Class I: Flush and wall mount
Vibration endurance test Class I: Rack, flush and wall mount IEC 60255-21-1
Shock response test Class I: Rack, flush and wall mount IEC 60255-21-2
Shock withstand test Class I: Rack, flush and wall mount IEC 60255-21-2
Bump test Class I: Rack, flush and wall mount IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test Class II: Rack mount IEC 60255-21-3
Class I: Flush and wall mount

Technical manual
Labels
Section 18 Labels
18.1 Labels on IED SEMOD168249-4 v5
Front view of IED
6
2
10
3
IEC16000081=1=en.vsdx
Figure 338: Example of IED label
1 QR-code containing the complete ordering code

2 Power supply module (PSM)
3 Ordering and serial number
4 Manufacturer
5 Transformer designations
6 Transformer input module, rated currents and voltages
7 Optional, customer specific information
8 Order number, dc supply voltage and rated frequency
9 Product type, description and serial number
10 Product type

Technical manual
Labels
Rear view of IED
IEC15000573=2=en=Original.wsdx
1 Warning label
2 Caution label
3 Class 1 laser product label It is used when an optical SFP or an MR LDCM is configured in
the product.

Technical manual
Connection diagrams
Section 19 Connection diagrams GUID-CF4EFFA5-3081-4FC7-9A14-ED127C3C0FDE v7
The connection diagrams are delivered in the IED Connectivity package as part of the product
delivery.
The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be downloaded from

http://www.abb.com/protection-control.
Connection diagrams for Configured products
Connection diagram, REQ650 2.2, B11X00 1MRK006507-QA
Connection diagrams for Customized products
Connection diagram, 650 series 2.2 IEC 1MRK006501-AG
Connection diagram, 650 series 2.2 ANSI 1MRK006502-AG

Technical manual
642
Inverse time characteristics
Section 20 Inverse time characteristics

20.1 Application M16686-3 v5
In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections at different

points in the network different time delays for the different protections are normally used. The
simplest way to do this is to use definite time-lag. In more sophisticated applications current
dependent time characteristics are used. Both alternatives are shown in a simple application
with three overcurrent protections operating in series.
I> I> I>

xx05000129.vsd
Figure 339: Three overcurrent protections operating in series
Stage 3
Time
Stage 2 Stage 2
Stage 1 Stage 1 Stage 1
Fault point
position
en05000130.vsd
Figure 340: Definite time overcurrent characteristics
Time
Fault point
position
en05000131.vsd
Figure 341: Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function

The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time and still
assure the selectivity between protections.

Technical manual
To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the operation
time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following factors, in a
simple case with two protections in series:
• Difference between pickup time of the protections to be co-ordinated

• Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault
• Reset times of the protections
• Margin dependent of the time delay inaccuracy of the protections
Assume we have the following network case.
A1 B1
Feeder
I> I>
Time axis
t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3
en05000132.vsd
Figure 342: Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1
where:
t=0 is The fault occurs
t=t1 is Protection B1 trips
t=t2 is Breaker at B1 opens
t=t3 is Protection A1 resets
In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous). When the
fault occurs the protections start to detect the fault current. After the time t1 the protection B1
send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts its delay timer at the same
time, with some deviation in time due to differences between the two protections. There is a
possibility that A1 will start before the trip is sent to the B1 circuit breaker. At the time t2 the
circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault current is interrupted.
The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults. The maximum opening time can
be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at t2 the timer of protection A1 is active. At
time t3 the protection A1 is reset, that is the timer is stopped.
In most applications it is required that the times shall reset as fast as possible when the
current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time shall be
minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type of delayed reset
time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following applications:

Technical manual
• If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current IED, close to the faults, starts and
resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system.
• Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic reclosing to
a permanent fault.
• Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other
protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the release
function.
20.2 Principle of operation IP15777-1 v2
20.2.1 Mode of operation M16687-3 v8
The function can operate in a definite time-lag mode or in a current definite inverse time
mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard curves are
available. Also programmable curve types are supported via the component inputs: p, A, B, C
pr, tr, and cr.
Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen.
If current in any phase exceeds the set start current value (here internal signal startValue), a
timer, according to the selected operating mode, is started.
In case of definite time-lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is reached or until
the current drops below the reset value (start value minus the hysteresis) and the reset time
has elapsed.
For definite time delay curve ANSI/IEEE Definite time or IEC Definite time are chosen.
The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 61.
æ ö
ç A
÷
t[ s ] = ç + B ÷×k
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø
where:
p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type,
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current.
For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the set start
level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be seen:

Technical manual
ææ i öp ö
(top - B × k ) × ç ç ÷ - C ÷ = A×k
è è in > ø ø
where:
top is the operating time of the protection
The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according to
equation 63, in addition to the constant time delay:
t
ææ i öp ö
ò è in > ø ÷ × dt ³ A × k
ç ç ÷ - C
0 è ø
For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.
æ æ i( j ) ö p
n ö
Dt × å ç ç ÷ - C ÷ ³ A× k
j =1 è è in > ø ø
where:
j=1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been detected,
that is, when
i
>1
in >
Dt is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the

protection algorithm,
n is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time
equation is fulfilled, that is, when a trip is given and
i (j) is the fault current at time j
For inverse time operation, the inverse time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC and
ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported.
For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time-lag of operation, see figure 343.

Technical manual
Operate
time
tMin
Current
IMin
Figure 343: Minimum time-lag operation for the IEC curves

In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be set to the
value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse time curve for measured
current of twenty times the set current start value. Note that the operating time value is
dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k.
In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two additional
inverse curves available; the RI curve and the RD curve.
The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA relay RI.
The curve is described by equation 65:
æ ö
ç k ÷
t[ s ] = ç
in > ÷
ç 0.339 - 0.235 × ÷
è i ø
where:
in> is the set start current for step n
k is set time multiplier for step n
i is the measured current
The RD inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex protection RXIDG. The
curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for sensitive residual earth-fault current
protection, with ability to detect high-resistive earth faults. The curve is described by
equation 66:

Technical manual
æ i ö
t[ s ] = 5.8 - 1.35 × ln ç ÷
è k × in > ø
where:
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current
If the curve type programmable is chosen, the user can make a tailor made inverse time curve
according to the general equation 67.
æ ö
ç A
÷
t[ s ] = ç + B ÷×k
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø
Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. There is the possibility to choose
between three different reset time-lags.
• Instantaneous Reset
• IEC Reset
• ANSI Reset.
If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops below
the set start current level minus the hysteresis.
If IEC reset is chosen the timer will be reset after a set constant time when the current drops
below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.
If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after fault
clearance (when the current drops below the start current level minus the hysteresis). The
timer will reset according to equation 68.
æ ö
ç tr ÷
t [s] = ç ÷×k
çæ i ö ÷
2
çç ÷ -1 ÷
è è in > ø ø
where:
The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.
The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of the choice of
time delay characteristic.

Technical manual
For the definite time delay characteristics the possible reset time settings are instantaneous
and IEC constant time reset.
For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics are
available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI current dependent reset time.
For IEC inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are instantaneous
and IEC set constant time reset).
For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time
characteristics are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI current
dependent reset time. If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be
given, see equation 69:
æ ö
ç tr ÷
t [s] = ç ÷×k
çæ i ö ÷
pr
çç ÷ - cr ÷
è è in > ø ø
For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.
GUID-F7AA2194-4D1C-4475-8853-C7D064912614 v4
When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate time of

the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set definite time
delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is important to set the
definite time delay for that stage to zero.

Technical manual
20.3 Inverse characteristics IP15797-1 v2
M12388-1 v23
Table 580: ANSI Inverse time characteristics

Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset ±2.0% or ±40 ms
æ A ö
t =ç P + B÷×k
è (
ç I -1 ÷
ø )
EQUATION1249-SMALL V3 EN-US
Reset characteristic:
tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1)
I = Imeasured/Iset
ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6

Technical manual
Table 581: IEC Inverse time characteristics

Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 IEC 60255-151, ±2.0%
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±40 ms whichever
æ A ö is greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
I = Imeasured/Iset
IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
t = ç P + B÷ × k P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
ç (I - C ) ÷ TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001
è ø CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
TR
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR )
I = Imeasured/Iset
The parameter setting Characteristn = Reserved (where, n = 1 - 4) shall not be

used, since this parameter setting is for future use and not implemented yet.
Table 582: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics

RI type inverse characteristic 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 IEC 60255-151, ±2.0%
1 is greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse

characteristic
æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
I = Imeasured/Iset

Technical manual
GUID-19F8E187-4ED0-48C3-92F6-0D9EAA2B39BB v4
Table 583: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection
Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 2.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset ±5.0% or ±160 ms
æ A ö
t =ç P + B÷×k
ç I -1
è ( ÷
ø )
tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 584: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection
æ A ö is greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
I = Imeasured/Iset

Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01
Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
t = ç P + B÷ × k P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
ç (I - C ) ÷ TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001
è ø CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
TR
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR )
I = Imeasured/Iset

Technical manual
The parameter setting TimeChar = Reserved shall not be used, since this
parameter setting is for future use and not implemented yet.
Table 585: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power
protection
RI type inverse characteristic 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 2.00 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%
1 is greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse

characteristic
æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
I = Imeasured/Iset
GUID-2AE8C92E-5DA8-487F-927D-8E553EE29240 v2
Table 586: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection
Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 , ±
5.0% or ±40 ms
æ A ö
t =ç P + B÷×k
è (
ç I -1 ÷
ø )
tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
I = Imeasured/Iset


Technical manual
Table 587: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection
or ±40 ms whichever
æ A ö is greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
I = Imeasured/Iset

SEMOD116978-2 v10
Table 588: Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection

Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 ±5.0% or ±45 ms
k
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U> ø
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
k  480
t 2.0
 0.035
 U  Un  
 32   0.5 
 Un  
IECEQUATION2423 V2 EN-US
Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
k × 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
æ U - Un > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è U> ø
IECEQUATION2421 V1 EN-US
Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of
k×A 0.001
t = +D B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01
P
æB × U - U > ö C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
ç -C÷
D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of
è U > ø
0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001

Technical manual
Table 589: Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection

Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 ±5.0% or ±45 ms
k
t =
æ U < -U ö
ç ÷
è U< ø
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
k × 480
t = + 0.055
2.0
æ 32 × U < -U - 0.5 ö
ç ÷
è U < ø
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of
é ù 0.001
ê ú B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01
k×A C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
t =ê ú+D
ê æ U < -U P
ú D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of
ö
êçB × -C÷ ú 0.001
ëè U < ø û P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of
0.001
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

Technical manual
Table 590: Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection

Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps ±5.0% or ±45 ms whichever is
of 0.01 greater
k
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U > ø
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps

of 0.01
k ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
2.0
 32 ⋅ U − U > − 0.5 
 
 U > 
Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps

of 0.01
k ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
3.0
 32 ⋅ U − U > − 0.5 
 
 U > 
Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps

of 0.01
k×A A = (0.005-200.000) in
t = +D steps of 0.001
P
æB × U - U > ö B = (0.50-100.00) in
ç -C÷ steps of 0.01
è U > ø
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of
0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
steps of 0.001

Technical manual
SEMOD118114-4 v4
A070750 V2 EN-US
Figure 344: ANSI Extremely inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070751 V2 EN-US
Figure 345: ANSI Very inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070752 V2 EN-US
Figure 346: ANSI Normal inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070753 V2 EN-US
Figure 347: ANSI Moderately inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070817 V2 EN-US
Figure 348: ANSI Long time extremely inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070818 V2 EN-US
Figure 349: ANSI Long time very inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070819 V2 EN-US
Figure 350: ANSI Long time inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070820 V2 EN-US
Figure 351: IEC Normal inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070821 V2 EN-US
Figure 352: IEC Very inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070822 V2 EN-US
Figure 353: IEC Inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070823 V2 EN-US
Figure 354: IEC Extremely inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070824 V2 EN-US
Figure 355: IEC Short time inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070825 V2 EN-US
Figure 356: IEC Long time inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070826 V2 EN-US
Figure 357: RI-type inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070827 V2 EN-US
Figure 358: RD-type inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN-US
Figure 359: Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection

Technical manual
GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN-US
Figure 360: Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection

Technical manual
GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN-US
Figure 361: Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection

Technical manual
GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN-US
Figure 362: Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection

Technical manual
GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN-US
Figure 363: Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection

Technical manual
Glossary
Section 21 Glossary M14893-1 v18
AC Alternating current
ACC Actual channel
ACT Application configuration tool within PCM600
A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS Amplitude deadband supervision
ADM Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
AI Analog input
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD Adaptive signal detection
ASDU Application service data unit
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BBP Busbar protection
BFOC/2,5 Bayonet fiber optic connector
BFP Breaker failure protection
BI Binary input
BIM Binary input module
BOM Binary output module
BOS Binary outputs status
BR External bistable relay
BS British Standards
BSR Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals between IEDs
CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial
communication
CB Circuit breaker
CBM Combined backplane module
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephony. A
United Nations-sponsored standards body within the International
Telecommunications Union.
CCM CAN carrier module
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS Combined megapulses per second
CMT Communication Management tool in PCM600

Technical manual
Glossary
CO cycle Close-open cycle

Codirectional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two twisted
pairs making it possible to transmit information in both directions
COM Command
COMTRADE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange format for
Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI C37.111, 1999 / IEC
60255-24
Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four twisted
pairs, two of which are used for transmitting data in both directions
and two for transmitting clock signals
COT Cause of transmission
CPU Central processing unit
CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CROB Control relay output block
CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CU Communication unit
CVT or CCVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR Delayed autoreclosing
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US developer of the
TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line
DBLL Dead bus live line
DC Direct current
DFC Data flow control
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DI Digital input
DLLB Dead line live bus
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815-2012
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DRH Disturbance report handler
DSP Digital signal processor
DTT Direct transfer trip scheme
ECT Ethernet configuration tool
EHV network Extra high voltage network
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromotive force

Technical manual
Glossary
EMI Electromagnetic interference

EnFP End fault protection
EPA Enhanced performance architecture
ESD Electrostatic discharge
F-SMA Type of optical fiber connector
FAN Fault number
FCB Flow control bit; Frame count bit
FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech, data and
protection signals
FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up to seven
duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers
FPN Flexible product naming
FTP File Transfer Protocol
FUN Function type
G.703 Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by local
telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced and
unbalanced lines
GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver module
GDE Graphical display editor within PCM600
GI General interrogation command
GIS Gas-insulated switchgear
GOOSE Generic object-oriented substation event
GPS Global positioning system
GSAL Generic security application
GSE Generic substation event
HDLC protocol High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC standard
HFBR connector type Plastic fiber connector
HLV circuit Hazardous Live Voltage according to IEC60255-27
HMI Human-machine interface
HSAR High speed autoreclosing
HSR High-availability Seamless Redundancy
HV High-voltage
HVDC High-voltage direct current
IDBS Integrating deadband supervision
IEC International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers – Part 6: Requirements for
protective current transformers for transient performance
IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protection equipment. A serial master/
slave protocol for point-to-point communication
IEC 61850 Substation automation communication standard
IEC 61850–8–1 Communication protocol standard

Technical manual
Glossary
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on twisted-
pair or optical fiber cable
IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules. References
the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common Mezzanine Card)
standard for the mechanics and the PCI specifications from the PCI SIG
(Special Interest Group) for the electrical EMF (Electromotive force).
IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) Cyber
Security Capabilities
IED Intelligent electronic device
IET600 Integrated engineering tool
I-GIS Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear
IOM Binary input/output module
Instance When several occurrences of the same function are available in the IED,
they are referred to as instances of that function. One instance of a
function is identical to another of the same kind but has a different
number in the IED user interfaces. The word "instance" is sometimes
defined as an item of information that is representative of a type. In
the same way an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a
type of function.
IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol suite
widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless, best-effort
packet-switching protocol. It provides packet routing, fragmentation
and reassembly through the data link layer.
2. Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529
IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 20
IRF Internal failure signal
IRIG-B: InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B, standard 200
ITU International Telecommunications Union
LAN Local area network
LIB 520 High-voltage software module
LCD Liquid crystal display
LDCM Line data communication module
LDD Local detection device
LED Light-emitting diode
LNT LON network tool
LON Local operating network
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MCM Mezzanine carrier module
MPM Main processing module
MVAL Value of measurement
MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally developed
for use in trains.
NCC National Control Centre

Technical manual
Glossary
NOF Number of grid faults

NUM Numerical module
OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle
OCP Overcurrent protection
OLTC On-load tap changer
OTEV Disturbance data recording initiated by other event than start/pick-up
OV Overvoltage
Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition.
For example, a distance relay is overreaching when the impedance
presented to it is smaller than the apparent impedance to the fault
applied to the balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay “sees” the
fault but perhaps it should not have seen it.
PCI Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM Pulse code modulation
PCM600 Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP Mezzanine card standard
PELV circuit Protected Extra-Low Voltage circuit type according to IEC60255-27
PMC PCI Mezzanine card
POR Permissive overreach
POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity to the
measured and/or controlled components
PRP Parallel redundancy protocol
PSM Power supply module
PST Parameter setting tool within PCM600
PTP Precision time protocol
PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
RASC Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX
RCA Relay characteristic angle
RISC Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value Root mean square value
RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in point-
to-point connections
RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real-time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
SA Substation Automation
SBO Select-before-operate
SC Switch or push button to close
SCL Short circuit location
SCS Station control system

Technical manual
Glossary
SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition

SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SDU Service data unit
SELV circuit Safety Extra-Low Voltage circuit type according to IEC60255-27
SFP Small form-factor pluggable (abbreviation)
Optical Ethernet port (explanation)
SLM Serial communication module.

SMA connector Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant
impedance.
SMT Signal matrix tool within PCM600
SMS Station monitoring system
SNTP Simple network time protocol – is used to synchronize computer clocks
on local area networks. This reduces the requirement to have accurate
hardware clocks in every embedded system in a network. Each
embedded node can instead synchronize with a remote clock,
providing the required accuracy.
SOF Status of fault
SPA Strömberg Protection Acquisition (SPA), a serial master/slave protocol
for point-to-point and ring communication.
SRY Switch for CB ready condition
ST Switch or push button to trip
Starpoint Neutral point of transformer or generator
SVC Static VAr compensation
TC Trip coil
TCS Trip circuit supervision
TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common transport layer
protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de facto
standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD Unix. TCP/IP
was developed by DARPA for Internet working and encompasses both
network layer and transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify
two protocols at specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer
to the entire US Department of Defense protocol suite based upon
these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.
TEF Time delayed earth-fault protection function
TLS Transport Layer Security
TM Transmit (disturbance data)
TNC connector Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance version of a
BNC connector
TP Trip (recorded fault)
TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Current transformer class according to IEC
TRM Transformer Module. This module transforms currents and voltages
taken from the process into levels suitable for further signal
processing.
TYP Type identification

Technical manual
Glossary
UMT User management tool

Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition.
For example, a distance relay is underreaching when the impedance
presented to it is greater than the apparent impedance to the fault
applied to the balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay does not
“see” the fault but perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach.
UTC Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale, maintained by
the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures (BIPM), which forms the
basis of a coordinated dissemination of standard frequencies and time
signals. UTC is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by the
addition of a whole number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with
Universal Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth's
orbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing the Earth's
irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The Coordinated Universal
Time is expressed using a 24-hour clock, and uses the Gregorian
calendar. It is used for aeroplane and ship navigation, where it is also
sometimes known by the military name, "Zulu time." "Zulu" in the
phonetic alphabet stands for "Z", which stands for longitude zero.
UV Undervoltage
WEI Weak end infeed logic
VT Voltage transformer
3IO Three times zero-sequence current.Often referred to as the residual or
the earth-fault current
3UO Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as the
residual voltage or the neutral point voltage

Technical manual
684
685
ABB AB
Grid Automation Products
SE-721 59 Västerås, Sweden
Phone +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
Scan this QR code to visit our website
www.abb.com/protection-control
1MRK 505 384-UEN
© Copyright 2017 ABB.

All rights reserved.

1MRK505384-UEN C en Technical Manual Breaker Protection REQ650 Version 2.2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1MRK505384-UEN C en Technical Manual Breaker Protection REQ650 Version 2.2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Relion® 650 SERIES

Breaker protection REQ650

© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved

Section 2 Available functions.......................................................................................35

Section 3 Analog inputs................................................................................................43

Section 4 Binary input and output modules...............................................................51

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI ......................................................53

Breaker protection REQ650 1

5.2.2 Function block...........................................................................................................................53

Section 6 Current protection....................................................................................... 75

2 Breaker protection REQ650

Breaker protection REQ650 3

Section 7 Voltage protection.....................................................................................149

4 Breaker protection REQ650

7.1.7.3 Blocking.............................................................................................................................. 159

Section 8 Secondary system supervision.................................................................185

Breaker protection REQ650 5

8.2.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 188

Section 9 Control......................................................................................................... 201

6 Breaker protection REQ650

9.4.3 Error handling......................................................................................................................... 242

Breaker protection REQ650 7

9.5.7.1 Graphical display...............................................................................................................276

Section 10 Logic............................................................................................................ 289

8 Breaker protection REQ650

10.1.7 Technical data.........................................................................................................................297

Breaker protection REQ650 9

10.7.2.1 Function block................................................................................................................... 314

10 Breaker protection REQ650

10.8.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................324

Breaker protection REQ650 11

10.14 Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMP........................................................................... 338

Section 11 Monitoring.................................................................................................. 345

12 Breaker protection REQ650

Breaker protection REQ650 13

11.8.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 420

Section 12 Metering...................................................................................................... 429

14 Breaker protection REQ650

Section 14 Station communication............................................................................. 451

Breaker protection REQ650 15

16 Breaker protection REQ650

14.5.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 477

Breaker protection REQ650 17

14.8.5.4 Signals................................................................................................................................. 521

18 Breaker protection REQ650

14.8.13.2 Identification..................................................................................................................... 532

Section 15 Security........................................................................................................ 551

Breaker protection REQ650 19

15.4 Authority status ATHSTAT......................................................................................................557

Section 16 Basic IED functions.................................................................................... 565

20 Breaker protection REQ650

16.3.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 579

Section 17 IED hardware...............................................................................................593

Breaker protection REQ650 21

17.2.3.2 Design................................................................................................................................. 597

22 Breaker protection REQ650

17.3.3 Flush mounting dimensions................................................................................................ 626

Section 19 Connection diagrams................................................................................ 641

Section 20 Inverse time characteristics..................................................................... 643

Section 21 Glossary....................................................................................................... 677

Breaker protection REQ650 23

1.1.1 Presumptions for Technical Data GUID-1E949E38-E04D-4374-A086-912C25E9F93C v2

1.2 Intended audience GUID-C9B8127F-5748-4BEA-9E4F-CC762FE28A3A v11